b229_sm

B229 SERVICE MANUAL

002733MIU

B229

SERVIC

E MA

NU

AL

B229 SERVICE MANUAL

002733MIU

It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies.

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR

PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION. All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered trademarks or the property of their respective companies. They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other affiliation with Ricoh products.

© 2006 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

The Service Manual contains information regarding service techniques, procedures, processes and spare parts of office equipment distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this manual should be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program.

Untrained and uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury, damage to property or loss of warranty protection.

Ricoh Corporation

WARNING

LEGEND

PRODUCT CODE COMPANY GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN

B229 GS 106 LD215c Aficio 615C SGC 1506

DOCUMENTATION HISTORY

REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS * 07/2006 Original Printing

SM i B229

B229 TABLE OF CONTENTS

INSTALLATION

1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-1 1.1 BEFOREHAND...........................................................................................1-1 1.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................1-2

1.2.1 ENVIRONMENT................................................................................1-2 1.2.2 MACHINE LEVEL..............................................................................1-3 1.2.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS ...............................................1-3 1.2.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ...............................................................1-4

1.3 COPIER INSTALLATION ...........................................................................1-5 1.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS ........................................1-5 1.3.2 ACCESSORY CHECK ......................................................................1-6 1.3.3 BEFORE INSTALLING A COPIER....................................................1-6 1.3.4 INITIAL SETTING............................................................................1-11 1.3.5 CHECKING THE NOZZLE PATTERN.............................................1-11 1.3.6 HEAD GAP ADJUSTMENT.............................................................1-12 1.3.7 SUB SCAN: SEND ADJUSTMENT .................................................1-13 1.3.8 MOVING THE MACHINE ................................................................1-15 1.3.9 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE ..................................................1-16

1.4 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION ...........................................................1-18 1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................1-18 1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................1-18

1.5 ARDF INSTALLATION .............................................................................1-19 1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................1-19 1.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................1-19

1.6 ADF INSTALLATION................................................................................1-23 1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................1-23 1.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................1-23

1.7 ONE-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT ..............................................................1-27 1.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................1-27 1.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................1-27 1.7.3 OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY GRIP HANDLE – OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT...............................................................................................1-32

1.8 TWO-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION ...................................1-34 1.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................1-34 1.8.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................1-34 1.8.3 OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY GRIP HANDLE – OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT...............................................................................................1-39

1.9 DUPLEX UNIT INSTALLATION ...............................................................1-40 1.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................1-40 1.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................1-40

B229 ii SM

1.10 HEATER KIT INSTALLATION............................................................ 1-51 1.10.1 COMPONENT CHECK.............................................................. 1-51 1.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ................................................. 1-52 1.10.3 OPTIONAL TRAY HEATER ...................................................... 1-57

1.11 FUNCTION UPGRADE OPTION INSTALLATION............................. 1-62 1.11.1 COMPONENT CHECK.............................................................. 1-62 1.11.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ................................................. 1-62

1.12 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT INSTALLATION................................ 1-66 1.12.1 COMPONENT CHECK.............................................................. 1-66 1.12.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ................................................. 1-67

1.13 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT........................................ 1-68 1.13.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ................................................. 1-68

1.14 CONTROLLER OPTIONS.................................................................. 1-71 1.14.1 OVERVIEW............................................................................... 1-71 1.14.2 POSTSCRIPT3 INSTALLATION ............................................... 1-72 1.14.3 PICTBRIDGE INSTALLTION .................................................... 1-72 1.14.4 JAVA VM OPTION INSTALLATION.......................................... 1-73 1.14.5 WIRELESS LAN (IEEE 802.11B) INSTALLATION.................... 1-74 1.14.6 IEEE 1284 INSTALLATION....................................................... 1-74 1.14.7 IEEE 1394 INSTALLATION....................................................... 1-75 1.14.8 BLUETOOTH INSTALLATION.................................................. 1-75 1.14.9 USB HOST INSTALLATION...................................................... 1-76 1.14.10 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE D (B735)......... 1-76 1.14.11 REMOTE COMMUNICATION GATE INSTALLATION .......... 1-80

1.15 KEY COUNTER I/F UNIT TYPE A ..................................................... 1-82

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ................................................... 2-1 2.1 PM TABLES............................................................................................... 2-1 2.2 PM COUNTER........................................................................................... 2-3

2.2.1 HOW TO RESET THE PM COUNTER ............................................. 2-3 2.2.2 PM COUNTER RESET LIST ............................................................ 2-4

2.3 CLEANING PROCEDURES ...................................................................... 2-5 2.3.1 MAINTENANCE UNIT ...................................................................... 2-5 2.3.2 PRINT HEADS.................................................................................. 2-6 2.3.3 TRANSPORT BELT.......................................................................... 2-8

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-1 3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS .............................................................................. 3-1

3.1.1 SCANNER UNIT ............................................................................... 3-1 3.1.2 PAPER FEED ................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.3 IMPORTANT..................................................................................... 3-1

3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS....................................................... 3-2

Rev. 01/2007

SM iii B229

3.3 EXTERIOR COVERS AND OPERATION PANEL......................................3-3 3.3.1 REAR COVER...................................................................................3-3 3.3.2 REAR ENGINE UNIT COVER...........................................................3-3 3.3.3 TOP LEFT FRONT, LEFT FRONT AND INTERFACE COVER ........3-4 3.3.4 RIGHT DOOR ...................................................................................3-4 3.3.5 BY-PASS TRAY ................................................................................3-5 3.3.6 FRONT COVER ................................................................................3-5

3.4 OPERATION PANEL..................................................................................3-6 3.5 SCANNER UNIT.........................................................................................3-7

3.5.1 EXPOSURE GLASS..........................................................................3-7 3.5.2 LENS BLOCK....................................................................................3-7 3.5.3 EXPOSURE LAMP............................................................................3-8 3.5.4 ORIGINAL WIDTH/LENGTH SENSOR...........................................3-10 3.5.5 SCANNER MOTOR.........................................................................3-10 3.5.6 LAMP STABILIZER .........................................................................3-11

3.6 ENGINE....................................................................................................3-12 3.6.1 ENGINE UNIT .................................................................................3-12 3.6.2 CONIJ (CONNECT INK JET MODULE) ..........................................3-15 3.6.3 MAINTENANCE UNIT .....................................................................3-15 3.6.4 INK COLLECTION TANK ................................................................3-16 3.6.5 SUB SCAN ENCODER AND ENCODER SENSOR........................3-17 3.6.6 MAIN SCAN DRIVE MOTOR ..........................................................3-19 3.6.7 SUB SCAN DRIVE MOTOR............................................................3-19 3.6.8 FLUSHING GATE UNIT ..................................................................3-20 3.6.9 TRANSPORT BELT UNIT ...............................................................3-20 3.6.10 CHARGE ROLLER ....................................................................3-22

3.7 PAPER FEED...........................................................................................3-23 3.7.1 PAPER FEED MOTOR ...................................................................3-23 3.7.2 REGISTRATION CLUTCH ..............................................................3-24 3.7.3 REGISTRATION ROLLER ..............................................................3-24 3.7.4 PAPER FEED, PAPER TRANSPORT AND DUPLEX CLUTCH .....3-26 3.7.5 PAPER FEED ROLLER AND FRICTION PAD................................3-26 3.7.6 PAPER END SENSOR....................................................................3-27 3.7.7 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SWITCH....................................................3-28 3.7.8 BY-PASS FEED ROLLER AND PAPER END SENDOR.................3-29 3.7.9 REGISTRATION SENSOR .............................................................3-30 3.7.10 ONE-SHEET BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR........................3-31 3.7.11 PAPER SIZE SWITCH...............................................................3-31

3.8 PAPER EXIT ............................................................................................3-32 3.8.1 PAPER EXIT TRAY.........................................................................3-32 3.8.2 PAPER EXIT UNIT..........................................................................3-32 3.8.3 PAPER EXIT SENSOR ...................................................................3-33 3.8.4 JUNCTION GATE SENSOR ...........................................................3-33 3.8.5 PAPER EXIT MOTOR.....................................................................3-34

3.9 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS.................................................................3-35 3.9.1 CONTROLLER BOX .......................................................................3-35

B229 iv SM

3.9.2 CONTROLLER BOARD ..................................................................3-35 3.9.3 NVRAM AND DIMM RAM ...............................................................3-36 3.9.4 IO BOARD.......................................................................................3-37 3.9.5 PSU BOARD ...................................................................................3-37 3.9.6 IPU BOARD.....................................................................................3-38 3.9.7 BCU BOARD ...................................................................................3-39

3.10 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT .......................................................................3-40 3.10.1 PREPARING FOR TEST PRINTING.........................................3-40 3.10.2 ADJUST PAPER FEED .............................................................3-40 3.10.3 NOZZLE BLOCKAGE CHECK ..................................................3-41 3.10.4 ADJUST PRINT HEAD POSITION ............................................3-42 3.10.5 REGISTRATION........................................................................3-44

3.11 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING ...............................3-45 3.11.1 PRINTING..................................................................................3-45 3.11.2 SCANNING................................................................................3-48 3.11.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ......................................................3-49

TROUBLESHOOTING

4. TROUBLESHOOTING..................................................................4-1 4.1 SERVICE CALL..........................................................................................4-1

4.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .........................................................4-1 4.1.2 SC TABLE .........................................................................................4-2

4.2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE .....................................................................4-31 4.2.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................4-31 4.2.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ...................................................4-31

4.3 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING ...........................................................4-32 4.3.1 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR EXPECTED PROBLEMS IN THE FIELD .......................................................................................................4-32 4.3.2 POOR QUALITY IMAGE .................................................................4-33 4.3.3 POOR PRINTER PERFORMANCE (MISCELLANEOUS)...............4-36 4.3.4 UNUSUAL NOISES.........................................................................4-38 4.3.5 MAINTAINING THE PRINTER HEAD CONDITION ........................4-39

4.4 IMAGE TEST MODE ................................................................................4-41 4.4.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................4-41 4.4.2 IPU TEST ........................................................................................4-41

4.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS..................................................4-42 4.5.1 SENSORS.......................................................................................4-42 4.5.2 SWITCHES .....................................................................................4-44 4.5.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .........................................................4-46

SM v B229

SERVICE TABLES

5. SERVICE TABLES .......................................................................5-1 5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE.....................................................................5-1

5.1.1 HOW TO ENTER THE SP MODE.....................................................5-1 5.2 SP MODE TABLES ....................................................................................5-3

5.2.1 SP1-XXX (FEED) ..............................................................................5-3 5.2.2 SP2-XXX (DRUM) .............................................................................5-8 5.2.3 SP3-XXX (PROCESS) ....................................................................5-11 5.2.4 SP4-XXX (SCANNER) ....................................................................5-14 5.2.5 SP5-XXX (MODE) ...........................................................................5-30 5.2.6 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS).............................................................5-72 5.2.7 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG)....................................................................5-73 5.2.8 SP8-XXX (HISTORY) ......................................................................5-90

5.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ...................................................................5-132 5.4 SCANNER SP MODE ............................................................................5-138 5.5 USING SP MODES ................................................................................5-139

5.5.1 ADJUSTING REGISTRATION AND MAGNIFICATION ................5-139 5.5.2 DISPLAY APS DATA (SP 4301 1).................................................5-139 5.5.3 MEMORY CLEAR .........................................................................5-139 5.5.4 INPUT CHECK (SP 5803) .............................................................5-141 5.5.5 OUTPUT CHECK (SP 5804) .........................................................5-146 5.5.6 SERIAL NUMBER INPUT (SP 5811) ............................................5-148 5.5.7 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD (SP 5824/5825) ...............5-148 5.5.8 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE............................................5-150 5.5.9 SD CARD APPLI MOVE................................................................5-151 5.5.10 SMC PRINT (SP 5990) ............................................................5-153 5.5.11 ADF APS SENSOR OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP 6901).................5-153

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS........................................6-1 6.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................6-1

6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT....................................................................6-1 6.1.2 PAPER PATH....................................................................................6-2 6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ................................................................................6-3

6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE................................................................................6-4 6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM.............................................................................6-4

6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW...................................................................6-7 6.3.1 EXPOSURE ......................................................................................6-7 6.3.2 IMAGE CREATION ...........................................................................6-7 6.3.3 NO FUSING ......................................................................................6-7

6.4 SCANNING.................................................................................................6-8 6.4.1 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................6-8 6.4.2 LAMP STABILIZER FUSE.................................................................6-8 6.4.3 SCANNER DRIVE.............................................................................6-9

B229 vi SM

6.4.4 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION IN PLATEN MODE..........................6-10 6.5 IMAGE PROCESSING .............................................................................6-12

6.5.1 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT) .......................................................6-12 6.5.2 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT) .................................................6-13

6.6 CARRIAGE UNIT .....................................................................................6-14 6.6.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................6-14 6.6.2 PRINT HEAD...................................................................................6-15 6.6.3 PRINT HEAD TANK ........................................................................6-17 6.6.4 INK EJECTION DEVICE .................................................................6-18 6.6.5 INK NEAR END...............................................................................6-19 6.6.6 INK OUT..........................................................................................6-20 6.6.7 PAPER REGISTRATION AND SIZE DETECTION SENSOR .........6-21

6.7 INK SUPPLY UNIT ...................................................................................6-22 6.7.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................6-22 6.7.2 PRINT CARTRIDGES .....................................................................6-23 6.7.3 PRINT CARTRIDGE SET SENSOR................................................6-24 6.7.4 INK SUPPLY PUMP........................................................................6-25

6.8 MAINTENANCE UNIT ..............................................................................6-26 6.8.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................6-26 6.8.2 MAINTENANCE UNIT .....................................................................6-26 6.8.3 INK COLLECTION TANK ................................................................6-30 6.8.4 INK COLLECTION TANK FULL DETECTION.................................6-31 6.8.5 FLUSHING UNIT.............................................................................6-32

6.9 CARRIAGE DRIVE...................................................................................6-34 6.9.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................6-34 6.9.2 CARRIAGE DRIVE..........................................................................6-34 6.9.3 ENVELOPE SELECTOR.................................................................6-35

6.10 PAPER FEED, TRANSPORT, OUTPUT ............................................6-36 6.10.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................6-36 6.10.2 LEADING EDGE AND PAGE WIDTH DETECTION ..................6-37 6.10.3 TRAILING EDGE DETECTION..................................................6-38 6.10.4 PAPER TRANSPORT DRIVE....................................................6-38 6.10.5 PAPER PATH ............................................................................6-39 6.10.6 TRANSPORT BELT...................................................................6-40 6.10.7 CHARGE LEAK DETECTION....................................................6-41

6.11 PAPER FEED .....................................................................................6-42 6.11.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................6-42 6.11.2 PAPER FEED DRIVE MECHANISM .........................................6-43 6.11.3 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM.....................6-44 6.11.4 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM .......................................................6-45 6.11.5 PAPER END DETECTION ........................................................6-45 6.11.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION ........................................................6-46 6.11.7 SIDE FENCES...........................................................................6-48 6.11.8 PAPER REGISTRATION...........................................................6-48

6.12 PAPER EXIT.......................................................................................6-50 6.12.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................6-50

SM vii B229

6.12.2 PAPER EXIT PATH ...................................................................6-52 6.12.3 PAPER STOP FUNCTION ........................................................6-53 6.12.4 ENERGY SAVER MODES OF BASIC MACHINES...................6-55

SPECIFICATIONS

7. SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................7-1 7.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................7-1 7.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES.....................................................................7-5

7.2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION...........................................................7-5 7.2.2 PAPER FEED AND EXIT ..................................................................7-6

7.3 MACHINE CONFIGURATION..................................................................7-10 7.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT .........................................................................7-12

7.4.1 ARDF...............................................................................................7-12 7.4.2 ADF .................................................................................................7-12 7.4.3 ONE-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT.....................................................7-13 7.4.4 TWO-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT ....................................................7-14 7.4.5 DUPLEX UNIT.................................................................................7-14

B267 FAX OPTION SEE SECTION B267 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

B806 DUPLEX UNIT SEE SECTION B806 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

B813 DOCUMENT FEEDER SEE SECTION B813 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

B814 DOCUMENT FEEDER SEE SECTION B814 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

B384 PAPER TRAY UNIT SEE SECTION B385 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

B385 PAPER TRAY UNIT SEE SECTION B385 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

Read This First Important Safety Notices Prevention of Physical Injury 1. Make sure that the power cord is unplugged before you disassemble or assemble

parts of the copier and peripherals.

2. The wall outlet should be near the machine and easily accessible.

3. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open

while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically

driven components.

4. If a job has started before the copier completes the warm-up or initializing period, keep

hands away from the mechanical and electrical components.

Health Safety Conditions Ink is non-toxic, but if you get it in your eyes by accident, it may cause temporary eye

discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get

medical attention.

Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal 1. Dispose of ink cartridge and ink tank in accordance with local regulations. (These are

non-toxic supplies.)

2. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.

Observance of Electrical Safety Standards 1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service

representative who has completed the training course on those models.

2. The Controller board on this machine contains a lithium battery. The danger of

explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the

same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard batteries in

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.

Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or

an explosion might occur.

Symbols, Abbreviations, and Trademarks Symbols and Abbreviations This manual uses the symbols and abbreviations shown below.

Symbol Meaning

Refer to section number

Clip ring

Screw

Connector

Clamp

SEF Short Edge Feed

LEF Long Edge Feed

Trademarks Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation

in the United States and /or other countries.

PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.

PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.

Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.

PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be

trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with

those marks.

INSTALLATION B813 DOCUMENT FEEDER

B814 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B267 FAX OPTION

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE B384 PAPER TRAY UNIT

B385 PAPER TRAY UNIT


TROUBLESHOOTING

SERVICE TABLES B806 DUPLEX UNIT

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

SPECIFICATIONS

TAB

PO

SITI

ON

2

TAB

PO

SITI

ON

1

TAB

PO

SITI

ON

3

TAB

PO

SITI

ON

4

TAB

PO

SITI

ON

6

TAB

PO

SITI

ON

5

TAB

PO

SITI

ON

8

TAB

PO

SITI

ON

7

INSTALLATION

Beforehand

SM 1-1 B229

Inst

alla

tion

1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1.1 BEFOREHAND

Before installing options, please do the following:

1. If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the

lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list.

2. If there are printer jobs in the machine, print out all jobs in the printer buffer.

3. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the

network cable.

Installation Requirements

B229 1-2 SM

1.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Before installing options, please do the following:

1. If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the

lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list.

2. If there are printer jobs in the machine, print out all jobs in the printer buffer.


network cable.

1.2.1 ENVIRONMENT

For this machine, it may take two hours or more to get normal operation if there is

condensation inside the contact glass at the scanner unit. In that case, leave the copier

turned on the main power switch for two hours or more.

–Temperature and Humidity Chart–

Temperature Range: 10C to 32C (50F to 89.6F)

Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH

Ambient Illumination: Less than 2,000 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight)

Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more


SM 1-3 B229

Inst

alla

tion

Ambient Dust: Less than 0.1 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10-6 oz/yd3)

Avoid areas exposed to sudden temperature changes:

1) Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner.

2) Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater.

Do not place the machine where it is exposed to corrosive gases.

Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level.

Place the copier on a strong and level base. (Inclination on any side should be no

more than 5 mm.)

Do not place the machine where it is subjected to strong vibrations.

1.2.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

1.2.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Place the copier near the power source, providing clearance as shown:

A (front): 440 mm (17.3")

B (left): 520 mm (20.5")

C (rear): 50 mm (2.0")

D (right): 530 mm (20.9")


B229 1-4 SM

The recommended 440 mm front space is sufficient to allow the paper tray to

be pulled out. Additional front space is required to allow operators to stand at

the front of the machine.

1.2.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS

1. Make sure that the wall outlet is near the machine and easily accessible. After

completing installation, make sure the plug fits firmly into the outlet.

2. Avoid multi-wiring.

3. Be sure to ground the machine.

Input Voltage: North and South America, Taiwan:110 – 120 V, 60 Hz, 3.6 A

Europe, Asia: 220 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 2 A

Copier Installation

SM 1-5 B229

Inst

alla

tion

1.3 COPIER INSTALLATION

1.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS

Rated voltage for peripherals

Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.

Copier Installation

B229 1-6 SM

1.3.2 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check that you have the accessories indicated below.

No. Description Q’ty

1 CD-ROM - Drivers/ Utilities 1

2 EU Safety Sheet 1

3 Emblem 1

4 Emblem Cover 1

5 Operation Instructions 1 set

6 Paper Tray Decal 1

7 Decal - Contact Glass 1

8 Clamp (for ARDF) 1

9 Decal - Operation Panel 1

10 Hexagonal Wrench 1

11 Handle Cover 3

12 Mylar to cover handle slot 1

The above accessories provided with a main unit differ depending on the

destination.

1.3.3 BEFORE INSTALLING A COPIER

When moving or lifting a copier to install, please do the following:

1. Pull out and grasp the four handles at the each side (two handles each) of this

copier to lift the copier.

2. Two persons must be required to lift the copier at least. The copier is highly

unstable when lifted by one person, and may cause human injury or property

damage.

Copier Installation

SM 1-7 B229

Inst

alla

tion

Using the Handles

1. Pull out the four handles [A] from the copier. 2. Grasp the handles with two persons at least to lift the copier. 3. After installation, insert the all handles fully inside the handle slots of the copier. 4. Loosen the screw at the each handle slot first, and then secure the screw with

the hexagonal wrench provided in the copier to prevent the handles from coming out from the handle slots of the copier.

Installation Procedure

Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.

(Color Photo) Remove filament tape and other padding.

Copier Installation

B229 1-8 SM

(Color Photo)

1. Slide the cartridge stopper [A] in the arrow direction, and then remove it for each color.

(Color Photo)

2. Open the front door [B] and install ink cartridge (4 cartridges) [C]. 3. Close the front door.

4. Attach the correct emblem [D] to the front cover if the emblem is not attached to

the front cover. 5. Install the optional ARDF, ADF, or platen cover.

Copier Installation

SM 1-9 B229

Inst

alla

tion

(Color Photo)

6. Plug in the main power cord and turn on the main switch (Rear side) [E]. 7. Activate the User Tools and select the menu "Language." 8. Specify a language. This language is used for the operation panel. 9. Pull the paper tray out. Then turn the paper size dial to select the appropriate

size. Adjust the side guides and end guide to match the paper size.

10. Attach the appropriate paper tray decal [F] to each paper tray.

Paper tray decal is also used for the optional paper tray. Keep the decal

for use with the optional paper tray unit.

11. Insert the all handles fully inside the handle slots of the copier. 12. Loosen the screw at the each handle slot first, and then secure the screw with

the hexagonal wrench provided in the copier to prevent the handles from coming out from the handle slots of the copier.

Copier Installation

B229 1-10 SM

(Color Photo)

13. Keep the hexagonal wrench inside the front cover [G] of the copier.

14. Install the three handle covers [H] and attach the mylar to the handle slot [I].

Ink Loading Ink loading is performed after power on, and takes roughly 15 minutes.

Do not open covers during ink loading

Do not open any covers until the "Ready" message appears on the control

panel. If you do, the ink loading procedure is interrupted, and the power must

be switched off and then back on.

If the main power switch is turned back on to complete an interrupted ink

loading, additional ink might be used and a further 15 minutes might be

required.

Copier Installation

SM 1-11 B229

Inst

alla

tion

1.3.4 INITIAL SETTING

The following settings require some knowledge about the print head

adjustment.

Refer to the "Adjust Print Head Position" in the section "Replace and

Adjustment" and "Print Head" in the section "Detailed Section Descriptions"

for details.

Do the following initial settings after installing the copier.

1. Copy C4 chart in full color mode and B/W mode.

2. Do the "Nozzle Check Pattern".

3. Do the "Head Position Adjust".

4. Copy C4 chart in B/W text mode again.

5. Check the gray scale line on the printout copied in B/W mode.

6. If an image problem occurs, adjust the "Head Gap Adjustment" for the K1 and K2 with

SP3-002-017 or -018 (see the "Head Gap Adjustment" for details as following this

procedure).

7. Print out the test pattern "15" with SP4-417-001.

8. Check the printout. If white line or black line occurs in main scan direction, adjust the

"SubScan:Send Adj" with SP1-922-001 (see the "Sub Scan: Send Adjustment" for

details as following this procedure).

9. Do the "Registration" with UP or SP:

1.3.5 CHECKING THE NOZZLE PATTERN

1. Do the "Nozzle Check Pattern" ("User Tools" > "Maintenance"). 2. Check if the nozzle check pattern on a printed paper is satisfactory. 3. Do the "Clean Print-heads" if a printed nozzle check pattern is not satisfactory.

For details, refer to the "Replacement and Adjustment" or "Operation Instructions" about details

You must load A4/Letter papers in SEF direction.

Adjustment 1. Do the "Head Position Adjust", "Registration" and "Adjust Paper Feed" ("User

Tools" > "Adjustment"). For details, refer to the "Replacement and Adjustment" or "Operation Instructions" about details.

Copier Installation

B229 1-12 SM


1.3.6 HEAD GAP ADJUSTMENT

In the 600dpi B/W copy mode, an image problem, which is difficult to be adjusted with

"Head Position Adjust" in the UP mode, may occur sometimes. This adjustment

compensates for "Head Position Adjust" in the UP mode.

1. Copy C4 chart in B/W text mode.

2. Check the gray scale line [A] on the printout.

3. Adjust the gap between K1 and K2 print heads if a texture image appears. This machine has following formula for adjusting the print head alignment.

I - A = H

"A" (K1 forward head position)

"I" (K2 forward head position)

"H" (K2 reverse head position)

"I - A" means the shift value between K1 print head and K2 print head in forward scanning.

"H - K1 reverse head position (standard value for alignment: 0)" means the shift value

between K1 print head and K2 print head in reverse scanning.

"H - K1 reverse head position (0)" should be equal to "I -A" to prevent a texture image.

In case of the image problem in the left side picture:

Copier Installation

SM 1-13 B229

Inst

alla

tion

1. Enter the SP mode.

2. Check the value of SP3-002-010 [1200:A], -017 [1200:H] and -018 [1200:I].

3. Calculates the value "I" using above formula.

For example, A = +5, H = +1 I = +6

4. Enter the result from the formula with SP3-002-018.

5. Exit the SP mode, and then copy C4 chart in B/W text printing mode again.

6. Try and see until the gray scale line becomes an ideal image [B].

7. Exit the SP mode.

In case of the image problem in the right side picture: 1. Enter the SP mode.

2. Check the value of SP3-002-010 [1200:A], -017 [1200:H] and -018 [1200:I].

3. Calculates the value "H" using above formula.

For example, A = +5, I = +4 H = -1

4. Enter the result from the formula with SP3-002-017.

5. Exit the SP mode, and then copy C4 chart in B/W text printing mode again.

6. Try and see until the gray scale line becomes an ideal image [B].



1.3.7 SUB SCAN: SEND ADJUSTMENT

1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Print out the scanner test pattern "15" (Gray Pat 1) with SP4-417-001.

Copier Installation

B229 1-14 SM

3. If black line or white line in main scan direction occurs on the test pattern, adjust the paper feed timing with SP1-922-001 ("SubScan:Send Adj").

In case of black line problem: 1. Select SP1-922-001, and decrease the value one by one.

The value of 1 indicates 1 line.

2. Try and see until the gray scale becomes an ideal image [A].


In case of white line problem: 1. Select SP1-922-001, and increase the value one by one.

The value of 1 in the SP setting indicates 1 line.

2. Try and see until the gray scale becomes an ideal image [A].



Copier Installation

SM 1-15 B229

Inst

alla

tion

1.3.8 MOVING THE MACHINE

Make sure that the carriage unit is properly engaged with the maintenance

unit before turn off the power (see "Maintenance Unit" in the Replacement and

Adjustment), otherwise the print head may be damaged while moving the

machine.

If too much waste ink is filled in the ink correction tank, remove the tank before

moving the machine (see "Ink Collection Tank" in the Replacement and

Adjustment).

This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor.

See ”TRANSPORTING MACHINE" if you will use some transport equipment.

The machine stands make it difficult to move the copier with an optional paper tray or

duplex unit installed. You can remove them as necessary.

1. Check that the machine is in standby status. 2. Turn off the main power and unplug the power cable. 3. Remove all trays from the optional paper feed unit or LCT.

4. Loosen the adjuster [A] to release the machine from the place.

Copier Installation

B229 1-16 SM

5. Remove the four brackets and covers [B]. ( x 8).

Do not tilt the machine more than 45 degrees.

Reinstall the adjuster and brackets after you move the machine. The machine

can fall over when you pull out a paper tray or when you work on the machine

if you do not do this.

1.3.9 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE

Make sure that the carriage unit is properly engaged with the maintenance

unit before turn off the power (see "Maintenance Unit" in the Replacement and

Adjustment), otherwise the print head may be damaged while moving the

machine.

If too much waste ink is filled in the ink correction tank, remove the tank before

moving the machine (see "Ink Collection Tank" in the Replacement and

Adjustment).

This section shows you how to manually transport the machine by a truck or plane.

The machine stands make it difficult to move the copier with an optional paper tray or

duplex unit installed. You can remove them as necessary.

1. Perform ink purge with SP2100-001. 2. Turn off the main power and unplug the power cable. 3. Remove the ink cartridges. 4. Loosen the adjuster to release the machine from the place. (see "Moving

Machine") 5. Remove the four brackets and covers (see "Moving Machine"). 6. Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays. Then fix down the bottom

plates with a sheet of paper and tape.

Copier Installation

SM 1-17 B229

Inst

alla

tion

7. Remove the ink correction tank (see "Ink Collection Tank" in the Replacement

and Adjustment) 8. Do one of the following: 9. Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors. 10. Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.

Make sure you reinstall the ink correction tank.

Make sure you check the nozzle pattern (User Tools) and each adjustment

(see “Initial setting”) after you move the machine.

Platen Cover Installation

B229 1-18 SM

1.4 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION


Check that you have the accessories indicated below.


1 Stepped Screw 2

1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE


1. Install the platen cover [A] ( x 2).

ARDF Installation

SM 1-19 B229

Inst

alla

tion

1.5 ARDF INSTALLATION


Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.


1 Scale Guide 1

2 DF Exposure Glass 1

3 Stud Screw 2

4 Knob Screw 2

5 Original Size Decal 2

6 Screwdriver Tool 1

7 Attention Decal – Top Cover 1

8 Stamp Cartridge 1

9 Installation Procedure 1


Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.

1. Remove the strips of tape.

ARDF Installation

B229 1-20 SM

2. Remove the left scale [A] (2 screws). 3. Place the DF exposure glass [B] on the glass holder.

When installing the DF exposure glass, make sure that the white point [C]

is on the lower front side of the glass, as shown.

4. Peel off the backing [D] of the double-sided tape attached to the rear side of the scale guide [E], then install it (2 screws removed in step 2).

5. Install the two stud screws [F].

6. Mount the DF on the copier, and then slide the DF to the front as shown. 7. Secure the DF unit with two screws [G]. 8. Connect the cable [H] to the copier.

ARDF Installation

SM 1-21 B229

Inst

alla

tion

9. Attach the appropriate scale decal [I] as shown.

10. Attach the decal [J] to the top cover as shown, choosing the language most

suitable for the machine installed.

11. Open the ARDF [K]. 12. Install the stamp cartridge [L] to the ARDF.

ARDF Installation

B229 1-22 SM

(Color Photo)

13. Attach the clamp [M] on the right side of copier and clamp the I/F cable as shown.

The clamp [M] is provided with a main frame (B229).

14. Turn the main power switch on. Then check if the document feeder works properly.

15. Make a full size copy. Then check to make sure the side-to-side and leading edge registrations are correct. If they are not, adjust the side-to-side and leading edge registrations (refer to the service manual).

ADF Installation

SM 1-23 B229

Inst

alla

tion

1.6 ADF INSTALLATION


Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.


1 Scale Guide 1

2 DF Exposure Glass 1

3 Stud Screw 2

4 Fixing Screw 2

5 Original Size Decal 2

6 Screwdriver Tool 1

7 Attention Decal – Top Cover 1

8 Stamp Cartridge 1



Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.


ADF Installation

B229 1-24 SM

2. Remove the left scale [A] ( x 2). 3. Place the DF exposure glass [B] on the glass holder.

When installing the DF exposure glass, make sure that the white point [C]

is on the lower front side of the glass, as shown

4. Peel off the backing [D] of the double-sided tape attached to the rear side of the scale guide [E], then install it ( x 2 removed in step 2).

5. Install the two stud screws [F].

6. Mount the DF on the copier, then slide the DF to the front as shown. 7. Secure the DF unit with two screws [G]. 8. Connect the cable [H] to the copier.

ADF Installation

SM 1-25 B229

Inst

alla

tion

9. Attach the appropriate scale decal [I] as shown.

10. Attach the decal [J] to the top cover as shown, choosing the language most suitable for the machine installed.

11. Open the ADF [K]. 12. Install the stamp cartridge [L] to the ADF.

ADF Installation

B229 1-26 SM

(Color Photo)

13. Attach the clamp [M] on the right side of copier and clamp the I/F cable as shown.

The clamp [M] is provided with a main frame (B229).

14. Turn the main power switch on. Then check if the document feeder works properly.

15. Make a full size copy. Then check to make sure the side-to-side and leading edge registrations are correct. If they are not, adjust the side-to-side and leading edge registrations (refer to the service manual).

One-Tray Paper Tray Unit

SM 1-27 B229

Inst

alla

tion

IMPORTANT: A warning note has been issued and will include information in the installation instructions, warning not to exceed 45” in height. Below is a table showing which units can be configured for these machines, cabinets, duplex unit, and paper trays.

Cabinet Compatibility with B229 and the FAC31 & FAC32 cabinets: Config 1 Config 2 Config 3 Config 4 Config 5 Config 6 Config 7

Cabinet Large Cabinet (FAC32)

Small Cabinet(FAC31)




Small Cabinet (FAC31)

Small Cabinet (FAC31)

Main Frame X X X X X X X

Duplex Unit X X

1x500 Paper Tray X X X

1x500 Paper Tray X

2x500 Paper Tray X

1.7 ONE-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT



1 Screw M4 x 10 2

2 Stepped Screw 2

3 Bracket 2


Before installing this option, do the following:

If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the

memory, the lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list.

If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer buffer.

Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line,

and the network cable.

⇒

Rev.10/2006


B229 1-28 SM


After removing the tape that secures the peripheral components and

cardboard to the paper tray, make sure that there is no tape and/or tape

reside remaining on the tray.

2. Remove the cover [A] ( x 4).

(Color Photo)

3. Remove the bracket [C] ( x 2).

Rev.10/2006


SM 1-29 B229

Inst

alla

tion

4. Set the copier [D] on the paper tray unit [E].

When installing the copier, be careful not to pinch the connecting harness.

For model B229 "with the duplex unit" (B806)

Set the duplex unit on the paper tray unit first, and then set the copier on the

duplex unit mounted on the paper tray unit.

Remove the rear cover of the duplex unit ( x 2).

Remove the lower cover of the duplex unit ( x 1).

Line the harness [F] in the duplex unit as shown ( x 2).

Re-install the rear cover of the duplex unit ( x 2).

Secure the duplex unit to the paper tray unit.

For details, refer to the DUPLEX UNIT (B806) INSTALLATION


B229 1-30 SM

PROCEDURE. For the model of B229 "without the duplex unit" (B806):

(Color Photo)

Remove the rear cover of the paper tray unit ( x 3).

Line the harness [G] of the paper tray, and loop it between the two clamps [H].

Re-install the rear cover of the paper tray unit ( x 2).

5. Remove the 1st tray [I].


SM 1-31 B229

Inst

alla

tion

6. Install the two stepped screws [J]. 7. Re-install the 1st tray.

8. Install the two brackets [K] ( x 1 each).

(Color Photo)

9. Connect the harness [L] from the paper tray unit to the Copier. 10. Re-install the bracket removed in step 3 ( x 2).


B229 1-32 SM

11. Re-install the rear cover removed in step2 ( x 4). 12. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier. 13. Load paper and make full size copies. If the side and leading edge registrations

are not correct, adjust them.

1.7.3 OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY GRIP HANDLE – OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT

The following procedure is for the 1-tray or 2-tray optional paper feed unit only.

1. Remove the paper tray units [A] from the machine.

(Color Photo)

2. Lower the paper tray grip handle [B] into the paper tray slot as shown with the arrow in the above illustration.


SM 1-33 B229

Inst

alla

tion

(Color Photo)

3. Attach the grip handle to the paper tray (2 x ) as shown above. 4. Put the paper tray back into the machine.

Two-Tray Paper Tray unit Installation

B229 1-34 SM

1.8 TWO-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION



1 Screw M4 x 10 10

2 Bracket with long support 4

3 Bracket 2

4 Adjuster 1

5 Cover 4



1. If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory,

the lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list.

2. If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer buffer.


network cable.


After removing the tape that secures the peripheral components and

cardboard to the paper tray, make sure that there is no tape and/or tape

reside remaining on the tray.


SM 1-35 B229

Inst

alla

tion

2. Attach the adjuster [A] onto the base plate, as shown.

When a table is installed, this procedure is unnecessary.

3. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x 4).

(Color Photo)

4. Remove the lower bracket [C] ( x 2).


B229 1-36 SM

5. Set the copier [D] on the paper tray unit [E].

When installing the copier, be careful not to pinch the connecting harness.

For installing "without the duplex unit" (B806) Pull out the I/F harness from the paper tray unit.

If it is difficult to pull out the I/F harness, remove the rear cover of the

paper tray unit ( x 3), and then pull out the I/F harness from the paper

tray unit.

For installing with the duplex unit" (B806)

1. Set the duplex unit on the paper tray unit first, and then set the copier on the

duplex unit mounted on the paper tray unit.


SM 1-37 B229

Inst

alla

tion

2. Remove the rear cover of the duplex unit ( x 2).

3. Remove the lower bracket in the duplex unit ( x 1).

4. Line the harness [1] in the duplex unit as shown ( x 2).

5. Re-install the rear cover of the duplex unit ( x 2).

6. Secure the duplex unit to the paper tray unit.

For details, refer to the DUPLEX UNIT (B806) INSTALLATION.

6. Remove the 1st tray [F]. 7. Install the two screws [G]. 8. Re-install the paper tray 1.

9. Install the two brackets [H]. ( x 1 each).

(Color Photo)


B229 1-38 SM

10. Connect the harness [I] from the paper tray unit to the Copier. 11. Re-install the bracket removed in step3 ( x 2). 12. Re-install the rear cover removed in step3 ( x 4).

13. Install the four brackets with long supports [J] and four covers [K] (� x 2 each).

These long supports prevent the unit from tipping over.

14. Rotate the adjuster [L] to fix the machine in place. 15. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier. 16. Load paper and make full size copies from each tray. If the side and leading edge

registrations are not correct, adjust them. (Refer to the Service Manual.)


SM 1-39 B229

Inst

alla

tion

1.8.3 OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY GRIP HANDLE – OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT

This procedure is same as the one for the One-Tray Paper Tray Unit. See "Optional Paper

Tray Grip Handle – Optional Paper Tray Unit" in the installation procedure for One-Tray

Paper Tray Unit.

Duplex Unit Installtion

B229 1-40 SM

1.9 DUPLEX UNIT INSTALLTION



1 Screw M4 x 10 3

2 Stepped Screw 1

3 Bracket 2




1. If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory,

the lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list.

2. If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer buffer.


network cable.

1. Unpack the duplex unit and remove the tapes. There are two installation procedures, the duplex unit only/ the duplex unit and optional

paper tray unit. Follow the installation procedure that you need.


SM 1-41 B229

Inst

alla

tion

For Installing the duplex unit only

1. Set the copier on the duplex unit.

When installing the duplex unit, be careful not to pinch the connecting

harness.

2. Remove the rear cover [A] of the copier ( x 4). 3. Remove the standard tray of the copier.


B229 1-42 SM

4. Secure the duplex unit to the copier with two brackets [B] and two knob screws

[C] ( x 2). 5. Re-install the standard tray of the copier.

6. Remove the lower bracket [D] of the copier ( x 2). 7. Set and connect the I/F harness [E] of duplex unit with clamps [F] as shown.

The above left side drawing shows the state in which the controller box is

already removed. Removing the controller box [G] ( x 7: one for the slot

cover [H]) makes you easy to access the connectors.


SM 1-43 B229

Inst

alla

tion

(Color Photo) 8. Re-install the lower bracket [I] to the copier ( x 2).

When re-installing the lower bracket, slide the bracket to the left and fix it

as shown.

9. Skip to the "For Installing the Duplex Unit only/ Installing the Duplex Unit and Paper Tray Unit".

For Installing the Duplex Unit and Paper Tray Unit (B384 or B385)

(Color Photo)

1. Set the duplex unit [A] on the paper tray unit [B] grabbing the stays at the top of the duplex unit as shown.


B229 1-44 SM

(Color Photo) 2. Remove the duplex unit rear cover [C] ( x 2, [D]: M3 x 6 screw, [E]: stepped

screw).

(Color Photo)

3. Remove the lower bracket [F] of the duplex unit ( x 1).

4. Set the copier on the duplex unit.

When installing the duplex unit, be careful not to pinch the connecting

harness.


SM 1-45 B229

Inst

alla

tion

5. Remove the rear cover [G] of the copier ( x 4). 6. Remove the standard tray of the copier.

7. Line the I/F harnesses [H] of the optional paper tray unit in the duplex unit as

shown ( x 2).

For details, refer to the installation procedure for the optional paper tray

unit (B384 or B385).

8. Re-install the duplex unit rear cover to the duplex unit ( x 2, the rear left side screw is a stepped screw.).


B229 1-46 SM

(Color Photo)

9. Pull the duplex tray cassette halfway. 10. Remove the two stopper brackets [I] of the duplex unit ( x 1 each). 11. Remove the duplex tray cassette

12. Secure the optional paper tray unit to the duplex unit with two brackets and two

knob screws same as step 13's manner ( x 2). 13. Secure the duplex unit to the copier with two brackets [J] and two knob screws

[K] ( x 2) 14. Re-install the duplex tray cassette halfway. 15. Re-install the two stopper brackets to the duplex unit ( x 1 each). 16. Close the duplex tray cassette. 17. Reinstall the standard tray of the copier.


SM 1-47 B229

Inst

alla

tion

18. Remove the lower bracket [L] of the copier ( x 2). 19. Set and connect the I/F harness [M] of duplex unit with clamps [N] as shown.

The above left side drawing shows the state in which the controller box is

already removed. Removing the controller box [O] ( x 7) makes you

easy to access the connectors.

20. Set and connect the I/F harness of the paper tray unit to the copier.

For details, refer to the PAPER TRAY UNIT (B384 or B385)

INSTALLATION.

(Color Photo) 21. Re-install the lower bracket [P] to the copier (s x 2).

When re-installing the lower bracket, slide the bracket to the left and fix it

as shown.

22. Continue to the "For installing the duplex unit only/ installing the duplex unit and paper tray unit".


B229 1-48 SM

For Installing the Duplex Unit Only/ Installing the Duplex Unit and Paper Tray Unit

1. Remove the top left front cover [A] ( x 1), the left front cover [B] ( x 1) and the interface cover [C] ( x 2).

2. Remove the left cover [D] ( x 2). 3. Remove the two brackets [E] from the left cover ( x 1 each). 4. Remove the handle cover [F].


SM 1-49 B229

Inst

alla

tion

(Color Photo)

5. Re-install the left cover and open it as shown.

(Color Photo)

6. Set and connect the harness of the inverter unit [G] as shown ( x 3).

(Color Photo) 7. Install the inverter unit ( x 2, [H]).


B229 1-50 SM

8. Re-install the left front cover ( x 1), top left front cover ( x 1) and interface cover ( x 2).

9. Re-install the rear cover ( x 4) 10. Plug in and turn on the main power switch, and then check if the duplex unit

works properly. If the side and leading edge registrations are not correct, adjust them. (Refer to the Service Manual.)

Heater Kit Installation

SM 1-51 B229

Inst

alla

tion

1.10 HEATER KIT INSTALLATION

1.10.1 COMPONENT CHECK


Relay Harness for Main Frame 1 1

Relay Harness for Optional Paper Tray Unit １

Tray Heater for Main Frame 1 2

Tray Heater for Optional Paper Tray Unit １

3 Anti-condensation Heater 1

4 Clamp 13

5 Screw 3


B229 1-52 SM


For Installing the Anti-Condensation Heater and Tray Heater

1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 4) and the interface cover [B] ( x 2).

2. Pull out the paper tray 1. 3. Install the tray heater [C] in the top of the paper tray 1 opening ( x 1).


SM 1-53 B229

Inst

alla

tion

4. Open the ADF/ARDF or platen cover if it has been installed. 5. Remove the rear [D] scale ( x 3) and left scale [E] with exposure glass ( x 2).

6. Move the scanner carriage to the right side by rotating the wheel [F]

counterclockwise. 7. Install the anti-condensation [G] in the scanner unit ( x 1). 8. Pass the connector [H] of the anti-condensation heater through the cutout.


B229 1-54 SM

9. Remove the bracket [I] ( x 1) and shutter bracket [J] ( x 1).

When reinstalling this bracket, make sure that the shutter bracket pushes

the switch [K] of the shutter.

10. Remove the Ink collection tank [L] ( x 1).


SM 1-55 B229

Inst

alla

tion

11. Remove the controller box [M] ( x 5, x 1) and PSU [N] ( x 1, x All).

12. Attach the five small clamps [O], three large clamps [P] and one black clamp [Q]

to the each position as shown.


B229 1-56 SM

13. Line the PSU harness [R] and anti-condensation heater harness [S], and then

connect them ( x 5). 14. Line the PSU harness [R], and then connect it to the tray heater harness [T]

( x 1).

15. Connect the PSU harness [U] to the connector (CN220) on the PSU ( x 1). 16. Reinstall the PSU [V] ( x 1). 17. Reassemble the copier. 18. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 19. Check the machine operation.


SM 1-57 B229

Inst

alla

tion

1.10.3 OPTIONAL TRAY HEATER

Optional Tray Heater Installation

For One-tray Paper Tray Unit

1. Remove the rear cover of the copier ( x 4). 2. Remove the rear cover of the optional paper tray unit [A] ( x 5, bracket x 2). 3. Remove the rear cover [B] of the duplex unit if it has been installed ( x 4,

bracket x 2).

4. Pull out the paper tray 2. 5. Install the tray heater [C] ( x 1).


B229 1-58 SM

6. Attach the three clamps [D] to the optional paper tray unit. 7. Line the tray heater harness [E] as shown ( x 1). 8. Line the relay harness [F] and connect it to the tray heater harness ( x 3).

If the duplex unit has been installed, do step 9. If not, skip the step 9.

9. Line the relay harness [G] as shown ( x 2).

10. Remove the bracket [H] ( x 2).


SM 1-59 B229

Inst

alla

tion

11. Line the relay harness [I] and connect it to the PSU harness as shown ( x 1). 12. Reassemble the copier. 13. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 14. Check the machine operation.

For Two-tray Paper Tray Unit

1. Remove the rear cover of the copier ( x 4). 2. Remove the rear cover of the optional paper tray unit [A] ( x 5, bracket x 2). 3. Remove the rear cover [B] of the duplex unit if it has been installed.

4. Pull out the paper tray 2 and tray 3. 5. Install the tray heater [C] ( x 1).


B229 1-60 SM

6. Attach the two clamps [D] to the optional paper tray unit. 7. Line the tray heater harness [E] as shown ( x 1). 8. Line the relay harness [F] and connect it to the tray heater harness ( x 3).

If the duplex unit has been installed, do step 9. If not, skip the step 9.

9. Line the relay harness [G] as shown ( x 2).


SM 1-61 B229

Inst

alla

tion

10. Remove the bracket [H] ( x 2). 11. Line the relay harness [I] and connect it to the PSU harness as shown ( x 1). 12. Reassemble the copier. 13. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 14. Check the machine operation.

Function Upgrade Option Installation

B229 1-62 SM

1.11 FUNCTION UPGRADE OPTION INSTALLATION



1 HDD Unit 1

2 RAM DIMM 1

3 Knob Screw 4

4 Screw M3 x 6 1

5 Harness 1

6 I/F Cable 1

7 Ferrite Core 1

8 Nylon Clamp 3



1. Rear cover [A] ( x 4) 2. Interface cover [B] ( x 2)


SM 1-63 B229

Inst

alla

tion

3. FCU bracket or FCU [C] ( x 3) 4. Controller box cover [D] ( x 13)

(Color Photo)

5. Install the DIMM RAM [E] to the optional RAM slot [F] on the controller board.


B229 1-64 SM

(Color Photo)

6. Attach the I/F harness [G] and cable [H] ( x 2) 7. Reinstall the controller box cover ( x 13).

(Color Photo)

8. Line the harness [I], and then attach the ferrite core [J] ( x 2, ferrite core x 1). 9. Line the I/F harness [K] ( x 1) with the nylon clamp [L].


SM 1-65 B229

Inst

alla

tion

(Color Photo)

10. Install the HDD unit [M] as shown ( x 4). 11. Attach the two harnesses to the HDD unit ( x 2). 12. Reassemble the FCU bracket or FCU, interface cover and rear cover. 13. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 14. Run SP5-846-40 to move the address book from the Printer/Scanner SD Card to

the HDD. 15. Run SP5-990-005 (Self-Diagnosis) and verify HDD existence. 16. Check the HDD operation. Note: Please note that the following may occur if, the B229 has already been installed or

the B229 has not been installed yet, but the main power was already turned ON at

least once:

The machine may create the Address Book and Destination List in the SD card

because it did not detect the HDD. To use some features, the Address Book and

Destination List must be moved to the HDD. If it is not, the following errors can occur:

- ScanRouter: “Specified destination is not programmed” error occurs, because the

Destination List cannot be found.

- Web Image Monitor, operation panel: “LDAP Server” is not displayed.

- Only basic and user admin are available.

⇒

⇒

⇒

Rev. 11/2006

Copy Data Security Unit Installation

B229 1-66 SM

1.12 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT INSTALLATION



1 Copy data security board 1

2 Flat cable (long) 1

3 Screw 4

4 Harness (long) 1

5 Harness (short): Not used in this model. 1

6 Flat cable (short): Not used in this model. 1

7 Bracket: Not used in this model. 1

8 Clamp: Not used in this model. 1

Copy Data Security Unit Installation

SM 1-67 B229

Inst

alla

tion


1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 4).

(Color Photo)

2. Attach the copy data security unit [B] on the controller box cover ( x 4). 3. Connect the harness [C] to the CN142 on the BCU and I/F flat cable [D] to the

CN150 on the BCU. 4. Reinstall the rear cover ( x 4). 5. Plug in and turns on the main power switch. 6. Go into the User Tools mode, and select System Settings > Administrator Tools

> Copy Data Security Option > On. 7. Exit the User Tools.

Optional Counter Interface Unit

B229 1-68 SM

1.13 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT



2. Remove the Scanner stay right cover [B] ( x 1) 3. Scanner stay left cover [C] ( x 1) 4. Punch out the small hole [D] using a screwdriver. 5. Remove the cap [E] with nippers.


SM 1-69 B229

Inst

alla

tion

6. Hold the key counter plate nuts [F] on the inside of the key counter bracket [G] and insert the key counter holder [H].

7. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket ( x 2). 8. Install the key counter cover [I] ( x 2).

(Color Photo)

9. Line the relay harness [J] and connect it to the CN124 on the BCU ( x 2).

The relay harness is a little bit long for this machine. Loop it between two

clamps.


B229 1-70 SM

10. Pass the relay harness through the opening and reinstall the scanner stay right

cover ( x 1) and scanner stay left cover ( x 1). 11. Install the stepped screw [L]. 12. Connect the key counter harness [M] to the relay harness. 13. Pass the joined connectors through the opening of the key counter holder

assembly [N], and put the connectors inside the assembly. 14. Hook the key counter holder assembly onto the stepped screw [L]. Check that

the cable is not caught between the left cover and the key counter holder assembly.

15. Secure the key counter holder assembly with the screw [O]. 16. Reassemble the machine. 17. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 18. Check the operation.

Controller Options

SM 1-71 B229

Inst

alla

tion

1.14 CONTROLLER OPTIONS

1.14.1 OVERVIEW

This machine has I/F card slots and SD card slots for optional I/F connections and

applications.

I/F Card Slot

Slot [A] is used for one of the optional I/F connections: (IEEE1394, IEEE1284,

IEEE802.11 (Wireless LAN) or Bluetooth).

Slot [B] is used for the USB 2.0 Host.

SD Card Slot

Slot [1] is used for standard printer/scanner application only.

Slot [2] is used for one of the optional applications such as PostScript3, data

overwrite security or PictBridge.

Slot [3] is used for the Java VM Option or service use.

Controller Options

B229 1-72 SM

1.14.2 POSTSCRIPT3 INSTALLATION


1. Remove the SD card slot cover ( x 1). 2. Install the PostScript3 SD card into the slot 2. 3. Reinstall the SD card slot cover [A] ( x 1). 4. Turn on the main power switch. 5. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/

Test Print), and then check that this device is detected. 6. Attach the "Adobe PostScript3" decal to the front cover of the machine.

1.14.3 PICTBRIDGE INSTALLTION

When you use the PictBride, you must install the USB Host (B825).

Installation Procedure 1. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] ( x 1). 2. Install the PictBridge SD card into the slot 2. 3. Reinstall the SD card slot cover. 4. Turn on the main power switch. 5. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/

Test Print), and then check that this device is detected.

Controller Options

SM 1-73 B229

Inst

alla

tion

1.14.4 JAVA VM OPTION INSTALLATION

Installation Procedure SD card slot 3 is basically used only for service maintenance. Do not leave an SD card in

slot 3 after installing an application.

1. Remove the slot cover [A] from SD card slot 3 ( x 1). 2. Turn the SD-card [B] label face to the rear of the machine. Then push it slowly

into slot 3 until you hear a click. 3. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 4. Push the "User Tools" key. 5. Push the "Login/ Logout" key. 6. Login with the administrator user name and password. 7. Touch "Extended Feature Settings" on the LCD. 8. Touch "Install" on the LCD. 9. Touch "SD Card slot 3". 10. Touch the "Java TM Platform" line. 11. Touch the "SD card ON". 12. Touch the "Setting". 13. Press one of the hard keys, which you want to use for the Java option unit. 14. Touch the "Execute". 15. Touch the "OK" after confirming that the installation is correctly done. 16. Touch "Exit" twice to go back to the copy screen. 17. Turn off the main power switch. 18. Remove the SD card from slot 3. 19. Attach the slot cover [A] ( x 1).

Controller Options

B229 1-74 SM

1.14.5 WIRELESS LAN (IEEE 802.11B) INSTALLATION

Component Check No. Description Q’ty

1 Wireless LAN Adapter 1

2 Wireless LAN Card 1

3 LAN Card Cover 1

4 Caution Sheet 1

5 Label 1

Installation Procedure 1. Remove the interface cover A ( x 2). 2. Install the Wireless adaptor ( x 2). 3. Install the Wireless LAN card to the wireless adaptor. 4. Attach the antenna cap to the wireless LAN card. 5. Turn on the main power switch. 6. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/


1.14.6 IEEE 1284 INSTALLATION


1 IEEE1284 Interface Ass’y 1

2 UL Sheet 1

3 Caution Sheet 1

Installation Procedure 1. Remove the interface cover B ( x 2). 2. Install the IEEE 1284 board to the interface slot B ( x 2). 3. Turn on the main power switch. 4. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/


Controller Options

SM 1-75 B229

Inst

alla

tion

1.14.7 IEEE 1394 INSTALLATION


1 IEEE1394 Interface Ass’y 1

2 UL/FCC Sheet 1

3 Caution Sheet 1

4 I/F Cable – 4 pin 1

5 I/F Cable – 6 pin 1

Installation Procedure 1. Remove the interface cover A ( x 2). 2. Install the IEEE 1394 board to the interface slot A ( x 2). 3. Turn on the main power switch. 4. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/


1.14.8 BLUETOOTH INSTALLATION


1 Bluetooth Interface Ass’y １

2 Bluetooth Card 1

3 Bluetooth Card Adapter 1

4 Bluetooth Card Cover 1

5 UL/FCC Sheet 1

6 Caution Sheet 1

Installation Procedure 1. Remove the interface cover A ( x 2). 2. Install the Wireless adaptor to the interface slot A ( x 2). 3. Install the Bluetooth card to the wireless adaptor. 4. Attach the antenna cap to the Bluetooth card. 5. Turn on the main power switch. 6. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/


Controller Options

B229 1-76 SM

1.14.9 USB HOST INSTALLATION


1 USB Host Interface Ass’y １

2 USB Cable 1

3 Ferrite Core 1

4 Clamp 1

5 UL Sheet 1

Installation Procedure 1. Remove the interface cover B ( x 2). 2. Install the USB host board to the interface slot B ( x 2). 3. Turn on the main power switch. 4. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/


1.14.10 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE D (B735)

Before You Begin the Procedure 1. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values:

Supervisor login password

Administrator login name

Administrator login password

If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these

settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure.

2. Make sure that “Admin. Authentication” is ON. [System Settings] – [Administrator Tools] – [Administrator Authentication Management] - [Admin. Authentication]

If this setting is OFF, tell the customer this setting must be ON before you

do the installation procedure.

3. Make sure that “Administrator Tools” is enabled (selected). [System Settings] – [Administrator Tools] – [Administrator Authentication Management] - [Available Settings]

Controller Options

SM 1-77 B229

Inst

alla

tion

If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must

be enabled (selected) before you do the installation procedure.

ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.


1 SD Card 1

2 Operating Instructions (CD-ROM) 1

3 Caution Sheet 1

Seal Check and Removal

You must check the box seals to make sure that they were not removed after

the items were sealed in the box at the factory before you do the installation.

1. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box. Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner.

The surfaces of the tapes must be blank. If you see “VOID” on the tapes, do

not install the components in the box.

2. If the surfaces of the tapes do not show “VOID”, remove them from the corners of the box.

3. You can see the “VOID” marks [B] when you remove each seal. In this condition, they cannot be attached to the box again.

Controller Options

B229 1-78 SM


The machine must always be turned off and its power cord disconnected

before you do this procedure.

You must install the data overwrite protection unit in SD Card slot 2. However,

the PostScript option for this machine is also installed in SD Card slot 2. You

must do the SD Card Appli move procedure first if you have the PostScript

option installed and you want to install the Data Overwrite Security unit. Move

the Data Overwriting Security application (slot 3) to the SD Card that contains

the Printer/ Scanner application (slot 1). (* 5.7).

1. Turn off the main power switch if the machine is turned on. 2. Disconnect the network cable if the NIB is installed. 3. Turn on the main power switch. 4. Turn off the operation switch and main power switch. 5. Remove the slot cover [A] of SD card slot 2 ( x 1). 6. Turn the SD-card [B] label face to the rear of the machine. Then push it slowly

into slot 2 until you hear a click. 7. Connect the network cable if the NIB option is installed. 8. Turn on the main power switch. 9. Go into the SP mode and push “EXECUTE” with SP5-878. 10. Exit the SP mode and turn off the operation switch. Then turn off the main power

switch. 11. Turn on the machine power.

Controller Options

SM 1-79 B229

Inst

alla

tion

12. Do SP5990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report). 13. Make sure the ROM number and firmware version in area [a] of the diagnostic

report are the same as those in area [b]. [a]: “ROM Number/Firmware Version” – “HDD Format Option”

[b]: “Loading Program” – “GW2a_zoffy”

Diagnostic Report: “ROM No. / Firmware

Version” [b] “Loading Program” [a]

Data Overwrite Security Unit HDD Format Option:

B7355060 / 0.03

GW2a_zoffy:

B7355060 / 0.03

The ROM number and firmware version number change when the

firmware is upgraded. However, the important thing is to make sure the

numbers in [a] are the same as the numbers in [b].

If the ROM numbers are not the same, or the version numbers are not the same, this

means the unit was not installed correctly.

If this happens:

Make sure the unit type (Type D).

If they do not match:

4. Replace the NV-RAM

5. Replace the “Data Overwrite Security Unit” (SD card) with the correct type

6. Do the installation procedure in this procedure again, from Step 1.

14. Go into the User Tools mode, and select System Settings> Administrator Tools> Auto Erase Memory Setting> On.

15. Exit the User Tools mode.

Controller Options

B229 1-80 SM

1.14.11 REMOTE COMMUNICATION GATE INSTALLATION


1 Remote Comm. Gate Interface Ass’y １

2 Cover 1

3 Screw 3


(Color Photo) 1. Remove one cover bracket [A] from the application cover. ( x 2) 2. Install the modem board into the card slot for the device ( x 2). 3. Confirm the following SP settings before starting installation flow

SP5-816-150 (To Select the country)

SP5-816-154 (To set out side connection telephone number)

SP5-816-161 (To set telephone number)

4. Follow the Installation flow as shown below with SP mode.

Controller Options

SM 1-81 B229

Inst

alla

tion

Key Counter I/F Unit Type A

B229 1-82 SM

1.15 KEY COUNTER I/F UNIT TYPE A



2. Attach the key counter interface board over the IO board, as shown in the picture below.


SM 1-83 B229

Inst

alla

tion

3. Connect one end of the harness to the key counter interface board.

4. Connect the other end of the harness to CN117 on the BCU.


B229 1-84 SM

5. Route and clamp the harness as shown.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

PM Tables

SM 2-1 B229

Prev

entiv

e M

aint

enan

ce

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

2.1 PM TABLES

After preventive maintenance work, reset the PM counter corresponding with

each PM part.

PM intervals (75k and 150k) indicate the number of prints.

Keys: AN: As necessary, C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect

Optics

75k 150k AN NOTE

Exposure glass C C C Blower brush or Dry cloth

Engine

75k 150k AN NOTE

Print heads C C Dry cloth

Paper transport belt C R C

Charge roller R

Paper-dust Mylar C C

Discharge brush C C

Sub scan encoder R

Paper Feed

75k 150k AN NOTE

Paper feed roller (each tray) C R C Clean with water or alcohol.

Friction pad (each tray) C R C Clean with water or alcohol.

Bottom-plate pad (each tray) C C Clean with water or alcohol.

Paper feed roller (bypass tray) C C Clean with water or alcohol.

Friction pad (bypass tray) C C Clean with water or alcohol.

Bottom-plate pad (by-pass tray) C C Clean with water or alcohol.

Registration roller C C Clean with water or alcohol.

Relay rollers C C Clean with water or alcohol.

Paper feed guides C C Clean with water or alcohol.

Paper-dust Mylar C C Clean with water or alcohol.

PM Tables

B229 2-2 SM

Paper Exit

75k 150k AN NOTE

Exit transport rollers C

Maintenance

75k 150k AN NOTE

Maintenance unit R

First cap C C Remove the ink or Dry cloth.

Wiper C C Remove the ink or Dry cloth.

Ink collection bottle R

ADF/ARDF

80k AN NOTE

Feed belt R C Clean with water or alcohol.

Separation roller R C Clean with water or alcohol.

Pick-up roller R C Clean with water or alcohol.

Stamp R Replace when necessary.

White plate C Clean with water or alcohol.

DF exposure glass C Clean with water or alcohol.

Platen cover C Clean with water or alcohol.

Paper Tray Unit

60k 120k AN NOTE

Paper feed rollers R C Dry or damp cloth

Bottom-plate pads C C Dry cloth

Paper-feed guides C C Clean with water or alcohol.

Friction pads R C Dry or damp cloth

Relay clutch (B384 only) I

Feed clutches (B384 only) I

Relay roller (B384 only) C C Dry cloth

Duplex Unit

60k 120k AN NOTE

All rollers C Dry cloth

PM Counter

SM 2-3 B229

Prev

entiv

e M

aint

enan

ce

2.2 PM COUNTER

2.2.1 HOW TO RESET THE PM COUNTERS

After preventive maintenance work, reset the PM counters (SP7-804-002 ~ 009) as follows.

1. Activate the SP mode (see section 5.1). 2. Select SP 7-804 ("PM Count. Reset"). 3. Select the PM counter of what you have replaced. 4. Press the OK key [A]. The message "EXECUTE" is displayed.

5. Press the button [B] below the message "EXECUTE." The messages

"EXECUTE?" followed by "CANCEL" and "EXECUTE" are displayed.

6. Wait until the message "Completed" is displayed. 7. Quit the SP mode.

PM Counter

B229 2-4 SM

2.2.2 PM COUNTER RESET LIST

PM counter reset must be required after replacing the PM parts. The following list shows

SP numbers that need to be reset.

PM Parts SP Number Remark

GJ engine SP7959-001

This SP clears all SP numbers related

with GJ engine. For details, refer to "SP

Mode Tables in Service Program Mode".

Maintenance unit SP7804-002

This SP clears the counter of

SP7223-001 to -005 (cleaning total),

SP7224-001 to -005 (refreshing total)

SP7225-001 to -005 (air releasing and

ink filling total).

SP 7803-002 (total pages)

Charge roller SP7804-003 This SP clears the counter of

SP7803-003 (page total).

Transport belt unit SP7804-004 This SP clears the counter of


Ink collection tank SP7804-005

This SP clears the counter of

SP7221-001 (total amount), SP7803-005

(total amount) and SP7941-001 (total

amount).

Flushing gate unit SP2505-001 This SP clears the counter of


Cleaning Procedures

SM 2-5 B229

Prev

entiv

e M

aint

enan

ce

2.3 CLEANING PROCEDURES

2.3.1 MAINTENANCE UNIT

(Color Photos)

Suction Cap 1. Remove the maintenance unit. ( "Maintenance Unit" in the section of

Replacement and Adjustment) 2. Turn the adjuster [A] of the maintenance unit clockwise to raise the suction cap. 3. Wrap the tip of screwdriver or similar tool [B] with a damp cloth. 4. Use the wrapped tip of the screwdriver to clean these: 5. Inside the cap 6. Around the cap to remove the hardened ink

Always wrap the tip of the tool with a damp cloth. This will not let the suction

cup get scratched. A scratched suction cap could cause poor print jobs.

Air Vent

1. Use a screwdriver or similar tool to remove hardened ink from inside the air

vent [A].

Cleaning Procedures

B229 2-6 SM

2. Use a dry cloth to remove ink splatter from inside the air vent.

Wiper

1. Turn the adjuster clockwise to raise the caps [A] and hold it open. ("Suction

Cap" in this Section) 2. Turn the adjuster again until the wiper [B] is open. 3. Use a dry cloth to remove ink splatter from the wiper and the area around it.

2.3.2 PRINT HEADS

Nozzle Cover, Nozzle Plate Before doing this procedure:

Provide a delicate material cloth like one used for optical things.

Put on gloves to avoid any injury due to a metal edge.

Make sure of heads position (see the below picture) and clean the only defective

print head. Do not clean other print heads.

(Color Photos)

Cleaning Procedures

SM 2-7 B229

Prev

entiv

e M

aint

enan

ce

1. Remove the maintenance unit. ( "Maintenance Unit" in the section of Replacement and Adjustment)

2. Push the carriage to the home position (completely to the rear). 3. Insert your hand into the opening [A] on the rear side of the copier. 4. Use a damp cloth to clean the nozzle cover [B] of the print heads. 5. Use part of the cloth that is clean to wipe the print head nozzle plate on the face

of the print head [C].

Important: Gently wipe the plate once or twice in the same direction (left or

right). This will not let the plate get damaged. Never clean the plate with

strong right-and-left motion. A damaged plate could cause poor print jobs.

After Cleaning the Maintenance Unit

(Color Photo)

Do these before you reinstall the maintenance unit: 1. Turn the adjuster [A] clockwise.

2. Lower the suction cap and the wiper blade. Make sure they are secure in the down

position.

Cleaning Procedures

B229 2-8 SM

3. Make sure the triangle marks [B] on the sides of the maintenance unit match. Do

this if the tips of the white and black triangle marks are not aligned:

Insert the tip of a flat head screwdriver into the adjuster. Then slowly

rotate it clockwise until the marks are aligned.

After you reassemble the copier: 1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine. 2. Clean all the print heads with SP2010-001 or "Clean Print-heads" <

"Maintenance" < "User Tools". 3. Print a Nozzle Check Pattern with SP3109-003 or "Nozzle Check Pattern" <

"Maintenance" < "User Tools" to confirm that the printer is operates correctly. 4. Check the test pattern. Do the procedure again if you see any bare patches in the

pattern.

Do this until the pattern is perfect. For more, see section "Troubleshooting".

2.3.3 TRANSPORT BELT

(Color Photo)

1. Remove the front cover. (see "Front Cover" in the Replacement Adjustment) 2. Open the inner right cover (Front door > Inner left cover > Inner right cover). 3. Use a damp cloth to wipe clean the surface of the transport belt [A. Then clean

the belt with a dry cloth. 4. Use the timing belt [B] to rotate the transport belt as you clean. This procedure

lets you clean the entire surface of the belt. 5. Make sure the surface of the belt is completely dry.

Water on the surface of the transport belt could interfere with the operation of the

printer.

General Cautions

SM 3-1 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS

Do not turn off the main switch while any of the electrical components are active. Doing so

may result in damage to units as they are pulled out or replaced.

3.1.1 SCANNER UNIT

Use alcohol or glass cleaner to clean the exposure and scanning glass. This will

reduce the static charge on the glass.

Use a blower brush or a water-moistened cotton pad to clean the mirrors and lenses.

Take care not to bend or crease the exposure lamp’s ribbon cable.

Do not disassemble the lens unit. Doing so will throw the lens and copy image out of

focus.

Do not turn any of the CCD positioning screws. Doing so will throw the CCD out of

position.

3.1.2 PAPER FEED

Do not touch the surface of the paper feed rollers.

To avoid misfeeds, the side and end fences in each paper tray must be positioned

correctly so as to align with the actual paper size.

3.1.3 IMPORTANT

If the optional tray heater or optics anti-condensation heater is installed, keep the

copier's power cord plugged in even while the main switch is off, so that the heater(s)

remain energized.

Special Tools and Lubricants

B229 3-2 SM

3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

Part Number Description Q’ty

B6455010 SD Card 1

B6456705 PCMCIA Card Adapter 1

B6456810 USB Reader/Writer 1

VSSM9000 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE87 1

C4019503 20X Magnification Scope 1

A2579300 Grease Barrierta – S552R 1

52039501 Silicon Grease G-501 1

A0929503 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) 1

A2929500 Test Chart – S5S (10 pcs/set) 1

Exterior Covers and Operation Panel

SM 3-3 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

3.3 EXTERIOR COVERS AND OPERATION PANEL

3.3.1 REAR COVER

1. Rear cover [A] ( x 4)

3.3.2 REAR ENGINE UNIT COVER

1. Rear engine unit cover [A] (locking screw x 2)


B229 3-4 SM

3.3.3 TOP LEFT FRONT, LEFT FRONT AND INTERFACE COVER

1. Top left cover [A] ( x 1) 2. Left front cover [B] ( x 1) 3. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover") 4. Interface cover [C] ( x 2)

3.3.4 RIGHT DOOR

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover") 2. Open the right door [A]. 3. Disconnect three harnesses [B] ( x 3). 4. Right door belt [C]


SM 3-5 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

3.3.5 BY-PASS TRAY

[B]

1. Right door ( "Right Door") 2. Open the by-pass tray [A]. 3. By-pass tray [A] ( x 2, pin x 2) 4. Disconnect harness [B].

3.3.6 FRONT COVER

1. Pull out the paper tray 1. 2. Open the right door [A]. 3. Open the front door [B]. 4. Front cover [C] ( x 4)

Operation Panel

B229 3-6 SM

3.4 OPERATION PANEL

1. Press the "PUSH" bottom [A], and then tilt the operation panel. 2. Scanner stay right cover [B] ( x 1) 3. Scanner stay left cover [C] ( x 1) 4. Left front cover [D] ( x 1) 5. Push bottom [A]

6. Disconnect the I/F harness [E] ( x 1). 7. Left and right bushing [F] ( x 2 each) 8. Remove the operation panel [G] pressing the lever [H].

Scanner Unit

SM 3-7 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

3.5 SCANNER UNIT

3.5.1 EXPOSURE GLASS

1. Open the ARDF/ADF or platen cover (if it is installed). 2. Rear scale [A] ( x 3) 3. Left scale [B] with exposure glass [C] ( x 2)

If the platen cover is installed, the left scale [B] is not attached the

exposure glass [C]. Remove them separately.

4. DF exposure glass [D] (if ARDF or ADF is installed.)

Reassembling the exposure glass When reinstalling, make sure that the mark is at the rear left corner, and that the left edge is

aligned to the support on the frame.

3.5.2 LENS BLOCK

• Do not touch the paint-locked screws on the lens block. The position of the lens

assembly (black part) is adjusted before shipment.

• Do not grasp the PCB or the lens assembly when handling the lens block. The lens assembly may slide out of position.

Scanner Unit

B229 3-8 SM

1. Exposure glass ( "Exposure Glass") 2. Lens cover [A] ( x 9) 3. Original length sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1) 4. Ground cable [C] ( x 1) 5. Lens block [D] ( x 4, x 2, x 2)

After installing a new lens block, adjust the image quality ( "Printing"

in the Replace and Adjustment).

3.5.3 EXPOSURE LAMP

1. Remove the ARDF, ADF or platen cover (if it is installed). 2. Exposure glass ( "Exposure Glass") 3. Scanner stay right cover 4. Top right cover [A] ( x 2)

Scanner Unit

SM 3-9 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

5. Top front left cover 6. Interface cover 7. Top left cover [B] ( x 2) 8. Rear cover 9. Top rear cover [C] ( x 1) 10. Scanner top left frame [D] ( x 2)

11. Scanner top rear frame [E] ( x 9, x 2, x 2)

12. Slide the first scanner [F] to the cutout of the scanner rear frame with moving the timing belt.

13. Disconnect the scanner harness [G] from the lamp stabilizer ( x 4). 14. Tension clamp [H] ( x 1) 15. Cable holder [I] (hook x 1) 16. Press the plastic latch [J] and push the rear end of the lamp toward the front. 17. Exposure lamp [J] (with the cable, x 2, x 1)

Scanner Unit

B229 3-10 SM

Reassembling the Exposure Lamp When you reassemble the exposure lamp, run the cable not to be slack. Slide the clamp [L]

to adjust the cable slack.

3.5.4 ORIGINAL WIDTH/LENGTH SENSOR

1. Exposure glass ( "Exposure Glass") 2. Two original width sensors [A] ( x 1 each) 3. Two original length sensors [B] ( x 1 each)

3.5.5 SCANNER MOTOR

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover") 2. Scanner motor with bracket [A] ( x 2, x 2, x 1, spring x 1) 3. Scanner motor ( x 2)

Scanner Unit

SM 3-11 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

When reassembling, install the belt first, and set the spring next.

After installing the motor, adjust the image quality ( Copy Adjustments:

Printing/Scanning).

3.5.6 LAMP STABILIZER

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover") 2. Lamp stabilizer [A] ( x 2, locking support x 3)

Engine

B229 3-12 SM

3.6 ENGINE

3.6.1 ENGINE UNIT

When you install the new engine unit, remove the remaining ink with

SP2100-001 before replacing the old engine unit.

[D]

[C]

[B]

[A]

1. Remove the paper tray 1. 2. Open the right door. 3. Release the belt [A]. 4. Connector cover bracket [B] ( x 2) 5. Open the front door [C]. 6. Front cover [D] ( x 4)

When reassembling the connector cover bracket [B], make sure that the

bracket does not pinch any harnesses.

Engine

SM 3-13 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

7. Disconnect the six harnesses [E].

For details, refer to “Picture 1” on the following page.

8. Pull the two levers [F] out from the machine (cover x 1). 9. Remove the six screws ( x 6): two screws for ink cartridge housing, 4 screws

for engine unit.

For details, refer to “Picture 2” on the following page.

10. Pull the engine unit [G] slowly on the way.

Make sure that any harness is not attached to the machine before pulling

the engine unit.

11. Hold the engine unit as shown, and then remove it from the machine.

12. Pull out the engine unit stay [H] before putting it on the flat place. Otherwise, the

ink-supply unit [I] may be damaged.

Engine

B229 3-14 SM

(Color Photo)

(Color Photos)

When installing the new engine unit After installing the new engine unit, do the following procedure.

1. Install the ink cartridges provided with the new engine unit into the machine. 2. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 3. The copier automatically starts to execute the releasing air mode. 4. Do SP2-100-001. This takes about 5 minutes. 5. Do the refreshing using either UP or SP2010-002. 6. Print out the nozzle check pattern using either UP or SP3109-003 and check it

out. 7. If the printout is not satisfactory, do the cleaning with UP or SP2010-001 8. Do the "GJ Eng Count, Reset" with SP7959-001.

Engine

SM 3-15 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

Take the ink cartridges used in this procedure back to your service office.

(Most of the ink in these cartridges is consumed by this procedure.)

You need to do following procedure before transporting the replaced engine unit:

Lock the carriage unit using the adjuster of the maintenance unit. Make sure

the two tops of the squares do not face each other. (See "Maintenance Unit"

below.)

Pack the replaced engine unit into the original carton box, which was used for

the new engine unit. This prevents the unit from being damaged.

3.6.2 CONIJ (CONNECT INK JET MODULE)

(Color Photo)

1. Open the right door. 2. Connector cover bracket ( "Engine Unit") 3. CONIJ [A] ( x 2, all 's)


The maintenance unit is engaged to the carriage unit when the machine is in stand-by

status. Lowering the maintenance unit [D] releases the engagement with the carriage unit.

So, do this step before removing the maintenance unit.

Put a sheet of paper on the floor during servicing. Ink may fall on the floor.

Engine

B229 3-16 SM

1. Rear engine unit cover ( "Rear Engine Unit Cover") 2. Turn the adjuster [A] clockwise by a screwdriver until the tops of the two

triangles [B] face each other.

Never turn the adjuster counterclockwise.

3. Maintenance unit [C] ( x 2, x 2)

3.6.4 INK COLLECTION TANK

1. Rear engine unit cover ( "Rear Engine Unit Cover") 2. Ink collection tank bracket [A] ( x 1) 3. Shutter bracket [B] ( x 1)

When reinstalling this bracket, make sure that the shutter bracket pushes

the switch [C] of the shutter.

Engine

SM 3-17 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

4. Pull out the handle from the machine. 5. Ink collection tank [D] ( x 1)

3.6.5 SUB SCAN ENCODER AND ENCODER SENSOR

Never touch the rim of the sub scan encoder with bare hands.

1. Front cover ( "Front Cover") 2. Encoder cover [A] ( x 3)

Engine

B229 3-18 SM

(Color Photo) 3. Remove the screw [B] of the encoder sensor bracket, and then slide down the

bracket as shown [C].

Carefully slide down the bracket not to damage the encoder.

4. Remove the spring [D] and screw [E] of the sub scan encoder motor, and then slide up the bracket as shown [F].

5. Release the timing belt [G]. 6. Remove the sub scan encoder [H] (slider clip [I] x 1). 7. Remove the encoder sensor bracket [J] ( x 1). 8. Encoder sensor ( x 2)

Engine

SM 3-19 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

3.6.6 MAIN SCAN DRIVE MOTOR

(Color Photo)

1. Engine unit ( "Engine Unit") 2. Main scan drive motor [A] at front right side of the engine ( x 2, x 1)

Do not touch the main scan encoder during this procedure.

3.6.7 SUB SCAN DRIVE MOTOR

(Color Photo)

1. Engine unit ( "Engine Unit") 2. Encoder cover ( "Sub Scan Encoder and Encoder Sensor") 3. Sub scan drive motor with the bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 2, spring x 1)

Engine

B229 3-20 SM

3.6.8 FLUSHING GATE UNIT

1. Engine unit ( "Engine Unit") 2. Flushing gate unit [A] ( x 2)

3.6.9 TRANSPORT BELT UNIT

During this procedure, do not touch the main scan encoder with your hands.

1. Engine unit ( "Engine Unit") 2. Engine top cover [A] ( x 2) 3. Belt cleaning unit [B] ( x 2) 4. Flushing unit [C] ( x 2) 5. Encoder cover [D] ( x 3)

Engine

SM 3-21 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

6. Paper guide plate [E] ( x 2) 7. Paper guide bracket [F] ( x 3, x 1) 8. Sub scan encoder ( "Sub Scan Encoder and Encoder Sensor") 9. Encoder sensor bracket ( "Sub Scan Encoder and Encoder Sensor") 10. Timing belt ( "Sub Scan Encoder and Encoder Sensor")

11. Turn the lock lever [G] clockwise from the view of front side, and then put it

inside the frame through cutout. 12. Slide the transport belt unit [H] to the front side, and then remove it as shown (

x 2, x 1, x 1, x 2, bushing x 1).

Engine

B229 3-22 SM

3.6.10 CHARGE ROLLER

During this procedure, do not touch the main scan encoder with your hands.

1. Transport belt unit ( "Flushing Gate Unit") 2. Charge roller unit [A] ( x 2) 3. Charge roller [B]

Paper Feed

SM 3-23 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

3.7 PAPER FEED

3.7.1 PAPER FEED MOTOR

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover") 2. Ink collection tank ( " Ink Collection Tank") 3. Ink collection tank bracket [A] ( x 3, x 2)

4. Feed motor bracket [B] ( x 3, x 1) 5. Feed motor ( x 2)

Paper Feed

B229 3-24 SM

3.7.2 REGISTRATION CLUTCH

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover") 2. Registration clutch [A] ( x 1, x 1)

3.7.3 REGISTRATION ROLLER

(Color Photo) 1. Open the right door and release the belt ( "Right Door"). 2. Front cover ( "Front Cover") 3. Registration roller gear [A] ( x 1) 4. Registration clutch ( "Registration Clutch")

Paper Feed

SM 3-25 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

5. Remove the screw [B] and slide the registration guide plate [C] to the rear side. 6. Lift up the registration guide plate, and then remove it.

(Color Photo)

7. Remove the bushing [D] at rear side.

(Color Photo)

8. Slide the registration roller [E] to the rear side, and then remove it.

Paper Feed

B229 3-26 SM

3.7.4 PAPER FEED, PAPER TRANSPORT AND DUPLEX CLUTCH

1. Rear cover ( "Right Door") 2. Disconnect three harnesses and release six clamps. ( x 3, x 6) 3. Clutch cover bracket [A] ( x 2, x 2, bushing x 2) 4. Paper feed clutch [B] ( x 1) 5. Paper transport clutch [C] ( x 1) 6. Duplex clutch [D] ( x 1)

3.7.5 PAPER FEED ROLLER AND FRICTION PAD

1. Remove the paper tray 1. 2. Clip [A]

Paper Feed

SM 3-27 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

3. Push the shaft back through the opening, and tilt it up.

If the black plastic bushing [B] comes off, be sure to remount it when

reinstalling the shaft.

4. Paper feed roller [C] 5. Friction pad [D] (spring x 1)

3.7.6 PAPER END SENSOR

1. Engine unit ( "Engine Unit") 2. Remove the paper tray 1. 3. Paper end sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1) 4. Paper end sensor [B]

Paper Feed

B229 3-28 SM

3.7.7 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SWITCH

1. By-pass tray ( "By-pass Tray") 2. Tray lever [A] ( x 1, pin x 1) 3. Turn over the inner tray [B].

4. By-pass paper size switch [C] x 1, x 1)

When reassembling the by-pass paper size switch, the two mark face

each other as shown.

Paper Feed

SM 3-29 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

3.7.8 BY-PASS FEED ROLLER AND PAPER END SENDOR

1. Open the right door and release the belt ( "Right Door") 2. Paper guide [A] ( x 2) 3. Friction pad unit [B] ( x 3) 4. By-pass feed roller unit [C] ( x 3, x 1, x 1, x 4, bushing x 1)

5. By-pass feed roller [D] 6. By-pass paper end sensor [E]

Paper Feed

B229 3-30 SM

3.7.9 REGISTRATION SENSOR

1. Open the right door and release the belt ( "Right Door"). 2. Slide the registration guide plate [A] to the rear side, and then remove the

registration sensor unit holding it up ( x 1). 3. Sensor cover [B] 4. Registration sensor [C] ( x 1)

When reassembling, make sure that the spacer [D] is installed to the

registration guide plate.

Paper Feed

SM 3-31 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

3.7.10 ONE-SHEET BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR

1. Open the right door. 2. Open the multi by-pass tray. 3. Open the one-sheet by-pass tray [A]. 4. Sensor cover [B] (hook x 2) 5. One-sheet by-pass paper end sensor [C] ( x 1)

3.7.11 PAPER SIZE SWITCH

1. Remove the paper tray 1. 2. Paper size switch bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1) 3. Paper size switch [B]

Paper Exit

B229 3-32 SM

3.8 PAPER EXIT

3.8.1 PAPER EXIT TRAY

1. Open the paper exit tray [A]. 2. Open the front door [B]. 3. Paper exit tray (pin x 2)

3.8.2 PAPER EXIT UNIT

1. Paper exit tray ( "Paper Exit Tray") 2. Top left front cover, left front cover and interface cover ( "Top Left Front, Left

Front and Interface Cover") 3. Paper exit unit [A] ( x 4, x 3)

Paper Exit

SM 3-33 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

3.8.3 PAPER EXIT SENSOR

1. Paper exit unit ( "Paper Exit Unit") 2. Guide plate [A] ( x 4) 3. Paper exit sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1) 4. Paper exit sensor [C]

3.8.4 JUNCTION GATE SENSOR

1. Paper exit unit ( "Paper Exit Unit") 2. Junction gate sensor bracket [A] at the bottom of the paper exit tray ( x 1,

x 1) 3. Junction gate sensor [B]

Paper Exit

B229 3-34 SM

3.8.5 PAPER EXIT MOTOR

1. Paper exit unit ( "Paper Exit Unit") 2. Paper exit motor [A] at the bottom of the paper exit tray ( x 2, x 2, x 1)

Electrical Components

SM 3-35 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

3.9 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.9.1 CONTROLLER BOX

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover") 2. Interface cover ( "Top Left Front, Left Front and Interface Cover") 3. Controller box [A] ( x 5, x 1)

When reassembling the controller box, maker sure that the connector of

the controller box is firmly connected to the IPU board.

3.9.2 CONTROLLER BOARD

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")


B229 3-36 SM

2. Interface cover ( "Top Left Front, Left Front and Interface Cover") 3. FCU cover [A] ( x 3) 4. Controller box cover [B] ( x 13)

5. I/F covers [C] (knob screw x 2 each) 6. Slot cover ( "Controller Box") 7. Remove the all slot cards. 8. Remove the clamp [D] 9. Controller board [E] ( x 5)

When replacing the controller board Remove the two NVRAMs (FRAM) from the old controller board and install them in the

same place on the new controller board.

3.9.3 NVRAM AND DIMM RAM

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover") 2. Interface cover ( "Top Left Front, Left Front and Interface Cover")


SM 3-37 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

3. Controller box cover ( "Controller Board") 4. RAM DIMM [A] 5. NVRAM [B]

When you install the new NVRAM, install the two NVRAMs at the same

time even one NVRAM is not defective.

3.9.4 IO BOARD

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover") 2. IO board bracket [A] (All , x 2, x 2) 3. IO board [B] ( x 5)

3.9.5 PSU BOARD

BLACKWHITE

[C][D]


B229 3-38 SM

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover") 2. Ground cable [A] ( x 1) 3. PSU board [B] (All , x 2)

When reassembling the PSU board, make sure that black or brown wire is

connected to the terminal [C] and white or blue wire is connected to the

terminal [D]. The combination of the wire colors differs depending on the

model destination.

3.9.6 IPU BOARD

1. Controller box ( "Controller Board") 2. IPU board bracket [A] ( x 2, x 2, ground cable x 1) 3. IPU board [B] ( x 2, locking support x 1)


SM 3-39 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

3.9.7 BCU BOARD

The procedure below contains important information regarding BCU Board replacement.

• If you need to replace the BCU board, it is important to perform step 1 before you remove the old BCU board. This will transfer the data in the NV-RAM on the old board to the NV-RAM on the new board.

• This is necessary because the NV-RAM itself is soldered to the board, and cannot be replaced individually.

IMPORTANT: Keep all dipswitches at their default values.

1. Copy the data from the NV-RAM on the old BCU board to an SD card (SP5-824-001). IMPORTANT: If you cannot copy the data to the SD card, when you get to Step 8 below,

use the factory SMC sheet attached to the inside of the front door.

I IMPORTANT: Disconnect the AC power before starting step 2.

2. Controller box ( "Controller Board")

3. IPU board bracket ( "IPU Board")

4. BCU board [A] (All , x 4, flat cable x 1)

5. Install the new BCU board. 6. Reconnect the AC power and

power the unit ON. 7. Input the serial number of the

new BCU board (SP5-811-001). 8. Copy the data from the SD card

to the NV-RAM on the new BCU board (SP5-825-001). IMPORTANT: If you could not copy the data to the SD card in Step 1, do the following:

1. Access “Factory Settings Mode”. Contact the Hotline to request regional personnel to access this.

2. Set the destination code (SP5-807-001) to your area. 1:NA, 2:EU, 3:Asia, 4:China, 5:Taiwan, 6:Korea

3. Exit Factory Settings Mode. 4. Input the serial number of the new BCU board (SP5-811-001). 5. Input the SP values on the factory SMC sheet attached to the inside of the front

door. 6. Replace the waste ink tank (P/N B2292185).

NOTE: This is necessary because the counter value of the waste ink tank cannot be input.

⇒

Rev. 02/2007

Image Adjustment

B229 3-40 SM

3.10 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

You can do four image adjustment functions as shown below with "Maintenance" in the

"User Tools".

Adjust Paper Feed

Nozzle Blockage Check

Adjust Print Head Position

Registration (Print Start Position)

3.10.1 PREPARING FOR TEST PRINTING

Make sure A4 or LTR size paper/SEF is loaded in the paper tray 1.

Make sure the copier is ready to print.

3.10.2 ADJUST PAPER FEED

Print the ‘Adjust Paper Feed Test Pattern’ and do this adjustment if you see broken

horizontal lines or uneven colors in the printouts:

1. Enter the UP or SP. 2. Do the "Adjust Paper Feed" (User Tools > Maintenance > Adjustment > Adjust

Paper Feed) or SP3109-004 to print the test pattern.

3. Examine the test print. Then enter the number of the pattern that shows the best

appearance (the horizontal lines should be perfectly flat). 4. Do the instructions on screen to complete the adjustment.

Image Adjustment

SM 3-41 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

3.10.3 NOZZLE BLOCKAGE CHECK

One or more of the nozzles is blocked if you see these:

Broken lines

Uneven patches of white in the printouts.

At this time, do this procedure:

1. Enter the UP or SP. 2. Do the "Nozzle Check Pattern" (User Tools > Maintenance > Nozzle Check

Pattern) or SP3109-003 to print the test pattern.

[A]: Normal Pattern Lines are crisp and unbroken.

[B]: Abnormal Pattern Lines are broken; patches of white spoil the

appearance of the pattern.

3. Examine the pattern. Then check which color does not show. This information lets you know which nozzle is blocked.

4. Do the instructions on the screen to select the color you want to correct. Then clean the print heads.

Do “Clean Print Heads (Normal)” up to 3 times to correct the problem. Do

“Clean Print Heads (Full)” once if the problem stays.

The “Full” cleaning uses a lot of ink. Do not do the “Full” cleaning until you

have done the “Normal” cleaning at least 3 times.

For more, please refer to Section “4. Troubleshooting”.

Image Adjustment

B229 3-42 SM

3.10.4 ADJUST PRINT HEAD POSITION

The print head is out of position if you see these:

Broken vertical lines

Smeared or streaked colors

At this time, do this procedure:

1. Enter the UP or SP. 2. Do the "Head Position Adjust" (User Tools > Maintenance > Adjustment > Head

Position Adjust) with UP or the “Head Gap Adjustment 300dpi or 1200dpi” with or SP3109-001 or -002 to print the test pattern.

3. Examine the test print. Then, for each row (Letters A to I) enter the numbers of the column that show the best print alignment.. For example “+2” in the sample above.

Image Adjustment

SM 3-43 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

Keys: K1 = Black print head 1

K2 = Black print head 2

C = Cyan print head

M = Magenta print head

Y = Yellow print head

Forward = Scanning direction from rear to front

Reverse = Scanning direction from front to rear

This test grid is made as follows. K1 reverse is the standard for alignment.

Line A: K1 prints forward, then K1 prints reverse.

Line B: C prints reverse, then K1 prints reverse.

Line C: C prints forward, then K1 prints reverse.

Line D: M prints reverse, then K1 prints reverse.

Line E: M prints forward, then K1 prints reverse.

Line F: Y prints reverse, then K1 prints reverse.

Line G: Y prints forward, then K1 prints reverse.

Line H: K2 prints reverse, then K1 prints reverse.

Line I: K2 prints forward, then K1 prints reverse.

4. Do the instructions on screen to complete the adjustment.

Image Adjustment

B229 3-44 SM

3.10.5 REGISTRATION

1. Enter the UP or SP. 2. Do the "Registration" (User Tools > Maintenance > Adjustment > Registration) or

SP3109-005 to print the test pattern.

3. Examine the test print. Then enter the numbers of the patterns that show the

best appearance for the: Print direction (Main Scan)

Paper feed direction. (Sub Scan)

4. Do the instructions on screen to complete the adjustment.

Copy Adjustments: Printing/Scanning

SM 3-45 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

3.11 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING

You need to perform the adjustment after executing a Memory All Clear, and

after replacing or adjusting any of the following parts.

First or second scanner

Lens Block

Scanner Motor

Paper Tray

Paper Side Fence

For detailed explanations about how to access and use the SP modes, see

Section "Service Program Mode".

3.11.1 PRINTING

Make sure the paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you start

these adjustments.

Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP5-902, No.10) to print the test pattern for

the printing adjustments below.

Set SP 5-902 to 0 again after completing these printing adjustments.


B229 3-46 SM

Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side 1. Check the leading edge registration for each paper feed station, and adjust each

of these registrations using SP1-001. 2. Check the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station, and adjust these

registrations using SP1-002. (Adjust the trays in order: the 1st tray first, then the 2nd tray, etc.)

A: Leading Edge Registration, B: Trailing Edge Registration

Tray SP mode Specification

Any paper tray SP1-001-1

By-pass feed SP1-001-2

Duplex SP1-001-3

2 ±1.5 mm

1st tray SP1-002-1

2nd tray

(Optional PFU tray 1) SP1-002-2

3rd tray

(Optional PFU tray 2) SP1-002-3

By-pass tray SP1-002-4

One-sheet by-pass

feed SP1-002-5

Duplex SP1-002-6

2 ±1.5 mm


SM 3-47 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

Blank Margin

If the leading edge or side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted to within the

specification, then adjust the leading-edge blank margin or the left-side blank

margin.

1. Check the trailing edge and right side edge blank margins, and adjust them using the following SP modes.

A: Trailing Edge Blank Margin, B: Right Edge Blank Margin

C: Leading Edge Blank Margin, D: Right Edge Blank Margin

SP mode Specification

Trailing edge SP2-103-2 2 +2.0/ -1.5 mm

Right edge SP2-103-4 2 ± 2.0 mm

Leading edge SP2-103-1 3.3 +2.7/ -1.3 mm

Left edge SP2-103-3 2 ± 2.0 mm


B229 3-48 SM

3.11.2 SCANNING

Before doing the following scanner adjustments, check and adjust the printing

leading-edge and side-to-side registrations and the printing blank margins (as

described above).

Use an A3 test chart to perform the following adjustments.

Registration: Platen Mode 1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed

stations. 2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration, and adjust as necessary

using the following SP modes.

A: Leading Edge Registration, B: Side-to-Side Registration


Leading edge SP4-010 0 ± 2.0 mm

Side-to-side SP4-011 0 ± 2.5 mm

Sub-scan Magnification 1. Place the OS-A3 test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of

the feed stations. 2. Check the magnification ratio. If necessary, adjust the magnification using the

following SP mode.


Sub-scan magnification SP4-008 ± 1.0%


SM 3-49 B229

Rep

lace

men

t A

djus

tmen

t

3.11.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

Registration and Blank Margin

A: Leading Edge Registration, B: Side-to-Side Registration

Make a temporary test chart as shown above, using A3/11" x 17" paper.

1. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed stations.

2. Check the registrations, and adjust as necessary using the appropriate SP modes, as follows.

SP mode

Side-to-side registration 1st side SP6-006-1

Leading edge registration SP6-006-2

Blank margin for the trailing edge SP6-006-3

Side-to-side registration 2nd side SP6-006-4


B229 3-50 SM

Sub-scan Magnification

Make a temporary test chart as shown above, using A3/11" x 17" paper.

1. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed stations.

2. Check the registration, and if necessary adjust it using SP6-006-005. The specification is ± 1.0%.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Service Call

SM 4-1 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g

4. TROUBLESHOOTING

4.1 SERVICE CALL

4.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

There are 4 levels of service call conditions.

Level Definition Reset Procedure

A

Fusing unit SC’s displayed on the operation

panel. The machine is disabled. The user

cannot reset the SC.

This level is not used for this

machine (B229).

B

SC’s to disable only the features that use the

defective item. Although these SC’s are not

shown to the user under normal conditions,

they are displayed on the operation panel only

when the defective feature is selected.

Turn the main power switch off and

on.

C SC’s that are not shown on the operation

panel. They are internally logged. Logging only

D

The SC is displayed on the operation panel.

Turning the operation switch or main power

switch off then on resets the SC. The SC is

redisplayed if it occurs after the main power

switch is turned on again.

Turn the main power switch off and

on.

If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then

reconnect the connectors before you replace the PCBs.

If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load before

you replace motors or sensors.

When a Level “B” SC occurs while in an SP mode, the machine cannot display

the SC number. If this occurs, check the SC number after leaving the SP

mode.

The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues a Level “D” SC

code. This is done for Level “D” SC codes only.

When a Level “D” SC code occurs

A screen opens on the operation panel to tell the user that 1) an error occurred, 2) the job

Service Call

B229 4-2 SM

that the machine does at that time will be erased, and 3) the machine will reboot

automatically after approximately 30 seconds.

The user can: 1) stop until the machine reboots automatically after a short time, or 2) touch

“Reset” on the screen to reset the machine immediately, and go back to the copy screen.

If the operator does not touch “Reset”, the next message tells the user that 1) the machine

reset automatically and 2) the previous job was lost and must be done again. After the user

reads the message, the user touches “Confirm” on the screen. The next screen shows the

number and title of the SC code, and stops until the user turns the machine off and on.

If the operator touches “Reset” to bypass the 30-second interval for the machine to reboot,

the machine reboots immediately and the operation panel displays the copy screen.

Do not try to use the operation panel during an automatic reboot.

If the Remote Service System is used, the SC code is sent immediately to the

Service Center

Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To

avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation switch to switch

the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main

power switch off.

4.1.2 SC TABLE

Engine SC

SC1xx No. Definition

Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure

101 Exposure lamp error

Shading at AGC

-001 D The shading data peak does not

reach the specified threshold (64/255

digit) when the machine executes the

shading at initialization.

Defective exposure lamp

Defective lamp stabilizer

Defective exposure lamp

harness

1. Replace the exposure lamp.

2. Replace the lamp stabilizer.

3. Replace the exposure lamp

harness.

Service Call

SM 4-3 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g

Shading at scanning

-002 D The shading data peak does not

reach the specified threshold (64/255

digit) when the machine executes the

shading at scanning.

Same as SC101-001

Scanner home position error 1

120 D The scanner home position sensor

does not detect the “OFF” condition

during operation.

Defective scanner motor drive

board

Defective scanner motor

Defective home position sensor

Defective harness

1. Replace the scanner motor drive

board.

2. Replace the scanner motor.

3. Replace the scanner HP sensor.

4. Replace the harness.

Scanner home position error 2

121 D The scanner home position sensor

does not detect the “ON” condition

during operation.

Same as SC120

Black level detection error

141 D The black level cannot be adjusted

within the target value during the

zero clamp after the AGC.

Defective SBU

Defective harness


2. Replace the SBU.

3. Replace the IPU.

4. Replace the BCU.

White level detection error

142 D The white level cannot be adjusted

within the target value during the

zero clamp after the AGC.

Defective SBU

Defective harness

Defective optics components

1. Replace the exposure lamp.

2. Replace the lamp stabilizer.


Service Call

B229 4-4 SM

4. Replace the SBU.

5. Replace the IPU.

6. Replace the BCU.

144 SBU communication error

SBU connection error

-001 D The SBU connection cannot be

detected at power on or recovery

from the energy save mode.

Insufficient power supply for

SBU

Defective SBU

Defective harness

Defective detection port on the

BCU


2. Replace the SBU.

3. Replace the IPU.

4. Replace the BCU.

SBU serial communication error

-002 D The unusual register value from the

SBU is detected more than three

times at power on or recovery from

the energy save mode.

Same as SC144-001

GBSBU reset error

-003 D The GBSBU cannot be reset at

power on or recovery from the

energy save mode

Same as SC144-001

Cannot finish the SBU communication.

-004 D The communication between BCU

and SBU has not completed. Same as SC144-001

IPU error

161

-001 D

The error result of self-diagnostic by

the Taurus (ASIC on the IPU) is

detected.

Defective IPU

Defective BCU

Defective connection between

IPU and SBU

1. Check the connection between

IPU and SBU.

Service Call

SM 4-5 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g

2. Replace the IPU.

ASIC (Taurus) memory error

161

-002 D

The memory check error of ASIC

(Taurus) is detected when a machine

turns on or recovers from the energy

saver mode.

Defective IPU (Taurus memory)

Unusual power source

3. Replace the IPU.

Copy Data Security Unit error

165 D

The copy data security board

is not detected when the copy

data security function is set

"ON" with the initial setting.

A device check error occurs

when the copy data security

function is set "ON" with the

initial setting.

Incorrect installation of the copy

data security board

Defective copy data security

board

1. Reinstall the copy data security

board.

2. Replace the copy data security

board.



Maintenance unit home position error

200 D

The maintenance unit sensor

does not get "OFF" signal after

the maintenance unit motor

has rotated.

The maintenance unit sensor

does not get "ON" signal after

the maintenance unit motor

has rotated for certain time

when it is assumed that the

maintenance unit has to return

to the home position.

Defective maintenance unit

home position sensor

Defective maintenance unit drive

motor

1. Replace the maintenance unit

home position sensor.

2. Replace the maintenance unit

drive motor.

Tank full lever error

202 D The position of the tank full

lever does not stay at the tank

Defective tank full sensor

Tank full lever bent or broken

Service Call

B229 4-6 SM

No. Definition


full position after ink

initialization or air releasing.

The position of the tank full

lever is not detected at ink

suction.

Incorrect ink suction

1. Check the harness of the tank

full sensor.

2. Replace the GJ engine.

3. Replace the maintenance unit.

Main scan encoder signal error

210 D The input signal from the main scan

encoder is not detected during

operation of the main scan motor.

Defective main scan encoder


sensor

Defective main scan drive motor

1. Replace the main scan

encoder.


encoder senor.

3. Replace the main scan drive

motor.

Main scan encoder error

211 D The carriage unit does not stop at

home position (rear side) or reverse

position (front side).

Defective main scan drive motor

Main scan encoder coming off


sensor

1. Replace the main scan drive

motor.

2. Reinstall or replace the main

scan encoder.


encoder sensor.

Service Call

SM 4-7 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g



Tray 2 (optional paper tray unit) feed error

502 C

The lift sensor is not activated

within 18 seconds twice

consecutively after the tray lift

motor starts lifting the bottom

plate.

When the tray lowers, the tray

lift sensor does not go off

within 1.5 sec twice

consecutively.

Defective or disconnected tray

lift motor

Paper or other obstacle trapped

between tray and motor

Pick-up solenoid disconnected or

blocked by an obstacle

Reverse connection of harness

1. Remove an obstacle.

2. Replace the lift sensor.

Tray 3 (optional paper tray unit) feed error

503 C

The lift sensor is not activated

within 18 seconds twice

consecutively after the tray lift

motor starts lifting the bottom

plate.

When the tray lowers, the tray

lift sensor does not go off

within 1.5 sec twice

consecutively.

Defective or disconnected tray

lift motor

Paper or other obstacle trapped

between tray and motor

Pick-up solenoid disconnected or

blocked by an obstacle

Reverse connection of harness

1. Check the harness.

2. Remove an obstacle.

3. Replace the lift sensor.

Paper feed motor lock error (optional paper tray unit)

506 C A motor lock signal is not detected

for more than 1.5 s or the lock signal

is not detected for more than 1.0 s

during rotation.

Defective paper feed motor

Too much load on the drive

mechanism

1. Remove too much load.

2. Replace the paper feed motor.

Service Call

B229 4-8 SM

Sub scan motor error

520 D The sub scan motor does not reply

for 100ms when a machine sends

the "stop" command to the sub scan

motor.

Defective sub scan encoder

sensor

Timing belt of the sub scan

encoder is come off.

Defective sub scan motor

1. Check the sub scan encoder

and timing belt.

2. Replace the sub scan encoder

sensor.

3. Replace the sub scan motor.

Charge bias leak

570 D High voltage unit sends a signal of

charge bias leak.

Defective charge roller

Defective high voltage unit

Ink head temperature error

571 D The temperature sensor at the ink

head detects unusual temperature

for 8 seconds.

Disconnect harness

Defective temperature sensor at

the ink head

1. Check the connector (CN138).

2. Replace the temperature

sensor at the ink head.

Belt temperature error

572 D The temperature sensor at the belt

unit detects unusual temperature for

8 seconds.

Disconnect harness


the ink head

1. Check the connector (CN139,

CONIJ-CN503 and CN507).


sensor at the ink head.

Service Call

SM 4-9 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g

Belt temperature and absolute humidity error

573 D

The temperature sensor at the

belt unit detects less than

–15°C or more than 85°C.

The humidity sensor at the belt

unit detects less than 0% or

more than 100%.

Disconnect harness


the ink head

1. Check the connector (CN114).


sensor and/or humidity sensor

at the ink head.

Controller SC



Mechanical counter error

610 D The machine detects disconnection

of a mechanical counter when

SP5987-1 is set to "ON".

Disconnected mechanical

counter

1. Connect a mechanical counter.

Communication command error between BCU and ADF

620 D A communication error occurs after

the machine detects the correct

communication between BCU and

ADF.

Defective connection between

ADF and BCU

Defective ADF

Defective IPU

1. Check the connection between

ADF and BCU.

2. Replace the ADF.

3. Replace the IPU.

Memory address command error

687 D The BCU does not receive a memory

address command from the

controller 120 seconds after paper is

in the position for registration.

Loose connection

Defective controller

Defective BCU

1. Check if the controller is firmly

connected to the BCU.

2. Replace the controller.

3. Replace the BCU.

Service Call

B229 4-10 SM

No. Definition


CSS communication error

630 C The machine tries to communicate

with one of the terminals of a

relevant service center. An error

signal returns.

Communication error on the

public telephone network

(logged only; the machine can

still operate)

MF accounting device error 1

632 D The machine sends a data frame.

No normal end signal returns.

This symptom happens three

times.

Defective or broken line

between machine and device


633 D The machine is communicating

with the accounting device. The

break signal returns.

Defective or broken line

between machine and device


634 D A backup RAM error is reported

from the accounting device.

Defective accounting device

controller

Defective battery in the

accounting device


635 D A battery voltage error is reported

from the accounting device.

Defective accounting device

controller

Defective battery in the

accounting device

636 SD Card Error

Expanded authentication module error

-001 B

There is no expanded

authentication module in the

machine.

The SD card or the file of the

expanded authentication module is

broken.

1. Install the correct SD card or the

file of the expanded

authentication module.

2. Install the DESS module.

Service Call

SM 4-11 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g

No. Definition


There is no DESS module in the

machine.

Version error

-002 B The version of the expanded

authentication module is not

correct.

1. Install the correct file of the

expanded authentication module.

650 Communication error of the remote service modem (Cumin-M)

Authentication error

-001 D The authentication for the Cumin-M

fails at a dial up connection.

1. Check and set the correct user

name (SP5816-156) and

password (SP5816-157).

D Incorrect modem setting

-004

Dial up

fails due

to the

incorrect

modem

setting.

3. Check and set the correct AT

command (SP5819-160).

Communication line error

-005 D The supplied voltage is not

sufficient due to the defective

communication line or defective

connection.

1. Consult with the user's local

telephone company.

Incorrect network setting

-011 D Both the NIC and Cumin-M are

activated at the same time. 1. Disable the NIC with SP5985-1.

Modem board error

-012 D The modem board does not work

properly even though the setting of

the modem board is installed with a

dial up connection.

1. Install the modem board.

2. Check and reset the modem

board setting with SP5816.

3. Replace the modem board.

Service Call

B229 4-12 SM

No. Definition


651 Incorrect dial up connection

Program parameter error

-001 C The unexpected error occurs when

the modem (Cumin-M) tries to call

the center with a dial up

connection.

Software bug.

Program execution error -002 C

Same as SC651-001. Software bug.

Engine startup error

670 D

Just after the main power is turned

on or the machine is recovering

from auto off mode, the engine

ready signal assertion fails.

Just after the main power is turned

on, the engine does not respond.

Poor connection between the

BCU and controller board

Defective BCU

Defective controller board

Controller-to-operation panel communication error at startup

672 D

After powering on the machine,

communication between the

controller and operation panel does

not begin, or the communication is

interrupted after a normal startup.

Controller stalled

Controller board installed

incorrectly


Operation panel connector

loose or defective

Poor connection of DIMM and

optional boards on the

controller board

1. Check the setting of

SP5875-001. If the setting is

set to "1 (OFF)", change it to "0

(OFF)".

Service Call

SM 4-13 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g

SBU/IPU communication error

685 D While data is sent between the

scanner and BCU board, a

communication error has occurred.

Defective scanner unit cable

Defective SBU board

Defective BCU board



Watchdog error

818 B While the system program is

running, no other programs

can run (due to a bus hold or

endless loop).


1. Reinstall the system program.

2. Replace the controller board.

819 Kernel stop

[0696e] B Process error

System completely down

Defective RAM DIMM

Defective SD card in slot 1


Software error

1. Check and/or replace the

RAM DIMM.


SD card in slot 1.


4. See NOTE at the end of the

SC table.

[0766d] B VM full error

Unexpected system memory

size

Defective RAM DIMM

Defective SD card in slot 1


Software error


RAM DIMM.


Service Call

B229 4-14 SM

No. Definition


SD card in slot 1.


See NOTE at the end of the SC

table.

Cache error

[4361] B Cache error in the CPU

Defective CPU

Replace the controller board.

[----] B The others

Error in OS

Defective memory

Defective flash memory

Defective CPU


Self-Diagnostic Error: CPU

B [0001-0015] [000A-000D]: Detailed error code

During the boot monitor

program and self-diagnostic,

any exception or cut-in are not

supposed to happen. If these

happen, it is defined as SC.

Defective CPU device

Defective boot monitor

program or self-diagnostic

program

1. Replace the controller

board.

Reinstall the system firmware.

B [00FF]: Detailed error code 820

Cache access error in the

CPU

Defective CPU

Defective local bus

1. Turn the main power

switch off and on.

2. Reinstall the system

program.


board.

Service Call

SM 4-15 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g

No. Definition


[0601, 0602, 0605, 0606, 0607, 0609]: Detailed error code

B Exceptional command does

not operate even though it is

executed on purpose.

Defective CPU devices


[060A-060E]: Detailed error code

B Cut-in command does not

operate when it is executed.


Defective ASIC devices


[0610]: Detailed error code

B Timer cut-in does not operate

even though it is set.




B Cut-in in ASIC occurs.

Defective ASIC

Defective devices in which

ASIC detects cut-in.


[06FF]: Detailed error code

B The pipeline clock frequency

rate is different from the

prescribed value.


Mode bit data error, which is

used for initializing CPU.



B The result when the program

is executed in the command

cache is different from

desirable value.

Insufficient CPU cache

Insufficient memory process

speed


board.

2. Replace the RAM DIMM.

Service Call

B229 4-16 SM

No. Definition


[0709, 070A]: Detailed error code

B

Even you write the data in the

only cache of memory, the

data is actually written in

another area (not cache) of

memory.


Incorrect SPD

Boot mode setting error


board.


[0801, 0804, 0807, 0808, 0809, 80A]: Detailed error code

B An error occurs when

checking the TLB.



[4002-4005]: Detailed error code

B The calculation error in the

CPU occurs.

Defective CPU

Replace the CPU.

821 Self-Diagnostic Error: ASIC

ASIC error

[0B00] B The write-&-verify check error

has occurred in the ASIC.


Replace the controller.

ASIC not detected

[0B06] B The ASIC of the I/O is not

detected.

ASIC (controller board

defective)

Poor connection between

North Bridge and PCI I/F.

Replace controller board.

SHM register check error

[0B10] B Failed to initialize or could not

read connection bus. Data in

SHM register incorrect.

Defective bus connection

Defective SHM

Replace controller board.

Service Call

SM 4-17 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g

No. Definition


Timer error between ASIC and CPU

[0D05] B

The CPU checks if the ASIC

timer works properly

compared with the CPU timer.

If the ASIC timer does not

function in the specified

range, this SC code is

displayed.

System firmware problem

Defective RAM-DIMM


Reinstall the controller

system firmware.

1. Replace the RAM-DIMM.


822 Self-Diagnostic Error: HDD

Timeout error/ [3004]: Command error

[3003]: B

When the main switch is

turned on or starting the

self-diagnostic, the HDD stays

busy for the specified time or

more.

Loose connection

Defective HDD


1. Check that the HDD is

correctly connected to the

controller.

2. Replace the HDD.


823 Self-diagnostic Error: NIB

MAC address check sum error

[6101] B The result of the MAC

address check sum does not

match the check sum stored

in ROM.


Replace the controller.

PHY IC error

[6104] B The PHY IC on the controller

cannot be correctly

recognized.

Same as SC823-[6101]

Service Call

B229 4-18 SM

No. Definition


PHY IC loop-back error

[6105] B An error occurred during the

loop-back test for the PHY IC

on the controller.

Same as SC823-[6101]

Self-diagnostic Error: NVRAM

824 B The controller cannot

recognize the standard

NVRAM installed or detects

that the NVRAM is defective.

NVRAM damaged or

abnormal

Backup battery has

discharged

NVRAM socket damaged

Replace the NVRAM.

Self-diagnostic Error: RTC/Optional NVRAM

[1501]: Clock error

826 B

An RTC device is

recognized, and the

difference between the

RTC device and the

CPU exceeds the

defined limit.

No RTC device is

recognized.

RTC defective

NVRAM without RTC

installed

Backup battery discharged

Replace the NVRAM with another

NVRAM with an RTC device.

[15FF]: RTC not detected

B The RTC device is not

detected.

• NVRAM without RTC installed

• Backup battery discharged Replace the NVRAM with another

NVRAM with an RTC device.

827 Self-diagnostic Error: RAM

Service Call

SM 4-19 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g

No. Definition


Verification error

[0201] B Error is detected during a

write/verify check for the

standard RAM (SDRAM

DIMM).

Loose connection

Defective SDRAM DIMM


1. Replace the SDRAM

DIMM.


Resident memory error

[0202] B The SPD values in all RAM

DIMM are incorrect or

unreadable.

Defective RAM DIMM

Defective SPD ROM on

RAM DIMM

Defective 12C bus

Replace the RAM DIMM.

828 Self-diagnostic Error: ROM

Boost lap code error

[0101] B

The boot monitor and OS

program stored in the ROM

DIMM is checked. If the check

sum of the program is

incorrect, this SC code is

displayed.

Defective ROM DIMM


1. Replace the ROM DIMM.


ROMFS error

[0104] B

All areas of the ROM DIMM

are checked. If the check sum

of all programs stored in the

ROM DIMM is incorrect, this

SC code is displayed.

Defective ROM DIMM

Replace the ROM DIMM.

829 Self-diagnostic Error: Optional RAM

Service Call

B229 4-20 SM

No. Definition


Verification error (Slot 1)

[0401] B The data stored in the RAM in

Slot 1 does not match the

data when reading.

Not specified RAM DIMM

installed

Defective RAM DIMM



board.

Composition error (Slot 1)

[0402] B The result of checking the

composition data of the RAM

in Slot 1 on the controller is

incorrect.

Not specified RAM DIMM

installed

Defective RAM DIMM



board.

IEEE1394 I/F abnormal

851 B The IEEE1394 interface

cannot be used, due to a

driver error.

IEEE1394 interface board

defective


Wireless card startup error

853 B

The machine starts up. The

IEEE802 11b card connection

board is recognized. The

wireless LAN card or

bluetooth card is not

recognized.

Loose connection between

the card and the connection

board

Service Call

SM 4-21 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g

No. Definition


854 B Wireless card access error

The machine has been

reading the data from the

card. The machine loses

access to the card; the


bluetooth card connection

board is still recognized.

Loose connection between

the card and the connection

board

Wireless card error

855 B Some illegal data is found in

the card. Defective card

856 B Wireless card connection

board error

An error is detected in the


bluetooth card connection

board.

Defective card connection

board

USB I/F Error

857 B USB interface error is

detected.


1. Check the USB connections,

and make sure that they are

securely connected.


HDD startup error at main power on

860 B

HDD is connected but a driver

error is detected.

The driver does not respond

with the status of the HDD

within 30 s.

No formatted HDD

Label name input during

formatting is corrupted.

Defective HDD

1. Reformat the HDD.

2. Replace the HDD.

Service Call

B229 4-22 SM

No. Definition


HDD reboot error

861 D The HDD does not become

ready within 30 seconds after

the power is supplied to the

HDD.

Loose connection

Defective cables

Defective HDD


1. Check the connection

between the HDD and

controller.

2. Check and replace the

cables.

3. Replace the HDD.


HDD read error

863 D The data stored in the HDD

cannot be read correctly.

Bad sector detected during

operation of the HDD

Defective HDD


1. Reformat the HDD.

2. Replace the HDD when

SC863 occurs more than

ten times or it takes more

than twenty seconds to

get ready condition.


board.

HD data CRC error

864 D While reading data from the

HDD or storing data in the

HDD, data transmission fails.

Defective HDD

Service Call

SM 4-23 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g

No. Definition


HD access error

865 D An error other than SC863

and SC864 is detected while

operating the HDD.

Defective HDD

SD card authentication error

866 B A digital license error of an SD

card application is detected.

SD card data has corrupted.

Store correct data in the SD card.

SD card error

867 D An application SD card is

removed from the boot slot

while an application is

activated.

An application SD card is

ejected.

SD card access error

(-13 to -3: File system error, other number: Device error)

868 D An error report is sent from

the SD card reader.

SD card not inserted

correctly

SD card defective

Controller board defective

1. For a file system error,

format the SD card on

PC.

2. For a device error, turn

the main switch off and

on.

3. Remove and re-install the

SD card.

4. Replace the SD card.


Service Call

B229 4-24 SM

No. Definition


Address book data error

870 B

The address book in the

hard disk is accessed.

An error is detected in the

address book data;

address book data is not

read; or data is not written

into the address book..

To recover from the

error, do any of the

following

countermeasures:

Format the address

book by using

SP5-846-050 (all data

in the address

book–including the user

codes and counters–is

initialized).

Data corruption

Defective hard disk

Defective controller software

Replace the hard disk (the user

codes and counters are recovered

when the main switch is turned on

if those data are stored in Smart

Device Monitor for Admin).

HDD received mail data error

872 B An error is detected in the

received mail data partition of

the HDD at machine

initialization.

Defective HDD

Power failure during an

access to the HDD

1. Initialize the HDD

partition (SP5-832-007).

2. Replace the HDD.

Service Call

SM 4-25 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g

No. Definition


HDD sent mail data error

873 B An error is detected in the

sent mail data partition of the

HDD at machine initialization.

Defective HDD

Power failure during an

access to the HDD

1. Initialize the HDD

partition (SP5-832-008).

2. Replace the HDD.

Delete All error 1: HDD

874 D

An error is detected while the

all data of the HDD or NVRAM

are formatted physically by

the Data Overwrite Security

Unit (B735).

Not installed Data Overwrite

Security Unit (SD card)

Defective HDD

1. Install the Data Overwrite

Security Unit (B735).

2. Replace the HDD.

Delete All error 2: Data area

875 D

An error is detected while the

all data of the HDD or NVRAM

are formatted logically by the

Data Overwrite Security Unit

(B735).

The logical format for HDD

fails.

Turn the main switch off/on and try

the operation again.

876 Log Data Error

Log Data Error 1

-001 D

An error was detected in the

handling of the log data at

power on or during machine

operation. This can be caused

by switching the machine off

while it is operating.

Damaged log data file in the

HDD

Initialize the HDD with

SP5832-004.

Service Call

B229 4-26 SM

No. Definition


Log Data Error 2

-002 D Same as -001

An encryption module not

installed

1. Disable the log

encryption setting.

2. Install the encryption

module

Log Data Error 3

-003 D Same as -001

Invalid encryption key log

due to defective NVRAM

data

1. Initialize the HDD with

SP5832-004.

2. Disable the log

encryption setting.

Log Data Error 4

-004 D Same as -001

Unusual encryption function

log due to the defective

NVRAM data

Initialize the HDD with

SP5832-004.

Log Data Error 5

-005 D Same as -001

Installed NVRAM or HDD,

which is used in other

machine

1. Reinstall the previous

NVRAM or HDD.

2. Initialize the HDD with

SP5832-004.

Log Data Error 99

-099 D Same as -001

Other than above causes

Ask your supervisor.

Service Call

SM 4-27 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g

No. Definition


HDD Data Overwrite Security SD card error

877 B

The all delete cannot be

executed even though the


(B735) is installed and

activated.

Defective SD card (B735)

Not installed SD card

(B735)

1. Replace the NVRAM and

then install the new SD

card (B735).

2. Check and reinstall the

SD card (B735).

File Format Converter (MLB) error

880 D A request to get access to the

MLB was not answered within

the specified time.

MLB defective

SC9xx Electronic total counter error

900 D The value of the total counter is out

of the normal range. Defective NVRAM

Printer error

920 B An application error that stops the

machine operation is detected.

Defective software

Unexpected hardware resource (e.g.,

memory shortage)

Printer font error

921 B A necessary font is not found in the

SD card when the printer

application starts.

A necessary font is not found in

the SD card.

The SD card data is corrupted.

Check that the SD card stores correct

data.

Service Call

B229 4-28 SM

No. Definition


Net file error

925 D

The management file for net files

is corrupted; net files are not

normally read.

Netfiles:

Jobs to be printed from the

document server using a PC and

the DeskTopBinder software

Defective hard disk

Data corruption

Defective software

When SC860 to 865 occurs with

this SC at the same time:

The main cause is in

SC860 to 865. Refer to

those possible causes.

When only SC925 occurs:

Initialize the net file

partition of the HDD

(with SP5-832-11) after

you ask the customer

for permission. This

also erases the

transmitted and

received fax

documents.

If the above actions do

not solve the problem,

try to initialize all

partitions of the HDD

with SP5-832-1 after

you ask the customer

for permission.

Replace the HDD.

Service Call

SM 4-29 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g

No. Definition


Software performance error

990 B

The software attempted to

perform an unexpected

operation.

NOTE: When this error occurs,

the file name, address, and data

will be stored in NVRAM. This

information can be checked by

using SP7-403. See the data and

the situation in which this SC

occurs. Then report the data and

conditions to your technical

control center.

Software defective

Internal parameter incorrect

Insufficient working memory

Software continuity error

991 C

The software attempted to

perform an unexpected

operation. However, unlike

SC990, the process can keep on

running.

Logged only; the machine can

continue to operate

Undefined error

992 D An error not controlled by the

system occurred (the error does

not come under any other SC

code).

Defective software program

Service Call

B229 4-30 SM

No. Definition


Application function selection error

997 B The application selected by a key

press on the operation panel

does not start or ends

abnormally.

Software for that application is

defective

An option required by the

application (RAM, DIMM,

board) is not installed.

Too complicated nest of the

fax group address

As for the fax operation problem,

simplify the nest of the fax group

address.

Application start error

998 D After switching the machine on,

the application does not start

within 60 s. (No applications start

or end normally.)

Software for that application is

defective

An option required by the

application (RAM, DIMM,

board) is not installed.

Check the setting of SP5875-001. If

the setting is set to "1 (OFF)",

change it to "0 (OFF)".

Self-Diagnostic mode

SM 4-31 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g

4.2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

4.2.1 OVERVIEW

There are three types of self-diagnostics for the controller.

Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics just

after the power has been turned on.

Detailed self-diagnostics: The machine does the detailed self-diagnostics by using a

loop-back connector (P/N G0219350)

SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on or

during operation.

4.2.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

This detailed self-diagnostic test requires a loop-back connector (P/N: G0219350).

1. Turn off the machine (power switch located in the rear of the machine) and attach the loop-back connector to the parallel interface.

2. Hold down "Pound (#) " key, press and hold down "Asterisk (*) " key, and then while pressing both keys at the same time, switch on the machine (power switch located in the rear of the machine). You will see “Now Loading” on the touch-panel, and prints the diagnostic report after completing the test.

Refer to the diagnostics report for the detected errors. The errors detected

during self-diagnostics can be checked with SP7-832-001 (Diag. Result).

Refer to section 4.1 for details about the error codes.

General Troubleshooting

B229 4-32 SM

4.3 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING

4.3.1 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR EXPECTED PROBLEMS IN THE FIELD

No. Problems Possible causes/Countermeasures

1 Trailing edge margin is not

enough.

The engine entrance sensor may have a

problem about its movement.

1. Check the trailing margin with SP2103-2 "Prt

Erase Margin Adj TEdge Margin".

2. Check the engine entrance sensor. Make

sure that the spring of the engine entrance

sensor is correctly set.

2 A machine stops indicating the

"Please Wait" message.

Memory defective

A machine is still formatting the HDD. It takes

approximately 5 minutes.

1. Replace the controller board if this problem

still occurs after checking above possible

causes.

3 A machine automatically

reboots.

Check what SC happens to a machine and do the

proper counter measure. You can confirm SC number

with SP7403-1 to -10.

4

A machine does not get "Online

mode" even the copier screen

comes up on the operation

panel.

SD card error (not installed or defective)

Incorrect NIS or USB setting

1. Check that an SD card is installed correctly.

2. Set the SP5985-001 for NIS setting or -002

for USB setting to the "1".

3. Replace the controller board if this problem

still occurs after checking above possible

causes.

5 SC142 occurs at power on. Defective IPU

1. Replace the IPU.

6 Background dirty occurs after

recovering.

Defective IPU

1. Replace the IPU.


SM 4-33 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g

No. Problems Possible causes/Countermeasures

7

Horizontal line or no image

area (0.1mm to 1.5mm width)

occurs due to the other reason

than a nozzle problem.

Defective IPU

1. Replace the IPU.

8 Smeared dirt occurs in feed

direction.

Dirty paper path

1. Clean the paper path (transport roller, idle

roller etc.)

9

Paper jam occurs at the

registration roller. (A leading

edge of paper comes out 0mm

to 0.5mm from the registration

roller nip.)

Defective paper feed motor

1. Replace the paper feed motor.

10

Paper jam occurs at the paper

exit roller. (The leading edge of

paper is no damage but there is

a line pressed like "Z" on the

paper.)

Defective paper exit motor

2. Replace the paper exit motor.

4.3.2 POOR QUALITY IMAGE

Colors Not What You Expect

Cause 1: The correct paper was not used for the print job, or the paper was not

loaded correctly.

Solution 1:

Check the selection for the type of paper in the printer driver (transparency,

ink jet, plain paper, etc.). Confirm that the same type of paper is loaded

correctly in the printer.

Cause 2: The print mode selection was not correct.

Solution 2: Make sure that the print mode selection in the printer software application

and the printer driver is correct (Paper Type, Print Quality, Level Color, etc.)

Cause 3: Job settings in the software application are not correct.

Solution 3: Check the settings for the print job in the software application. The settings

in the software application have priority over the printer driver settings.

Cause 4: One or more print heads are blocked.

Solution 4: Do cleaning Cycle 1 and then Cleaning Cycle 2.


B229 4-34 SM

Colors Faint Cause 1: The correct paper was not used for the print job.

Solution 1:

Check the selection for the type of paper in the printer driver (transparency,

ink jet, plain paper, etc.). Confirm that the same type of paper is loaded in

the printer.


Solution 2:

Make sure that the print mode selection in the printer software application

and the printer driver is correct (Paper Type, Print Quality, Level Color, etc.)

Make sure that the “Color/Black and White” selection is correct.

Cause: 3 One or more print heads are blocked.


Color Print Job Prints in Monochrome Cause 1: “Black and White” was selected for the print job.

Solution 1: On the “Setup” sheet of the printer driver, make sure “Color” is selected

under “Color/Black and White”.

Cause 2: Correct data not selected for the print job.

Solution 2: Confirm that the software application printed the correct data.

White Patches, or Horizontal White Lines Cause 1: Original image abnormal.

Solution 1: In the software application, check the original image for streaking (especially

at borders between different colors). Correct the original image.



Vertical White Lines

Cause: Solid or intermittent white lines from the top to the bottom of the sheet caused

by a blocked ink nozzle.

Solution: Do cleaning Cycle 1 once.

Image Chaffed in Horizontal Direction

Cause: Solid or intermittent white lines from edge to edge of the sheet caused by a

blocked ink nozzle.

Solution: Do cleaning Cycle 1 once.


SM 4-35 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g

Only 1 Line Printed at Leading Edge

Cause 1: Paper with punched holes, or thin or slick paper with too much “play” was

used that allowed slippage during feed.

Solution 1:

Check the paper used for the print job and make sure that it meets standards

for use with this printer. For more see the Operating Instructions or the last

section “Specifications” of the Service Manual.

Cause 2: Paper is jammed or slipping on the transport belt due to the accumulation of

paper dust, etc. on the belt.

Solution 2: Clean accumulated paper dust, etc. from the transport belt. The service

technician must clean the transport belt.

Unwanted Dots Cause: Flakes of paper dust or dry ink have fallen onto the printed sheet.

Solution: Do cleaning Cycle 1 once. Operator should call for service if cleaning does

not solve the problem.

Text Dirty Cause 1: Print job was not set up correctly for special print media.

Solution 1:

Special procedures are necessary to set up print jobs for special print media

such as postcards, envelopes, and transparencies. Review and carefully

follow the instructions in the Operating Instructions. Pay special attention to

these settings “Paper Type”, “Job Type”, and “Print Quality”.

Cause 2: The sheets are not flat or are deformed in some way.

Solution 2:

Make sure the sheets are perfectly flat (especially envelopes, postcards).

Make sure the sheets neither curled nor deformed in any way. If using thick or

any type of coated paper, make sure that the paper is approved for use with

this printer.



Backs of Sheets Stained With Ink Cause: Paper has jammed in the printer or the transport belt is dirty.

Solution:

Run a print job with several sheets of paper to use clean up the ink. Use a

damp cloth to clean the surface of the transport belt, and then use a clean, dry

cloth to clean the surface of the belt.


B229 4-36 SM

Transparency Sheets Scratched Cause: More than 1 sheet of transparency was set.

Solution: Set transparencies one by one for printing one sheet at time. For more,

please refer to the Operating Instructions.

Miscellaneous Cause 1: The paper in use is not the correct paper for the print job.

Solution 1:

Check the paper loaded for feeding. Make sure that it matches the type of

paper specified for the print job (transparency, ink jet, plain paper, etc.).

Make sure that the paper is approved for use with this printer. For more, see

the Operating Instructions or the “Specifications” in the last section of the

Service Manual.


Solution 2:

Make sure that the print mode selection in the printer software application and

the printer driver is correct (Paper Type, Print Quality, Level Color, etc.) Make

sure that the “Color/Black and White” selection is correct.

Cause 3: Job settings in the software application are not correct.

Solution 3: Check the settings for the print job in the software application. The settings in

the software application have priority over the printer driver settings.

Cause 4: Correct data not selected for the print job.

Solution 4: Confirm that the software application printed the correct data.

Cause 5: One or more of the nozzles is blocked.

Solution 5: Do cleaning Cycle 1 once.

4.3.3 POOR PRINTER PERFORMANCE (MISCELLANEOUS)

Cannot set paper cassette.

Cause: The cassette is damaged or there is a jammed sheet of paper inside the

printer.

Solution:

Remove the paper cassette. Remove the jammed sheet from inside the

printer. Inspect the paper cassette for damage. If the cassette is damaged,

replace the paper cassette.


SM 4-37 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g

Cannot remove paper cassette. Cause: The paper cassette is blocked.

Solution: Raise the paper output tray and reset it. Attempt to remove the paper cassette

again. Replace the paper cassette.

Printer does not turn on. Cause: The power cord is not connected to the power source.

Solution:

Follow the instructions on the screen if an error message appears in the

Status Monitor, or do the following:

Make sure the power cord is securely connected to the printer and to the

power source.

Make sure the operator knows how to switch on the printer correctly. For

more, refer to the Setup Guide and the Operating Instructions.

Switch the printer off. Remove the power cord from the power source. Wait 2

minutes then connect the power cord and switch the printer on.

Printer fails to enter “Ready” mode. Cause: An error has occurred at the printer.

Solution:

Check the operation panel and determine which LED’s are on or flashing

(temperature out of range, ink out, cover open, etc.). Refer to the checklist in

the previous section.

Printing stops before print job finishes. Cause: The print heads have overheated.

Solution:

The printer has stopped to allow the print heads to cool. After the print heads

have cooled down to the standard operating temperature, the print job will

resume.

Cause: A fatal error has occurred on the computer side.

Solution:

Check the screen for messages. Shut down the computer. Switch off the

printer. Check the USB connection at the printer and the computer. Switch the

printer on. Restart the computer.

Printer loses power. Cause: Power loss at the source.

Solution:

Power to the printer has been interrupted, due to a power failure or some

other external cause. Unplug the printer from the power source. Wait 2

minutes. Reconnect the power plug and switch the printer on.


B229 4-38 SM

Cause: The printer has blown a fuse.

Solution: The printer must be returned to the service center for replacement of the F300

board.

Firmware update failed. Cause: Incorrect procedure.

Solution: Update the firmware. (5.3)

4.3.4 UNUSUAL NOISES

Printer emits strange noises at power on. Cause: Paper scraps remain inside the printer.

Solution: Open the top cover, rear cover (or Duplex Unit) cover and inspect inside the

printer and Duplex Unit for paper scraps left behind after clearing a paper jam.

Cause: Special print media may make a noise on feeding the last sheet.

Solution: Load one blank sheet of plain paper at the bottom of a stack of special media

(coated paper, etc.) This problem may occur with a new paper cassette.


SM 4-39 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g

4.3.5 MAINTAINING THE PRINTER HEAD CONDITION

Preparing for Test Printing 1. Make sure A4 size or LTR size paper is loaded in the printer. 2. Make sure the printer is ready to print (the [Power] key is on).

Entering the User Tools 3. Press the "User Tools" button to enter the UP mode. 4. Select “Maintenance”.

Cleaning Cycle 1 1. Select “Clean Print-heads” (User Tools > Maintenance > Clean Print-heads), and

then press the “OK” button. 2. Select the five print-heads to be cleaned with left or right arrow button. (You can

cancel it also pressing the left or right arrow button again.)

You can select multiple print-heads in this cleaning. If the print-head is

selected for this cleaning, the checked mark shows at left next to the

print-head name.

3. Press “OK” button, and then “This function consumes a large quantity of ink. Do you want to continue?” message shows on the display.

4. Press “Yes” button to execute the cleaning. 5. After cleaning, “Cleaning complete” message shows on the display. 6. Press “Exit” button and follow the instruction on the display.

Wait for cleaning to finish. Never do any other operation at the time of

cleaning.

Check the results of the nozzle check pattern. Examine which nozzles

need cleaning.

Do Steps 1 to 6 again. You can do this up to three times.

Do Cleaning Cycle 2 after the third printing of the test problem if the

pattern is still not correct.

Cleaning Cycle 2

Cleaning Cycle 2 uses a lot of ink. Do Cleaning Cycle 1 at least 3 times before

you do Cleaning Cycle 2.


B229 4-40 SM

1. Select “Flush Print-heads” (User Tools > Maintenance > Flush Print-heads), and then press the "OK" button.

2. Select the five print-heads to be cleaned with left or right arrow button. (You can cancel it also pressing the left or right arrow button again.)

You can select multiple print-heads in this cleaning. If the print-head is

selected for this cleaning, the checked mark shows at left next to the

print-head name.

3. Press “OK” button, and then “This function consumes a large quantity of ink. Do you want to continue?” message shows on the display.

4. Press “Yes” button to execute the cleaning. 5. After flushing, “Flushing complete” message shows on the display. 6. Press "Exit" button and follow the instruction on the display.

Wait for cleaning to finish. Never do any other operation at the time of

cleaning.

Check the results of the nozzle check pattern after completing this

function.

If Cleaning Cycle 2 Does Not Solve the Problem... 7. Let the machine stay unused overnight. 8. In the morning, turn on the main power switch of the machine. 9. Print the nozzle check pattern using UP mode. 10. Then check the results of the test pattern. 11. If a problem is remaining, clean the print heads. For details, see the "Print

Heads" ("Cleaning Procedures" in the section "Preventive Maintenance"). 12. Print the nozzle check pattern using UP mode again, and then check the results

of the test pattern. 13. If a problem is still remaining, wipe the nozzle surface with a damp cloth (For

details, refer to the "Trouble Shooting Guide").

Use water; Never use alcohol or dry cloth for wiping the nozzle surface.

14. Print the nozzle check pattern using UP mode again, and then check the results of the test pattern.

15. If a problem is still remaining, replace the engine unit.

Image Test Mode

SM 4-41 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g

4.4 IMAGE TEST MODE

4.4.1 OVERVIEW

The SBU, BCU, and LD board have the function that prints out their test pattern. It is useful

to find the defective board when the image data problem is occurred.

4.4.2 IPU TEST

The BCU board has the IPU test pattern. To make sure the image processing is functioning,

output the IPU test pattern with SP4-417.

Electrical Component Defects

B229 4-42 SM

4.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

4.5.1 SENSORS

Component CN Condition Symptom

Open

The Paper Jam message will appear whenever

a copy is made (paper hasn't reached the

sensor). First Registration 115-6

(BCU)

Shorted The Paper Jam message appears even if there

is no paper at the sensor.

Open


a copy is made except for 1st and by-pass tray

feeding. Relay 116-2

(BCU)



Open The Paper End indicator lights when the bypass

tray is selected, even if there is paper in the tray.

By-pass Paper

End

127-11

(BCU) Shorted

The Paper End indicator does not light when the

bypass tray is selected, even if there is no paper

in the tray. The Paper Jam message will appear

whenever a copy is made from the bypass tray.

Open



sensor). Junction Gate 114-A9

(BCU)



Open



sensor). Exit 114-A4

(BCU)




SM 4-43 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g


Open



sensor). Engine Entrance 161-2

(BCU)



Open



sensor). Engine Exit 114-B7

(BCU)



Open Scanner H.P.

102-2

(BCU) Shorted SC120 is displayed.

Open APS and Auto Reduce/Enlarge do not function

correctly.

Platen Cover 102-5

(BCU) Shorted

If the Start button is pressed with the platen

cover or A(R)DF closed, “Cannot detect original

size” is displayed.

Open Original Width

103-2,5

(BCU) Shorted

The CPU cannot detect the original size

properly. APS and Auto Reduce/Enlarge do not

function correctly.

Open Original Length

103-8,11

(BCU) Shorted

The CPU cannot detect the original size

properly. APS and Auto Reduce/Enlarge do not

function correctly.

Open


a duplex copy is made (paper hasn't reached

the sensor). Duplex Entrance 105-4

(DCB)




B229 4-44 SM


Duplex Exit 106-4

(DCB) Open



the sensor).

Shorted

The Paper Jam message appears even if there


Open



the sensor). Duplex Inverter 104-2

(DCB)



Open Waste Ink Tank

Full

123-1

(BCU) Shorted

Open Sub Scan Encoder

161-7,8


Open Main Scan

Encoder

3-3,4

(COM) Shorted SC210 or SC211 is displayed.

Open Ink Full

508-11


Open Lift sensor 1

140-6,7

(I/F) Shorted SC503 is displayed.

Open Lift sensor 2

140-1,2

(I/F) Shorted SC504 is displayed.

4.5.2 SWITCHES


Open Paper End

113-2

(BCU) Shorted

The CPU cannot detect the paper end, and a

paper jam may occur when a copy is made from

the standard paper tray.

Open Paper Size

113-

3,4,6

(BCU) Shorted

The CPU cannot detect the proper paper size,

and misfeeds may occur when a copy is made

from the 1st paper tray.


SM 4-45 B229

Trou

ble-

sh

ootin

g


Open The Cover Open indicator is lit even if the

vertical transport door is closed. Vertical Transport

Door

110-5

(BCU) Shorted

The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if the

vertical transport door is opened.

Open By-pass Paper

Size

127-

1,2,4,5

(BCU) Shorted

The CPU misdetects or is not able to detect the

size of the paper set in the bypass tray, causing

possible misfeeds when feeding from this tray.

Open The machine detects that the one-sheet

by-pass tray is open even it is closed. One-sheet

By-pass Tray

127-9

(BCU) Shorted

The machine does not detect that the one-sheet

by-pass tray is open even it is actually opened.

Open

The machine does not open the one-sheet

by-pass shutter even a sheet of paper is set to

the one-sheet by-pass tray.

One-sheet

By-pass Paper

Set

113-8

(BCU)

Shorted

The machine open the one-sheet by-pass

shutter even a sheet of paper is not set to the

one-sheet by-pass tray.

Open The Cover Open indicator is lit even if doors are

closed. One-sheet

By-pass Exit Door

114-A2

(BCU) Shorted

The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if doors

are open.

Open The Cover Open indicator is lit even if the right

door is closed. Right Door

115-2

(BCU) Shorted

The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if the

right door is open.


closed. Front Door

111-4

(BCU) Shorted


are open.


B229 4-46 SM



closed. Left Door

114-A7

(BCU) Shorted


are open.


closed. Left Junction

Cover

126-4

(BCU) Shorted


are open.

Open Carriage Position

161-5


Open The machine does not turn on.

Main Shorted

The machine

does not turn

off.

4.5.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

Rating Fuse

120 V 220 – 240 V Symptom when turning on the main switch

Power Supply Board

FU1 3.15A/250V 6.3A/250V No response.

FU2 1A/250V 1A/250V

FU4 4A/250V 4A/250V

FU5 4A/250V 4A/250V

FU6 4A/250V 4A/250V

FU7 4A/250V 4A/250V

FU8 3.15A/250V 3.15A/250V

High Voltage Power Supply

F1 2.5A/72V

Lamp Inverter

F1 1.25A/250V

SERVICE TABLES

Service Program Mode

SM 5-1 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5. SERVICE TABLES

5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

Do not let the user access the SP mode. Only service representatives but no

other persons are allowed to access the SP mode. The machine quality or its

operation is NOT guaranteed after any person other than service

representatives accesses the SP mode.

5.1.1 HOW TO ENTER THE SP MODE

The following two modes are available:

SP Mode (Service Program Mode): The SP Mode includes the programs that are

necessary for standard maintenance work.

SSP Mode (Special SP Mode): The SSP Mode includes SP-Mode programs and

some special programs. You need some extra knowledge to manipulate these

special programs. For details, consult your supervisor.

Starting SP Mode 1. Type the keys as follows: [Clear Modes] > [1] > [0] > [7].

2. Press the [Clear/Stop] key and hold it down until the SP-mode menu is displayed

(about 3 seconds).

Selecting Programs When a blinking underscore (or several blinking underscores) is displayed, you can

type a number from the numeric keypad [D].

Service Program Mode

B229 5-2 SM

When the sign " /OK" [A] is displayed upper right corner, you can scroll through

the menu by pressing the left-arrow key [B] or the right-arrow key [C]. To select a

program, press the "OK" key [F].

Specifying Values 1. After locating a program, press the "OK" key. A blinking underscore (or several

blinking underscores) indicates which value you can change. The value in parentheses is the default value of the menu.

2. Type a necessary value from the numeric keypad. To switch between positive (plus) and negative (minus) values, press the [./*] (period/asterisk) key.

3. To validate the value, press the "OK" key. To cancel the value, press the cancel key [E].

Activating Copy Mode You can activate the copy mode while the SP mode is running. When you do so, the copier

outputs images or patterns that help you adjust the SP-mode program.

1. Press the key. The copy mode is activated. 2. Specify copy settings and press the "OK" key. 3. To return to the SP mode, press the key.

You cannot end the SP mode while the copy mode is activated.

Quitting Programs/Ending (S)SP Mode Press the key or the "Cancel" key to quit the program. You can end the SP mode by

pressing one of these keys several times.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-3 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5.2 SP MODE TABLES

The tables in this section list the service programs (SP’s).

The following codes are used:

Asterisk (*): The settings are saved in the NVRAM. Most of them return to the default

values when you execute SP 5801 2

The DFU menu is for design or factory use only. You must not change the settings.

Brackets ([ ]): The brackets enclose the setting rage, default value, and minimum

step (with unit) as follows: [Minimum to Maximum / Default / Step].

SSP: Consult your supervisor before you use this program.

5.2.1 SP1-XXX (FEED)

1001* [LE Regist] Leading Edge Registration

1001 1 All Trays

1001 2 By-pass

1001 3 Duplex

Adjusts the printing leading-edge registration from

paper trays.

[–9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

( Copy Adjustments)

1001 4 End space

Adjusts the printing trailing-edge registration from

the paper trays.

[–9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

1001 5 OHP

Adjusts the printing leading-edge registration of

OHP from the by-pass tray.

[–9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

1001 6 All Trays (Fact)

1001 7 By-pass (Fact)

1001 8 Duplex (Fact)

1001 9 End Space (Fact)

1001 10 OHP (Fact)

These SP’s store the factory setting of SP1001-1

to 5. Do the SP5884-1 when you change the

values of SP1001-1 to 5 to the SP1001-6 to 10

(factory settings).

[S-to-S Registration]

1002* Adjusts the printing side-to-side registration from each paper feed station.

Adjustments are effective for all 4 possible feed trays (including optional trays).

A "–" value shifts the image to the right side of the paper.

A "+" value shifts the image to the left side of the paper.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-4 SM

The SP 1002 1 setting is applied to all trays, not just the 1st tray. Settings for

trays 2 to 4 are offsets relative to the SP 1002 1 setting.

For duplex copies, the value for the front side is determined by SP 1002-1 to -4,

and the value for the rear side is determined by SP 1002-6.

1002 1 1st Tray

1002 2 1st Optional

1002 3 2nd Optional

1002 4 By-pass:100

1002 5 By-pass

1002 6 Duplex

1002 7 OHP

[–9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] ( Copy

Adjustments)

1002 8 1st Tray (Fact)

1002 9 1st Optional (Fact)

1002 10 2nd Optional (Fact)

1002 11 By-pass:100 (Fact)

1002 12 By-pass (Fact)

1002 13 Duplex (Fact)

1002 14 OHP (Fact)

Resets each adjusted value (SP1002-1 to 7) to

the factory setting.

1003* [Paper Buckle]

1003 1 1st tray

1003 2 Reg Bank

1003 3 Reg By-pass

1003 4 Reg Duplex

Adjusts the amount of buckle that the paper feed

motor applies to the paper after the registration

sensor is activated. A higher setting applies

greater buckling.

[0 to 10 / 3 / 1 mm/step]

1003 5 Belt1 Tray

1003 6 Belt1 Multi: Plain

1003 7 Belt1 Multi: Thk1


1003 9 Belt1 Duplex


motor applies to the paper after the belt entrance


greater buckling.

[0 to 10 / 3 / 1 mm/step]

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-5 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

1003 10 Belt2 Tray

1003 11 Belt2 Multi: Plain



1004 14 Belt2 Duplex


motor applies to the paper after the carriage


greater buckling.

[0 to 10 / 4 / 1 mm/step]

1014 [Single By-pass] Single By-pass Setting

1014 1 Pre-feed Distance

Adjusts the transport distance of paper fed from

by-pass tray.

Do not specify 40 mm with this SP. If so, the

machine detects paper jam.

[20 to 40 / 30 / 1 mm/step]

1014 2 Reset Time

Adjusts the interval for the single bypass mode to

be ready. The machine resets the ready state for

single bypass mode after the specified time with

this SP has passed.

[5 to 20 / 5 / 1 min/step]

[Feed Time Adj] Feed Time Adjustment 1015

Adjusts the time when a paper stops to be dried.

1015 1 Pause 1 [0 to 80 / 10 / 1 sec/step]

1015 2 Pause 2 [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 sec/step]

1015 3 Pause 3 [0 to 40 / 7/ 1 sec/step]

1015 4 Pause 4 [0 to 20 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

1015 5 Pause 5 [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

1017* [Temp Abnormal] Abnormal Temperature Detection

1017 1 High Temp Stop H

1017 2 High Temp HM

1017 3 High Temp Rec HL

DFU

The specified value with this SP is the threshold

for machine stop. The machine stops when the

measured temperature goes up to the specified

value and recoveries when the measured

temperature goes down to the specified value.

This temperature is measured by thermistor at

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-6 SM

the transport belt.

[20 to 50 / 48.5 / 0.5°C/step]

1017 4 Low Temp Rec LH

1017 5 Low Temp LM

1017 6 Low Temp Stop L



measured temperature goes down to the

specified value and recoveries when the


value. This temperature is measured by

thermistor at the transport belt.

[1 to 20 / 1 / 0.5°C/step]

1018* [Env Temp Abnormal] Environment Temperature Abnormal Detection

1018 1 High Temp Stop H

DFU


for machine stop. The measured temperature

goes up to the specified value. This temperature

is measured by thermistor at the carriage.

[20 to 50 / 43.5 / 0.5°C/step]

1018 2 High Temp HM

1018 3 High Temp Rec HL

DFU


for machine recovery. The measured temperature

goes down to the specified value. This

temperature is measured by thermistor at the

carriage.

[20 to 50 / 41.5 / 0.5°C/step]

1018 4 Low Temp Rec LH

1018 5 Low Temp LM

1018 6 Low Temp Stop L

DFU



measured temperature goes down to the

specified value and recoveries when the


value. This temperature is measured by

thermistor at the transport belt.

[1 to 20 / 1 / 0.5°C/step]

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-7 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

[Feed Clutch Boost]

1903 Adjusts the amount of extra push that the feed clutch gives to the paper after the

skew has been corrected at registration. This feature helps the registration roller

feed certain types of paper (such as thick paper). Increase the value if thick

paper is jamming after feeding from the registration roller.

1903 1 1st Tray

1903 2 By-pass: 100 [0 to 100 / 30 / 5 ms/step]

1903 3 Optional Tray [0 to 100 / 10 / 5 ms/step]

[Option Tray Adj] Optional Tray Adjustment

1908

Adjusts the bottom plate pressure of the optional paper feed unit.

+value increases pressure between the papers and the feeding roller at

the optional feed unit.

–value decreases pressure between the papers and the feeding roller at

the optional feed unit.

1908 1 1st Optional

1908 2 2nd Optional [–2 to 2 / 0 / 1%/step]

1922* ［SubScan: Send Adj］ Sub Scan: Line Adjustment

Value [–100 to 100 / 22 / 1/step]

1922 1 Adjusts the sub scan line referring to the adjustment sheet printed with

SP3109-4.

1922 2 Value(Fact)

This value is the factory setting. This value over

writes the value of SP1-922-1 when SP5-884-1

is executed.

LEFT SCAN [-400 to 400 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

1922 3 This value is reference for the returning way (front to rear: home position)

scanning. Therefore, it is not adjusted normally.

RIGHT SCAN [-400 to 400 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

1922 4 Adjusts the gap between going way (rear to front) and returning way (front to

rear) scanning position.

1923* ［Belt Temp Adj] Belt Temperature Adjustment DFU

1923 1 Adj Value [0 to 100 / 23 / 1 mm/step]

1923 2 User Adj Value [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-8 SM

5.2.2 SP2-XXX (DRUM)

2010 [Head Maint] Head Maintenance

Cleaning [0 to 30 / 0 / 1 /step] 2010 1

Executes the printer heads cleaning for each color.

Check the nozzle check pattern with the SP3109-3. Set the number in

correspond with each color if there is a problem in the sheet of the nozzle check

pattern.

0: All colors, 1: Cyan, 2: Black 1, 4: Black 2, 8: Magenta, 16: Yellow

If it is necessary to clean more than two colors at same time, set the total

number of the colors to be cleaned. e.g. If you want to clean the printer

heads of Magenta and Yellow, set 24 (8+16) in this SP.

[Refresh] [0 to 30 / 0 / 1 /step] 2010 2

Executes the printer heads refreshing for each color.

Do this SP in case that "Cleaning" (SP2010-1) does not solve a problem in the

sheet of the nozzle check pattern.

0: All colors, 1: Cyan, 2: Black 1, 4: Black 2, 8: Magenta, 16: Yellow

If it is necessary to clean more than two colors at same time, set the total

number of the colors to be cleaned. e.g. If you want to clean the printer

heads of Magenta and Yellow, set 24 (8+16) in this SP.

[Initial Operation Settings for Engine Unit] [0 to 3 / 2 / 1 /step] 2012 1

The machine does the following when the main power is turned on:

0: Nothing at all (not possible to print).

1: Initial ink loading. After finishing, this SP value is changed to "2" automatically.

2: Usual warm-up procedure.

3: Refresh all heads. After finishing, this SP is changed to "2" automatically.

• During initial ink loading (when this SP is 1), the machine learns the

"tank full" position of the tank lever and saves this data.

• If the machine does not have this data at normal warm-up (when this SP

is 2), the machine performs air release and then ink loading.

Important: Check the value of this SP mode if the machine performs ink loading

or abnormal operations when you replace the engine unit.

⇒

Rev. 08/2007

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-9 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

2100 [Spe Maint] Special Maintenance

Ink Purge [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

2100 1 Removes remained ink from the sub tanks for replacing the engine unit or

transporting the machine.

2101 [Special Cleaning]

2101 1 K1

2101 2 K2

2101 3 C

2101 4 M

2101 5 Y

Executes the head cleaning for each printer head.

The machine uses 32.04 ml of ink for this special cleaning.

Do not use customer's ink for this mode.

After performing this special cleaning, you need to perform normal

refreshing once to recover all nozzle condition. (Special cleaning

flows ink at a faster speed, and sometimes air may get caught in the

nozzle. As a result, the corrected nozzle may temporary write a

white line. To recover such condition, you need to perform the

normal refreshing once.)

[Prt Erase Margin] Printer Erase Margin

2103 Adjusts the erase margin of each edge for each paper type or in each printing

mode.

2103 1 Adj LEdge Margin Leading edge for standard paper [2 to 6 / 3.3 / 0.1 mm/step]

2103 2 Adj TEdge Margin Trailing edge for standard paper [0.5 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 mm/step]

2103 3 Adj Left Margin Left edge for standard paper [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

2103 4 Adj Right Margin Right edge for standard paper

[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

2103 5 Lead Edge OHP Leading edge for OHP

[2 to 6 / 3.3 / 0.1 mm/step]

2103 6 Back End OHP Trailing edge for OHP

[0.5 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 mm/step]

2103 7 Left Mar OHP Left edge for OHP

[0 to 10 / 5 / 0.1 mm/step]

2103 8 Right Mar OHP Right edge for OHP [0 to 10 / 5 / 0.1 mm/step]

2103 9 Left Mar By-pass Left edge in By-pass mode [0 to 10 / 5 / 0.1 mm/step]

2103 10 Right Mar By-pass Right edge in By-pass mode [0 to 10 / 5 / 0.1 mm/step]

Rev. 08/2007

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-10 SM

2103 11 Lead Edge

Envelope

Leading edge for an envelope [2 to 50 / 38 / 0.1 mm/step]

2103 12 Back End

Envelope Trailing edge for an envelope [2 to 16 / 8.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

2103 13 Left Mar Envelope Left edge for an envelope [0 to 10 / 5 / 0.1 mm/step]

2103 14 Right Mar Envelope Right edge for an envelope [2 to 16 / 8.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

[Normal Fil Pos] Normal Filling Ink Position

2200* Displays the standard position of the ink actuator when the air releasing is done.

These values are referred for checking the ink quantity.

2200 1 K1

2200 2 K2

2200 3 C

2200 4 M

2200 5 Y

[0 to 60000 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

[Wst Ink # Reset] Ink Collection Bottle Counter Reset 2505

Clears the ink collection bottle counter (Front or Rear).

2200 1 Front

This clears the counter of SP7-221-2. Do this SP after replacing the

front ink collection bottle.

The counter of SP7-854-2 counts up after clearing the counter of

SP7-221-2.

2200 2 Rear Do SP7-804-005 instead of this SP.

[Wst Ink Near Full] Ink Collection Bottle Near Full Threshold 2507*

Specifies the threshold of the ink collection bottle near full.

2507 1 Rear [500000 to 2000000 / 1212000 / 1/step]

2508 [Exhalation Interval]

2508 1

Selects the exhalation interval. Multiple printing may cause blocked nozzles.

The exhalation prevents a nozzle from being blocked.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: every twenty seconds, 1: every fifteen seconds

Rev. 08/2007

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-11 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5.2.3 SP3-XXX (PROCESS)

3001* [Gamma Setting]

3001 1 K1

3001 2 K2

3001 3 C

3001 4 M

3001 5 Y

DFU

[1 to 9 / 5 / 1/step]

[Head: Gap Adj] Printer Head: Gap Adjustment

3002* Adjusts the head gap referring to the adjustment sheet printed with SP3109-1

(300 dpi) or 3109-2 (1200 dpi).

3002 1 300: A

3002 2 300: B

3002 3 300: C

3002 4 300: D

3002 5 300: E

3002 6 300: F

3002 7 300: G

3002 8 300: H

3002 9 300: I

[–100 to 100 / 0 / 1 dot/step]

3002 10 1200: A

3002 11 1200: B

3002 12 1200: C

3002 13 1200: D

3002 14 1200: E

3002 15 1200: F

3002 16 1200: G

3002 17 1200: H

3002 18 1200: I

[–100 to 100 / 0 / 1/step]

3002 21 300: A (Fact)

3002 22 300: B (Fact)

3002 23 300: C (Fact)

3002 24 300: D (Fact)

3002 25 300: E (Fact)

These are values of the factory settings.

SP3002-001 to -009 are reset to these settings

when SP5884-1 is done.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-12 SM

3002 26 300: F (Fact)

3002 27 300: G (Fact)

3002 28 300: H (Fact)

3002 29 300: I (Fact)

3002 30 1200: A (Fact)

3002 31 1200: B (Fact)

3002 32 1200: C (Fact)

3002 33 1200: D (Fact)

3002 34 1200: E (Fact)

3002 35 1200: F (Fact)

3002 36 1200: G (Fact)

3002 37 1200: H (Fact)

3002 38 1200: I (Fact)

These are values of the factory settings.

SP3002-010 to -018 are reset to these settings

when SP5884-1 is done.

3002 41 1200: Ruled line

Adjusts the gap precisely in B/W printing mode.

Do this SP only if a result of executing "Standard"

in the "Head Position Adjust" (User Tools >

Maintenance > Adjustment > Head Position

Adjustment) is not satisfactory.

[–10 to 10 / 0 / 1/step]

[Print: Pattern] 3109 Prints the adjustment sheet for each print head adjustment. For details, refer to

the "Image Adjustment" in section "Replace and Adjustment".

3109 1 Head: Gap Adj 300 This sheet is for the print head gap adjustment in

300 x 300 dpi.

3109 2 Head: Gap Adj 1200 This sheet is for the print head gap adjustment in

1200 x 1200 dpi.

3109 3 Nozzle Check This sheet is for the nozzle pattern adjustment.

3109 4 Sub Scan: Send Adj This sheet is for the adjustment fro the paper

feeding amount.

3109 5 Reg Adj This sheet is for the main and sub scan

registration adjustment.

3109 6 Auto: Gap Adj 300 DFU

3109 7 Auto: Gap Adj 1200 DFU

3109 10 For Fact DFU

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-13 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

3112* [Print Mode Set] Print Mode Setting

Setting 1 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]

3112 1

Bit0: Scanning method adjustment [0: Normal, 1: Always one scanning (rear to front)]

It is possible to disable the returning scanning (front to rear: home position) to

keep a high quality printing whatever jobs a machine gets.

Bit1: One scanning mode for envelop

[0: Normal, 1: Always one scanning (rear to front) when the envelop lever is

"ON".]

It is possible to disable the returning scanning (front to rear: home position) to

keep a high quality printing when the envelop lever is set to "ON".

Bit2 and 3: Image density adjustment at duplex mode

[Bit3: "0" and Bit2: "1", 80%]

[Bit3: "1" and Bit2: "0", 74%]

[Bit3: "0" and Bit2: "0", Normal (80 to 98%)]

It is possible to reduce ink to prevent the other side transparent image of paper

when the duplex mode is used.

Bit4: reserved

Bit5: DFU

Bit6 and 7: Not used

3112 2 Setting 2 DFU

3112 3 Setting 3

3112 4 Setting 4

3112 5 Setting 5

3112 6 Setting 6

3112 7 Setting 7

Not used



3112 10 Setting 10 Not used

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-14 SM

3130* [Head Rank (W Ptn)]

3130 1 K1

3130 2 K2

3130 3 C

3130 4 M

3130 5 Y

DFU

[0 to 7/ 0 / 1/step]

3131* [Head Rank (Vol)]

3131 1 K1

3131 2 K2

3131 3 C

3131 4 M

3131 5 Y

DFU

[0 to 7/ 0 / 1/step]

3557* [Hum Bf Idle]

3557 2

Displays the relative humidity when the machine has previously capped the

printer head.

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 %/step]

[Paper Feed ReDrv] Paper Feed Re-drive Setting

3803* Adjusts the paper feed retry time when the no-feed paper jam occurs at each

tray.

3803 1 Retry Times [0 to 5 / 0 / 1/step]

5.2.4 SP4-XXX (SCANNER)

4008* [Sub Scan Mag] (Scanner) [–0.9 to +0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step]

4008 1 Adjusts the actual sub-scan direction scanning magnification. The higher the

setting, the lower the scanner motor speed (Copy Adjustments-Scanning).

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-15 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

4010 [LE Scan Regist] (Scanner) [–2 to +2 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

4010 1

Adjusts the leading edge registration for scanning in platen mode (Copy

Adjustments-Scanning).

(–): The image moves toward the leading edge.

(+): The image moves toward the trailing edge·

4011* [StoS Scan Regist] (Scanner) [–2.5 to +2.5 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

4011 1

Adjusts the side-to-side registration for scanning in platen mode ( Copy

Adjustments-Scanning).

Increasing the value shifts the image to the right.

Decreasing the value shifts the image to the left.

[Set Scale Mask]

4012 Adjusts the scanning margin individually for each of the four edges in book

scanning or ADF scanning. It is generally best to adjust the scanning margin as

little as possible, and use the printing margin for image adjustments.

4012 1 Book: Sub: LEdge

4012 2 Book: Sub: TEdge

4012 3 Book: Main: LEdge

4012 4 Book: Main: TEdge

4012 5 ADF: Sub: LEdge

4012 7 ADF: Main: LEdge

4012 8 ADF: Main: TEdge

[0 to 3 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

[Scanner Free Run] 4013 Performs a scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off. Press ON to start.

Press OFF to stop.

4013 1 Lamp: ON

4013 2 Lamp: OFF

[0 or 1/ 0 / 1/step]

0: Off, 1: ON

4014 [Scan]

4014 1 HP Detect: Enable Enables the scanner home position detection.

4014 2 HP Detect: Disable Disables the scanner home position detection.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-16 SM

4020* [Dust Check]

4020 1 Dust Detect: ON/OFF

Enables or disables the dust detection on the

ADF scanning glass or the white plate.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

4020 2 Dust Detect: Lvl

Selects the dust detection level.

[ 0 to 8 / 4 / 1 /step]

0: lowest detection level

8: highest detection level

4020 3 Dust Reject: Lvl

Selects the level of the sub scan line correction

when using the ADF.

[ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: Off, 1: Weakest, 2: Weak,

3: Strong, 4: Strongest

4301 [APS Sns Chk]

4301 1 Displays the status of the APS sensors and platen/DF cover sensor ( ADF/APS

Sensor Output Display).

4303* [APS Small Origin] [0 = No (not detected) / 1 = Yes (A5/HLT LEF)]

4303 1

Selects whether or not the copier will consider the original to be A5/HLT LEF

when the APS sensors cannot detect its size. If “Yes” is selected, paper sizes

that cannot be detected by the APS sensors are regarded as A5/HLT LEF. If

“No" is selected, “Cannot detect original size” will be displayed.

4305* [APS Priority] [0 = Unknown size / 1 = A5/HLT LEF]

4305 1 Selects the paper size when the machine detects the smaller size than B5.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-17 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

[Org Edge Mask] Set the Mask for Original 4400

This SP sets the area to be masked during platen (book) mode scanning.

4400 1 Book:Sub:LEdge

4400 2 Book:Sub:TEdge

4400 3 Book:Main:LEdge

4400 4 Book:Main:TEedge

4400 5 ADF:Sub:LEdge

4400 7 ADF:Main:LEdge

4400 8 ADF:Main:TEdge

[0 to 3.0 / 0 /0.1 mm/step]

4417 [IPU Test Pattern] Set IPU Test Pattern

Use this SP to select the IPU test pattern to print.

Test Pattern [0to25/ 0 / 1/step]

0 Scanned Image 13 Grid Pattern CMYK

1 Gradation Main Scan A 14 Color Patch CMYK

2 Gradation Main Scan B 15 Gray Pattern (1)

3 Gradation Main Scan C 16 Gray Pattern (2)

4 Gradation Main Scan D 17 Gray Pattern (3)

5 Gradation Sub Scan 1 18 Shading Pattern

6 Grid Pattern 19 Thin Line Pattern

7 Slant Grid Pattern 20 Scanned + Grid Pattern

8 Gradation RGBCMYK 21 Scanned + Grayscale

9 UCR Pattern 22 Scanned + Color Patch

10 Color Patch 16 (1) 23 Scanned + Slant Grid C

11 Color Patch 16 (2) 24 Scanned + Slant Grid D

4417 1

12 Color Patch 16 64 25 H Rank Pt

4429 ICI Output Level

4429 1 Sets the ICI output level

[35 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-18 SM

4440 [Saturation Adj] Adjust Color Saturation

This SP adjusts the saturation level for copying.

[0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]

0: High

1: Lowest

2: Lower

3: Default

4: Higher

5: Highest

4450 [Scan Img Pas Swch] Scan Image Path Switch

Bk Subt ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON 4450 1

Uses or does not use the black reduction image path.

SH Pas ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON 4450 2

Uses or does not use the shading image path.

4460 [Digital AE set] Digital AE Setting FA

4460 1 Low Limit Set [0 to 1024 / 364 / 4 digit/step]

4460 2 Back Ground Level [512 to 1532 / 972 / 1 digit/step]]

[Print Coverage] Print Coverage Correction

4540 This SP corrects printer coverage of 12 hues (RY, YR, YG, etc. x 4 Colors

(Option, R, G, B) for a total of 48 parameters.

001 – 004 RY: Option, R, G, B

005 – 008 YR: Option, R, G, B

009 – 012 YG: Option, R, G, B

013 – 016 GY: Option, R, G, B

017 – 020 GC: Option, R, G, B

021 – 024 CG: Option, R, G, B

025 – 028 CB: Option, R, G, B

[–128 to +128 / 0 / 1/step]

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-19 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

029 – 032 BC: Option, R, G, B

033 – 036 BM: Option, R, G, B

037 – 040 MB: Option, R, G, B

041 – 044 MR: Option, R, G, B

045 – 048 RM: Option, R, G, B

4550 [SApli: Txt Prt] Scanner Application: Text/Picture Mode

4551 [SApli:TxtOCR1] Scanner Application: Text Mode

4552 [SApli:TxtOCR2] Scanner Application: Text/Drop Out

4553 [SApli: T/P] Scanner Application: Text/Photo

4554 [SApli: Photo] Scanner Application: Photo

4565 [SApli: Gray Scale] Scanner Application: Gray Scale

4570 [SApli: Color T/P] Scanner Application: Text/Photo

4571 [SApli: Color P]: Text/Printing Paper

MTF Lvl: 0-15 [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step]

-005 Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image

contrast. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.

Smooth:0-7 [0 to 15 / 4 / 1/step] -006

Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother.

Brightness:1-255 [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step] -007

Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.

Contrast:1-255 [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step] -008

Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast.

Standoff:1-7 [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]

-009 Sets the Erasure level of Irregular Dots. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for

weaker effect.

0: Not activated

4580 [FaxApli: TxPrt] Fax Application: Text/Picture Mode

4581 [FaxApli: Txt] Fax Application: Text

4582 [FaxApli: T/P] Fax Application: Text/Photo

4583 [FaxApli: Photo] Fax Application: Photo

4584 [FaxApli: Original1] Fax Application: Original 1

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-20 SM

4585 [FaxApli: Original2] Fax Application: Original 2

MTF Lvl: 0-15 [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step]

-005 Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image

contrast. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.

Smooth:0-7 [0 to 15 / 4 / 1/step] -006

Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother.

Brightness:1-255 [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step] -007

Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.

Contrast:1-255 [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step] -008

Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast.

Standoff:1-7 [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]

-009 Sets the erasure level of irregular dots. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for

weaker effect.

0: Not activated

Texture:1-2

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]

This SP (suffix "-010") only exists in SP4580,

4582 and 4583. -010

Sets the erasure level of textures. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker

effect.

0: Not activated

4600 [Display SBU ID]

4600 1

Displays the board version of the SBU. First

production model indicates "0".

[0 to7 / 0 / 1/step]

4602 [SBU Mem Access] SBU Memory Access Not Used

4602 1 SBU Mem Access

4602 2 Set Address

4602 3 Set Data

4603 [Do AGC] Auto Gain Control Execution

4603 1 HP Detect: Enable Executes the AGC.

4603 2 HP Detect: Disable DFU

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-21 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

4604 [Open/Close FGATE] DFU

4604 1

Opens or closes the FGATe signal. This SP automatically returns to the default

status (close) after exiting this SP.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: OFF, 1: ON

4606 [Wht Lvl Adj: R] White Level Adjustment: Red DFU

4606 1 This value is the target value of red for the white level adjustment.

[0 to 1024 / 784 / 1 digit/step]

4607 [Wht Lvl Adj: G] White Level Adjustment: Green DFU

4607 1 This value is the target value of green for the white level adjustment.

[0 to 1024 / 784 / 1 digit/step]

4608 [Wht Lvl Adj: B] White Level Adjustment: Blue DFU

4608 1 This value is the target value of blue for the white level adjustment.

[0 to 1024 / 784 / 1 digit/step]

4623 [BkLvl Adj: ValueR] Black Level Adjustment: Current Value of Red

4624 [BkLvl Adj: ValueG] Black Level Adjustment: Current Value of Green

4625 [BkLvl Adj: ValueB] Black Level Adjustment: Current Value of Blue

CrsAdj: Rough Adjustment, FinAdj: Fine Adjustment

RE (GE or BE): Red (Green or Blue) Even signal, RO (GO or BO): Red (Green

or Blue) Odd signal

-001 CrsAdj: RE (GE or BE) Clr

-002 CrsAdj: RO (GO or BO) Clr

-003 FinAdj: RE (GE or BE) Clr

-004 FinAdj: RO (GO or BO) Clr

Displays the black offset value for the each even

or odd color (red, green or blue) signal in the CCD

circuit board (color printing speed).

[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]

-005 CrsAdj: RE (GE or BE) Bk

-006 CrsAdj: RO (GO or BO) Bk

-007 FinAdj: RE (GE or BE) Bk

-008 FinAdj: RO (GO or BO) Bk

Displays the black offset value for the each even

or odd color (red, green or blue) signal in the CCD

circuit board (B/W printing speed).

[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-22 SM

4628 [Gain Adj: ValueR] Gain Adjustment: Current Value of Red

4629 [Gain Adj: ValueG] Gain Adjustment: Current Value of Green

4630 [Gain Adj: ValueB] Gain Adjustment: Current Value of Blue

R: Red, G: Green, B: Blue

-001 Value: R(G or B)Even Clr

-002 Value: R(G or B)Odd Clr

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the

controller for each color (red, green or blue) in

color printing mode.

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

-003 Value: R(G or B)Even Bk

-004 Value: R(G or B)Odd Bk

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the

controller for each color (red, green or blue) in

B/W printing mode.

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4640 [Bk Lvl Adj Loop] Black Level Adjustment Loop

Adj1: First adjustment, Adj2: Second adjustment

4640 1 Adj1:Clr

4640 2 Adj1:BK

4640 3 Adj2:Clr

4640 4 Adj2:BK

Displays the black level adjustment time for each

mode.

[0 to 20 / 0 / 1 time/step]

4641 [White Lvl Loop] White Level Adjustment Loop

4640 1 Color

4640 2 B/W

Displays the white level adjustment time for each

mode.

[0 to 20 / 0 / 1 time/step]

4646 [Read Adj Timeout] Read Adjustment Timeout

4640 1 Bk Offset Adj1

4640 2 Bk Offset Adj2

4640 3 Wht Lvl Adj

Displays the result of the AGC adjustment. If the

AGC adjustment fails, SC141 (Bk Lvl) or SC142

(White Lvl) occurs.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: OK, 1: AGC adjustment failure

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-23 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

4647 [Read Hard Error] Read Hard Error

4640 1 At Power On

Displays the result of the SBU connection check.

If the SBU connection check fails, SC144-001,

-002 or -003 occurs.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: OK, 1: SBU connection check failure

4654 [BkLvl Adj: PrevR] Black Level Adjustment: Previous Value of Red

4655 [BkLvl Adj: PrevG] Black Level Adjustment: Previous Value of Green

4656 [BkLvl Adj: PrevB] Black Level Adjustment: Previous Value of Blue

Displays the previous vale of the black level adjustment for each color.



or Blue) Odd signal


-002 CrsAdj: RO (GO or BO) Clr [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]


-004 FinAdj: RO (GO or BO) Clr [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]


-006 CrsAdj: RO (GO or BO) Bk [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]


-008 FinAdj: RO (GO or BO) Bk [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]

4658 [Gain Adj: PrevR] Gain Adjustment: Previous Value of Red

4659 [Gain Adj: PrevG] Gain Adjustment: Previous Value of Green

4660 [Gain Adj: PrevB] Gain Adjustment: Previous Value of Blue

Displays the previous vale of the gainl adjustment for each color.


or Blue) Odd signal

-001 S Prev: RE (GE or BE) Clr

-002 S Prev: RO (GO or BO) Clr

-003 S Prev: RE (GE or BE) BK

-004 S Prev: RO (GO or BO) Bk

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-24 SM

4661 [BkLvl2 Adj: PrevR] Black Level2 Adjustment: Previous Value of Red

4662 [BkLvl2 Adj: PrevG] Black Level2 Adjustment: Previous Value of Green

4663 [BkLvl2 Adj: PrevB] Black Level2 Adjustment: Previous Value of Blue

Displays the previous vale of the second black level adjustment for each color.



or Blue) Odd signal


-002 CrsAdj: RO (GO or BO) Clr [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]


-004 FinAdj: RO (GO or BO) Clr [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]


-006 CrsAdj: RO (GO or BO) Bk [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]


-008 FinAdj: RO (GO or BO) Bk [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]

[BkLvl Adj: FactR] Black Level Adjustment: Factory Setting of Red

4673 Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment.


RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal

4673 1 CrsAdj: RE Clr

4673 2 CrsAdj: RO Clr [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]

4673 3 FinAdj: RE Clr

4673 4 FinAdj: RO Clr [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]

4673 5 CrsAdj: RE Bk

4673 6 CrsAdj: RO Bk [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]

4673 7 FinAdj: RE Bk

4673 8 FinAdj: RO Bk [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-25 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

[BkLvl Adj: FactG] Black Level Adjustment: Factory Setting of Green



GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal

4674 1 CrsAdj: GE Clr

4674 2 CrsAdj: GO Clr [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]

4674 3 FinAdj: GE Clr

4674 4 FinAdj: GO Clr [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]

4674 5 CrsAdj: GE Bk

4674 6 CrsAdj: GO Bk [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]

4674 7 FinAdj: GE Bk

4674 8 FinAdj: GO Bk [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]

[BkLvl Adj: FactB] Black Level Adjustment: Factory Setting of Blue



BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal

4675 1 CrsAdj: BE Clr

4675 2 CrsAdj: BO Clr [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]

4675 3 FinAdj: BE Clr

4675 4 FinAdj: BO Clr [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]

4675 5 CrsAdj: BE Bk

4675 6 CrsAdj: BO Bk [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]

4675 7 FinAdj: BE Bk

4675 8 FinAdj: BO Bk [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]

[Gain Adj: FactR] Gain Adjustment: Factory Setting of Red

4677 Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment.

RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal

4677 1 Factini: RE Clr

4677 2 Factini: RO Clr

4677 3 Factini: RE BK

4677 4 Factini: RO Bk

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-26 SM

[Gain Adj: FactG] Gain Adjustment: Factory Setting of Green


GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal

4678 1 Factini: GE Clr

4678 2 Factini: GO Clr

4678 3 Factini: GE BK

4678 4 Factini: GO Bk

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[Gain Adj: FactB] Gain Adjustment: Factory Setting of Blue


BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal

4679 1 Factini: BE Clr

4679 2 Factini: BO Clr

4679 3 Factini: BE BK

4679 4 Factini: BO Bk

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[Gray Balance: R] Gray Balance Adjustment: Red 4685

Adjusts the gray balance of red signal for each scanning mode. DFU

4685 1 For Book Read

4685 2 For DF Read [–512 to 511 / –240 / 1 digit/step]

[Gray Balance: G] Gray Balance Adjustment: Green 4686

Adjusts the gray balance of green signal for each scanning mode. DFU



[Gray Balance: B] Gray Balance Adjustment: Blue 4687

Adjusts the gray balance of blue signal for each scanning mode. DFU



SP Mode Tables

SM 5-27 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

[DF Density Adj] DF Density Adjustment

4688 Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF.

Adjusts the density level if the image density of outputs made in the DF and

Platen mode is different.

4688 1 [50 to 150 / 109 / 1%/step]

4690 [White Lvl Peak: R] White Level Scanning Peak Value: Red

4691 [White Lvl Peak: G] White Level Scanning Peak Value: Green

4692 [White Lvl Peak: B] White Level Scanning Peak Value: Blue

-001 RE (GE or BE)

-002 RO (GO or BO)

-003 RE (GE or BE) BK

-004 RO (GO or BO) Bk

Displays the peak level of the white level

scanning.

[0 to 1024 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4693 [Black Lvl Scan: R] Black Level Scanning Peak Value: Red

4694 [Black Lvl Scan: G] Black Level Scanning Peak Value: Green

4695 [Black Lvl Scan: B] Black Level Scanning Peak Value: Blue

-001 RE (GE or BE)

-002 RO (GO or BO)

-003 RE (GE or BE) BK

-004 RO (GO or BO) Bk

Displays the peak level of the white level

scanning.

[0 to 1024 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[DF Shade FreeRun] DF Free Run for Shading

4802 Executes the scanner free run of shading movement with exposure lamp on or

off. Press "OFF" to stop this free run. Otherwise, the free run lasts.

4802 1 Lamp ON

4802 2 Lamp OFF

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

0: OFF, 1: ON

4804 [Home Position] Scanner Home Position Adjustment

4804 1 Checks the scanner home position movement.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-28 SM

4806 [Carriage Escape]

4806 1

Moves the carriage from the scanner home

position. Dust may fall through the DF contact

glass. Therefore, do this SP when you transport

this machine for a long term.

[Test Scan IPU] Test Scanner IPU Board

4904 Performs a write and read check of the ASICs on the scanner IPU board and

displays the result. Turn off and on after doing this SP.

4904 1 Test 1

Bit0: ASIC0 image register

Bit1: ASIC0 serial register

Bit2: ASIC1 register





Bit7: ASIC4 (MC) register

Bit8: ASIC4 (YK) register

0: OK, 1: Error

4904 2 Test 2

Bit0: ASIC0 image register

Bit1: ASIC0 serial register






Bit7: ASIC4 (MC) register

Bit8: ASIC4 (YK) register

0: OK, 1: Error

4905 [Dither Select] DFU

4905 1 Changes the parameters for error diffusion.

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-29 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

[SBU Pattern] 4907

Selects the test pattern generated by the controller board.

4907 1

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]

0: Default (Scanned image)

1: Grid pattern

2: Gradation main scan

3: Gradation sub scan

4 to 250: Default (Scanned image)

4909 [Man Gamma: P ColK] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Photo Mono-Black

4910 [Man Gamma: Txt: K] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Text Black

4911 [Man Gamma: Txt: C] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Text Cyan

4912 [Man Gamma: Txt: M] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Text Magenta

4913 [Man Gamma: Txt: Y] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Text Yellow

4914 [Man Gamma: T: ColK] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Text Mono-Black

4915 [Man Gamma: Pht: K] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Photo Black

4916 [Man Gamma: Pht: C] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Photo Cyan

4917 [Man Gamma: Pht: M] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Photo Magenta

4918 [Man Gamma: Pht: Y] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Photo Yellow

-001 Offset: Highlight

-002 Offset: Middle

-003 Offset: Shadow

-004 Offset: IDmax

Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for

each color in Photo mode or Text mode.

[0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step]

-005 Option: Highlight

-006 Option: Middle

-007 Option: Shadow

-008 Option: IDmax

Adjusts the option data of the printer gamma for

each color in Photo mode or Text mode.

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]

4991 [IPU Img Path Sel] IPU Image Path Switch

Use this SP to determine the image path. Enter the number to be selected using

the 10-key pad.

RGB Frame Mem [0 to 11 / 2 / 1/step]

0 Scanner input RGB images

4991 1

1 Scanner I/F RGB images

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-30 SM

2 RGB images done by Shading correction (Shading ON, Black offset ON)

3 Shading data

4 Inner pattern data: Gray scale

5 RGB images done by Line skipping correction

6 RGB images done by Digital AE

7 RGB images done by Vertical line correction

8 RGB image done by Scanner gamma correction

9 RGB image done by Filtering correction

10 RGB images done by Full color ADS

11 RGB image done by Color correction

4993 [Highlight Cor] Highlight Correction

Sensibility [0 to 9 / 4 / 1/step]

4993 1 Selects the Highlight correction level.

0: Weakest sensibility, 9: Strongest sensibility

Region [0 to 9 / 4 / 1/step]

002 Selects the range level of Highlight correction.

0: Weakest skew correction, 9: Strongest skew correction

5.2.5 SP5-XXX (MODE)

5001 [All Indicators On]

001 All LED’s turn on. The LCD turns on or off every 3 seconds. Press the reset key

to end this program.

5024* [mm/inch Selection]

001

Selects whether mm or inches are used in the display.

After selecting the number, you must turn the main power switch

off and on.

Europe/Asia model: [0: mm / 1: inch]

American model: [0: mm / 1: inch]

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-31 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5045 [Counter Model]

001 Selects the counting method if the meter charge mode is enabled with

SP5-930-001.

You can change the setting only one time. [0 or 1/ 0] 0: Development counter. Shows the total counts for color (Y,M,C) and black

(K). 1: Paper counter. Shows the total page counts for: Color Total, Black Total,

Color Copies, Black Copies, Color Prints, Black Prints. NOTE: Settings “2” and “3” are also displayed on the LCD, but they cannot

be selected.

[Refill Toner Displ] Refill Toner Detection Display 5051

Enables or disables the toner refill detection display.

001 Toner Refill Detection

Display *CTL

[ 0 or 1 / 0 /- ]

0: ON, 1: OFF

5055 [Display IP address]

001 Display IP address *CTL

Display or does not display the IP address on

the LCD.

[0 or 1 / 0 / -]

0: Not display, 1: Display

5056 [Coverage Counter]

001 Coverage Counter *CTL

Display or does not display the coverage

counter on the LCD.

[0 or 1 / 0 / -]

0: Not display, 1: Display

[A3 Double Count] SSP 5104*

A3 Double Count *CTL [0 = No / 1 = Yes / 2 = No Unclear]

001

Selects whether the machine counts twice for each sheet of A3/11"x 17". If this

is set to “Yes” is selected, the total (mechanical) counter and the current user

counter will both increment by two for each A3/11" x 17" sheet.

⇒

Rev. 11/2006

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-32 SM

5112 [Non-Std. Paper Set] Non-Standard Paper Set

001

Determines whether a non-standard paper size can be input for the universal

cassette trays (Tray 2, Tray 3)

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

0: No

1: Yes. If “1” is selected, the customer will be able to input a non-standard

paper size using the UP mode.

5113 [Optional Counter Type]

001 Default Optional Counter

Type *CTL

This program specifies the counter type.

0: None

1: Key card (RK 3, 4)

2: Key card (down)

3: Prepaid card

4: Coin Rack

5: MF key card

8: Key counter + Vendor

9: Bar-code Printer

002 External Optional Counter

Type *CTL

This program specifies the external counter

type.

0: None

1: External optional counter type 1



5118 [Disable Copying] *CTL [0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]

001 This program disables copying.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-33 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5120* Mode Clear Opt. Counter

Removal *CTL [0=Yes / 1=Standby only / 2=No]

001

Determines under which conditions the copy job settings are reset when the

key counter is removed. With 0, the settings are cleared if the counter is

removed at the end of a job or midway through a job. With 1, they are only

cleared if the counter is removed at the end of a job. With 2, they are not

cleared at all, under either condition. With duplex copies, the job settings are

always preserved, regardless of the setting of this SP mode.

5121* Count Up Timing *CTL [0 = Feed In / 1 = Exit]

001 Selects whether the key counter increments at time of paper feed-in or at time

of paper exit.

5127 [APS Mode] *CTL [0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]

001 This program disables the APS.

5128 [Code Mode With Key/Card]

*CTL

001 DFU

5131 [Size For Dest] *CTL [0: DOM (Japan)/1: NA /2: EU or ASIA]

001

The program selects a paper size system from the following alternatives: the AB

system (0), the LT system (1), and the AF system (2). (Default depends on DIP

SW 101 setting.)

5150 [By-pass Long Paper] *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: OFF, 1: ON

001

Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not.

Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is

limited to 600 mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm.

5162 [App. Switch Method] *CTL [ 0: Soft Key Set/1: Hard Key Set]

001 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-34 SM

[Fax Printing Mode at Optional]

5167 Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This

SP is used when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting

device.

001 Fax Printing Mode at

Optional Counter Off *CTL

[ 0 or 1 / 0 / – ]

0: Automatic printing

1: No automatic printing

[CE Login] 5169 If you change the printer bit switches, you must ‘log in’ to service mode with this

SP before you go into the printer SP mode.

001 CE Login *CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

5178* [Copy Data Security Setting]

001

Do this SP after installation of the Copy Data Security Unit.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: Copy data security function disabled

1: Copy data security function enabled

The copy data security option will not operate correctly after installation

until this SP is turned on.

This SP is not displayed until the machine is powered on with the Copy

Data Security Setting board installed.

[Set Time]

5302

Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone.

Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.)

DOM: +540 (Tokyo)

NA :-300 (New York)

EU :+ 60 (Paris)

CH :+480 (Peking)

TW :+480 (Taipei)

AS :+480 (Hong Kong)

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-35 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

002 Set Time *CTL

# [ -1440 to 1440 / Area / 1 min./step ]

5307 [Summer Time]

Setting

[ 0 or 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step]

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0 001

Enables or disables the summer time mode.

Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise,

this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to "1".

Rule Set (Start)

003

Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the

first digit, so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.

1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]

3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]

4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]

5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]

7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]

8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]

For example: 3500010 (EU default)

The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March

The digits are counted from the left.

Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".

Rule Set (End)

004

Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP.

1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]

3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5]

4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]

5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]

The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-36 SM

The digits are counted from the left.

Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".

[Access Control] 5401 When installing the SDK application, SAS (VAS) adjusts the following settings.

DFU

006 C

016 DS

026 F

036 S

046 P

076 SDK 1

086 SDK 2

096 SDK 3

SSP: These SP’s are not disclosed due to the security

protection.

200 SDK1 Unique

ID *CTL

This ID is overwritten by SAS (VAS) when you install or

uninstall the SDK application.

201

SDK1

Certification

Method

*CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU

210 SDK2 Unique

ID *CTL DFU

211

SDK2

Certification

Method

*CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU

220 SDK3 Unique

ID *CTL DFU

221

SDK3

Certification

Method

*CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU

5404 [User Code Clear]

001 Clears the counts for the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict

the use of the machine. Press [Execute] to clear.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-37 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5501 [PM Alarm Interval] *CTL

001 Printout

[ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: Alarm off

1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1 to 9999) x

1000 PM counter

002 ADF

[ 0 or 1 / 1 / – ]

0: No alarm sounds

1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals passing

through the A(R)DF 10,000

5504 [Jam Alarm] *CTL

001

Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not

included).

[ 0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]

0: Zero (Off), 1: Low (2.5K jams), 2: Medium (3K jams), 3: High (6K jams)

5505* [Error Alarm]

001

Sets the error alarm level.

The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the

error alarm counter decreases "1" when any SC is not detected during specified

sheets of copies (for example, default 1500 sheets).

The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches "5".

[0 to 255 / 15 / 100 copies per step]

5507 [Supply Alarm] *CTL

001 Paper Size 0: Off, 1: On, DFU

002 Staple 0: Off, 1: On, DFU

003 Toner 0: Off, 1: On, DFU

128 Interval :Others

132 Interval :A3

133 Interval :A4

134 Interval :A5

141 Interval :B4

142 Interval :B5

[250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 /step] DFU

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-38 SM

160 Interval :DLT

164 Interval :LG

166 Interval :LT

172 Interval :HLT

5508* [Auto Call Setting] *CTL

Jam Remains 0: Disable, 1: Enable 001*

Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam.

Frequent Jams 0: Disable, 1: Enable 002*

Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams.

Door Open 0: Disable, 1: Enable 003*

Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open.

Jam Remains: Time [ 03 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute /step]

011* Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an “unattended paper jam”.

This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.

Freq Jam: # of Time [ 02 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]

012* Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call. This

setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.

Door Open: Time [ 03 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute/step]

013* Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a

call.

This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.

Jam Remains: Mode 0: Automatic Call

1: Audible Warning at Machine 021*

Determines what happens when a paper jam is left unattended.

Freq Jam: Mode 0: Automatic Call

1: Audible Warning at Machine 022*

Determines what happens when a paper jam happens continually.

Door Open: Mode 0: OFF, 1: ON

023* Determines what happens if the door remains open (15 min.).

Displays a warning if set to ON. Pressing the call button will contact the service

center.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-39 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

[SC/Alarm Setting] *CTL

5515 With NRS (New Remote Service) in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an

SC call when an SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not

issued when an SC error occurs.

001 SC Call

002 Service Parts Near End

003 Service Parts End

004 User Call

006 Communication Test

007 Machine Information

008 Alarm Notice

009 Non Genuine Toner

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]

0: Off, 1: On

010 Supply Automatic Order

011 Supply Management Report[0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off,1: On

012 Jam/Door Open Call [0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off,1: On

5610 [ACC Factory Setting]

Value 004

Recalls the factory settings.

Value Setting 005

Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings.

Restore Org 006

Recalls the previous settings.

5801 [Memory Clear] Before executing any of these SP codes, print an SMC Report.

001 All Clear

Initializes items SP5801-002 to -014 below.

Turn off and on the main power switch after executing this SP.

002 Engine

Clears the engine settings.

003 SCS

Clears the system settings.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-40 SM


IMH 004

Clears IMH data. DFU

MCS 005

Clears MCS data. DFU

Copier 006

Clears the copy application settings.

Fax 007

Clears the fax application settings.

Printer 008

Clears the printer application settings.

Scanner 009

Clears the scanner application settings.

GWWS/NFA

010 Delete the netfile application management files and thumbnails, and initializes

the job login ID.

NCS

011

Initializes the system default and interface settings (IP address also),

SmartNetMonitor for

Admin, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.

The name of Apple talk is not cleared only if this SP is executed. Turns off and

on after executing this SP.

R-FAX

012 Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for

Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.

Clear DCS Setting 014

Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.

Clear UCS Setting 015

Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) settings.

MIRS Setting 016

Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service) settings.

CCS 017

Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control Service) settings.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-41 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es


Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings.

LCS 019

Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings.

INPUT CHECK 5803

( Input Check)

OUTPUT CHECK 5804

( Output Check)

5807 [Destination Code] Sets the destination code after replacing the BCU PCB

001 0: Japan, 1: NA, 2: EU, 3: Asia, 4: China, 5: Taiwan, 6: Korea, 7: Other

5811* [Machine Serial] Machine Serial Number

001 Set ( Serial Number Input)

002 Display Displays the machine serial number.

5812 [Service TEL]

Telephone *CTL

001 Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed

on the Counter List, which can be printed with the user’s “Counter” menu.

This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can

be input).

Facsimile *CTL

002 Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is

printed on the Counter List.

This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can

be input).

Supply *CTL

003 Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables. Enter

the number and press "StringIn" key.

Press the “Clear modes” key to delete the telephone number.

004 Sales *CTL

⇒

Rev. 08/2007

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-42 SM

Sales *CTL

004 Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the number

and press #. Press the “Clear modes” key to delete the telephone number.

5816 [NRS Function] *CTL

001 I/F Setting

Selects the remote service setting.

[ 0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]

0: Remote service off

1: CSS remote service on

2: NRS remote service on

002 CE Call

Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the

service.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: Start of the service, 1: End of the service

This SP is activated only when SP

5816-001 is set to “2”.

003 Function Flag

Enables or disables the remote service function.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

007 SSL Disable

Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL

when calling the RCG.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: Uses the RCG certification

1: Does no use the RCG certification

008 RCG Connect Timeout

Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling

the RCG.

[1 to 90 / 10 / 1 second/step]

009 RCG Write Timeout

Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the

RCG.

[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second/step]

010 RCG Read Timeout

Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the

RCG.

[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second/step]

011 Port 80 Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP

Rev. 08/2007

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-43 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]


Function Flag

021 This SP displays the Cumin installation end flag.

1: Installation completed 2: Installation not completed

Install Status

022 This SP displays the Cumin installation status.

0: Basil not registered

1: Basil registered

2: Device registered

Connect Mode (N/M)

023 This SP displays and selects the Cumin connection method.

0: Internet connection 1: Dial-up connection

NotiTime ExpTime DFU 061

Proximity of the expiration of the certification.

HTTP Proxy Use

062 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine

communicates with the service center.

HTTP Proxy Host

063

This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between

Cumin-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy

server address. The address is necessary to set up Cumin-N.

The address display is limited to 127 characters. Characters

beyond the 127th character are ignored.

This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC

report.

HTTP Proxy Port Number

064

This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication

between Cumin-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up

Cumin-N.

This port number is customer information and is not printed in the

SMC report.

065 HTTP Proxy Aut Usr

Rev. 08/2007

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-44 SM

This SP sets the HTTP proxy authentication user name.

The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character

beyond the 31st character is ignored.

This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC

report.

HTTP Proxy Aut Pass

066

This SP sets the HTTP proxy authentication password.

The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any

character beyond the 31st character is ignored.

This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC

report.

Cer Updt Cond

Displays the status of the certification update.

0 The certification used by Cumin is set correctly.

1 The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from

the GW URL and certification is presently being updated.

2 The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of

the successful update.

3 The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the

failed update.

4 The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update

is being sent to the GW URL.

11 A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue

certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection.

12 The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being

notified of the certification update request.

13

The notification of the request for certification update has completed

successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update request

from the rescue GW URL

14 The notification of the certification request has been received from the

rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored.

067

15 The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of the

successful completion of this event.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-45 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

16 The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being

notified of the failure of this event.

17

The certification update request has been received from the GW URL,

the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was

completed, but an error has been received, and the rescue certification is

being recorded

18 The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL is

being notified of the failure of the certification update.

Cer Abnml Cause

Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of

the certification.

0 Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.

1 Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has

expired.

2 An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification

has expired.

3 Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual

certification.

4 Notification of a common certification without ID2.

5 Notification that no certification was issued.

068

6 Notification that GW URL does not exist.

Cert: Updtt ReqID 069

The ID of the request for certification.

Firm Updating 083

Displays the status of the firmware update.

Firm UpFlg No HDD

084 This setting determines if the firmware can be updated, even without the HDD

installed.

Firm Up Usr Conf

085 This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the previous version of

the firmware before the firmware update execution. If the option to confirm the

previous version is selected, a notification is sent to the system manager and

the firmware update is done with the firmware files from the URL.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-46 SM

Firmware Size

086 Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the firmware data files during

the firmware update execution.

CERT: Macro Version 087

Displays the macro version of the NRS certification.

CERT: PAC Version 088

Displays the PAC version of the NRS certification.

CERT: ID2 Code

089 Displays ID2 for the NRS certification. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_).

Asterisks (*) indicate that no NRS certification exists.

CERT: Subject

090 Displays the common name of the NRS certification subject. CN = the following

17 bytes. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_). Asterisks (*) indicate that no

DESS exists.

CERT: Serial Number

091 Displays serial number for the NRS certification. Asterisks (*) indicate that no

DESS exists.

CERT: Issuer

092 Displays the common name of the issuer of the NRS certification. CN = the

following 30 bytes. Asterisks (*) indicate that no DESS exists.

CERT: St ExpTime

093 Displays the start time of the period for which the current NRS certification is

enabled.

CERT: End ExpTime

094 Displays the end time of the period for which the current NRS certification is

enabled.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-47 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

Ins Country

150

Select from the list the name of the country where Cumin-M is installed in the

machine. After selecting the country, you must also set the following SP codes

for Cumin-M:

SP5816-153

SP5816-154

SP5816-161

0: Japan, 1: USA, 2: Canada, 3: UK, 4: Germany, 5: France

6: Italy, 7: Netherlands, 8: Belgium, 9: Luxembourg, 10: Spain

Aut Line Detect

151

Press [Execute].

Setting this SP classifies the telephone line where Cumin-M is connected as

either dial-up or push type, so Cumin-M can automatically distinguish the

number that connects to the outside line.

The current progress, success, or failure of this execution can be

displayed with SP5816 152.

If the execution succeeded, SP5816 153 will display the result for

confirmation and SP5816 154 will display the telephone number for the

connection to the outside line.

Line Detect Rst

Displays a number to show the result of the execution of SP5816 151. Here is a

list of what the numbers mean.

152

0: Success

1: In progress (no result yet). Please wait.

2: Line abnormal

3: Cannot detect dial tone automatically

4: Line is disconnected

5: Insufficient electrical power supply

6: Line classification not supported

7: Error because fax transmission in progress – ioctl() occurred.

8: Other error occurred

9: Line classification still in progress. Please wait.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-48 SM

Dial/Push Select

153

This SP displays the classification (tone or pulse) of the telephone line to the

access point for Cumin-M. The numbered displayed (0 or 1) is the result of the

execution of SP5816 151. However, this setting can also be changed manually.

[0to1/0/1]

0: Tone Dialing Phone

1: Pulse Dialing Phone

Inside Japan "2" may also be displayed:

0: Tone Dialing Phone

1: Pulse Dialing Phone 10PPS

2: Pulse Dialing Phone 20PPS

Outline Phone #

154

The SP sets the number that switches to PSTN for the outside connection for

Cumin-M in a system that employs a PBX (internal line).

If the execution of SP5816-151 has succeeded and Cumin-M has

connected to the external line, this SP display is completely blank.

If Cumin-M has connected to an internal line, then the number of the

connection to the external line is displayed.

If Cumin-M has connected to an external line, a comma is displayed with

the number. The comma is inserted for a 2 sec. pause.

The number setting for the external line can be entered manually

(including commas).

Remove Service: PPP Recognition Timeout

155 SSP: Sets the length of the timeout for the Cumin-M connection to its access

point. The timeout is the time from when the modem sends the ATD to when it

receives the result code.

[1 to 65536 / 60 / 1 /step]

Dial Up User

156

Use this SP to set a user name for access to remote dial up. Follow these rules

when setting a user name:

Name length: Up to 32 characters

Spaces and # allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double

quotation marks (").

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-49 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

Dial Up Password

157

Use this SP to set a password for access to remote dial up. Follow these rules

when setting a user name:

Name length: Up to 32 characters

Spaces and # allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double

quotation marks (").

Phone Number

161 Use this SP to set the telephone number of the line where Cumin-M is

connected. This number is transmitted to and used by the Call Center to return

calls.

Limit: 24 numbers (numbers only)

Ans Timing Adj

162

When the Call Center calls out to a Cumin-M modem, it sends a repeating ID

tone (*#1#). This SP sets the line remains open to send these ID tones after the

number of the Cumin-M modem is dialed up and connected.

[0 to 24/ 1 /1 /step]

The actual amount of time is this setting x 2 sec. For example, if you set "2" the

line will remain open for 4 sec.

Access Point

163

This is the number of the dial-up access point for Cumin-M. If no setting is done

for this SP code, then a preset value (determined by the country selected) is

used.

Default: 0

Allowed: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters

Comm Line

164

This SP sets the connection conditions for the customer. This setting dedicates

the line to Cumin-M only, or sets the line for sharing between Cumin-M and a fax

unit.

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: Line shared by Cumin-M/Fax

1: Line dedicated to Cumin-M only

If this setting is changed, the copier must be cycled off and on.

SP5816 187 determines whether the off-hook button can be used

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-50 SM

to interrupt a Cumin-M transmission in progress to open the line for

fax transaction.

Modem Serial Number 173

This SP displays the serial number registered for the Cumin-M.

Lmt Resend Cncl

174

Normally, it is best to allow unlimited time for certification and ID2 update

requests, and for the notification that the certification has been completed.

However, Cumin-M generates charges based on transmission time for the

customer, so a limit is placed upon the time allowed for these transactions.

If these transactions cannot be completed within the allowed time, do this SP to

cancel the time restriction.

FAX TX Priority

187

This SP determines whether pushing the off-hook button will interrupt a

Cumin-M transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction. This SP

can be used only if SP5816-164 is set to "0".

[0 or 1/ 0 / - ] 0: Disable. Setting the fax unit off-hook does not interrupt a fax transaction in

progress. If the off-hook button is pushed during a Cumin-M transmission, the

button must be pushed again to set the fax unit on-hook after the Cumin-M

transmission has completed.

1: Enable. When Cumin-M shares a line with a fax unit, setting the fax unit

off-hook will interrupt a Cumin-M transmission in progress and open the line for

a fax transaction.

Polling Man Exc 200

Executes the polling test.

Instl: Condition

201

Displays a number that indicates the status of the NRS service device.

0: Neither the NRS device nor Cumin device are set.

1: The Cumin device is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this

status the Basil unit cannot answer a polling request.

2: The Cumin device is set. In this status the Basil unit cannot answer a polling

request.

3: The NRS device is being set. In this status the Cumin device cannot be set.

4: The NRS module has not started.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-51 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

Instl: ID# 202

Allows entry of the number of the request needed for the Cumin device.

Instl: Reference 203

Executes the inquiry request to the NRS GW URL.

Instl: Ref Rslt

Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with

SP5816-203.

204

0: Succeeded

1: Inquiry number error

2: Registration in progress

3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)

4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)

5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)

6: Communication error

7: Certification update error

8: Other error

9: Inquiry executing

Instl: Ref Section

205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in

answer to the inquiry request. Displayed only when the result is registered at the

GW URL.

Instl: Rgstltn 206

Executes Cumin Registration.

Instl: Rgstltn Rst

207

Displays a number that indicates the registration result.

0: Succeeded

2: Registration in progress

3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)

4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)

5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)

6: Communication error

7: Certification update error

8: Other error

9: Registration executing

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-52 SM

Instl Error Code

Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either

SP5816 204 or SP5816 207 was executed.

Cause Code Meaning

-11001 Chat parameter error

-11002 Chat execution error Illegal Modem

Parameter -11003 Unexpected error

-12002 Inquiry, registration attempted without acquiring

device status.

-12003 Attempted registration without execution of an

inquiry and no previous registration.

Operation Error,

Incorrect Setting

-12004 Attempted setting with illegal entries for

certification and ID2.

-2385 Attempted dial up overseas without the correct

international prefix for the telephone number.

-2387 Not supported at the Service Center

-2389 Database out of service

-2390 Program out of service

-2391 Two registrations for same device

-2392 Parameter error

-2393 Basil not managed

-2394 Device not managed

-2395 Box ID for Basil is illegal

-2396 Device ID for Basil is illegal

-2397 Incorrect ID2 format

208

Error Caused by

Response from GW

URL

-2398 Incorrect request number format

Instl Clear 209

Releases a machine from its Cumin setup.

Print Com Log 250

Prints the communication log.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-53 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5821 [NRS Address]

001 CSS-PI Device Sets the PI device code. After you change this

setting, you must turn the machine off and on.

002 RCG IP Address

Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote

Communication Gate) destination for call

processing at the remote service center.

[00000000h to FFFFFFFFh/1]

5824 NVRAM Upload

001 ( NVRAM Upload)

5825 NVRAM Download

001 ( NVRAM Download)

5828 [Network Setting] *CTL

050 1284 Compatibility (Centro)

Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility.

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]


052 ECP (Centro)

Enables or disables ECP Compatibility.

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]


3. This SP is activated only when SP5-828-50 is

set to "1".

065 Job Spooling

Enables/disables Job Spooling.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]


066 Job Spooling Clear: Start

Time

Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at

power on.

0: ON (Data is cleared)

1: OFF (Automatically printed)

069 Job Spooling (Protocol)

Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for

each protocol.

0: Validates

1: Invalidates

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-54 SM


bit0: LPR

bit1: FTP

bit2: IPP

bit3: SMB

bit4: BMLinkS

bit5: DIPRINT

bit6: (Reserved)

bit7: (Reserved)

090 TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON)

Enables or disables the Telnet protocol.

[ 0 or 1 / 1 / – ]

0: Disable, 1: Enable

091 Web (0: OFF 1: ON)

Enables or disables the Web operation.

[ 0 or 1 / 1 / – ]


Operation IPv6 Link Local Address

145

This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN

(802.11b) in the format:

"Link Local Address" + "Prefix Length"

The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits

each.

147 Operation IPv6 Status

Address 1


Address 2


Address 3


Address 4


Address 5

These SPs are the IPv6 status addresses (1 to 5)

referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN

(802.11b) in the format:

"Status Address" + "Prefix Length"

The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits

configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.

IPv6 Manual Setting Address

156 This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless

LAN (802.11b) in the format:

"Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-55 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es


The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits

each.

IPv6 Gateway Address

158 This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless

LAN (802.11b). The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8

blocks of 16 bits each.

5832 [HDD] HDD Initialization *CTL

001 Format ALL

002 HDD Formatting (IMH)

003 Format Thumbnail

004 Format Job Log

005 Format Font

006 Format User Info

007 Format Rec Mail

008 Format Sed Mail

009 Formatting DFU Data

010 Formatting All Log

011 Format Ridoc I/F

Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode only if

there is a hard disk error.

5839 [IEEE1394] *CTL

007 Cycle Master

DFU: Turns the cycle master function on/off.

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]

0: OFF, 1: ON

008 BCR mode DFU: Selects either ‘Standard’, 'IRM Color Copy', or

'Always Effective'.

009 IRM 1394a Check

DFU: Turns the IRM 1394a check on/off.

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

0: OFF, 1: ON

If the IRM is not defined as 1394a standard, its

node is used as IRM.

010 Unique ID

DFU

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]

0: OFF, 1: ON

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-56 SM

011 Logout

DFU: Prevents initiators from logging on or makes

initiators log off.

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]

0: OFF

(Prevents the initiators, having already logged on,

to log on if they try to log on.)

1: ON

(Makes initiators, having already logged on, to log

off if they try to log on.)

012 Login

DFU: Allows/disallows an initiator to exclusively log

on.

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

0: OFF (Disallows), 1: ON (Allows)

013 Login MAX

DFU: Specifies the maximum initiators able to log

on.

[0 to 63 / 8 / 1 /step]

5840 [IEEE 802.11b]

Channel MAX *CTL

[1 to 11 or 13 / 11 or 13 / 1 /step]

Europe: 1 to 13, default: 13

NA/ Asia: 1 to 11, default: 11

006 Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the

wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location.

The default settings are set for the maximum end of the range for each area.

Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels. DFU

Do not change the setting.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-57 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

Channel MIN *CTL

[ 1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]

Europe: 1 to 13

NA/ Asia: 1 to 11

007 Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the

wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location.

The default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area.

Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels. DFU

Do not change the setting.

WEP Key Select *CTL

[00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary]

00: Key #1

01: Key #2 (Reserved)



011

Selects the WEP key.

5841 [Supply Name]

001 Toner Name: Bk

002 Toner Name: C

003 Toner Name: Y

004 Toner Name: M

007 Org Stamp

*CTL

Specifies supply names. These appear on

the screen when the user presses the

Inquiry button in the user tools screen.

5842 [GWWS Analysis] DFU

Setting 1

Bit Groups

0 System & other groups (LSB)

1 Capture related

2 Certification related

3 Address book related

4 Machine management related

5 Output related (printing, delivery)

6 Repository related

001

This is a debugging tool. It sets

the debugging output mode of

each Net File process.

Default: Bit SW 1000 0000

7 Debug log output

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-58 SM

Setting 2

Bit Groups

0-6 Not used 002

Default: Bit SW 0000 0000

7

Log time stamp setting

0: Date/Hour/Minute/Second

1: Minute/Second/Msecond

5844 USB

Transfer Rate

001 Sets the speed for USB data transmission.

[Full Speed]

[Auto Change]

Vendor ID

002 Sets the vendor ID:

Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company

[0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] DFU

Product ID

003 Sets the product ID.

[0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] DFU

Device Release No.

004 Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display.

[0000 to 9999/1] DFU

Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number

recognized as the BCD.

[Delivery Server Setting] *CTL 5845

Provides items for delivery server settings.

FTP Port Num [ 0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step] 001

Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server.

Srv IP (Primary) Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

002 Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the

transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-59 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

Delivery Error Display Time [ 0 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step]

006 Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is

displayed when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile

application and an external device.

Srv IP (Secondary) Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

008 Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as

the secondary delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting

of the IP address without reference to the DNS setting.

Delivery Server Model [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]

009 Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.

0: Unknown, 1: SG1 Provided, 2: SG1 Package,

3: SG2 Provided, 4: SG2 Package

Delivery Svr Capability [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits

Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible

Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible

Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function

exists

Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists

Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists

Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists

010

Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6

is set to “0”)

Changes the capability

of the server that is

registered as an I/O

device.

Delivery Svr Capability (Ext) [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

Changes the capability of the server that is registered as an I/O device. 011 Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user)

Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link

Bit5 to 0: Not used

Svr Schm (Primary) 013

Specifies the scheme of the primary delivery server.

Svr Port Num (Pri) 014

Specifies the port number of the primary delivery server.

Srv URL Path (Pri) 015

Specifies the URL path of the primary delivery server.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-60 SM

Svr Schm (Sec) 016

Specifies the scheme of the secondary delivery server.

Svr Port Num (Sec) 017

Specifies the port number of the secondary delivery server.

Srv URL Path (Sec) 018

Specifies the URL path of the secondary delivery server.

CapSvr Schm 019

Specifies the scheme of the capture server.

CapSvr Port Num 020

Specifies the port number of the capture server.

CapSrv URL Path 021

Specifies the URL path of the s capture server.

5846 [UCS Settings] *CTL

Machine ID (For Delivery Server) Displays ID

001 Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value

is only displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the NIC MAC

or IEEE 1394 EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.

Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server) Clears ID

002 Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer

directory. Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server

is unstable. After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again automatically

by cycling the machine off and on.

Maximum Entries [150 to 999 / 150 / 1 /step]

003 Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.

If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is

cleared, and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.

Delivery Server Retry Timer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

006 Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the

delivery server address book.

Delivery Server Retry Times [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

007 Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the

delivery server address book.

Delivery Server Maximum Entries [200 to 999 / 200 / 1/step] 008

Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-61 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es


information managed by UCS.

LDAP Search Timeout [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step] 010

Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.

[AddrBMig (SD–> HDD)] Address Book Migration (SD–> HDD)

040

This SP moves the address book data from an SD card to the HDD. You

must cycle the machine off and on after executing this SP.

When you do this SP without a HDD, SC991 occurs.

We recommend that you back up all directory information to an

SD card with SP5846-051 before you execute this SP.

[AddrB Acl Info] Address Book Access Control List Information

041

This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a

basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is

powered on with the new HDD installed; the system automatically takes the

address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However, the

new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system

administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician

immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.

047 Initialize Local Addr Book Clears the local address book information,

including the user code.

048 Initialize Delivery Addr Book Clears the distribution address book

information, except the user code.

049 Initialize LDAP Addr Book Clears the LDAP address book information,

except the user code.

050 Initialize All Addr Book

Clears all directory information managed by

UCS, including all user codes.

Turn off and on the main power switch after

executing this SP.

051 Backup All Addr Book Uploads all directory information to the SD

card.

052 Restore All Addr Book Downloads all directory information from the

SD card.

Clear Backup Info 053

Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the service slot.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-62 SM


Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this machine.

This feature does not work if the card is write-protected.

After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, and then turn the

power off. Do not remove the SD card until the Power LED stops

flashing.

Search Option

060

This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local

address book.

Bit0: Checks both upper/lower case characters

Bit1: Japan only

Bit2 to 7: Not used

Compl Opt1

062

Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local

address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case and

sets the length of the password.

[0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]

This SP does not normally require adjustment.

This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up

a group password policy to control access to the address book.

Compl Opt2

063


address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to lower case and

defines the length of the password.

[0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]




Compl Opt3

064 Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local

address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to numbers and


SP Mode Tables

SM 5-63 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es


[0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]




Compl Opt4

065


address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to symbols and


[0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]




091 FTP Auth Port Setting

Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution

server address book that is used in the

identification mode.

[0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step]

094 Encryption Stat Shows the status of the encryption function for

the address book data.

[Web Service] *CTL

5848 SP5848-1 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting.

Setting of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.

ac: Access Control

ac: Netfile (Lower 4 bits only) Bit switch settings.

001 0000: No access control

0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder. Access and deliveries from Scan

Router have no effect on capture.

004 ac: UD (only Lower 4 bits)

005 ac: For Cherry (only Lower 4

bits)

007 ac: Log Fax (Lower 4 bits)

009 ac: Job Ctrl (Lower 4 bits)

Switches access control on and off.

0000: No access control

0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-64 SM

011 ac: Device Management

(Lower 4 bits)

022 ac: Uadmin (Lower 4bits)

210 Log Type: Job1

211 Log Type: Job2

212 Log Type: Access

213 Primary Srv

214 Secondary Srv

215 Start Time

Displays the log server settings.

These can be adjusted with the Web Image

Monitor.

216 Interval Time

Specifies the transmit interval.

[1 to 1000 / 1 / 1 hour/step]

This SP is activated only when SP5848-217 is

set to "2 (Transmit periodically)".

217 Timing

Selects the transmit timing.

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]

0: No Transmit, 1: Transmit one by one

2: Transmit periodically

[Installation Date] 5849

Displays or prints the installation date of the machine.

001 Display The “Counter Clear Day” has been changed to “Installation

Date” or “Inst. Date”.

002 Print

Determines whether the installation date is printed on the

printout for the total counter.

[0 or 1/ 1 / 1/step]

0: No Print, 1: Print

5851 [Bluetooth]

001 Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key.

0 :Public, 1: Private

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-65 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

[Remote ROM Update] 5856 Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel cable when

updating the remote ROM.

002 Local Port *CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: Not allowed

1: Allowed

5857 [Debug Log Save] *CTL

On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF) 0: ON, 1: OFF

001 Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured

until this feature is switched on.

Target (2: HDD 3: SD) 2: HDD, 3: SD Card

002 Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the conditions

set with SP5-858 are satisfied.

[ 2 to 3 / 2 / 1 /step]

Save to HDD DFU

005 Saves the debug log in memory to the HDD.

A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the

HDD. Up to 4MB can be copied to the HDD. 4 MB segments can be copied one

by one to the HDD.

006 Save to SD Card

009 HDD to SD Latest (Latest 4 MB)

010 HDD to SD Any (Latest 4 MB Any Key)

011 Erase HDD Debug

012 Erase SD Debug

013 Dsply-SD Space

014 SD to SD Latest (Latest 4 MB)

015 SD to SD Any (Latest 4 MB Any Key)

016 Make HDD Debug

017 Make SD Debug

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-66 SM

[Debug Log Save: SC] *CTL

5858 These SP’s select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the

destination selected by SP5857-2.

SP5858-3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC

error codes.

001 Engine SC Error

Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes

generated by copier engine errors.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]

0: OFF, 1: ON

002 Controller SC Error

Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes

generated by GW controller errors.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]

0: OFF, 1: ON

003 Any SC Error [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]

004 Jam

Turns on/off the debug save for jam errors.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]

0: OFF, 1: ON

5859 [Debug Log Save Key] *CTL

001 Key 1

002 Key 2

003 Key 3

004 Key 4

005 Key 5

006 Key 6

007 Key 7

008 Key 8

009 Key 9

010 Key 10

These SP’s allow you to set up to 10 keys for log

files for functions that use common memory on the

controller board.

[ –9999999 to 9999999 / 0 / – ]

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-67 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5860 [SMTP/POP3/IMAP4] *CTL

Partial Mail Receive Timeout [1 to 168 / 72 / – ]

020 Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during

reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is

not received during this prescribed time.

MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance [0 to 1 / 1 / – ]

021 Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.

0: No, 1: Yes

SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement [0 to 1 / 0 / – ]

022 Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the

validated account after the SMTP server is validated.

0: No. “From” item not switched. 1: Yes. “From" item switched.

SMTP Auth. Direct Setting [0 or 1 / 0 / – ]

025

Selects the authentication method for SMPT.

Bit switch: Bit 0: LOGIN

Bit 1: PLAIN

Bit 2: CRAM MD5

Bit 3: DIGEST MD5

Bit 4 to 7: Not used

This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by

UP mode.

5866 [E-mail Report] Not Used

Report Validity [ 0 or 1 / 0 / – ] 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled 001

Enables or disables the E-mail alert function.

Add Date Field *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / – ] 0: Not add, 1: Add 005

Adds or does not add the date field to the header of the alert mail.

5869 [RAM Disk Setting] Not Used

PDL Storage GWINIT [0 to 255 / 4 / 1 /step] 002

Specifies the RAM disk storage size for PDL.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-68 SM

5870 [Common Key Info Writing]

001 Writing *CTL

Writes to flash ROM the common proof for

validating the device for NRS

specifications.

003 Initialize *CTL Formats the common proof area of the

flash ROM. FA

5873 [SD Card Appli Move]

001 Move Exec

This SP copies the application programs from the

original SD card in the SD card slot 3 to an SD card

in the SD card slot 2.

002 Undo Exec

This SP copies back the application programs from

an SD card in the SD Card Slot 3 to the original SD

card in the SD card slot 2. Use this menu when you

have mistakenly copied some programs by using

"Move Exec" (SP5873-1).

5875 [SC Auto Reboot]

001 Reboot Mode *CTL

Enables or disables the automatic reboot function

when an SC error occurs.

[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]

0: The machine reboots automatically when the

machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error

code. If the same SC occurs again, the machine does

not reboot.

1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error

occurs.

The reboot is not executed for Type A, B or C SC

codes.

002 Reboot Method *CTL

Selects the reboot method for SC.

[0 or 1 / 0 / -]

0: Manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-69 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5878 [Option Setup]

001 Option Setup

Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit.

Press "EXECUTE" on the operation panel.

Then turn the machine off and on.

5881 [Delete Fixed Sent]

001 Delete Fixed Sent Deletes the fixed form sentence.

5884 [Factini] Factory Initial Setting

001 Value Restore

Restores the factory settings to the machine.

This SP restores the settings of SP1001, 1002, 1922 and

3002.

5886 [Permit ROM Update] DFU

001

This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: On, 1: Off

[Plug & Play] Plug & Play Name Selection

5907

Selects the brand name and production name for the Plug and Play function.

These names are registered in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM becomes defective,

these names should be re-registered. Use the right-arrow or left-arrow key to

scroll through the list of brand names. To select a brand name, press the "#" key.

An asterisk (*) indicates which manufacture is currently selected.

001 Plug & Play *BCU

[ 0 to 5 / 0 / 1 /step ] FA

0: RICOH: MP C1500/615C

1: SAVIN: SGC 1506

2: Gestetner: MPC1500/GS106

3: NRG: MP C1500SP

4: infotec ISC 615G

5: LANIER: MPC1500sp/LD2015c

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-70 SM

5913 [Switchover Permission Time]

Print Application Timer

002 Sets the length of time to elapse before allowing another application to take

control of the display when the application currently controlling the display is

not operating because a key has not been pressed.

[3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second/step]

5974 [Cherry Server]

001

Selects which version of the Scan Router application program, “Light” or “Full

(Professional)”, is installed.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: Light version (supplied with this machine)

1: Full version (optional)

[Device Setting]

5985 The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this SP

to enable and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB

functions built into the controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".

001 On Board NIC

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: Disable, 1: Enable, 2: Function limitation

When the "Function limitation" is set, "On board NIC" is

limited only for the NRS or LDAP/NT authentication.

Other network applications than NRS or LDAP/NT

authentication are not available when this SP is set

to "2". Even you can change the initial settings of

those network applications, settings does not work

actually.

002 On Board USB [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]


SP Mode Tables

SM 5-71 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5987 [Mech. Counter] Mechanical Counter Device

0: OFF / 1: ON

This SP detects that a mechanical counter device is

removed. If it is detected, SC610 occurs.

This SP is active only for NA model.

5988 [Contract Form] Contract Form Setting SSP

001 Maintenance ID [0 to 255 / 1 / 1 /tep]

5989 [Parts PM] SSP

001 On/Off

Enables or disables the PM parts alarm.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: Enable, 1: Disable

[SP Print Mode] SMC Print

5990 In the SP mode, press Copy Window to move to the copy screen, select the

paper size, then press Start. Select A4/LT (Sideways) or larger to ensure that all

the information prints. Press SP Window to return to the SP mode, select the

desired print, and press "EXECUTE".

001 All (Data List)

002 SP (Mode Data List)

003 User Program Data

004 Logging Data

005 Diagnostic Report

006 Non-Default (Prints only SP’s set to values other than defaults.)

007 NIB Summary

021 Copier User Program

022 Scanner SP

023 Scanner User Program

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-72 SM

5.2.6 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS)

6006*

ADF Adjustment ( ADF Image Adjustment)

Available menus depend on the machine model and its

configuration.

StoS/Front Regist [–7 to +9.5 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

001 Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the front side of the original, for ADF

mode. Use the key to select “+” or “–” before entering the value.

Leading Regist [–5.0 to +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

002 Adjusts the leading edge registration for ADF mode. Use the key to select

“+” or “–” before entering the value.

Trailing Erase [–3.0 to +3.0 / –1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

003 Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin for ADF mode. Use the key to select

“+” or “–” before entering the value.

StoS/Rear Regist [–7 to +9.5 / 0.0 / 0.5 mm/step]

004 Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the rear side of duplex originals, for ADF

mode. Use the key to select “+” or “–” before entering the value.

Sub-scan Magnif [–9.0 to +9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step] 005

Adjust the sub-scan magnification for the ADF.

Original Curl Adj [0 = No / 1 = Yes]

006 Enables or disables the skew adjustment for the reverse sides of originals.

When you enable SP6-006-6, adjust the distance of the skew adjustment (SP

6-006-7).

Skew Correction [–20 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

007 Specifies the distance of the skew adjustment. SP6006-7 is effective when you

enable SP6006-6 (ADF Adjustment [Original Curl Adj]).

6009 ADF Free Run

001 Performs an ADF free run. Press "ON" to start; press "OFF" to stop.

[Stamp Position Adj.] Fax Stamp Position Adjustment 6010

Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals.

6010 1 Stamp Position Adj. *CTL [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-73 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

6901 Display ADF/APS

001 Displays the status of the ADF original size sensors ( ADF/ APS Sensor

Output Display).

6910* ADF Shading Time [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 s/step]

001

Adjusts the interval used for the shading processing in the ADF mode. Light and

heat in the room may affect the scanner response. Reduce this setting if copy

quality indicates that the white level is drifting during ADF copy jobs.

5.2.7 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG)

[Total Counter] 7002

Displays the total print count (number of printouts) for the selected mode.

001 Color Counter

002 Black Counter

003 GJ Unit Clr

004 GJ Unit Bk

*CTL

[0 to 99999999 / - / 1 page/step]

These counters are cleared with SP7959-1.

[User Cleaning #] 7212

Displays the user cleaning job number for the selected print head.

001 K1

002 K2

003 C

004 M

005 Y

*CTL

[0 to 999999 / - / 1/step]


[User Refresh #] 7213

Displays the user refreshing job number for the selected print head.

001 K1

002 K2

003 C

004 M

005 Y

*CTL

[0 to 999999 / - / 1/step]


SP Mode Tables

B229 5-74 SM

[Air Rls Fill #] Air Release and Ink Filling Counter

7214 Displays the air releasing job number for the selected print head. This SP

counts up the number of the air releasing job other than the jobs that are done

with SP7215-xxx and 7219-xxx.

001 K1

002 K2

003 C

004 M

005 Y

*CTL

[0 to 999999 / - / 1/step]


[Aie Detec #] Air Releasing Detection Counter

7215 Displays the air releasing job number for the selected print head. This SP

counts up the number of the air releasing job other than the jobs that are done

with SP7214-xxx and 7219-xxx.

001 K1

002 K2

003 C

004 M

005 Y

*CTL

[0 to 30000 / - / 1/step]

[Auto Cleaning #]

7216

Displays the automatic cleaning job number for the selected print head.

The automatic cleaning is done as follows:

4. when the counter of SP7222-xxx reaches 4240000nl (during job) or

3816000nl (job end).

5. when the counter of SP7302-xxx reaches 336 pages (job end).

001 K1

002 K2

003 C

004 M

005 Y

*CTL

[0 to 999999 / - / 1/step]


SP Mode Tables

SM 5-75 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

[Idle Cleaning #]

7217 Displays the idle cleaning job number for the selected print head. The idle

cleaning is done when the machine does not get any job for more than 7 days

and less than 3 months.

001 K1

002 K2

003 C

004 M

005 Y

*CTL

[0 to 20000 / - / 1/step]

These counters are cleared with

SP7959-1.

[Idle Refresh #] 7218 Displays the idle refresh job number for the selected print head. The idle refresh

is done when the machine does not get any job for more than 3 months.

001 K1

002 K2

003 C

004 M

005 Y

*CTL

[0 to 100 / - / 1/step]


SP7959-1.

[Idle Air Rls #]

7219 Displays the idle air releasing job number for the selected print head. The idle

air releasing is done when the machine does not get any job for more than 1

month and less than 3 months.

001 K1

002 K2

003 C

004 M

005 Y

*CTL

[0 to 300 / - / 1/step]


SP Mode Tables

B229 5-76 SM

[Waste Ink Count] 7221

Displays the amount of the collected ink in the rear and front ink collection tank.

Rear *CTL [0 to 800000000/ - / 1 nl/step]

001

The ink collection bottle (rear) near full is detected when this counter reaches

the value specified with SP2-507-1 or the ink collection tank full sensor detects

"ON".

The ink collection bottle (rear) full is detected when this counter reaches

"20000000nl (20ml)".

Front *CTL [0 to 400000000/ - / 1 nl/step]

002 The ink collection bottle (front) near full is detected when this counter reaches

"210000000nl (210ml)".

The ink collection bottle (front) full is detected when this counter reaches

"210300000nl (210.3ml)".

[Mist Count]

7222 Displays the ink mist counter. This counter counts "1" with the formula of

calculating ink mist.

These counters are references for the automatic cleaning. These counters are

cleared after the automatic cleaning has been done.

001 K1

002 K2

003 C

004 M

005 Y

*CTL

[0 to 8000000 / - / 1 nl/step]

[Cleaning #] 7223

Displays the total cleaning job number for the selected print head.

001 K1

002 K2

003 C

004 M

005 Y

*CTL

[0 to 999999 / - / 1/step]


SP7804-2 and 7959-1.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-77 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

[Refresh #] 7224

Displays the total refresh job number for the selected print head.

001 K1

002 K2

003 C

004 M

005 Y

*CTL

[0 to 999999 / - / 1/step]


SP7804-2 and 7959-1.

[AirRlsFill Total] Air Release and Ink Filling Total Counter

7225 Displays the total air releasing job number for the selected print head.

This counter counts "1" when either of SP7214-xxx, SP7215-xxx or SP7219-xxx

is counted.

001 K1

002 K2

003 C

004 M

005 Y

*CTL

[0 to 999999 / - / 1/step]


SP7804-2 and 7959-1.

[Total Page Count] Total Page Counter

7302 Displays the total fed paper number for the selected print head.

This counter counts "1" when less than A4LEF size is fed and counts "1.4" when

bigger than A4LEF size is fed. These counters are references for the automatic

cleaning.

001 K1

002 K2

003 C

004 M

005 Y

*CTL

[0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 page/step]

These counters are cleared after

the auto cleaning is done.

7401* [Counter–SC Total] *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

001 Displays how many times SC codes are generated.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-78 SM

[Filler Posn SC #] Tank Full Lever Position Error SC Counter

7402 Displays the number of the SC202 occurrences for the selected print head.

SC202 occurs when the machine fails to memorize the position of the tank full

lever.

001 K1

002 K2

003 C

004 M

005 Y

*CTL

[0 to 10000 / - / 1/step]

7403 [SC History]

001 Latest

002 Latest 1

003 Latest 2

004 Latest 3

005 Latest 4

006 Latest 5

007 Latest 6

008 Latest 7

009 Latest 8

010 Latest 9

*CTL

Logs the SC codes detected.

The 10 most recently detected SC Codes

are displayed on the screen.

L: Asset line

V: Assert location

F: Assert file

[Maint Mot SC #] Maintenance Unit Motor HP Sensor Error Counter

7404 Displays the number of the SC200 occurrences. SC200 occurs when the

machine detects the home position error for the maintenance unit.

001 *CTL [0 to 10000 / - / 1/step]

7502* [Counter–Paper Jam] [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

7502 1 Displays the total number of paper jams.

7503* [Counter–Orgn Jam] [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

7503 1 Displays the total number of original jams,

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-79 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

[Paper Jam/Loc] [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] 7504*

Displays the total number of the paper jams classified by timing and location.

At Power On 7504 1

Paper jam occurs at power on.

Non Feed Tray1 7504 3

Paper does not reach the first registration sensor (from the paper tray1).

Non Feed 100 Bypass 7504 4

Paper does not reach the first registration sensor (from the by-pass tray).

Non Feed Bypass

7504 5 Paper does not reach the second registration sensor (from the one-sheet

by-pass tray).

Non Feed Tray2

7504 6 Paper does not reach the vertical transport sensor or duplex exit sensor (from

the optional paper tray2).

Non Feed1 Tray3

7504 7 Paper does not reach the vertical transport sensor (from the optional paper

tray3).

Non Feed2 Tray3 7504 8

Paper does not reach the duplex exit sensor (from the optional paper tray3).

Off EngEntrance

7504 10 Paper does not reach the engine entrance sensor (from other than bypass

tray).

Off EngRegist SN

7504 11 Paper does not reach the second registration sensor (from other than bypass

tray).

Off EngExit 7504 12

Paper does not reach the engine exit sensor.

Off IntChange SN 7504 13

Paper does not reach the junction gate sensor.

Off Exit SN 7504 14

Paper does not reach the paper exit sensor.

Off FedRegist SN

7504 15 Paper does not reach the first registration sensor (from the duplex unit or

optional paper tray unit).

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-80 SM

Off DupEnt SN 7504 19

Paper does not reach the duplex entrance sensor.

Off DupWait SN 7504 20

Paper does not reach the duplex wait sensor.

Off DupRevers SN 7504 21

Paper does not reach the duplex inverter sensor.

Off VertOP SN 7504 22

Paper does not reach the relay sensor.

Off DupExit SN 7504 23

Paper does not reach the duplex exit sensor.

Off FedRegist SN 7504 53

Paper is caught at the first registration sensor.

On Bypass SN

7504 55 Paper from the one-sheet by-pass tray is caught at the engine entrance

sensor.

On Jam Tray2 7504 56

Paper from the tray2 (optional paper try unit) is caught at the relay sensor.

On Jam Tray3

7504 57 Paper from the tray3(optional paper try unit) is caught at the vertical transport

sensor at the optional unit.

On EngEnt SN

7504 60 Paper from other than one-sheet by-pass tray is caught at the engine

entrance sensor.

On EngRegist SN 7504 61

Paper is caught at the second registration sensor.

On EngExit SN 7504 62

Paper is caught at the engine exit sensor.

On IntChange SN 7504 63

Paper is caught at the junction gate sensor.

On MFExit SN 7504 64

Paper is caught at the paper exit sensor.

On DupEnt SN 7504 69

Paper is caught at the duplex entrance sensor.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-81 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

On DupWait SN 7504 70

Paper is caught at the duplex wait sensor.

On DupRevers SN 7504 71

Paper is caught at the duplex inverter sensor.

On VertOP SN 7504 72

Paper from the duplex unit is caught at the relay sensor.

On DupExit VerSN1 7504 73

Paper from the duplex unit is caught at the duplex exit sensor.

On DupExit VerSN2 7504 74

Paper from the optional paper tray unit is caught at the duplex exit sensor.

[Original Jam/Loc] [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

7505* Displays the total number of the original jams on the ADF that have occurred

at a certain timing or at a certain location.

At Power ON 7505 1

Paper jam occurs at power on.

Off DF Regist SN 7505 3

The original does not reach the first registration sensor.

Off DF Exit SN 7505 4

The original does not reach the exit sensor.

Off DF Revers SN 7505 5

The original does not reach the inverter sensor.

On DF Regist SN 7505 53

The original is caught at the first registration sensor.

On DF Exit SN 7505 54

The original is caught at the exit sensor.

On DF Revers SN 7505 55

The original is caught at the inverter sensor.

7506 [Paper Jam/ Size] Jam Counter: Paper Size

7506 5 A4 LEF

7506 6 A5 LEF

7506 14 B5 LEF

*CTL Displays the number of jams according to

the paper size.

[ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-82 SM

7506 38 LT LEF

7506 44 HLT LEF

7506 132 A3 SEF

7506 133 A4 SEF

7506 134 A5 SEF

7506 141 B4 SEF

7506 142 B5 SEF

7506 160 DLT SEF

7506 164 LG SEF

7506 166 LT SEF

7506 172 HLT SEF

7506 255 Others

7507* [Disply-P Jam Hist] Display: Paper Jam History

7507 1 Last

7507 2 Latest 1

7507 3 Latest 2

7507 4 Latest 3

7507 5 Latest 4

7507 6 Latest 5

7507 7 Latest 6

7507 8 Latest 7

7507 9 Latest 8

7507 10 Latest 9

Displays the copy jam history (the most recent 10 jams)

Sample Display:

CODE:007

SIZE:05h

TOTAL:0000334

DATE:DEC 1 09:44/06 2005

where:

CODE is the SP7504-*** number (see above.)

SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.

TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7003)

DATE is the date the jams occurred.

Size Code Size Code Size Code

A4 (S) 05 A3 (L) 84 DLT (L) A0

A5 (S) 06 A4 (L) 85 LG (L) A4

B5 (S) 0E A5 (L) 86 LT (L) A6

LT (S) 26 B4 (L) 8D HLT (L) AC

HLT (S) 2C B5 (L) 8E Others FF

[Disply-O Jam Hist] Display: Original Jam History

7508* Displays the original jam history of the transfer unit in groups of 10, starting with

the most recent 10 jams. Display contents are as follows:

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-83 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

CODE is the SP7-505-*** number.

SIZE is the paper size code in hex. (See “Paper Size Hex Codes” below.)

TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7-003)

DATE is the date the previous jam occurred

1* Latest

2* Latest 1

3* Latest 2

4* Latest 3

5* Latest 4

6* Latest 5

7* Latest 6

8* Latest 7

9* Latest 8

10* Latest 9

Sample Display:

CODE: 007

SIZE: 05h

TOTAL: 0000334

DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000

[Total Decap Time]

7703 Displays the time when the print head has not been covered. This SP is the

threshold for the auto cleaning. This counter is cleared after the auto cleaning.

7703 1 *CTL [0 to 1000000 / - / 1 sec/step]

[Ink Condition] 7704

Displays the ink cartridge condition.

7704 1 K1

7704 2 K2

7704 3 C

7704 4 M

7704 5 Y

*CTL

[0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: Ink remains in the both ink cartridge

and sub-tank.

1: Ink remains only in the sub-tank. (No

ink in the ink cartridge) However,

printing is still possible.

2: Ink is not enough to print because the

sub-tank is nearly empty. "Ink empty"

message appears on the LCD

3: Ink is empty.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-84 SM

[Ink Consumption]

7705 Displays the amount of the ink consumption. This counter is cleared after ink

filling up.

7705 1 K1

7705 2 K2

7705 3 C

7705 4 M

7705 5 Y

*CTL [0 to 4000000 / 0 / 1 nl/step]

[Ink Cons Near End] Ink Consumption After Ink Near End

7706 Displays the amount of the ink consumption after the ink near end has been

detected. This counter is cleared after ink filling up.

7706 1 K1

7706 2 K2

7706 3 C

7706 4 M

7706 5 Y

*CTL [0 to 4000000 / 0 / 1 nl/step]

[Memory/ Version/ PN] 7801

Displays the part number and version of all ROMs in the machine.

-001 Memory/ Version/ PN

[PM Counter] 7803

Displays the PM counter for each PM part.

7803 1 Paper

7803 2 Maintenance Unit

7803 3 Charge Roller

7803 4 Transport Belt

7803 5 Waste Ink Tank

7803 6 Roller (Bypass)

7803 7 Roller (Tray1)



*CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-85 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

[PM Count. Reset] 7804

Clears the PM counter for each PM part.

7804 1 Paper *CTL This clears the counter of SP7803-1.

7804 2 Maintenance Unit *CTL

This clears the counter of SP7803-2,

SP7223-001 to -005, SP7224-001 to -005

and SP7225-001 to -005.

7804 3 Charge Roller *CTL This clears the counter of SP7803-3.

7804 4 Transport Belt *CTL This clears the counter of SP7803-4.

7804 5 Waste Ink Tank *CTL This clears the counter of SP7-221-001,

SP7-803-005 and SP7-941-001

7804 6 Roller (Bypass) *CTL This clears the counter of SP7803-6.

7804 7 Roller (Tray1) *CTL This clears the counter of SP7803-7.



7804 10 Head Unit *CTL DFU

7807 [Reset–SC/Jam Counters]

7807 1

Resets the SC, paper, original, and total jam counters. When the program ends

normally, the message "Completed" is displayed. SP 7807 1 does not reset the

following logs: SP 7507 (Display-Paper Jam History) and SP 7508

(Display-Original Jam History).

[MF Error Counter] Japan Only 7826

Displays the number of counts requested of the card/key counter.

001 Error Total

A request for the count total failed at power on. This

error will occur if the device is installed but

disconnected.

002 Error Staple

The request for a staple count failed at power on.

This error will occur if the device is installed but

disconnected.

[MF Error Counter Clear] 7827

Press Execute to reset to 0 the values of SP7826. Japan Only

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-86 SM

7832* [Display-Self-Diag]

7832 1 Displays the SC codes and the number of their occurrences. Each number is in

the range of 0 to 9999.

[Resident Memory] 7836

Displays the contents of the memory on the controller board.

7852 [ADF Scan Glass]

Dust Counter [0 to 9999 / - / 1/step]

7852 1 Counts the number of occurrences (0 to 65,535) when dust was detected on the

scanning glass of the ADF. Counting is done only if SP4020 1 (ADF Scan Glass

Dust Check) is switched on. Memory All Clear (SP5801) resets this counter to

zero

Clear Counter [0 to 9999 / - / 1/step] 7852 2

Clears the total counter of the dust diction.

[Cart Replace #] Ink Cartridge Replacement Counter 7853

Displays the replacement time of the ink cartridge for each color.

7853 1 K

7853 2 C

7853 3 M

7853 4 Y

*CTL [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1/step]

[Wst Tnk Rep #] Ink Collection Tank Replacement Counter

7854 Displays the replacement time of the ink collection tank at front side or rear

side.

78541 Rear [0 to 100 / - / 1/step]

78542 Front [0 to 100 / - / 1/step]

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-87 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

[Assert Info] 7901 Records the location where a problem is detected in the program. The data

stored in this SP is used for problem analysis. DFU

7901 1 File Name

7901 2 Number of Lines

7901 3 Location

7931 Ink Info: BK

7932 Ink Info: M

7933 Ink Info: C

7934 Ink Info: Y

–1 Model ID Displays the model ID that is used in RAPI.

–2 Cartridge Ver Displays the cartridge version.

Displays the brand ID.

–3 Brand ID 01H: RICOH

02H: Savin

03H: NRG

04H: Gestetner

05H: Nashuatec

06H: Rex

07H: Danka-Infotec

08H: Lanie

Displays the area ID.

-004 Area ID 01H: Japan

02H: NA

03H: EU

04H: ASIA

05H: CHINA

06H: LA

-005 Production ID Displays the production ID.

Displays the color ID.

-006 Color ID 01H: Bk

02H: C

03H: M

04H: Y

-007 Maintenance ID Displays the maintenance ID. Japan Only?

-008 New

Displays the information of the new cartridge.

64H: New unit

00H: Used unit

-009 Recycle Count Displays how many times a cartridge is recycled.

-010 Product Date Displays the production date and model number.

-011 Serial No Displays the serial number.

-012 Ink Remaining Displays the amount of the ink remaining.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-88 SM

7931 Ink Info: BK

7932 Ink Info: M

7933 Ink Info: C

7934 Ink Info: Y

-013 EDP Code Displays the EDP (type) code.

-014 Ink End Displays the history of the ink end.

-015 Ink Refill Displays the information of the refill.

-016 Total Count:Start

[0 to 9999999 / - / 1/step]

Displays the total counter for B/W printing mode when

the new cartridge is installed.

-017 Color Count:Start

[0 to 9999999 / - / 1/step]

Displays the total counter for color printing mode

when the new cartridge is installed.

-018 Total Count:End

[0 to 9999999 / - / 1/step]

Displays the total counter for B/W printing mode when

the new cartridge is installed.

-019 Color Count:End

[0 to 9999999 / - / 1/step]

Displays the total counter for color printing mode

when the new cartridge is installed.

-020 Install Date Displays the installation date.

-021 Ink End Date Displays the ink end date.

-022 ID Chip Ink Cons Displays the amount of the ink consumption.

-023 Ink Cons: Mirror1 This SP is the mirroring SP of SP793x-021.

-024 Ink Cons: Mirror2 This SP is the mirroring SP of SP793x-021.

-025 Due Date Displays the guarantee date for product quality.

-026 Initial Fill # Displays how many times the initial ink filling up is

done.

-027 Refresh # Displays how many times the refresh mode is done.

-028 Cleaning # Displays how many times the cleaning mode is done.

-029 Air Rls Fill # Displays how many times the air release mode is

done.

7935 Ink Info Log: BK

7936 Ink Info Log: M

7937 Ink Info Log: C

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-89 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

7938 Ink Info Log: Y

-001 1: Serial No Displays the serial number of the current ink cartridge.

-002 1: Install Date Displays the date when the current ink cartridge is

installed.

-003 1: Total Count

Displays the total counter when the current ink

cartridge is installed.

[0 to 99999999 / - / 1/step]

-004 2: Serial No Displays the serial number of the previous ink

cartridge.

-005 2: Install Date Displays the date when the previous ink cartridge is

installed.

-006 2: Total Count

Displays the total counter when the previous ink

cartridge is installed.

[0 to 99999999 / - / 1/step]

-007 3: Serial No Displays the serial number of the one before the

previous ink cartridge.

-008 3: Install Date Displays the date when t the one before the previous

ink cartridge is installed.

-009 3: Total Count

Displays the total counter when the one before the

previous ink cartridge is installed.

[0 to 99999999 / - / 1/step]


third-previous ink cartridge.

-011 4: Install Date Displays the date when the one before the

third-previous ink cartridge is installed.

-012 4: Total Count


third-previous ink cartridge is installed.

[0 to 99999999 / - / 1/step]


fourth-previous ink cartridge.

-014 5: Install Date Displays the date when the one before the

fourth-previous ink cartridge is installed.

-015 5: Total Count


fourth-previous ink cartridge is installed.

[0 to 99999999 / - / 1/step]

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-90 SM

7935 Ink Info Log: BK

7936 Ink Info Log: M

7937 Ink Info Log: C

7938 Ink Info Log: Y

7959 [GJ Eng Count. Reset] GelJet Engine Counter Reset

Clears the following counters related with GJ engine unit.

001

SP7-002-003

SP7-002-004

SP7-212-001 to 005

SP7-213-001 to 005

SP7-214-001 to 005

SP7-215-001 to 005

SP7-216-001 to 005

SP7-217-001 to 005

SP7-218-001 to 005

SP7-219-001 to 005

SP7-221-002

SP7-223-001 to 005

SP7-224-001 to 005

SP7-225-001 to 005

SP7-402-001 to 005

SP7-404-001

SP7-803-002

SP7-803-003

SP7-803-004

5.2.8 SP8-XXX (HISTORY)

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as

sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in

combination with others, can provide useful information.

SP Numbers What They Do

SP8-211toSP8-216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.

SP8-401toSP8-406 The number of pages printed from the document server

SP8-691toSP8-696 The number of pages sent from the document server

Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

How is the document server actually being used?

What application is using the document server most frequently?

What data in the document server is being reused?

Most of the SP’s in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation

(the mode of operation is referred to as an “application”). Before reading the Group 8

Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-91 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

Prefixes What it means

T: Total: (Grand Total). Grand total of the items counted for all applications

(C, F, P, etc.)..

C: Copy application.

F: Fax application.

P: Print application.

S: Scan application.

Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each

application when the job was not stored on the

document server.

L: Local storage

(document server)

Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server.

The L: counters work differently case by case.

Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on the

document server; this can be in document server

mode (from the document server window), or from

another mode, such as from a printer driver or by

pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode

window. Sometimes, they include occasions when

the user uses a file that is already on the document

server. Each counter will be discussed case by case.

O:

Other applications

(external network

applications, for

example)

Refers to network applications such as Web Image

Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software

Development Kit) will also be counted with this group

in the future.

The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying

them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of

abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not

understand.

Key for Abbreviations

Abbreviation What it means

/ “By”, e.g. “T:Jobs/Apl” = Total Jobs “by” Application

> More (2> “2 or more”, 4> “4 or more”

AddBook Address Book

Apl Application

B/W Black & White

Bk Black

C Cyan

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-92 SM


ColCr Color Create

ColMode Color Mode

Comb Combine

Comp Compression

Deliv Delivery

DesApl Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print)

used to store the job on the document server, for example.

Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.

Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides

Emul Emulation

FC Full Color

FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)

Full Bleed No Margins

GenCopy Generation Copy Mode

GPC

Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does

not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts

up by the number that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job,

the counter counts up 11-10 =1)

IFax Internet Fax

ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g.

border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.

K Black (YMCK)

LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.

LSize Large (paper) Size

Mag Magnification

MC One color (monochrome)

NRS

New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor

machines remotely. “NRS” is used overseas, “CSS” is used in

Japan.

Org Original for scanning

OrgJam Original Jam

Palm 2

Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows

print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the

network, and allows files to moved around, combined, and

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-93 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es


converted to different formats.

PC Personal Computer

PGS

Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex

pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if

the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.

PJob Print Jobs

Ppr Paper

PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam

PrtPGS Print Pages

R

Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2

only. This machine is under development and currently not

available.

Rez Resolution

SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)

Scn Scan

Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.

S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail

SMC SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters are

recorded in the SMC report.

Svr Server

TonEnd Toner End

TonSave Toner Save

TXJob Send, Transmission

YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan

YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black

All of the Group 8 SP’s are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear.

8 001 T:Total Jobs *CTL

8 002 C:Total Jobs *CTL

8 003 F:Total Jobs *CTL

8 004 P:Total Jobs *CTL

These SP’s count the number of times each

application is used to do a job.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

The L: counter is the total number of

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-94 SM

8 005 S:Total Jobs *CTL

8 006 L:Total Jobs *CTL

times the other applications are used to

send a job to the document server, plus

the number of times a file already on

the document server is used.

These SP’s reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of

pages processed.

When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.

Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.

Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer

engineer using the SP modes are not counted.

When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the

job is counted at the time when either “Delete Data” or “Specify Output” is specified.

A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.

When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L: counter

does not (the document server is not used).

A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the

broadcast are not counted separately).

A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their

destinations. If one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not be

counted until the transmission has been completed.

A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.

The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.

When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments, and

when a print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also increments.

When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L:

counters both increment.

When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments.

When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the

document server, only the L: counter increments.

When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the

document server, only the L: counter increments.

When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter

increments.

When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter

increments. However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application,

the F: counter increments.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-95 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

8 011 T:Jobs/LS *CTL

8 012 C:Jobs/LS *CTL

8 013 F:Jobs/LS *CTL

8 014 P:Jobs/LS *CTL

8 015 S:Jobs/LS *CTL

8 016 L:Jobs/LS *CTL

8 017 O:Jobs/LS *CTL

These SP’s count the number of jobs stored to the

document server by each application, to reveal how

local storage is being used for input.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored

from within the document server mode screen at the

operation panel.

When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments. When

you enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter

increments.

When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.

When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter

increments.

When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter

increments.

When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.

8 021 T:Pjob/LS *CTL

8 022 C:Pjob/LS *CTL

8 023 F:Pjob/LS *CTL

8 024 P:Pjob/LS *CTL

8 025 S:Pjob/LS *CTL

8 026 L:Pjob/LS *CTL

8 027 O:Pjob/LS *CTL

These SP’s reveal how files printed from the

document server were stored on the document

server originally.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

The L: counter counts the number of jobs

stored from within the document server mode

screen at the operation panel.

When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application,

the C: counter increments.

When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the

document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and

P: counters both increment.

When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L:

counter increments.

When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another

application, the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within

document server mode, then the L: counter increments.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-96 SM

When images stored on the document server by a network application (including

Palm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.

When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application

(Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.

When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.

8 031 T:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

8 032 C:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

8 033 F:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

8 034 P:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

8 035 S:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

8 036 L:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

8 037 O:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

These SP’s reveal what applications were

used to output documents from the document

server.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]


printed from within the document server mode


When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count for

the application that started the print job is incremented.

When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web

Image Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.

8 041 T:TX Jobs/LS *CTL

8 042 C:TX Jobs/LS *CTL

8 043 F:TX Jobs/LS *CTL

8 044 P:TX Jobs/LS *CTL

8 045 S:TX Jobs/LS *CTL

8 046 L:TX Jobs/LS *CTL

8 047 O:TX Jobs/LS *CTL

These SP’s count the applications that

stored files on the document server that

were later accessed for transmission over

the telephone line or over a network

(attached to an e-mail, or as a fax image

by I-Fax).

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

Jobs merged for sending are

counted separately.


scanned from within the document server

mode screen at the operation panel.

When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments.

When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are

sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-97 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

8 051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

8 052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

8 053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

8 054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

8 055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

8 056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

8 057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

These SP’s count the applications used to

send files from the document server over the

telephone line or over a network (attached to

an e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). Jobs

merged for sending are counted separately.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent

from within the document server mode screen

at the operation panel.

If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then

the O: counter increments.

T:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 061 These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by

the application.

C:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 062 These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method

is specified by the application.

F:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 063 These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is

specified by the application.

Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.

P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 064 These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method


S:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 065 These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method


Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.

L:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 066 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document

server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is

specified from the print window within document server mode.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-98 SM

O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 067 These SP’s total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external

application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by the

application.

-001 Sort

Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is

set for Sort and then stored on the document server, the L: counter

increments. (See SP8066-1)

-002 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.

-003 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.

-004 Booklet Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in staple

mode, the Staple counter also increments.

-005 Z-Fold Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode

and set for folding (Z-fold).

-006 Punch Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a

print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8064-6.)

-007 Other Reserved. Not used.

T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 071 These SP’s count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages

in the job, regardless of which application was used.

C:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 072 These SP’s count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on

the number of pages in the job.

F:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 073 These SP’s count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the

number of pages in the job.

P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 074 These SP’s count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on


S:Jobs/PGS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 075 These SP’s count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on


SP Mode Tables

SM 5-99 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

L:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 076 These SP’s count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the

document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of

pages in the job.

O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 077 These SP’s count and calculate the number of “Other” application jobs

(Web Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in

the job.

-001 1 Page -008 21to50 Pages

-002 2 Pages -009 51to100 Pages

-003 3 Pages -010 101to300 Pages

-004 4 Pages -011 301to500 Pages

-005 5 Pages -012 501to700 Pages

-006 6to10 Pages -013 701to1000 Pages

-007 11to20 Pages -014 1001to Pages

For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document

server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076-0xx) increments.

Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).

Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.

If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.

If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted

at the time the error occurs.

For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by

multiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One

duplex page counts as 2.)

The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the

number of pages of the copy job (SP 8072).

When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the

page is counted.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-100 SM

T:FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 111

These SP’s count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white)

sent by fax, either directly or using a file stored on the document server,

on a telephone line.

Color fax sending is not available at this time.

F: FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 113 These SP’s count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white)

sent by fax directly on a telephone line.


-001 B/W

-002 Color

These counters count jobs, not pages.

This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application, including

documents stored on the document server.

If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the

job started.

If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination

where both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (8 12x)

also increments.

The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.

T:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 121


sent, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax

images using I-Fax.


F: IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 123 These SP’s count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent

(not stored on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.


SP Mode Tables

SM 5-101 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

-001 B/W

002 Color


The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not

available at this time.

The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.

T:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]


scanned and attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document

server was used or not.

S:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 135 These SP’s count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned

and attached to e-mail, without storing the original on the document server.

001 B/W

002 Color

-003 ACS


If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined to

be color or black-and-white then counted.

If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is

waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.

If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on

what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.

If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or

Scan-to-PC, or if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is counted

separately. For example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email as well as

Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once for

Scan-to-PC).

T:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]


scanned and sent to a Scan Router server.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-102 SM

S:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 145 These SP’s count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in

scanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server.

001 B/W

002 Color

-003 ACS


The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan

Router server cannot be confirmed.

If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is

counted as a “Color” job.

If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is

waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted.



Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.

T:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0to9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 151


scanned and sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).

At the present time, SP8151 and 8155 perform identical

counts.

S:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0to9999999 / 0 / 1]


scanned and sent with Scan-to-PC.

-001 B/W

-002 Color

-003 ACS


If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.

If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.



SP Mode Tables

SM 5-103 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.

8 161 T:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL

8 163 F:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL

These SP’s count the number of PC Fax

transmission jobs. A job is counted from

when it is registered for sending, not when

it is sent.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

At the present time, these

counters perform identical

counts.

This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending the

data out to the destination from the PC through the copier.

8 191 T:Total Scan PGS *CTL

8 192 C:Total Scan PGS *CTL

8 193 F:Total Scan PGS *CTL

8 195 S:Total Scan PGS *CTL

8 196 L:Total Scan PGS *CTL

These SP’s count the pages scanned by each

application that uses the scanner to scan

images.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of

physical pages.

These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to

adjust color.

Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.

A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.

Scans made in SP mode are not counted.

Examples

If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored,

the S: count is 4.

If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the

Store File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6.

If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.

If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-104 SM

T:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 201

These SP’s count the total number of large pages input with the

scanner for scan and copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for

fax transmission are not counted.

These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the

User Tools display.

F:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 203 These SP’s count the number of large pages scanned by original type for

Fax jobs.

S:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 205

These SP’s count the total number of large pages input with the

scanner for scan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax

transmission are not counted.

These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the

User Tools display.

8 211 T:Scan PGS/LS *CTL

8 212 C:Scan PGS/LS *CTL

8 213 F:Scan PGS/LS *CTL

8 215 S:Scan PGS/LS *CTL

8 216 L:Scan PGS/LS *CTL

These SP’s count the number of pages scanned

into the document server .

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

The L: counter counts the number of pages


screen at the operation panel, and with the

Store File button from within the Copy mode

screen

Reading user stamp data is not counted.

If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.

If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet,

the S: count is 4.

If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not

change.

If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C:

count is 6 and the L: count is 6.

If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-105 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

ADF Org Feeds *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 221 These SP’s count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and

back side scanning.

001 Front

Number of front sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front

side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either

simplex or duplex scanning.

With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front

side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front

side scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the user

loads face up.)

002 Back

Number of rear sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back

count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning.

With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back

count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-side

scanning.

When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1.

If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double

counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is

output.

Scan PGS/Mode *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 231 These SP’s count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to

determine the work load on the ADF.

001 Large Volume Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be

loaded in the ADF at one time.

002 SADF Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through

the ADF.

003 Mixed Size Selectable. Select “Mixed Sizes” on the operation

panel.

004 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.

005 Platen Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the

original directly on the platen.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-106 SM

If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from

ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.

The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application so

if the original’s page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.

If the user selects “Mixed Sizes” for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count

is enabled.

In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages

with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.

T:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 241 These SP’s count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all

jobs, regardless of which application was used.

C:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 242 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy

jobs.

F:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 243 These SP’s count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax

jobs.

S:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 245 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan

jobs.

L:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 246 These SP’s count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the

document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store

File button from within the Copy mode screen

8 241 8 242 8 243 8 245 8 246 8 247

001: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

002: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

003: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

004: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes

005: Map Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes

006: Normal/Detail Yes No Yes No No No

007: Fine/Super Fine Yes No Yes No No No

008: Binary Yes No No Yes No No

009: Grayscale Yes No No Yes No No

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-107 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

010: Color Yes No No Yes No No

011: Other Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from

ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.

8 251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL

8 252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL

8 254 P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL

8 256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL

8 257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL

These SP’s show how many times Image

Edit features have been selected at the

operation panel for each application.

Some examples of these editing features

are:

Erase> Border

Erase> Center

Image Repeat

Centering

Positive/Negative

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

The count totals the number of

times the edit features have been

used. A detailed breakdown of

exactly which features have been

used is not given.

The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode

screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode

screen.

8 261 T:Scn PGS/ColCr *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 262 C:Scn PGS/ ColCr *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 266 L:Scn PGS/ColCr *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

001 Color Conversion

002 Color Erase

003 Background

004 Other

These SP’s show how many times color

creation features have been selected at the

operation panel.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-108 SM

8 281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL

8 285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL

These SP’s count the number of pages

scanned using a TWAIN driver. These

counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is

used for delivery functions.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

At the present time, these

counters perform identical

counts.

8 291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL

8 293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL

8 295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL

8 296 L:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL


stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]



screen at the operation panel, and with the

Store File button from within the Copy mode

screen

T:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 301 These SP’s count by size the total number of pages scanned by all

applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and

output (printing) page size [SP 8-441].

C:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 302 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy

application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and

output (printing) page size [SP 8-442].

F:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 303 These SP’s count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax


output page size [SP 8-443].

S:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 305 These SP’s count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan


SP Mode Tables

SM 5-109 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

output page size [SP 8-445].

L:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 306

These SP’s count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored

from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and

with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these

totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP

8-446].

-001 A3

002 A4

003 A5

004 B4

005 B5

006 DLT

007 LG

008 LT

009 HLT

010 Full Bleed

-254 Other (Standard)

-255 Other (Custom)

T:Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 311 These SP’s count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned

by applications that can specify resolution settings.

Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 315

These SP’s count by resolution setting the total number of pages

scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings.

At the present time, SP8-311 and 8-315 perform identical

counts.

001 1200dpi to

002 600dpito1199dpi

003 400dpito599dpi

004 200dpito399dpi

005 to199dpi

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-110 SM

Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.

The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count is

done for the Fax application.

8 381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL

8 382 C:Total PrtPGS *CTL

8 383 F:Total PrtPGS *CTL

8 384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL

8 385 S:Total PrtPGS *CTL

8 386 L:Total PrtPGS *CTL

8 387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL

These SP’s count the number of pages printed

by the customer. The counter for the

application used for storing the pages

increments.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]



screen at the operation panel. Pages stored

with the Store File button from within the Copy

mode screen go to the C: counter.

When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page

is counted as 2.

When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are

counted for the application that stored them.

These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so

the following pages are not counted as printed pages:

Blank pages in a duplex printing job.

Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip

sheets.

Reports printed to confirm counts.

All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance

reports, etc.)

Test prints for machine image adjustment.

Error notification reports.

Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.

LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 391

These SP’s count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.

In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these

counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the

copy machine.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-111 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

8 401 T:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

8 402 C:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

8 403 F:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

8 404 P:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

8 405 S:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

8 406 L:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printed

from the document server. The counter for the

application used to print the pages is

incremented.




[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L:

count.

Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F:

count.

8 411 Prints/Duplex *CTL

This SP counts the amount of paper

(front/back counted as 1 page) used for duplex

printing. Last pages printed only on one side

are not counted.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 421 These SP’s count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of

pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.

C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]


pages processed for printing by the copier application.

F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]


pages processed for printing by the fax application.

P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]


pages processed for printing by the printer application.

S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]


pages processed for printing by the scanner application.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-112 SM

L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]


pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window

at the operation panel.

O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]


pages processed for printing by Other applications

001 Simplex> Duplex

002 Duplex> Duplex

003 Book> Duplex

004 Simplex Combine

005 Duplex Combine

006 2> 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)





011 16> 16 pages on 1 side (16-Up)

012 Booklet

013 Magazine

These counts (SP8-421 to SP8-427) are especially useful for customers who need to

improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.

Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.

Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:

Booklet Magazine

Original Pages

Count Original Pages

Count

1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2

3 2 3 2

4 2 4 2

5 3 5 4

6 4 6 4

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-113 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

7 4 7 4

8 4 8 4

T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 431 These SP’s count the total number of pages output with the three features

below, regardless of which application was used.

C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 432 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features

below with the copy application.

P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]


below with the print application.

L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 436 These SP’s count the total number of pages output from within the

document server mode window at the operation panel with the three

features below.

O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]


below with Other applications.

001 Cover/Slip Sheet Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The

count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.

002 Series/Book The number of pages printed in series (one side) or

printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.

003 User Stamp

The number of pages printed where stamps were

applied, including page numbering and date

stamping.

T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 441 These SP’s count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all

applications.

C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 442 These SP’s count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the

copy application.

F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8 443

These SP’s count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-114 SM

application.

P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]


printer application.

S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]


scanner application.

L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 446 These SP’s count by print paper size the number of pages printed from

within the document server mode window at the operation panel.

O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 447 These SP’s count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other

applications.

001 A3

002 A4

003 A5

004 B4

005 B5

006 DLT

007 LG

008 LT

009 HLT

010 Full Bleed

254 Other (Standard)

255 Other (Custom)

These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.

PrtPGS/Ppr Tray *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8 451

These SP’s count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.

001 Bypass Bypass Tray

002 Tray 1 Copier

003 By pass Copier

004 Tray 2 Paper Tray Unit (Option)


SP Mode Tables

SM 5-115 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es



008 Tray 6 Currently not used.



T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 461

These SP’s count by paper type the number pages printed by all

applications.

These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter

is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the

feed rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.

Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.

During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a

page printed on one side counts as 1.

C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 462 These SP’s count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy

application.

F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 463 These SP’s count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax

application.

P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 464 These SP’s count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer

application.

L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 466 These SP’s count by paper type the number pages printed from within the

document server mode window at the operation panel.

001 Normal

002 Recycled

003 Special

004 Thick

005 Normal (Back)

006 Thick (Back)

007 OHP

008 Other

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-116 SM

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-117 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

PrtPGS/Mag *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8 471

These SP’s count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.

001 to49%

002 50%to99%

003 100%

004 101%to200%

005 201% to

Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation

panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of

performing magnification adjustment as well.

Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as

Excel are also counted.

Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the

document server are not counted.

Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge

copying are counted.

The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically

assigned a rate of 100%.

8 481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save

feature switched on.

These SP’s return the same results as this SP is limited to the

Print application.

8 491 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

8 492 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

8 493 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

8 496 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL


printed in the Color Mode by each

application.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-118 SM

8 497 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

001 B/W

002 Single Color

003 Two Color

004 Full Color

8 501 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

8 504 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

8 507 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL


printed in the Color Mode or B/W Mode by

the print application.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

001 B/W

002 Single Color

003 Full Color

004 Single Color

-005 Two Color

T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 511 These SP’s count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages

printed.

P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 514 These SP’s count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages

printed.

001 RPCS

002 RPDL

003 PS3

004 R98

005 R16

006 GL/GL2

007 R55

008 RTIFF

009 PDF

010 PCL5e/5c

011 PCL XL

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-119 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

012 IPDL-C

013 BM-Links

014 Other

SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print

application.

Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.

T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 521 These SP’s count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all

applications.

C:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 522 These SP’s count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by

the Copy application.

F:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 523

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed

by the Fax application.

Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not

available.

P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]


the Print application.

S:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]


the Scanner application.

L:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 526 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from

within the document server mode window at the operation panel.

001 Sort

002 Stack

003 Staple

004 Booklet

005 Z-Fold

006 Punch

007 Other

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-120 SM

If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the

unstapled pages are still counted.

The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam

recoveries are counted.

8 531 Staples *CTL

This SP counts the amount of staples used by the

machine.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

T:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 581 These SP’s count the total output broken down by color output, regardless

of the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report,

these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy

machine.

001 Total

002 Total: Full Color

003 B&W/Single Color

004 Development: CMY

005 Development: K

006 Copy: Color

007 Copy: B/W

008 Print: Color

009 Print: B/W

010 Total: Color

-011 Total: B/W

012 Full Color: A3

013 Full Color: –B4

014 Full Color Print

015 Mono Color Print

016 Full Color GPC

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-121 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

8 582 C:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count the total output of the copy application broken down by

color output.

001 B/W

002 Single Color

003 Two Color

004 Full Color

8 583 F:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count the total output of the fax application broken down by

color output.

8583-001 B/W

8 583 2 Single Color

8 584 P:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count the total output of the print application broken down by

color output.

8 584 1 B/W

8 584 2 Mono Color

8 584 3 Full Color


8 584 5 Two Color

8 586 L:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

These SP’s count the total output of the local storage broken down by color

output.

8 582 1 B/W


8 582 3 Two Color

8 582 4 Full Color

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-122 SM

8 591 O:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 591 1 A3/DLT

8 591 2 Duplex

These SP’s count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number

of duplex pages printed, and the number of staples used.

These totals are for Other (O:) applications only.

8 601 Cvg Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 601 1 Cvg: BW %

8 601 2 Cvg: FC % Displays the total coverage of each mode.

8 601 11 Cvg: BW Pages

8 601 12 Cvg: FC Pages Displays the number of the printouts in each mode.

T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 631 These SP’s count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a

telephone number.

F:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 633 These SP’s count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a

telephone number.

001 B/W

002 Color

If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted

separately as B/W or Color.

At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631

and SP8633 are the same.

The counts include error pages.

If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the

count is done for each destination.

Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.

Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each

destination.

T:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 641 These SP’s count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax

images using I-Fax.

8 643 F:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-123 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

These SP’s count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax

images using I-Fax.

001 B/W

002 Color

If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted

separately as B/W or Color.

At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8641

and SP8643 are the same.

The counts include error pages.

If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the

count is done for each destination.

Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX is not.

Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each

destination.

T:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 651 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an

e-mail for both the Scan and document server applications.

S:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 655 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an

e-mail for the Scan application only.

001 B/W

002 Color

The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on

the HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted.

If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the

count is 10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).

If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50

(the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP server).

Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a

10-page document to a large number of destinations, the count may be

divided and counted separately. For example, if a 10-page document is sent to

200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is

also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-124 SM

T:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 661 These SP’s count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan

Router server by both Scan and LS applications.

S:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 665 These SP’s count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan

Router server by the Scan application.

001 B/W

002 Color

The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD

of the Scan Router server.

If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the

counts are not done.

The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the

Scan Router server.

T:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 671 These SP’s count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder

on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.

S:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 675 These SP’s count by color mode the total number of pages sent with

Scan-to-PC with the Scan application.

001 B/W

002 Color

Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to

the count.

If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are

counted for the application that stored them.

When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done

for the number of pages sent to each destination.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-125 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

TX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 701 These SP’s count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to send

them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4,

the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.

8 701 1 PSTN-1

8 701 2 PSTN-2

8 701 3 PSTN-3

8 701 4 ISDN (G3,G4)

8 701 5 Network

8 711 T:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

S:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8 715

These SP’s count the number of pages sent by each compression mode.

-001 JPEG/JPEG2000

-002 TIFF M/S

(Multi/Single)

003 PDF

-004 Other

RX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 741 These SP’s count the number of pages received by the physical port used to

receive them.

8 741 1 PSTN-1

8 741 2 PSTN-2

8 741 3 PSTN-3

8 741 4 ISDN (G3,G4)

8 741 5 Network

Ink Botol Info. *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 781 These SP’s display the number of already replaced ink cartridges.

Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in

SP8-781-001 through 004 are the same.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-126 SM

8 781 1 BK The number of black-ink cartridges

8 781 2 Y The number of yellow-ink cartridges

8 781 3 M The number of magenta-ink cartridges

8 781 4 C The number of cyan-ink cartridges

8 791 LS Memory Remain *CTL

This SP displays the percent of space

available on the document server for

storing documents.

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]

Ink Remain *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1]

8 801

These SP’s display the percent of ink remaining for each color. This SP

allows the user to check the toner supply at any time.

This precise method of measuring remaining ink supply (1%

steps) is better than other machines in the market that can only

measure in increments of 10 (10% steps).

8 801 1 K

8 801 2 Y

8 801 3 M

8 801 4 C

Cvr Cnt:0-10% *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 851 These SP’s display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of

each color is from 0% to 10%.

8 851 11 0-2%:Bk

8 851 12 0-2%:Y

8 851 13 0-2%:M

8 851 14 0-2%:C

8 851 21 3-4%: Bk

8 851 22 3-4%: Y

8 851 23 3-4%: M

8 851 24 3-4%: C

8 851 31 5-7%: Bk

8 851 32 5-7%: Y

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-127 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

8 851 33 5-7%: M

8 851 34 5-7%: C

8 851 41 8-10%: Bk

8 851 42 8-10%: Y

8 851 43 8-10%: M

8 851 44 8-10%: C

Cvr Cnt: 11-20% *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]



8 851 1 BK

8 851 2 Y

8 851 3 M

8 851 4 C

Cvr Cnt: 21-30% *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]



8 871 1 BK

8 871 2 Y

8 871 3 M

8 871 4 C

Cvr Cnt: 31%- *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]


each color is 31% or higher.

8 881 1 BK

8 881 2 Y

8 881 3 M

8 881 4 C

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-128 SM

Page/Ink Bottle *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8 891

These SP’s display the number of sheets output by the scan application.

8 891 1 BK

8 891 2 Y

8 891 3 M

8 891 4 C

Page/Ink Prev1 *BCU [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 901 These SP’s display the number of sheets output by the scan application

with the previously replaced units.

8 901 1 BK

8 901 2 Y

8 901 3 M

8 901 4 C

Page/Ink Prev2 *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 911 These SP’s display the number of sheets output by the scan application

with the one before previously replaced units.

8 911 1 BK

8 911 2 Y

8 911 3 M

8 911 4 C

8 921 Cvr Cnt/Total *BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 921 1 Coverage(%): BK

8 921 2 Coverage(%): Y

8 921 3 Coverage(%): M

8 921 4 Coverage(%): C

These SP’s display the total coverage percentage

of sheets output by the machine.

8 921 11 Covwerage/P: Bk

8 921 12 Covwerage/P: Y

8 921 13 Covwerage/P: M

8 921 14 Covwerage/P: C

These SP’s display the total coverage pages

output by the machine.

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-129 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

8 921 21 Ink Cons(ml): BK

8 921 22 Ink Cons(ml): Y

8 921 23 Ink Cons(ml): M

8 921 24 Ink Cons(ml): C

These SP’s display the total ink consumption used

by the machine.

Machine Status *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 941 These SP’s count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation

mode. These SP’s are useful for customers who need to investigate

machine operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.

8 941 1 Operation Time

Engine operation time. Does not include time while

controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not

operating).

8 941 2 Standby Time

Engine not operating. Includes time while controller

saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in

Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.

8 941 3 Energy Save Time Includes time while the machine is performing

background printing.

8 941 4 Low Power Time

Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.

Includes time while machine is performing

background printing.

8 941 5 Off Mode Time

Includes time while machine is performing

background printing. Does not include time machine

remains powered off with the power switches.

8 941 6 SC Total down time due to SC errors.

8 941 7 PrtJam Total down time due to paper jams during printing.

8 941 8 OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during

scanning.

8 941 9 Spl PM Unit End Total down time due to ink end.

SP Mode Tables

B229 5-130 SM

AddBook Register *CTL

8 951 These SP’s count the number of events when the machine manages data

registration.

8 951 1 User Code User code registrations.

8 951 2 Mail Address Mail address registrations.

8 951 3 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations.

8 951 4 Group Group destination registrations.

8 951 5 Transfer Request Fax relay destination registrations

for relay TX.

8 951 6 F-Code F-Code box registrations.

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 951 7 Copy Program

Copy application registrations

with the Program (job settings)

feature.

8 951 8 Fax Program

Fax application registrations with

the Program (job settings)

feature.

8 951 9 Printer Program

Printer application registrations


feature.

8 951 10 Scanner Program

Scanner application registrations


feature.

[0 to 255 / 0 / 255]

AdominCounter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8 999

Displays the user setting counter for administrator.

8 999 1 Total

8 999 2 Copy: FC

8 999 3 Copy: BW

8 999 6 Printer: FC

8 999 7 Printer: BW

8 999 8 Printer: OneC

8 999 9 Printer: TwoC

8 999 10 FaxP: BW

8 999 11 FaxP: OneC

SP Mode Tables

SM 5-131 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

8 999 12 A3/DLT

8 999 13 Duplex

8 999 14 Cvr: FC %

8 999 15 Cvr: BW %

8 999 16 Cvr: FC Pages

8 999 17 Cvr: BW Pages

8 999 101 SendTtl: FC

8 999 102 SendTtl: BW

8 999 103 FaxSend

8 999 104 FaxSend: FC

8 999 105 FaxSend: BW

Printer Service Mode

B229 5-132 SM

5.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE

1001 [Bit Switch]

1001 1 Bit Switch 1 *CTL Adjusts bit switch settings. DFU

1001 2 Bit Switch 2 *CTL

Bit 0 to 2: Not used. Do not change settings.

Bit 3: Changing print language (PCL <-> PS)

0: Enabled

1: Disabled (No change)


Bit Switch 3 *CTL Adjusts bit switch settings.

1001 3

Bit 0: PostScript3 Euro glyph

0: Disabled

1: Enabled (Even if there is no Euro Glyph in ROM, it is possible to load the

Euro Glyph data.)

Bit 1: Not used. Do not change setting.

Bit 2:PCL5e/5c (HP4000/HP8000)

The left space command is set to “0”, the machine is changed to “1”

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

Bit 3: PCL5e/GL2: pen # of PW

0: Normal

1: Patch

Bit 4: Tray selecting

0: Select tray is determined auto tray selecting

1: Like HP/SV


1001 4 Bit Switch 4 *CTL Adjusts bit switch settings. DFU



Bit 3: Enabled the “%%” command of the

PostScript detection condition for the auto

print language selection function.

0: Enabled

1: Disabled



SM 5-133 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es




Adjusts bit switch settings. DFU

1003 [Clear Setting]

1003 1 Init. System Initializes settings in the System menu of the

user mode.

1003 3 Delete Program DFU

1004 [Print Summary]

1004 1 Service Summary Prints the service summary sheet (a summary

of all the controller settings).

1005 [Disp. Version]

1005 1 Displays the version of the controller firmware.

1101 [ToneCtlSet]

1101 1 Tone (Factory) *CTL

1101 2 Tone (Prev.) *CTL

1101 3 Tone (Current) *CTL

Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be

either a) the factory setting, b) the previous

setting, or c) the current setting.

[ToneCtlSet] *CTL

1102 Sets the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment. The

asterisk (*) shows which mode is set.

Refer to the tone control selection list following these SP tables

1103 [PrnColorSheet]

1103 001 ToneCtlSheet

1103 002 ColorChart

Prints the test page to check the color balance

before and after the gamma adjustment.


B229 5-134 SM

[ToneCtlValue] 1104

Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the Mode Selection menu.

1104 001 Set Black 1 *CTL

1104 021 Set Cyan 1 *CTL

1104 041 Set Magenta 1 *CTL

1104 061 Set Yellow 1 *CTL

[0 to 255 / 16 / 1/step]





[0 to 255 / 32 / 1/step]





[0 to 255 / 48 / 1/step]





[0 to 255 / 64 / 1/step]





[0 to 255 / 80 / 1/step]





[0 to 255 / 96 / 1/step]





[0 to 255 / 112 / 1/step]


SM 5-135 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es





[0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]





[0 to 255 / 144 / 1/step]





[0 to 255 / 160 / 1/step]





[0 to 255 / 176 / 1/step]





[0 to 255 / 192 / 1/step]





[0 to 255 / 208 / 1/step]





[0 to 255 / 224 / 1/step]





[0 to 255 / 240 / 1/step]


B229 5-136 SM

[ToneCtlSave]

1105 Saves the print gamma (adjusted with the Gamma Adj.) as the new Current

Setting. Before the machine stores the new “current setting”, it moves the data

stored as the “current setting” to the “previous setting” memory-storage

location.

[Toner Limit] 1106

Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.

1106 001 TonerLimitPhot *CTL [100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step]

1106 002 TonerLimitText *CTL [100 to 400 / 200 / 1 %/step]

[FactoryTestPrt] 1107 Prints the test page to check the color balance before transportation (600 x 600

2 bit). DFU

1108 [Ext. Toner Save]

1108 001 Mode 1: Text

1108 002 Mode 2: Text

1108 003 Mode 1: Image

1108 004 Mode 2: Image

1108 005 Mode 1: Line

1108 006 Mode 2: Line

1108 007 Mode 1: paint

1108 008 Mode 2: Paint

DFU

Tone Control Setting: SP1102-001

Input Number Paper Type Resolution Mode

0 Photo

1 300 dpi

Text

2 Photo

3 Text

4 Photo

5

Plain Paper

600 dpi

Text


SM 5-137 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

6 Photo

7 Text

8 Photo

9 Text

10 Photo

11

High Grade Plain Paper 600 dpi

Text

12 Photo

13 Text

14 Photo

15

Glossy Paper 600 dpi

Text

16 Photo

17 Text

18 Photo

19 Text

20 Photo

21

OHP 600 dpi

Text

22 Envelop 600 dpi Photo

23 Text

24 Photo

25 Text

26 Photo

27

Envelop 600 dpi

Text

28 Photo

29 Text

30 Photo

31 Text

32 Photo

33

Envelop for Ink jet (Japan Only)

600 dpi

Text

Scanner SP Mode

B229 5-138 SM

5.4 SCANNER SP MODE

SP1-xxx (System and Others) [Compression Type]

1004 Selects the compression type for binary picture processing.

1004 1 Compression Type *CTL [ 1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ]

1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR

[Erase margin] 1005 Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.

If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin.

1005 1 Range from 0 to 5 mm *CTL [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]

1009 [Remote scan disable] *CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: enable, 1: disable

1009 1 Enable or disable the TWAIN network scan.

SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality) [Compression ratio of gray-scale]

2021 Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the

three settings that can be selected at the operation panel.

2021 1 Level 3 (Standard

compression) [ 5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ]

2021 2 Level 2 (Higher compression) [ 5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step ]

2021 3 Level 4 (Lower compression) [ 5 to 95 / 30 / 1 /step ]

2021 4 Level 1 (Highest

compression) [ 5 to 95 / 60 / 1 /step ]

2021 5 Level 5 (Lowest compression)

*CTL

[ 5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]

Using SP Modes

SM 5-139 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5.5 USING SP MODES

5.5.1 ADJUSTING REGISTRATION AND MAGNIFICATION

To adjust the registration and magnification, you need to use several service programs.

The chart shows an example of the procedure to adjust the machine in the basic

configuration.

5.5.2 DISPLAY APS DATA (SP 4301 1)

- Sensor Positions - The APS (auto paper select) sensors are arranged as shown in the diagram.

- Reading the Data -

Example 1

(7)00001100(0) [0C]

Example 2

Paper Size: 00000011 [03]

Example 1 indicates that the paper size and its orientation is "81/2 x 13 SEF," and that the

document feeder (or platen cover) is open. Example 2 indicates that the paper size and its

orientation is "A4 LEF," and that the document feeder (or platen cover) is closed.

The "Paper Size" data starts with eight digits. The first digit indicates the output of L2; the

second digit, L1; the third digit, W2; and the fourth digit, W1. The other four digits (from the

fifth through the eighth) are always "0000." In Example 1, the APS sensors L2 and L1

Detect paper (W2 and W1 do not).

In Example 2, APS sensors W2 and W1 detect paper (L2 and L1 do not). The paper size

and its orientation is based on the outputs of these four APS sensors.

The "DF Open" data shows "1" or "0," indicating if the document feeder (or platen cover) is

open or closed respectively. The data is based on the output of the platen cover sensor [A].

5.5.3 MEMORY CLEAR

The machine stores the engine data in the NVRAM on the BCU, and stores the other data

in the NVRAM on the controller. To distinguish between the engine data and the other data,

see SP5801-1 through 19. This service program (SP 5801) handles the controller data. Any

data that is not handled by SP 5801 is the engine data. The data in the BCU NVRAM

(engine data) is cleared by SP5998-1 while the data in the controller NVRAM (controller

data) is cleared by SP 5801-xxx (for exceptions, see "xxx").

Using SP Modes

B229 5-140 SM

Machine Data NVRAM Cleared by Remarks

Engine data BCU SP 5998-002

Any data other

than controller

data

MFP

Controller data Controller SP 5801-001,

003 to 009

SCS, IMH, MCS,

Copier

application, Fax

application,

Printer

application,

Scanner

application, Web

service/network

application, NCS,

R-Fax, DCS, UCS

- Exceptions - SP 5998-1 clears most of the settings and counters stored in the NVRAM on the BCU (the

values return to their default values). However, the following settings are not cleared:

SP 5807 (Area Selection)

SP 5811-1 (Serial Num Input [Code Set])

SP 5811-3 (Serial Num Input [ID2 Code Display])

SP 5812-1 (Service TEL [Telephone])

SP 5812-2 (Service TEL [Facsimile])

SP 5907 (Plug & Play)

SP 7 (Data Log)

SP 8 (History)

SP 5998-1 (MFP machine) after you have replaced the BCU NVRAM or when the BCU

NVRAM data is corrupted. When the program ends normally, the message "Completed" is

displayed. When you have replaced the controller NVRAM or when the controller NVRAM

data is corrupted, use SP 5801-1. The message is the same as the basic machine.

1. Upload the NVRAM data to a flash memory card ( NVRAM Data Upload/Download).

2. Print out all SMC data lists ( SMC Print).

Be sure to print out all the lists. You have to manually change the SP

settings if the NVRAM data upload ends abnormally.

Using SP Modes

SM 5-141 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

3. Select SP 5801-2. 4. Press the OK key. 5. Select "Execute." The messages "Execute?" followed by "Cancel" and

"Execute" are displayed. 6. Select "Execute." 7. When the program has ended normally, the message "Completed" is displayed.

If the program has ended abnormally, an error message is displayed. 8. Press the cancel key. 9. Turn the main switch off and on. 10. Download the NVRAM data from a flash memory card ( NVRAM Data

Upload/Download).

5.5.4 INPUT CHECK (SP 5803)

- Conducting an Input Check - 1. Select SP 5803. 2. Select the number (see the table below) corresponding to the component. 3. Select "Execute." The copy mode is activated. 4. The sign "01H" or "00H" is displayed (see the table below).

- Input Check Table -

Num. Sensor/Switch 01H 00H

001 Safety SW Open Close

002 Front Cover SW (Front door) Open Close

003 Right Cover SW (Right door) Open Close

004 Left Cover SW (Left upper door) Open Close

005 Left LowCover SW (Left lower door) Open Close

006 Straight Cover SW

(Multi-duplex exit door) Open Close

007 Manual Cover SW

(Duplex entrance door) Open Close

008 Exit Cover SW

(Exit tray cover left and right) Open Close

009 Mech Counter (Mechanical counter) Detected Not detected

010 Regist Sensor (First registration sensor) Paper detected Not detected

011 Belt In Sensor (Engine entrance sensor) Paper detected Not detected

Using SP Modes

B229 5-142 SM


012 Image Reg Sensor (Second Registration

Sensor) Paper detected Not detected

013 Branch Sensor (Junction gate sensor) Paper detected Not detected

014 Exit Sensor Paper detected Not detected

015 Mun PE S (Paper end Sensor: By-pass) Paper detected Not detected

016 OP Sensor (Relay sensor) Paper detected Not detected

017 Upper PE S (Paper end sensor: Tray 1) Paper detected Not detected

018 Upper P Size S

(Paper size switch: Tray1) *1

019 System Temp (Temperature sensor) Display at 5 to 45°C

020 System Humidity (Humidity sensor) Display at 0 to 100 %

021 By-pass PE S

(Multi-bypass paper detection sensor) Paper detected Not detected

022 By-pass P Size S

(Multi-bypass paper size sensor) *1

023 Duplex Installed (Duplex unit selection

switch ) Duplex unit detected Not detected

024 Duplex Entrance S

(Duplex entrance sensor) Paper detected Not detected

025 Duplex Internal S (Duplex wait sensor) Paper detected Not detected

026 Duplex Inverter S

(Duplex inverter sensor) Paper detected Not detected

027 Duplex Exit S (Duplex exit sensor) Paper detected Not detected

028 Duplex R-Cover SW (Duplex right door

Switch) Open Close

029 Duplex L-Cover SW

(Duplex left door Switch) Open Close

030 BK Installed (Optional paper tray unit

detection switch) OPT detected Not detected

031 BK-Upper PE S

(Paper end sensor: Tray 2) Paper detected Not detected

032 BK-Upper P Size S

(Paper size switch: Tray 2) *1

033 BK-Upper Lift S Paper detected Not detected

Using SP Modes

SM 5-143 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es


(Paper upper limit sensor: Tray 2)

034 BK-Up P Height S

(Paper height sensor: Tray 2) Paper detected Not detected

035 BK Cover SW (Right door switch:

Optional paper tray unit) Open Close

038 BK type 00: Not installed, 01: One tray unit

02: Two tray unit

039 BK-Low PE S (Paper end sensor: Tray

3) Paper detected Not detected

040

BK-Low P Size S

(Paper size switch: Tray 2)

00: Not installed, 02: A4 LEF,

03: A4 SEF, 05: B4 SEF, 07: B5 LEF,

08: B5 SEF, 0C: A5 SEF, 0F: A3 SEF

041 BK-Low Lift S

(Paper upper limit sensor: Tray 3) Detected Not detected

042 BK-Low P Height S

(Paper height sensor: Tray 3) Detected Not detected

046 Air Detected S (Air sensor pin at printer

head)

047 Filler S (Tank full sensor) Detected Not detected

048

Cartrg Det:Y

(Ink cartridge detection sensor for

yellow)

Detected Not detected

049 Cartrg Det:M (Ink cartridge detection

sensor for magenta) Detected Not detected

050 Cartrg Det:C

(Ink cartridge detection sensor for cyan)Detected Not detected

051 Cartrg Det:K

(Ink cartridge detection sensor for black)Detected Not detected

052 New Cartridge: Y New Not new

053 New Cartridge: M New Not new

054 New Cartridge: C New Not new

055 New Cartridge: K New Not new

056 Ink Remainder: Y 0 to 100%

057 Ink Remainder: M 0 to 100%

Using SP Modes

B229 5-144 SM


058 Ink Remainder: C 0 to 100%

059 Ink Remainder: K 0 to 100%

060 Refill Cartrg: Y Refill cartridge Not refill

061 Refill Cartrg: M Refill cartridge Not refill

062 Refill Cartrg: C Refill cartridge Not refill

063 Refill Cartrg: K Refill cartridge Not refill

064 Maintenance-M HP S

(Maintenance unit HP sensor) HP Not HP

065 Waste Ink Full S

(Ink collection bottle full sensor)

066 Mist-Fan Lock Detected Not detected

067 Carig Enc-Counter

(Main scan encoder sensor)

068 Carriage Lift S Carriage lift Not lift

069 Head Temperature Displayed at 0 to 55°C

070 Belt Enc-Counter

(Sub scan encoder sensor)

071 Belt Temperature Displayed at 0 to 55°C

072 PP-Leak Detect (High voltage unit

current leak detection) Detected Not detected

073 Print Exit Sens (Paper exit sensor) Detected Not detected

100 Key-Card Sensor Detected Not detected

101 Key-Cnt Sensor

(Key counter detection sensor) Detected Not detected

200 Scanner HP Sensor HP Not HP

201 Platen Opn Sens (Platen cover sensor) Close Open

202 DF Installed (DF detection sensor) Installed Not installed

203 DF-Position S Close Open

204 DF-Cover Open S Close Open

205 DF-Original Set S Detected Not detected

206 DF-Registration S Detected Not detected

207 DF-Exit S Detected Not detected

208 DF-Trailing S Detected Not detected

Using SP Modes

SM 5-145 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es


209 DF-Reverse S Detected Not detected

*1 Paper Size

Copier 00 02 03 04 05 06 07

Europe DLT SEF LT LEF LG SEF A4 SEF Foolscap A4 LEF Not set

North

America A3 SEF LT LEF A5 LEF LT SEF Foolscap A4 LEF Not set

Paper Feed

Unit 00 02 03 05 07 0C 0F

Europe Not set A4 LEF A4 SEF DLT SEF LT LEF LG SEF A3 SEF

North

America Not set A4 LEF A4 SEF DLT SEF LT LEF LG SEF A3 SEF

By-Pass Tray 03 07 09 0B 0C 0D 0E

Europe A4 SEF A3 F/GL A5 SEF

North

America LT SEF DLT HLT SEF

- *2 Paper Amount -

10 Near end

11 About 25%

00 About 75%

00 About 100%

- *3 Available Paper Feed Unit -

00 None

20 2-tray paper feed unit

30 1-tray paper feed unit

Using SP Modes

B229 5-146 SM

5.5.5 OUTPUT CHECK (SP 5804)

Conducting an Output Check

To prevent mechanical or electrical damage, do not keep an electrical

component on for a long time.

1. Select SP 5804. 2. Select the number (see the table below) corresponding to the component. 3. Select "ON." 4. To stop the operation, select "OFF."

Output Check Table Number 005, 006, 040, and 041 may not respond when the fusing temperature is high.

Num. Component

001 Feed M-Fwd 220

002 Feed M-Fwd 100

003 Upper Feed CL (Paper feed clutch: Tray 1)

004 Registration CL

005 Guide SOL

006 Exit M-Fwd 225

007 Exit M-Fwd 105

008 Branch SOL

009 By-Pass CL

010 Duplex M-Fwd 225

011 Reverse M-Fwd 225

012 Reverse M-Fwd 146

013 Duplex CL

014 Duplex Branch SOL

015 BK-Up M-Fwd

016 BK-Up Relay CL

017 BK-Up Lift M-Up

018 BK-Up Lift M-Dw

019 BK-Low M-Fwd

020 BK-Low Relay CL

021 BK-Low Lift M-Up

Using SP Modes

SM 5-147 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

Num. Component

022 BK-Low Lift M-Dw

023 Supply M-Fwd K2

024 Supply M-Fwd K

025 Supply M-Fwd C

026 Supply M-Fwd M

027 Supply M-Fwd Y

028 Air Open SOL

029 Maintenance M-Fwd

030 Mist-Fan

031 Carriage M-Fwd

032 Belt M-Fwd 220

033 Belt M-Fwd 100

034 PP High:4mm

035 PP High:8mm

036 PP High:12mm

037 PP High:16mm

038 PP High:20mm

039 PP Low:4mm

040 PP Low:8mm

041 PP Low:12mm

042 PP Low:16mm

043 PP Low:20mm

044 Decap

045 Capping

100 Carig FreeRun (Carriage unit free run)

101 Belt FreeRun (Belt unit free run)

102 BeltCarig FreeRun

(Belt unit and Carriage unit free run)

202 Scanner Lamp

203 DF-Feed M

204 DF-Duplex M

205 DF-Feed CL

206 DF-Pickup SOL

Using SP Modes

B229 5-148 SM

Num. Component

207 DF-Stamp SOL

208 DF-Gate SOL

5.5.6 SERIAL NUMBER INPUT (SP 5811)

- Specifying Characters - SP 5811 1 specifies the serial number. You use the numeric keypad and the operation

panel.

You use the numeric keypad to type numbers. In addition, you use the operation panel to

type other characters. When you press the "ABC" key, the letter changes as follows: A

B C. To input the same letter two times, for example "AA," you press the "ABC" key, the

"Space" key, and the "ABC" key. To switch between uppercase letters and lowercase letters,

press the "Shift" key.

- Serial Number and NVRAM - Serial numbers are stored in the NVRAM before shipment and are not cleared. You must

specify a serial number after you replace the NVRAM or BCU.

5.5.7 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD (SP 5824/5825)

Make sure that you turn off the main switch before inserting or removing an

SD card. Installing or removing an SD card while the main switch is on may

damage the BCU or SD card.

- Overview - You can copy the data from the NVRAM to an SD card (NVRAM Upload), or from an SD

card to the NVRAM (NVRAM download).

SP 5824-1

(NVRAM Upload) From the BCU to an SD card

SP 5825-1

(NVRAM Download) From an SD card to the BCU

You should execute NVRAM Upload before replacing the NVRAM or before executing SP

5801-2 ( Memory Clear). You can copy back the data from the SD card to the NVRAM

as necessary.

Using SP Modes

SM 5-149 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

- NVRAM Upload (SP 5824-1) - Print out the SMC reports (“SP Mode Data” and “Logging Data”) with SP5990-001 before

you do the NVRAM upload.

1. Turn off the main power switch. 2. Remove the slot cover [B] ( x 1). 3. Face a label of an SD card [A] ("A" is printed on it) to the rear side, and insert it

into the SD card slot 3 (service slot). 4. Turn on the main power switch. 5. Start the SP mode and select SP 5824-1. 6. The machine erases the settings on the SD card (if any), then writes the

machine’s settings to the SD card. This takes about 20 seconds. If uploading fails, an error message appears. If an error message appears, retry the upload procedure.

7. Turn off the main power switch. 8. Remove the SD card.

- NVRAM Download (SP 5825-1) - SP 5825-1 copies the data from the SD card to the NVRAM. The following data is NOT

copied (the data in the NVRAM remains unchanged).

SP8581-xxx (Total counter)

1. Turn off the main power switch. 2. Remove the slot cover [B] ( x 1). 3. Face a label of an SD card [A] ("A" is printed on it) to the rear side, and insert it

into the SD card slot 1, and insert it into the SD card slot 3 (service slot).

Using SP Modes

B229 5-150 SM

4. Turn on the main power switch. 5. Start the SP mode and select SP 5825-1. 6. The machine erases the current settings, then writes the new settings onto the

NVRAM on the BCU board. This takes about 1 second. If downloading fails, an error message appears. If an error message appears, retry the download procedure.

7. Turn off the main power switch. 8. Remove the SD card.

5.5.8 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE

This section shows how to update the firmware of the machine.

1. Turn the main power switch off. 2. Remove the slot cover ( x 1). 3. Face a label of an SD card [A] ("A" is printed on it) to the rear side, and insert it

into the SD card slot 3 (service slot). 4. Turn on the main power switch. 5. Select a firmware that you want to update.

You can update multiple firmwares at the same time. However, it is not

possible to update controller firmware (System/Copy, Network, Support,

Fax and Web Support) at the same time. Update a controller firmware one

by one.

6. Press "Execute" [C]. 7. Do not touch any key while the message "Load Status..." is displayed. This

message indicates that the program is running. 8. Check that the message "End Sum..." is displayed. This message indicates that

the program has ended normally. 9. Turn off the main power switch (on the rear cover). 10. Remove the SD card. 11. Install the slot cover. 12. Turn on the main power switch. 13. Check the operation.

Using SP Modes

SM 5-151 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

5.5.9 SD CARD APPLI MOVE

Overview The service program “SD Card Appli Move” (SP5-873) lets you copy application programs

from one SD card to another SD card.

Slot 1 and Slot 2 are used to store application programs. Slot 3 is for maintenance work

only. You cannot run application programs from Slot 3. However, you can move application

programs from Slot 3 to Slot 2. Do the following procedure if you want to move an

application procedure from Slot 3:

1. Choose an SD card with enough space. 2. Enter SP5873 “SD Card Appli Move”. Then move the application from the SD

Card in Slot 3 to Slot 2.

Do steps 1-2 again if you want to move another application program.

3. Exit the SP mode. Be very careful when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure:

The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program

from an SD card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card

after you copy the application program from one card to another card.

Do not use the SD card if it has been used before for other purposes. Normal

operation is not guaranteed when such an SD card is used.

Keep the SD card in a safe place after you copy the application program from one

card to another card. This is done for the following reasons:

6. The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application

program.

7. You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.

You cannot copy PostScript data to another SD card. You have to copy other data to

the SD card that stores the PostScript data.

Move Exec The menu “Move Exec” (SP5-873-001) lets you copy application programs from the original

SD card to another SD card.

Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application

SD card on the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error

(e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge.

Using SP Modes

B229 5-152 SM

1. Turn the main switch off. 2. Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 2. The application program is

copied into this SD card. 3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) in SD Card Slot 3. The

application program is copied from this SD card. 4. Turn the main switch on. 5. Start the SP mode. 6. Select SP5-873-001 “Move Exec.” 7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel. 8. Turn the main switch off. 9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3. 10. Turn the main switch on. 11. Check that the application programs run normally.

Undo Exec “Undo Exec” (SP5-873-002) lets you copy back application programs from an SD card to

the original SD card. You can use this program when, for example, you have mistakenly

copied some programs by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).

Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application

SD card on the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error

(e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge.

1. Turn the main switch off. 2. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2. The application program is copied

back into this card. 3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 3.

The application program is copied back from this SD card. 4. Turn the main switch on. 5. Start the SP mode. 6. Select SP5-873-002 “Undo Exec.” 7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel. 8. Turn the main switch off. 9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2 10. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3 and insert it in SD Card Slot 2.

This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by

the machine.

Using SP Modes

SM 5-153 B229

Serv

ice

Tabl

es

1. Turn the main switch on. 2. Check that the application programs run normally.

5.5.10 SMC PRINT (SP 5990)

SP 5990 outputs machine status lists.

1. Select SP 5990. 2. Select a menu:

001 All (Data List), 002 SP (Mode Data List), 003 User Program, 004 Logging

Data, 005 Diagnostic Report, 006 Non-Default, 007 NIB Summary, 021 Copier

User Program, 022 Scanner SP, 023 Scanner User Program,

The output given by the menu "Big Font" is suitable for faxing.

3. Press the "Execute" key. MFP machine: The machine status list is output.

4. To return to the SP mode, press the key.

5.5.11 ADF APS SENSOR OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP 6901)

- Sensor Positions -

Large to Small

W1 1 0 0 1

W2 0 0 1 1

- Reading Data -

Paper Size W1 W2 L1 L2

NA EU/AA

1 1 1 1 11" x 17" A3

0 1 1 1 - B4

0 0 1 1 81/2" x 14" 81/2" x 13"

0 0 1 0 81/2" x 11" A4 SEF

1 1 0 0 11" x 81/2" A4 LEF

0 1 0 0 - B5 LEF

0 0 0 0 81/2" X 51/2" A5 LEF

DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

Overview

SM 6-1 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

6.1 OVERVIEW

6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT

(Color)

1. Scanner H.P. Sensor

2. 3rd Mirror

3. 2nd Mirror

4. Exposure Glass

5. Original Width Sensors

6. Exposure Lamp

7. 1st Mirror

8. Original Length Sensors

9. Lens Block

10. CCD

11. SBU

12. Scanner Motor

13. Engine Unit

14. Engine Entrance Sensor

15. One-sheet By-pass Tray

16. By-pass Tray

17. Registration Roller

18. First Registration Sensor

19. By-pass Paper Feed Roller

20. Paper Size Switch

21. Vertical Transport Roller

22. Paper Feed Roller

23. Sub-scan Encoder

24. Charge Roller

25. Sub-scan sensor

26. Engine Exit Sensor

27. Ink Cartridge Black

28. Ink Cartridge Cyan

29. Ink Cartridge Magenta

30. Ink Cartridge Yellow

31. Junction Gate Sensor

32. Junction Gate

33. Paper Exit Roller

34. Paper Exit Sensor

Overview

B229 6-2 SM

6.1.2 PAPER PATH

(Color)

1. Original Tray

2. Original Exit Tray

3. One-sheet By-pass Tray

4. By-pass Tray

5. Duplex Feed

6. Tray 2: Optional One-tray Paper Tray

Unit/Two-tray Paper Tray Unit

7. Tray 3: : Optional Two-tray Paper Tray Unit

8. Duplex Inverter

9. To the Duplex Unit

10. Straight Exit Tray

11. Standard Tray

This model can use the optional duplex unit and paper tray unit.

Overview

SM 6-3 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Scanner Motor

2. Exit Motor

3. Sub Scan Motor

4. Feed Motor

5. Feed Clutch

6. Relay Clutch

7. By-pass Clutch

8. Registration Clutch

9. Main Scan Motor

Board Structure

B229 6-4 SM

6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE

6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM

Board Structure

SM 6-5 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

1. BCU (Base Engine Control Unit) The main board controls the following functions:

Engine sequence

Timing control for peripherals

Image processing, video control

Drive control for the sensors, motors, and clutches of the copier and scanner

High voltage supply board control

Serial interfaces with peripherals

2. Controller The controller board controls the following functions.

Machine-to-host interface

Operation panel interface

Network interface

Interfacing and control of the optional IEEE1284, Bluetooth, IEEE1394, IEEE802.11b

(wireless LAN), HDD, and DRAM DIMM

3. CONIJ (Connect Ink Jet Module) The CONIJ is connecting board between COM and BCU board and COM and IOB board.

4. COM The COM board controls the print heads.

5. SBU (Sensor Board Unit) The SBU deals with the analog signals from the CCD and converts them into digital

signals.

6. IPU (Image Processing Unit) The Image Processing Unit is a large-scale integrated circuit. This unit processes digital

signals.

7. IOB (In Out Board) The IOB controls the motors, clutches , solenoids and high voltage power supply of the

engine unit.

8. PSU (Power Supply Unit) The PSU supplies DC to the machine.

9. FCU (Fax Control Unit): Optional The FCU controls the fax programs and communicates with the controller to share copier

resources.

Board Structure

B229 6-6 SM

10. HDD (Hard Disk Drives) This board stores all the temporary files for job processing and all permanent files for the

document server.

Copy Process Overview

SM 6-7 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW

6.3.1 EXPOSURE

A xenon lamp exposes the original. Light reflected from the original passes to the CCD,

where it is converted into an analog data signal. This data is converted to a digital signal,

processed and stored in the memory. At the time of printing, the data is retrieved and sent

to the COM board, which controls the carriage unit.

6.3.2 IMAGE CREATION

The ink jet engine processes an image to the paper with the carriage unit. The carriage unit

has 5 print heads (K1, K2, C, M, Y). It scans the paper from rear (home position) to front to

print an image to the paper. The carriage scans in two mode, one-way scanning and

two-way scanning. Two-way scanning saves time because the carriage can print an image

at returning way (front to rear).

The printing speed differs depending on the mode, resolution, paper type and so on.

6.3.3 NO FUSING

This machine uses the ink jet engine. As a result, it is not necessary to fuse the ink on the

paper. However, the machine may need time to exit the paper depending on the high ink

coverage on the paper or installation environment. This waiting time prevents the paper

from becoming curl.

Scanning

B229 6-8 SM

6.4 SCANNING

6.4.1 OVERVIEW

1. Scanner H.P. Sensor

2. Exposure Glass

3. Exposure Lamp

4. 1st Scanner

5. Lens Block

6. CCD

7. Scanner Motor

8. Original Length Sensor

9. Original Width Sensors

The original is illuminated by the exposure lamp (a xenon lamp). The image is reflected

onto a CCD (charge coupled device) on the lens block via the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd mirrors,

and through the lens on the lens block.

The 1st scanner consists of the exposure lamp, a reflector, and the 1st mirror.

A lamp stabilizer energizes the exposure lamp. The light reflected by the reflector is of

almost equal intensity, to reduce shadows on pasted originals.

An optics anti-condensation heater is available as an option. It can be installed on the left

side of the scanner. It turns on whenever the power cord is plugged in.

6.4.2 LAMP STABILIZER FUSE

Rating Manufacturer Type No.

Fuse 1.25A BEL FUSE INC MRT

Scanning

SM 6-9 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

6.4.3 SCANNER DRIVE

A stepper motor drives the 1st and 2nd scanners [A, B]. The 1st scanner and 2nd scanner

are driven by the scanner drive motor [C], drive gear through the timing belt [D], scanner

drive pulley [E], scanner drive shaft [F], and two scanner wires [G].

Book Mode The BCU controls and operates the scanner drive motor. In full size mode, the 1st scanner

speed is 100 mm/s in B/W mode and 66.6 mm/s in color mode during scanning. The 2nd

scanner speed is half that of the 1st scanner.

In reduction or enlargement mode, the scanning speed depends on the magnification ratio.

The returning speed is always the same, whether in full size or magnification mode. The

image length change in the sub scan direction is done by changing the scanner drive motor

speed, and in the main scan direction it is done by image processing on the BCU board.

Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the scanner drive

motor speed using SP4-008.

ADF Mode The scanners are always kept at their home position (the scanner H.P. sensor [H] detects

the 1st scanner) to scan the original. The ADF motor feeds the original through the ADF. In

reduction/enlargement mode, the image length change in the sub-scan direction is done by

changing the ADF motor speed. Magnification in the main scan direction is done in the

BCU board, like for book mode.

Scanning

B229 6-10 SM

Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the ADF motor speed

using SP6-006-005.

6.4.4 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION IN PLATEN MODE

In the optics cavity for original size detection, there are four reflective sensors. The original

width sensors [A] detect the original width, and the original length sensors [B] detect the

original length. These are the APS (Auto Paper Select) sensors. Each APS sensor is a

reflective photo sensor.

While the main switch is on, these sensors are active and the original size data is always

sent to the CPU. However, the CPU checks the data only when the platen cover sensor [C]

is activated. This is when the platen is positioned about 15 cm above the exposure glass,

for example while it is being closed. The CPU can recognize the original size from the

combination of on/off signals from the APS sensors.

If the copy is made with the platen fully open, the CPU decides the original size from the

sensor outputs when the Start key is pressed.

Scanning

SM 6-11 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

[A]: NA, [B]: EU/ASIA

Original Size Length Sensors Width Sensors

A4/A3 version LT/DLT version L2 L1 W2 W1

SP4-301

display

A3 11" x 17" 1 1 1 1 00001111

B4 — 1 1 1 0 00001110

8.5" x 13" 8.5" x 14" 1 1 0 0 00001100

A4-SEF 8.5" x 11" 0 1 0 0 00000100

A4-LEF 11" x 8.5" 0 0 1 1 00000011

B5-LEF — 0 0 1 0 00000010

A5-LEF 8.5" x 5.5" 0 0 0 0 00000000

0: High (no paper), 1: Low (paper present)

The above table shows the outputs of the sensors for each original size. This original size

detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre-scan and increases the machine's

productivity.

For other combinations, “Cannot Detect Original Size” will be indicated on the operation

panel display (if SP4-303 is kept at the default setting).

However, if the by-pass feeder is used, note that the machine assumes that the copy paper

is short-edge first. For example, if A4 paper is placed long-edge first on the by-pass tray,

the machine assumes it is A3 paper and scans the full A3 area for the first copy of each

page of the original, disregarding the original size sensors. However, for each page, the

data signal to the laser diode is stopped to match the copy paper length detected by the

registration sensor. This means that copy time for the first page may be slower (because of

the longer time required for scanning), but it will be normal for the rest of the job.

Original size detection using the ADF is described in the manual for the ADF.

Image Processing

B229 6-12 SM

6.5 IMAGE PROCESSING

6.5.1 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT)

SBU The VPU (Video Processor Unit) does the following functions:

Black level correction

White level correction

Gradation calibration

ADS control (Background Density)

Creating the SBU test pattern

Operation Summary The signals from the 3-line CCD, one line for each color (R, G, B) and 2 analog signals per

line (ODD, EVEN), are sampled by the ASIC and converted to digital signals in the 10-bit

A/D converter. This is the first phase of processing the data scanned from the original.

Storing Operation Settings The controller stores the SBU settings. These values must be restored after the lens block

is replaced:

SP4008 001 Sub Scan Mag Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment

SP4010 001 Sub Scan Reg Sub Scan Registration Adjustment

SP4011 001 Main Scan Reg Main Scan Registration Adjustment

Also, before lens block replacement, enter the SP mode and note the settings of

SP4800-001 to 003 (ARDF density adjustments for R, G, B). After lens block replacement,

do some copy samples with the ARDF, then check the copies. If the copies have

background, change SP4800-001 to 003 to their previous settings, or adjust until the

background is acceptable. These SP codes are also used to adjust the ARDF scanning

density, if the scanning densities of the ARDF and the platen mode are not the same.

SBU Test Mode There are two SP codes to create a test pattern which can be used as a diagnostic tool to

troubleshoot problems in the SBU:

SP4907-001 SBU Pattern - Test Pattern

SP4907-002 SBU Pattern - Select Fixed Pattern

Image Processing

SM 6-13 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

To print the pattern:

• Select the pattern to print.

• Touch "Copy Window" then press the Start key twice.

6.5.2 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT)

The IPU does the following:

Controls the scanner

Processes the image signals from the SBU and sends them over the PCI bus to the

controller memory

Receives the image processing signals sent over the PCI bus from the controller

memory, processes them, then outputs them to the BATTI.

Controls the relay of power and signals

Image processing, ADS correction, and line width correction are done on the BCU board

for all the digital data sent from the SBU. Finally, the processed data is sent to the printer as

digital signals (2 bits/pixel).

Carriage Unit

B229 6-14 SM

6.6 CARRIAGE UNIT

6.6.1 OVERVIEW

(Color Photo)

1. Carriage Unit

2. Print Head Tank

3. Air Release Valve

4. Print Head

5. Second Registration Sensor

Carriage Unit

SM 6-15 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

6.6.2 PRINT HEAD

[A]: 32.3 mm (1.27")

The wider print head increases the width of the band printed with one pass. This lets the

machine print faster.

Print Head Specifications Item Remark

Number of Print

Heads 5 (Y, M, C, K1, K2)

Number of Nozzles 384 x 4 colors

192 nozzles x 2 lines/head

Array Cross-Hatch (150 dpi x 2 lines)

Voltage Element Piezoelectric

Two Black Print Heads This machine has two black print heads on the carriage unit. As a result, it can copy/print at

a faster speed in B/W mode than a one-print head machine and can make a 600dpi print in

one print pass.

Carriage Unit

B229 6-16 SM

Line A of K1

Line A of K2

Line B of K1

Line B of K2

The following drawing shows the pixel pattern in 600dpi B/W solid printing mode.

If the gap between 1-3 and 2-4 is different, an image problem may occur. The carriage

prints an image in the forward direction [A] (rear to front) and in the reverse direction [B]

(front to rear). Also if the gap between 1-3 and 1*-3*, 2-4 and 2*-4* is different, an image

gap between forward and reverse may occur.

This can be adjusted with SP3-002. For details, refer to the "Initial Setting" in the section

"Installation Procedure".

Carriage Unit

SM 6-17 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

6.6.3 PRINT HEAD TANK

1. Ink Supply Port

2. Ink Reservoir

3. Air Release Valve

4. Tank Full Lever

5. Plastic Bellows

This copier employs a dual-tank system. Each print cartridge (YMCK) is connected to a

print head tank with a plastic tube. The first "tank" of the dual-tank system is the cartridge

that supplies the ink through a tube to the print head tank unit, and the second "tank" is the

ink reservoir inside the print head tank unit.

Both the high volume Print cartridges and the carriage components are extremely

lightweight.

A print head tank has four main parts as shown above:

Ink supply port: Ink enters here from the ink cartridge mounted under the operation

panel.

Ink reservoir: This is where ink collects before it is fed to the print head below.

Plastic Bellows: A spring forces out the flexible, thin plastic film on the left side of

the ink tank.

Tank Full Lever: When the ink tank is mounted in the copier, this lever pushes the

bellows down to increase pressure in the ink reservoir.

Air release valve: Vents periodically to keep the ink inside the ink tank unit under

the prescribed pressure.

Carriage Unit

B229 6-18 SM

On the B229 there are four independent units.

Each print head tank [A] has an independent print head [B] with a nozzle array [C].

Each print head tank holds 6ml of ink.

6.6.4 INK EJECTION DEVICE

Each print head uses a piezo-electric element (PZT) [A]. This will force the ink from the

ink reservoirs out of the ink nozzles and onto the paper.

This is done with pressure. At the prescribed time, an electric charge is given to the PZT.

This makes the PZT expand. The expansion of the PZT [B] puts pressure on the ink [C]

below. This makes the ink move in both directions. The ink on the right is forced out the

ejection port [D].

This device is unique. You cannot see this device on other copier on the market that use

small heaters to form bubbles to eject ink from the ports.

Carriage Unit

SM 6-19 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

6.6.5 INK NEAR END

[A]

Each print head has a tank full lever [A]. This lever presses against a spring loaded

bellows in the center of the print head tank. The rear side of each tank is constructed of

flexible plastic:

As ink enters the tank, the pressure of the ink pushes against the side of the tank and

moves the lever away from the side of the print head tank.

As ink is consumed during printing, the vacuum created by the ink leaving the tank

pulls the lever toward the side of the print head tank.

The tank full sensor [B], mounted above the left frame, checks the front and rear

positioning of the tank full lever every time the carriage passes below.

When the tank full sensor detects the lever against the side of the tank, the copier sends a

prescribed amount of ink to the tank from the Print cartridge.

The sensor signals the ‘ink near-end’ if the tank full lever does not return to the full position

(away from the side of the tank) within the prescribed time after the copier requests another

fill from the Print cartridge.

After the near-end alert, the copier will continue to print (B/W mode: approximately 300 to

500 sheets, Color mode: approximately 50 sheets) with the ink that remains in the partially

filled tank until the copier issues the ink end alert. ( "Ink Out" in this section)

Carriage Unit

B229 6-20 SM

6.6.6 INK OUT

(Color Photo)

Two sensor pins [A] monitor air in the print head tank. These pins detect changes in the

voltage differential on the surface of the ink inside the print head tank.

When these terminals detect air in the tank:

The air release solenoid [B] energizes and opens the air release valve [C] so air can

escape from the ink reservoir.

This allows more ink to enter the tank.

This is a continuous operation. The sensor pin readings signal the ink-out condition

when:

The ink near-end alert has been issued.

The amount of air detected in the tank indicates that no ink remains in the tank.

Also, as a backup measure, the firmware counts up for the amount of ink consumed after

every near end occurrence. When this count reaches the value prescribed for the toner

cartridge, this will also signal an ink-out condition.

Carriage Unit

SM 6-21 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

6.6.7 PAPER REGISTRATION AND SIZE DETECTION SENSOR

1. Second Registration Sensor

2. Transport Belt

3. Paper (Leading Edge)

The second registration sensor is attached to the front side of the carriage. The carriage

moves from rear to front during printing.

The second registration sensor performs two important functions for printing control:

Detects the leading edge and trailing edge of every sheet

Detects the width of the paper when the carriage and sensor pass in main scan

direction over the side edges of the paper as it feeds.

This is not automatic paper size detection. The paper size must be set with the

paper size switch on the paper tray.

The copier will signal an alert if the detected size does not match the size

selected with the paper size switch on the paper tray.

For more, see "Leading Edge and Page Width Detection" and "Trailing Edge Detection".

Ink Supply Unit

B229 6-22 SM

6.7 INK SUPPLY UNIT

6.7.1 OVERVIEW

(Color Photo)

1. Ink cartridges x 4 (with Viscous Ink: Y, M, C, K)

2. Supply Pump Unit

3. Supply Tube

Ink Supply Unit

SM 6-23 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

6.7.2 PRINT CARTRIDGES

There is a separate Print cartridge for each color (Y, M, C, K). Each Print cartridge is

vacuum packed [A].

Color Amount Life

Black 194.44cc (210 g) 9 K

Cyan 90.00cc (94.5 g) 3K

Magenta 59.90cc (62.9 g) 3K

Yellow 53.81cc (56.5 g) 3K

All the colors (Y, M, C, K) of Viscous ink are pigment inks.

Require only standard PPC to get quality printouts (special print media are not

required).

Do not let smears occur because they dry more quickly (there is less chance of

smearing wet ink).

Do not let fades occur in bright light. This makes their colors highly durable.

Ink Supply Unit

B229 6-24 SM

6.7.3 PRINT CARTRIDGE SET SENSOR

(Color Photo)

Four micro switches detect the Print cartridges. These are connected in series above the

cartridge set detection plate [A].

Each tank has a micro switch. The machine cannot specifically detect if a Print cartridge is

not set correctly. The open switch signals these:

A cartridge is not in the machine

A cartridge is not installed correctly

To solve this problem, you must open the front door of the copier. At this time you can

check these:

A cartridge is not in the machine

A cartridge is not installed correctly

Ink Supply Unit

SM 6-25 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

6.7.4 INK SUPPLY PUMP

(Color Photos)

The ink supply pump is divided into three compartments:

[A]: K compartment (for Black 1 and 2 Print cartridges)

[B]: C compartment (for Cyan Print cartridge)

[C]: M/Y compartment (for Magenta, Yellow Print cartridges)

Each compartment contains:

1 ink supply motor [D]

1 or 2 pumps [E] (one pump for each Print cartridge)

1 or 2 cams [F] (one cam for each Print cartridge)

1 One-way clutch (not shown)

When a print head tank needs ink:

The copier switches on the ink supply motor. The motor and its worm gear get

rotated forward or backward (depending on which type of ink is required). (Only one

pump can operate at a time.)

A one-way clutch engages and drives the shaft to operate the cam that repeatedly

strikes a pump arm to siphon ink from the cartridge.

The ink supply motor operates long enough to pump the prescribed amount of ink to

the tank. Then it switches off.

Maintenance Unit

B229 6-26 SM

6.8 MAINTENANCE UNIT

6.8.1 OVERVIEW

(Color Photos)

1. Flushing Gate

2. Maintenance Unit


(Color Photo)

The maintenance unit does these two important functions:

Keeps the surface of the print heads moist at the time they are not in use.

Cleans the print heads with suction at the time you do cleaning with the copier driver.

(The print heads are also cleaned automatically at prescribed intervals).

Maintenance Unit

SM 6-27 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

The caps [A] cover the print heads above. This occurs when the carriage stays at the home

position on the right side of the copier.

The first cap [B] is the only cap that can siphon excess ink from a print head. The ink gets

siphoned from the head with a simple, pressure tube-pump mechanism.

You must do these to the maintenance unit in order to position the print head to do the

siphon procedure:

Lower the maintenance unit

Move the carriage to the left. This sets the print head for cleaning (for more, see next

page).

The maintenance motor [C] rotates forward. Then it lowers two cams to let them press

against the bottom to lower the unit. Then it reverses at the prescribed time.

When the motor reverses, it disengages a one-way clutch attached to the main shaft. Then

it drives the second shaft to rotate the cam of the tube-pump mechanism.

At the prescribed time, the motor runs forward again until a feeler on the main shaft gets to

the gap of the maintenance HP sensor [D]. Then it switches the motor off.

Another cam attached to the main shaft raises and lowers the wiper [E]. The wiper cleans

the surface of the print head above as the carriage moves left and then right.

Maintenance Unit Cleaning Cycle The operator can start the cleaning operation from the copier driver or the operation panel.

You can set the print head for cleaning (or clean them all) if you start the clean job

with UP mode or SP mode.

All the print heads get cleaned if the job starts from the operation panel.

Cleaning starts with the carrier and print heads [A] capped and resting on top of the

maintenance unit [B].

Maintenance Unit

B229 6-28 SM

When the cleaning cycle starts, the maintenance unit [C] is lowered by the rotation of the

main shaft. Then the cams rotate away from the bottom of the unit.

At the same time, the carriage [D] moves to the front side.

The carriage moves the first print head (in this example, "K1" the black print head) above

the first vent [E] of the maintenance unit.

Only the first vent can siphon ink.

Another cam on the main shaft presses the maintenance unit up so the print head (K)

covers the first vent.

At this time the maintenance motor reverses. The one-way clutch disengages the main

shaft and engages the second shaft. This operates the tube-pump. The suction from the

pump below sucks ink [F] from the surface of the print head.

Maintenance Unit

SM 6-29 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

The maintenance [G] unit lowers.

Another cam raises the wiper [H]. At the same time the carriage moves the print heads to

the front side far enough so the vacuumed print head can make contact with the wiper. The

wiper cleans the ink [I] from the print head.

Then the carriage [J] moves rear to the home position. Then the maintenance unit caps the

print heads [K].

A cam on the main shaft below vibrates the small scraper [L]. This removes the

ink bolus from the wall of the trap. Then it goes to the ink collection tank.

This cycle repeats for each print head when you start a clean job from the

operation panel.

If cleaning is done from the copier driver, the operator has the option of

selecting one print head, more than one, or all print heads for cleaning.

For more, see Troubleshooting.

This cleaning cycle is also done automatically for all print heads if the copier

stays idle for the time intervals shown in the table below.

Maintenance Unit

B229 6-30 SM

Idle Time Total Time

Required for Cleaning

> 10 Hours < 3 Days 24 s

> 3 Days < 7 Days 24 to 160 s

> 7 Days < 1 Month 160 s

> 1 Month < 3 Months 360 s

> 3 Months 360 s

The B229 has 5 print heads.

6.8.3 INK COLLECTION TANK

The wiper [A] sweeps the residual ink of the each printer head. As a result, the ink

collection tank [B] collects the used ink from the maintenance unit above and the flushing

gate. The used ink gets collected at the ink collection port [C].

The capacity of the ink collection tank is 1232 ml. The copier should be able to use the ink

collection tank for about 150K pages of normal use. The tank has an ink collection tank full

sensor [D]. The sensor detects when the ink collection tank gets full (hardware detection).

In addition to that sensor, the copier calculates the total amount of flushed ink and judges

when ink collection tank gets to the near-full or full condition (software detection).

Maintenance Unit

SM 6-31 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

6.8.4 INK COLLECTION TANK FULL DETECTION

(Color Photo)

There are two different methods to detect ink collection tank full condition;

i) Detected by the ink collection tank full sensor [A] (hardware detection).

ii) Detected by accumulating amount of flushed ink (software detection).

The ink collection tank full sensor [A] is a “smart” reflective photo sensor. The photo sensor

measures the changes in the density of the ink materials in the tank. This lets you know

when the tank is full.

A “tank is near-full” prompt shows the copier needs maintenance when this sensor detects

the near-full condition. The default setting of near-full is set as 1212 ml. You can use the

copier to print these amounts of print jobs at the time the maintenance alert shows:

300 to 500 prints (B/W mode)/ 50 prints (Color mode)

These are only rough estimates. Fewer pages get printed if many normal and full print head

cleanings are done after the maintenance alert.

A “tank is full” prompt shows when this sensor detects the ink full condition. You cannot use

the copier when the sensor detects ink full. At this time you must replace the ink collection

tank. After replace the ink collection tank, you must reset the counter at SP7804-005.

Maintenance Unit

B229 6-32 SM

6.8.5 FLUSHING UNIT

(Color Photo)

The machine flushes all the nozzles with some amount of ink to keep the nozzles clear and

in good working condition. when the one of some conditions is met. The flushing gate [A]

and the flushing collection unit (below the gate) are located at the right side of the engine

unit.

Before Printing Job The machine flushes all the nozzles (384 nozzles/head) with following amount of ink

whenever the machine gets the printing job.

Temperature Ink Drops – M/Y/K Ink Drops - C

Less than 5°C 0.036 (µ l) 0.036 µ l

5°C to 10°C 0.036 (µ l) 0.036 µ l

10°C to 15°C 0.03 / 0.014* (µ l) 0.03 / 0.014* (µ l)

15°C to 20°C 0.0018 (µ l) 0.014 (µ l)

20°C to 25°C 0.0018 ((µ l) 0.014 (µ l)

25°C to 30°C 0.0018 (µ l) 0.014 (µ l)

30°C to 35°C 0.0018 (µ l) 0.014 (µ l)

35°C or more 0.0018 (µ l) 0.014 (µ l)

*For only 300 dpi B&W printing, the flushed amount of ink are different from other printing

mode.

Maintenance Unit

SM 6-33 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

During Printing The machine flushes all the nozzles (384 nozzles/head) with following amount of ink and at

following interval during the printing job.

Ink Drops Temperature

K C/M/Y Interval

Less than 5°C 0.0022 (µ l) 0.0022 (µ l) Every 5 seconds

5°C to 10°C 0.0022 (µ l) 0.0022 (µ l) Every 5 seconds






35°C or more 0.0022 (µ l) 0.0007 (µ l) Every 20 seconds

After No Operation The machine flushes all the nozzles with 0.036 µ l of ink when the machine has been left

without any operation for over 10 hours and less than 7 days.

For Maintenance Operation The machine flushes all the nozzles with 0.06 µ l of ink after wiping the print heads when

the machine gets the "Initial Ink Filling", "Air Releasing and Ink Filling", "Head Cleaning"

and "Refreshing".

The sum of the flushing collection unit should never fill to capacity for the

service life of the copier. You do not have to clean or replace the sump.

Carriage Drive

B229 6-34 SM

6.9 CARRIAGE DRIVE

6.9.1 OVERVIEW

(Color Photo) 1. Main Scan Motor

2. Timing Belt

3. Guide Rod

4. Main Scan Encoder (Translucent Film)

6.9.2 CARRIAGE DRIVE

A main scan motor [A] drives the carriage unit via a timing belt [B] connected to the

carriage.

Carriage Drive

SM 6-35 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

The main scan encoder strip [C], mounted in left side of the timing belt is threaded through

the main scan encoder sensor mounted on the carriage. This sensor detects the position of

the carriage at the time the carriage moves from rear to front during printing.

The home position of the carriage unit is on the rear side of the copier.

6.9.3 ENVELOPE SELECTOR

(Color Photo)

Move the envelope selector [A] to adjust:

The gap between the print heads

The surface of the paper on the transport belt.

Pushing the lever downward moves the print heads slightly away from the surfaces of thick

paper and envelopes. This stops chaffing on the printing surface and smearing the ink.

A cam operates when the envelope selector is set for printing on thick paper or envelopes.

This moves the guide rod to create a gap about 1.8 mm wider than the gap for normal

printing.

This lever should be down and set for printing on normal paper.

Paper Feed, Transport, Output

B229 6-36 SM

6.10 PAPER FEED, TRANSPORT, OUTPUT

6.10.1 OVERVIEW

(Color Photos)

* The lower picture shows the state after the transport belt unit has been removed.

1. Transport Belt Unit

2. Sub-scan Encoder

3. Sub-scan Encoder Sensor

4. Sub-scan Motor

5. High Voltage Power Supply

6. Charge Roller


SM 6-37 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

6.10.2 LEADING EDGE AND PAGE WIDTH DETECTION

There is no paper size sensor in the standard paper tray. The paper size must be selected

with the paper size switch of the paper tray.

The second registration sensor [A], mounted on the carriage unit, moves from rear to front

with the carriage during printing.

The second registration sensor detects the leading edge [B] and width [C] of the sheet for

feed timing.


B229 6-38 SM

6.10.3 TRAILING EDGE DETECTION

The engine entrance sensor [A], which is mounted at the left frame of the engine unit,

detects the trailing edge of the sheet for feed timing.

6.10.4 PAPER TRANSPORT DRIVE


SM 6-39 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

The sub scan motor [A] drives the timing belt [B] that rotates the paper transport belt [C].

The edge of the rotary encoder [D], attached to the shaft of the transport roller, passes

through the gap of the encoder sensor [E] as the encoder wheel rotates. The sub scan

sensor reads the coded markings on the rim of the encoder and sends this information to

the CPU. The CPU uses these readings to control the on/off timing of the transport belt:

When servicing the machine, work carefully to prevent scratching, breaking,

or bending the rotary encoder.

6.10.5 PAPER PATH

Here is a summary of the operation that sends paper through the copier:

1. The feed clutch energizes and engages the feed roller and the rotation of the vertical

motor drives the feed roller.

2. Paper feed roller feeds 1 sheet from the top of the stack in the paper tray. A friction pad

at the lip of the paper tray does not let the paper get double-fed.

3. The charge roller charges the transport belt. The charge on the transport belt lets the

paper stay on the transport belt.

4. The sheet feeds onto the transport belt. Then the feeler of the engine entrance sensor

rises and switches the engine entrance sensor on.

5. At the same time the second registration sensor goes on, the carriage moves to the 40

mm rear from the center position. This lets the second registration sensor detect the

leading edge of the paper.

6. The second registration sensor detects the right edge of the sheet when the carriage

and second registration sensor move toward the HP sensor on the right.

7. The detection of the right edge by the second registration sensor is used to determine

the width of the paper in the paper path.

The second registration sensor reads the right edge of the sheet only

once. This occurs at the time the first page gets fed for the print job. The

second registration sensor does not detect the right edge for any sheet

after the first sheet.

8. An area equal to the width of each print head gets printed when the carriage goes

across the sheet from right to left.

9. This occurs when the last line gets printed. The transport roller rotates only long

enough to feed the length of paper that stays. Then the paper exits the copier.

10. The print job count goes up by 1 after the paper exits.


B229 6-40 SM

6.10.6 TRANSPORT BELT

(Color Photo)

This copier uses the BT (Belt Transfer) system to transport paper through the paper path.

A high voltage power supply [A] charges the charge roller below the transport belt [B].

The charge roller applies a bias charge to the transport belt. This static charge makes the

paper adhere to the transport belt so the paper does not shift during transport and printing.

A temperature/humidity sensor, mounted near the GJ engine unit, monitors the

temperature and humidity near the charge roller. The temperature/humidity values read

from the sensor are used to adjust the width of the bias (bias pitch) applied to the transport

belt. This operation, called belt charge control, operates within the following ranges of

temperature and humidity:

Temperature: 0C to 35C (32F to 95F) Adjusted in 2.5C (4.5F) steps

Humidity: 0% to 100% Adjusted in 10% steps

The machine uses the feedback of the temperature/humidity sensor to reduce the width of

the charge applied to the transport belt below the print heads. This reduces the size of the

electrical field to the smallest size that can still provide the optimum charge to keep the

paper on the belt at the leading edge, center, and trailing edge of the paper without

interfering with the operation of the print nozzles.

Belt charge control is done for every paper feed station (Tray 1, Tray 2, and bypass) and for

every paper type (normal paper, envelopes, thick paper, and OHP).

The sharp curvature of the paper path separates the paper from the transport belt at the

time paper gets fed out the paper exit.


SM 6-41 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

6.10.7 CHARGE LEAK DETECTION

(Color Photo)

(* This picture shows the state after the transport belt unit has been removed.)

The copier checks for and detects charge leaks at these times:

Immediately after the copier is turned on.

When it gets a leak detection signal from the high voltage power pack at the time of

copier operation.

These happen when a charge leak gets detected:

The voltage supply from the power pack [A] gets interrupted immediately

The copier stops the current print job in progress.

The carriage goes back to its home position.

The print heads gets capped. The copier cannot operate.

Do these to let the copier go back to normal operation:

You must remove the cause of the leak.

Turning the copier off and on.

Paper Feed

B229 6-42 SM

6.11 PAPER FEED

6.11.1 OVERVIEW

There are a standard paper tray (250 sheets), by-pass tray (100 sheets) and one-sheet

by-pass tray (one sheet only).

The standard paper tray and by-pass tray use a friction pad system. However, for the

one-sheet by-pass tray, a sheet of paper is fed directly by the transport belt.

To prevent paper from getting caught inside the machine when the tray is pulled out, the

paper feed roller and shaft do not separate from the tray when the tray is pulled out.

The first registration sensor and engine entrance sensor are used for paper jam. The relay

sensor is used for paper jam detection when paper is fed up from the optional paper feed

unit.

The components of the paper feed station are as follows.

1. One-sheet By-pass Tray Set Sensor

2. Registration Roller

3. First Registration Sensor

4. By-pass Paper Feed Roller

5. By-pass Friction Pad

6. Relay Sensor

7. Relay Roller

8. Friction Pad

9. Paper End Sensor

10. Paper Feed Roller

11. Transport Belt

12. Engine Entrance Sensor

Paper Feed

SM 6-43 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

6.11.2 PAPER FEED DRIVE MECHANISM

Standard Tray

The feed motor [A] drives the pick-up and feed mechanism of both the first and second

paper trays. The paper feed clutches [B] transfer drive from this motor to the paper feed

rollers [C].

When the paper feed clutch turns on, the feed roller starts to feed the paper. The paper

feed clutch stays on until shortly after the first registration sensor has been activated.

By-pass Tray

When the by-pass tray set sensor [A] detects paper, the machine goes into ready condition.

The feed motor [B] drives the feed roller [D] via the by-pass clutch [C]. The by-pass tray set

sensor also detects the paper end when the filler [E] interrupts the sensor.

Paper Feed

B229 6-44 SM

One-sheet By-pass Tray

When the one-sheet by-pass tray [A] is opened, the machine shows "Make sure the

machine has stopped. Then open the 1 sheet by-pass Output tray". The machine can

detect a sheet of paper on the one-sheet by-pass tray via the set detection filler [B]. If the

one-sheet by-pass output tray is opened with a sheet of paper set on the tray, the

one-sheet by-pass shutter solenoid [C] is activated and the one-sheet by-pass shutter [D]

is opened. As a result, a sheet of paper can be inserted into the machine. a sheet of paper

is directly caught by transport belt of the engine unit after the sheet of paper has reached to

the engine unit.

6.11.3 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM

The paper feed roller [A] drives the top sheet of paper from the paper tray or by-pass tray to

the copier. The friction pad [B] allows only one sheet to feed at a time. The friction pad

applies pressure to the feed roller with a spring [C].

The friction pad pressure cannot be adjusted.

Paper Feed

SM 6-45 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

6.11.4 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM

When the paper tray [A] is closed, projection [B] on the copier frame pushes the slider [C]

(on the bottom part of the paper tray) off the bottom plate hook [D]. After the release slider

comes off, the compressed springs lift the bottom plate.

6.11.5 PAPER END DETECTION

If there is any paper in the paper tray, the paper stack lifts the feeler; the paper end sensor

[A] is deactivated.

When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout [B] in the

tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated.

When the paper tray is drawn out with no paper in the tray, the shape of the paper end

feeler causes it to lift up.

Paper Feed

B229 6-46 SM

6.11.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION

Paper Tray

Size SW1 SW2 SW3

A3, 11" x 17" OFF OFF OFF

A4 LEF ON ON OFF

A4 SEF,81/2" x 11" ON OFF OFF

A5 LEF, 81/2" x 14" OFF ON ON

81/2" x 13" ON OFF ON

11" x 81/2" OFF ON OFF

* (Asterisk) OFF OFF ON

ON: Not pushed, OFF: Pushed

There are three paper size micro switches [A] on the front right plate of the paper tray unit.

The switches are actuated by a paper size actuator [B] behind the paper size indicator

plate, which is on the front right of the tray.

Each paper size has its own actuator, with a unique combination of notches. To determine

which size has been installed, the CPU reads which micro switches the actuator has

switched off.

The CPU disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected. If the paper

size actuator is broken, or if there is no tray installed, the Add Paper indicator will light.

When the paper size actuator is at the “*” mark, the paper tray can be set up to

accommodate one of a wider range of paper sizes by using User Tools. If the paper size for

this position is changed without changing the User Tool setting, a paper jam will result.

Paper Feed

SM 6-47 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

By-pass Tray

The by-pass feed paper size switch [A] monitors the paper width. The side fence is

connected to the terminal plate gear. When the side fences move to match the paper width,

the circular terminal plate rotates over the wiring patterns on the rectangular part of the

paper size switch. The patterns for each paper width in the paper size switch are unique.

North America

CN No. (BICU) 11" x 17" 81/2" x 14" 51/2" x 81/2"

CN127-1 ON/OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

CN127-2 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

CN127-3 (GND) OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

CN127-4 OFF ON OFF OFF ON

CN127-5 ON ON OFF OFF OFF

Europe/Asia

CN No. (BICU) A3 A4 SEF 8" x 13" A5 SEF

CN127-1 ON/OFF OFF OFF OFF

CN127-2 OFF OFF OFF ON/OFF

CN127-3 (GND) OFF OFF OFF OFF

CN127-4 OFF ON ON OFF

CN127-5 ON ON OFF OFF

Paper Feed

B229 6-48 SM

6.11.7 SIDE FENCES

If the tray is full of paper and it is pushed in strongly, the fences may deform or bend. This

may cause the paper to skew or the side-to-side registration to be incorrect. To correct this,

each side fence has a stopper [A] attached to it. Each side fence can be secured with a

screw, for customers who do not want to change the paper size.

6.11.8 PAPER REGISTRATION

The drive from the feed motor [A] is transmitted to the registration roller through the

registration clutch gear [B].

The first registration sensor [C] is used for correcting paper skew and for detecting paper

misfeeds.

The cleaning Mylar [D] contacts the registration roller. It removes paper dust from the

registration roller so that this dust will not transfer into the development unit through the

drum-cleaning unit.

Paper Feed

SM 6-49 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

The amount of paper buckle at the registration roller to correct skew can be adjusted with

SP1-003.

If jams frequently occur after registration, SP1-903 can be used to activate the relay clutch

so that the relay roller assists the registration roller in feeding the paper along. When

feeding from the by-pass tray, the by-pass feed clutch is activated, turning the by-pass feed

roller. This feature may be needed when feeding thick paper, and cannot be used for the

first paper feed tray.

Paper Exit

B229 6-50 SM

6.12 PAPER EXIT

6.12.1 OVERVIEW

(Color)

1. Exit Transport Roller1 to 3

2. Engine Exit Sensor

3. Junction Gate Sensor

4. Junction Gate

5. Exit Transport Roller 4

6. Paper Exit Sensor

7. Paper Exit Roller

Paper Exit

SM 6-51 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

Sensors and Switch

[A]: Paper Exit Sensor

[B]: One-sheet By-pass Output Tray Switch

[C]: Engine Exit Sensor

[D]: Junction Gate Sensor

The paper exit sensor [A] detects the paper jam.

The engine exit sensor [C] activates the exit motor and the junction gate solenoid if the

duplex mode is selected. It also detects the paper jam.

The junction gate sensor [D] activates the duplex transport motor and detects the paper

jam.

The One-sheet By-pass Output Tray Switch [B] detects if the output tray is open or not. If

this tray is not open, the one-sheet by-pass shutter cannot open.

Paper Exit

B229 6-52 SM

6.12.2 PAPER EXIT PATH

Standard Output Tray

The paper exit motor starts to drive the exit transport rollers [B] and paper exit roller [C]

after the engine exit sensor [A] has detected a sheet of paper. The paper is fed through the

exit transport rollers and paper exit roller. Then the paper exit motor stops rotating after the

paper exit sensor [D] has detected no paper.

External Output Tray

The junction gate [A] for the one-sheet by-pass tray opens after a customer has decided

paper type. A sheet of paper is fed through exit transport rollers and to the external output

tray [B]. The junction gate sensor [C] still detects a sheet of paper until the paper fed to the

external output tray is removed. While this sensor detects a sheet of paper, the shutter of

the one-sheet by-pass tray is closed. So, a next job using the one-sheet by-pass printing

cannot be allowed.

Paper Exit

SM 6-53 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

Duplex

The junction gate [A] for the duplex unit opens when a sheet of paper is transported for 150

mm after the engine exit sensor has detected no paper.

The paper is fed through the exit transport rollers and to the duplex transport rollers.

The duplex transport motor starts to drive the duplex transport rollers when a sheet of

paper is transported for 150 mm after the junction gate sensor [B] has detected the paper.

The junction gate [A] is closed when a sheet of paper is transported for 50 mm after the

junction gate sensor [B] has detected no paper.

6.12.3 PAPER STOP FUNCTION

(Color)

The exiting paper stops temporarily [A] to get enough time to be dried when much ink is

used for a sheet of paper. The average consumed ink amount (ml/cm2) for each page is

calculated at completing the printing. And also the copier calculates the average consumed

ink amount in the 50 mm area from the trailing edge of paper. This is countermeasure in

case that much amount of ink is used only in the trailing edge area. The copier uses the

higher value among both as the coefficient for the paper stop function. The paper stop time

is defined depending on the combination of the coefficient and table. For details, refer to

the end of this column. The next sheet of paper stays at the registration roller [B].

Paper Exit

B229 6-54 SM

Table for the Paper Stop Time

(Color) The table has three areas [A], [B], [C].

The paper stop time is "10 seconds" when the average consumed ink is more than

70 % and the environment is in [A].






50 % and the environment is in [B].





The paper stop time is "0 second" when the average consumed ink is more than

20 % and the environment is in [C].

Paper Exit

SM 6-55 B229

Det

aile

d D

escr

iptio

ns

6.12.4 ENERGY SAVER MODES OF BASIC MACHINES

This section illustrates the energy saver modes of the basic machine (the machine without

the optional controller).

Overview

The machine has two energy-saver modes: the Low Power Mode and the Night/Off Mode.

The table lists the status of several components.

Operation panel Engine Exhaust fan

Operating Mode* On On On

Sleep Mode Off Off** Off

*The "Operating Mode” refers to all the modes (and status) other than the Sleep Mode.

Actual power consumption (during the Operating Mode) depends on job status and

environmental conditions.

**The SRAM is alive and backs up the engine controller.

Timers The engine controller references the Auto Off Timer to start the Sleep Mode. The user can

set these timers (Use Tools > System Settings > Timer Settings). The Auto Off Timer starts

at the same time (t0) when the machine ends all jobs or when the user ends all manual

operations.

Paper Exit

B229 6-56 SM

Recovery Any of the following operations brings the machine back to the Operating Mode:

The power switch is pressed.

Originals are set on the document feeder.

The platen cover (or document feeder) is opened.

SPECIFICATIONS

General Specifications

SM 7-1 B229

Spec

ifica

tions

7. SPECIFICATIONS

7.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Configuration: Desktop

Copy Process: On-Demand Ink Printing Technology

Originals: Sheet/Book/Object

Original Size: Maximum A3/11" x 17"

Copy Paper Size: Maximum: A3/11" x 17" Minimum: A5 LEF/81/2" x 51/2" (Paper tray) A6 SEF/51/2" x 81/2" (Bypass) Custom sizes in the bypass tray: Width: 90 – 305 mm (3.55" – 12.2") Length: 148 – 600 mm (5.83" – 23.62") Print and Fax Modes 148 – 457.2 mm (5.83" – 18.0”) Copy Mode

Physically, the by-pass tray can handle the

following size (but this size is not recognized by

the application software):

Width: 305 mm

Length: 1,260 mm

Copy Paper Weight:

Paper Tray: 60 – 105 g/m2, 16 – 28 lb.

By-pass Tray: 60 – 162 g/m2, 16 – 43 lb.

One-sheet By-pass Tray: 60 – 220g/㎡ 16lb – 55lb

Duplex: 60 – 105 g/m2, 16 – 28 lb.

Reproduction Ratios: 4 enlargement and 5 reduction

A4/A3 Version LT/DLT Version

Enlargement

400%

200%

141%

122%

400%

155%

129%

121%

Full Size 100% 100%

Reduction

93%

82%

71%

50%

25%

93%

78%

65%

50%

25%

⇒

Rev. 11/2006


B229 7-2 SM

25% 25%

Zoom: 25% to 400%, in 1% steps

Power Source: North America/ Taiwan: 110V – 120 V, 60 Hz, 12 A

Europe, Asia, China: 220 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 7 A

Power Consumption:

North America/ Taiwan Main Unit only Complete System*

Europe/ Asia/ China Main Unit only Complete System*

Maximum Less than 110 W Less than 250 W

Operating About 70 W About 135 W

Stand-by About 38 W About 46 W

Sleep mode 3.1 W or less 7.0 W or less

Maximum Less than 110 W Less than 250 W

Operating About 70 W About 135 W

Stand-by About 40 W About 48 W

Sleep mode 3.7 W or less 7.7 W or less

*Complete System: The complete system consists of the Main unit, A(R)DF, Fax Unit, USB

Host, IEE1284, Function Upgrade Option, Copy Data Security Unit, Duplex unit and Paper

Tray unit.

Noise Emission (Sound Power Level)

Standby (Mainframe/Full system): Not above 40 dB(A)

Operating (Mainframe only): Not above 62 dB(A)

Operating (Full System): Not above 66 dB(A)

The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779. Measurements were

taken from the normal position of the operator.

Dimensions (W x D x H):

550 x 728 x 485 mm (22" x 29.1" x 19.4")

Measurement Conditions:

With bypass feed table closed

Without the A(R)DF

Weight: 50 kg or less (110 lb.) (Excluding A(R)DF, platen cover,

toner, and developer)

Copying Speed in Multi-copy Mode

(copies/minute):

5 – 24 cpm (B/W mode, A4/LT LEF)

3 – 6 cpm (FC mode, A4/LT LEF)


SM 7-3 B229

Spec

ifica

tions

Warm-up Time: From Power-on; Less than 20 seconds (at 20°C [68°F])

From Stand-by; Less than 5.5 seconds (at 20°C [68°F])

First Copy Time:

Not more than 9.7 seconds (B/W mode)

Not more than 24 seconds (Color mode)

Measurement Conditions

From the ready state, with the polygonal mirror motor

operating.

A4/LT copying

Not APS mode

100%size

Paper feed from the upper tray

Copy Number Input: Numeric keypad, 1 to 99 (increment, decrement)

Manual Image Density: 5 steps

Automatic Reset: Default is 60 seconds. Can be set from 60 to 999

seconds with user tools.

Automatic Shut-off: Default is 1 minute. Can be set from 1 to 240 minutes

with user tools.

Copy Paper Capacity:

Paper Tray: 250 sheets

Optional Paper Tray Unit: 500 sheets x 1, or 500

sheets x 2

By-pass Tray: 100 sheets (sheets up to 432 mm [17"]),

40 postcards, 10 envelopes

One-sheet By-pass Tray: 1 sheet

Copy weight: 80 g/m2 (20 lb.)

Ink Replenishment: Cartridge replacement (xxx g/cartridge)

Optional Equipment:

Platen cover

Auto document feeder

Auto-reverse document feeder

Paper tray unit (1 tray)

Paper tray unit (2 trays)

Tray heater

Optics anti-condensation heater

Fax unit

Handset

IEEE 1394


B229 7-4 SM

IEEE 1284

Wireless LAN

Bluetooth

PostScript 3

USB Host

PictBridge


Copy Data Security Unit

JVM SD Card

NRS Cumin-M

Ink Yield:

BK: 9 k copies (A4 LEF, 6%)

Color: 3 k copies (A4 LEF, 5%)

*: 1 to 2 copying, normal text mode

Copy-Tray Capacity 250 sheets

Memory: 384 MB (On-board-128 MB + RAM DIMM- 256 MB)

Supported Paper Sizes

SM 7-5 B229

Spec

ifica

tions

7.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES

7.2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

North America, Europe, Asia, Taiwan North America Europe/Asia/Taiwan

Paper Size (W x L) Platen ADF Platen ADF

A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm O O X X

B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm O O X X

A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm A4/LT A4/LT X X

A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm A4/LT A4/LT X X

B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm O O O X

B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm O O X X

A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm O O O X

A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm O O S a X

B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm O O O O

B6 LEF 182 x 128 mm O O O O

8K SEF 267 x 390 mm O O O O

16K SEF 195 x 267 mm O O O O

16K LEF 267 x 195 mm O O O O

DLT SEF 11.0" x 17.0" X X O O

SEF 11.0" x 15.0" O O O O

LG SEF 8.5" x 14.0" X X O O

LT SEF 8.5" x 11.0" X X A4/LT A4/LT

LT LEF 11.0" x 8.5" X X A4/LT A4/LT

HLT SEF 5.5" x 8.5" O X O O

HLT LEF 8.5" x 5.5" S X O O

F/GL (F4) SEF 8.0" x 13.0" F O F F

Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13.0" F O F F

Folio SEF 8.25" x 13.0" F O F F

USB4 SEF 10.0" x 14.0" O O O O

Eng Quarto SEF 8.0" x 10.0" O O O O

Eng Quarto LEF 10.0" x 8.0" O O O O


B229 7-6 SM

Symbols: X: Detected

O: Not detected

F: Detected as F (8.5" x 13.0")

S: Detected as specified

A4/LT: Detected as A4 or LT as specified

When the settings of SP4-305-001 is "1: A4/LT," the settings of SP4-303 is

invalidated (A5 LEF is not detected).

7.2.2 PAPER FEED AND EXIT

Main Frame, Duplex, Optional Paper Tray Main Frame Tray

Paper Size (W x L) NA EU/ASIA

Duplex Optional

Paper Tray

A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm M X X X

A3 LEF 420 x 297 mm O O O O

B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm M M X M


A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm M X X X

A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm X X X X

B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm M M X M

B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm M M X M

A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm O O X M

A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm M X X O

B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm O O O O


A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm O O O O


DLT SEF 11" x 17" X M X X

DLT LEF 17" x 11" O O O O

LG SEF 81/2" x 14" X M X X

LG LEF 14" x 81/2" O O O O

Gov. LG SEF 81/4" x 14" M M X M

Gov. LG LEF 14" x 81/4" O O O O


SM 7-7 B229

Spec

ifica

tions

Main Frame Tray Paper Size (W x L)

NA EU/ASIA Duplex

Optional Paper Tray

LT SEF 81/2" x 11" X M X X

LT LEF 11" x 81/2" X X X X

HLT SEF 51/2" x 81/2"" O O O M

HLT LEF 81/2" x 51/2" M M O O

Executive SEF 71/2" x 101/2" M M X O

Executive LEF 101/2" x 71/4" O O O O

F SEF 8" x 13" M M X M

F LEF 13" x 8" O O O O

Foolscap SEF 81/2" x 13" X X X M

Foolscap LEF 13" x 81/2" O O O O

Folio SEF 81/4" x 13" M M X M

Folio LEF 13" x 81/4" O O O O

8K SEF 267 x 390 mm M M X M

8K LEF 390 x 267 mm O O O O

16K SEF 195 x 267 mm M M X M

16K LEF 267 x 195 mm M M X M

C5 Env SEF 162 x 229 mm O O O O

C6 Env SEF 114 x 162 mm O O O O

DL Env SEF 110 x 220 mm O O O O

Com 10 SEF 41/8" x 91/2" O O O O

Monarch SEF 37/8" x 71/2" O O O O

Custom M M M M

Symbols: X: Detected (Main frame tray)/Processed (Duplex) O: Not detected (Main frame tray)/Not processed (Duplex) M: Selected manually K: Specified from the key pad

Custom

W: 182 to 297 mm, L: 148 to 432 mm for Main Frame W: 148 to 297 mm, L: 182 to 432 mm for Optional Paper Tray W: 90 to 305 mm, L: 148 to 600 mm for By-pass/ One-sheet By-pass Tray (Print

and Fax) W: 90 to 305 mm, L: 148 to 457.2 mm for By-pass/ One-sheet By-pass Tray (Copy)

Rev. 11/2006

⇒


B229 7-8 SM

By-pass Tray, One-sheet By-pass Tray By-pass One-sheet By-pass Tray

Paper Size (W x L) NA EU/ASIA NA EU/ASIA

A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm M X M M


B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm M M M M



A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm M M M M


B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm M M M M


A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm M M M M



A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm K K K K


DLT SEF 11" x 17" X M M M

DLT LEF 17" x 11" O O O O

LG SEF 81/2" x 14" M M M M

LG LEF 14" x 81/2" O O O O

Gov. LG SEF 81/4" x 14" M M M M

Gov. LG LEF 14" x 81/4" O O O O

LT SEF 81/2" x 11" X M M M

LT LEF 11" x 81/2" M M M M

HLT SEF 51/2" x 81/2" X M M M

HLT LEF 81/2" x 51/2" O O O O

Executive SEF 71/2" x 101/2" M M M M

Executive LEF 101/2" x 71/4" M M M M

F SEF 8" x 13" M X M M

F LEF 13" x 8" O O O O

Foolscap SEF 81/2" x 13" M M M M

Foolscap LEF 13" x 81/2" O O O O

Folio SEF 81/4" x 13" M M M M


SM 7-9 B229

Spec

ifica

tions

By-pass One-sheet By-pass TrayPaper Size (W x L)

NA EU/ASIA NA EU/ASIA

Folio LEF 13" x 81/4" O O O O

8K SEF 267 x 390 mm M M M M

8K LEF 390 x 267 mm O O O O

16K SEF 195 x 267 mm M M M M

16K LEF 267 x 195 mm M M M M

C5 Env SEF 162 x 229 mm M M M M

C6 Env SEF 114 x 162 mm M M M M

DL Env SEF 110 x 220 mm M M M M

Com 10 SEF 41/8" x 91/2" M M M M

Monarch SEF 37/8" x 71/2" M M M M

Custom K K K K

Symbols: X: Detected (Opt. paper tray and By-pass)/Processed (One-bin tray)

O: Not detected (Opt. paper tray and By-pass)/Not processed (One-bin tray)

M: Selected manually

K: Specified from the key pad

Custom

W: 182 to 297 mm, L: 148 to 432 mm for Main Frame

W: 148 to 297 mm, L: 182 to 432 mm for Optional Paper Tray

W: 90 to 305 mm, L: 148 to 600 mm for By-pass/ One-sheet By-pass Tray (Print

and Fax)

W: 90 to 305 mm, L: 148 to 457.2 mm for By-pass/ One-sheet By-pass Tray (Copy)

⇒

Rev. 11/2006

Machine Configuration

B229 7-10 SM

7.3 MACHINE CONFIGURATION

Unit/Component Machine Code Diagram

Copier (1-tray non-duplex model) B229 [B]

Platen cover (optional) B406 [E]

ADF (optional) B813 [A]

ARDF (optional) B814 [A]

Paper tray unit–1 tray (optional) B385 [F]

Paper tray unit–2 trays (optional) B384 [D]

Duplex Unit B806 [C]

Tray heater (optional) — —

Copier

Optics anti-condensation heater (optional) — —

Fax controller (optional) B267 Fax

Handset (optional) B433

Machine Configuration

SM 7-11 B229

Spec

ifica

tions

Unit/Component Machine Code Diagram

PostScript 3 (optional) B850 5

Function Upgrade Option B271 -

Data Overwrite Security Unit B735 5

Copy Data Security Unit B770 8

Printer/

scanner

JVM SD Card G874 6

IEEE 1394 B581 1

IEEE 1284 B679 2

Wireless LAN G813 3

Bluetooth B826 4

USB Host B825 7

Network

Remote Communication Gate B818 -

Optional Equipment

B229 7-12 SM

7.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

7.4.1 ARDF

Original Size:

Standard sizes

Single-sided mode: A3 to A5, 11" x 17" to 51/2" x 81/2"

Double-sided mode: A3 to A5, 11" x 17" to 51/2" x 81/2"

Non-standard sizes (Single-sided mode only)

Max. width 297 mm

Min. width 105 mm

Max. length 1260 mm

Min. length 128 mm

Original Weight: Single-sided mode: 40 – 128 g/m2, 10 – 34 lb.

Double-sided mode: 64 – 105 g/m2, 17 – 28 lb.

Table Capacity: 50 sheets (80 g/m2, 70 kg)

Original Standard Position: Center

Separation: FRR

Original Transport: Roller transport

Original Feed Order: From the top original

Reproduction Range: 50 to 200% (Sub scan direction only)

Power Source: 24 and 5 VDC from the copier

Power Consumption: 50 W

Dimensions (W x D x H): 550 x 470 x 130 mm

Weight: 10 kg

7.4.2 ADF

Original Size:

Standard sizes (Single-sided mode only):

A3 to A5, 11" x 17" to 51/2" x 81/2"

Non-standard sizes (Single-sided mode only):

Max. width 297 mm

Min. width 105 mm

Max. length 1,260 mm

Min. length 128 mm

Original Weight: 52 – 105 g/m2 (14 – 28 lb.)

Table Capacity: 30 sheets (80 g/m2, 22 lb.)

Optional Equipment

SM 7-13 B229

Spec

ifica

tions

Original Standard Position: Center

Separation: FRR

Original Transport: Roller transport

Original Feed Order: From the top original

Reproduction Range: 50 – 200%

Power Source: 24 and 5 VDC (from the main frame)


Dimensions (W x D x H): 550 mm x 470 mm x 90 mm

Weight: Not above 7 kg

7.4.3 ONE-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT

Paper Size A5 to A3

51/2" x 81/2" SEF to 11" x 17"

Paper Weight: 60 – 105 g/m2, 16 – 28 lb.

Tray Capacity: 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. ) x 1 tray

Paper Feed System: Feed roller and friction pad

Paper Height Detection: 4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Near end)

Power Source:

24 VDC and 5VDC (from the copier/printer):

120 VAC: 120 V version, from the copier/printer when the

optional tray heater is installed

220 – 240 VAC:

230 V version, from the copier/printer when the optional tray

heater is installed

Power Consumption:

Max: 20 W (copying/printing), 23 W (optional tray heater on)

Average: 13 W (Copying/printing), 15 W (Optional Tray

Heater On)

Weight: 12 kg (26.4 lb.)

Size (W x D x H): 550 mm x 520 mm x 134 mm

Optional Equipment

B229 7-14 SM

7.4.4 TWO-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT

Paper Size A5 to A3

51/2" x 81/2" SEF to 11" x 17"

Paper Weight: 60 – 105 g/m2, 16 – 28 lb.

Tray Capacity: 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.) x 2 trays

Paper Feed System: Feed roller and friction pad

Paper Height Detection: 4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Near end)

Power Source:

24 VDC, 5 VDC (from the copier/printer)

120 VAC: 120 V version, from the copier/printer when the

optional tray heater is installed

220 – 240 VAC: 230 V version, from the copier/printer when

the optional tray heater is installed

Power Consumption:

Max: 30 W (Copying/printing), 23 W (Optional Tray Heater

On)

Average: 17 W (Copying/printing), 15 W (Optional Tray

Heater On)

Weight: 25 kg (55 lb.)


7.4.5 DUPLEX UNIT

Copy Paper Size: Maximum: A3/11" x 17"

Minimum: A5/51/2" x 81/2"

Copy Paper Weight: 64 – 105 g/m2 (20 – 28 lb.)


Weight: 11 kg (24.2 lb.)


B267

FAX OPTION

SM i B267

FAX OPTION B267 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 1 1.1 FAX UNIT(B267) ...........................................................................................1

1.1.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .........................................................................1 1.1.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................2 1.2.3 INITIAL SETTING ................................................................................2

1.2 FAX UNIT OPTIONS .....................................................................................8 1.2.1 HANDSET (B443).................................................................................8

2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 9 2.1 FCU ...............................................................................................................9

3. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 10 3.1 FAX UNIT(B267) ......................................................................................... 10 3.2 I-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................................................... 30 3.3 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................... 30

3.3.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION.................................................................... 30 3..3.2 IP_FAX RECEPTION ......................................................................... 36

4. SERVICE TABLES ....................................................................... 40 4.1 BEFOREHAND............................................................................................ 40 4.2 SERVICE TABLES ...................................................................................... 41

4.2.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SWITCHES ) .............................................................. 41 4.2.2 I SP2-XXX (RAM DATA ) ................................................................... 42 4.2.3 SP3-XXX (TEL LINE SETTINGS) ...................................................... 43 4.2.4 SP4-XXX (ROM VERSIONS) ............................................................ 45 4.2.5 SP5-XXX (INITIALIZING) .................................................................. 46 4.2.6 SP6-XXX (REPORTS) ....................................................................... 46 4.2.7 SP7-XXX (TEST MODES) ................................................................. 49 4.2.8 SP9-XXX (DESIGN SWITCH MODE) ............................................... 51

4.3 BIT SWITCHES ........................................................................................... 52 4.3.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES ........................................................................ 52 4.3.2 I-FAX SWITCHES ............................................................................ 64 4.3.3 PRINTER SWITCHES ....................................................................... 71 4.3.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES ........................................................ 77 4.3.5 G3 SWITCHES .................................................................................. 84 4.3.6 IP FAX SWITCHES .......................................................................... 93

B267 ii SM

4.4 NCU PARAMETERS ................................................................................. 101 4.5 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ........................................ 117

4.5.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ..................................................... 117 4.5.1 PARAMETERS ................................................................................ 117

4.6 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES................................................................... 125

5. DETAIED DESCRIPTIONS.......................................................... 135 5.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 135 5.2 BOARDS ................................................................................................... 136

5.2.1 FCU ................................................................................................. 136 5.2.2 MBU ................................................................................................ 137

5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH .................................................................................. 138 5.3.1 TRANSMISSION ............................................................................. 138 5.3.2 RECEPTION ................................................................................... 140

5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES ....................................................... 141 5.4.1 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION ............................................. 141

5.5 IP-FAX ...................................................................................................... 150 5.5.1 WHAT IS IP-FAX? ........................................................................... 150

6. SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................... 151 6.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS................................................................... 151 6.2 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................ 153 6.3 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................ 155 6.4 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION ................................................................... 156

SM 1 B267

B26

7

Fax

Opt

ion

1. INSTALLATION

1.1 FAX UNIT (B267)


No. Description Q'ty

1 Fax Unit 1

2 Fax Operation Panel 1

3 Ferrite Core EU: 1, NA: 2

4 Module Cable (NA only) 1

5 Tel Cap (NA only) 1

6 Handset Bracket (NA only) 1

7 Serial Number Decal 1

8 G3 Decal 1

9 FCC Decal (NA only) 1

B267 2 SM


Before installing the fax option:

1. Print out all data in the printer buffer (if the printer option is installed).

2. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the power cord and the network cable.

1. Unplug the DF cable [A] (if installed). 2. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x 4).

3. Remove the interface cover [C] ( x 2).

SM 3 B267

B26

7

Fax

Opt

ion

4. Switch the jumper switch [D] on the MBU [E] to “ON” position.

The jumper switch works as the battery switch.

5. Remove the slot cover [F] ( x 3). 6. Install the Fax unit [G] ( x 3).

Before installing the Fax unit, push the MBU and confirm that the MBU is

properly connected to the FCU.

7. Install the Tel cap [H] in the “TEL” jack if the optional handset or external telephone is not installed.

B267 4 SM

8. Attach the ferrite core [I] to the telephone cable [J]. The length [K] must be about 10 cm (4").

Attach the ferrite core to the handset cable also if the handset is installed to the

copier. In case of attaching to the handset cable, the length [K] must be about 4

cm (1.6").

9. Reassemble the interface cover ( x 2) and rear cover ( x 4). 10. Connect the telephone cable [L] to the "LINE" jack as shown.

Connect the handset cable [M] to the "TEL" jack as shown if the handset is

installed.

SM 5 B267

B26

7

Fax

Opt

ion

11. Remove the dummy cover [N] from the operation panel.

12. Install the fax operation panel [O] on the operation panel as shown.

Slide the fax panel to the right pressing down the right edge of the fax operation

panel. Make sure that the connection between the fax operation panel and the

operation panel of the copier is firmly stable.

B267 6 SM

13. Attach the super G3 decal [P] to the front door as shown.

14. Attach the FCC decal to the right side [Q] of the rear cover if you do this procedure on the NA model. Go to the next step if you do not have the NA model.

15. Attach the serial number label to right side [Q] of the rear cover. 16. Plug in the machine and turn on the main switch.

The copier must be connected to a properly-grounded socket outlet.

17. Make sure that the clock (date and time) is set. 18. Enter the SP mode and program the serial number into the fax unit with SP 3102.

The serial number can be found on the serial number label (attached to the machine in step 15).

19. When you press the Fax key for the first time after installation, the error "SRAM problem occurred / SRAM was formatted" will show on the LCD for initializing the program of the fax unit. Turn the main power switch off/on to clear the error display.

If another error occurs after initialization, this can be a functional problem.

SM 7 B267

B26

7

Fax

Opt

ion

1.1.3 INITIAL SETTING

Set the country code with "BIT SW" in the "Fax SP".

Set the service station number with "Machine Set" in the "Fax SP".

B267 8 SM

1.2 FAX UNIT OPTIONS

1.2.1 HANDSET (B433)

The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only.

1. Make two holes [A] in the scanner left cover. 2. Attach the bracket [B] enclosed with the fax unit ( x 2) as shown. 3. Remove the label [C] from the handset cradle [D]. Attach the cradle [D] to the

bracket [B] ( x 2), and then replace the label [C]. 4. Install the handset [E] on the cradle [D]. 5. Attach the ferrite core to the cable. (see step 8 in the fax unit installation

procedure) 6. Connect the cable [F] to the “TEL” jack at the rear of the machine.

SM 9 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n


2.1 FCU

1. When you replace the FCU board, remove the MBU board from the old FCU board and install it on the new FCU board.

2. Set the correct date and time with the User Tools: User Tools> System Settings> Timer Setting> Set Date/Time

Do not turn off the battery switch (SW1).

Do SP6101 to print the system parameters, and check the settings.

B267 10 SM

3. TROUBLESHOOTING

3.1 ERROR CODES

If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to fix the

problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the error code

display and on the service report.

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

0-00

DIS/NSF not detected

within 40 s of Start being

pressed

Check the line connection.

The machine at the other end may be

incompatible.

Replace the NCU or FCU.

Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.

If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad

line.

0-01 DCN received

unexpectedly

The other party is out of paper or has a

jammed printer.

The other party pressed Stop during

communication.

0-03 Incompatible modem at the

other end The other terminal is incompatible.

0-04 CFR or FTT not received

after modem training


Try changing the tx level and/or cable

equalizer settings.

Replace the FCU.

The other terminal may be faulty; try sending

to another machine.

If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may

be a bad line.

Cross reference: Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)

SM 11 B267

B26

7 Fa

xOpt

ion


Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program

Mode

0-05

Modem training fails even

G3 shifts down to 2400

bps.


Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable

equalizer.

Replace the FCU.

Check for line problems.

Cross reference: See error code 0-04.

0-06 The other terminal did not

reply to DCS



equalizer settings.


The other end may be defective or

incompatible; try sending to another machine.



0-07

No post-message

response from the other

end after a page was sent



The other end may have jammed or run out of

paper.

The other end user may have disconnected

the call.

Check for a bad line.

The other end may be defective; try sending to

another machine.

0-08

The other end sent RTN or

PIN after receiving a page,

because there were too

many errors



The other end may have jammed, or run out of

paper or memory space.

B267 12 SM



equalizer settings.

The other end may have a defective

modem/NCU/FCU; try sending to another

machine.

Check for line problems and noise.

Cross reference: Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)

Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program

Mode

0-14

Non-standard post

message response code

received

Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try

sending to another machine.

Noisy line: resend.


equalizer settings.



0-15

The other terminal is not

capable of specific

functions.

The other terminal is not capable of accepting the

following functions, or the other terminal’s memory

is full.

Confidential rx

Transfer function

SEP/SUB/PWD/SID

0-16

CFR or FTT not detected

after modem training in

confidential or transfer

mode




equalizer settings.

The other end may have disconnected, or it

may be defective; try calling another machine.

If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a

SM 13 B267

B26

7 Fa

xOpt

ion


line problem.


0-20

Facsimile data not

received within 6 s of

retraining




Try calling another fax machine.

Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the

first line and/or rx cable equalizer setting.

Cross reference: Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6

Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

0-21

EOL signal (end-of-line)

from the other end not

received within 5 s of the

previous EOL signal

Check the connections between the FCU,

NCU, & line.

Check for line noise or other line problems.


The remote machine may be defective or may

have disconnected.

Cross reference: Maximum interval between EOLs and between

ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4

0-22

The signal from the other

end was interrupted for

more than the acceptable

modem carrier drop time

(default: 200 ms)



Defective remote terminal.


Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier

drop time.

Cross reference: Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch

0A, bits 0 and 1

0-23 Too many errors during

reception



B267 14 SM




Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.

Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting

and/or rx error criteria.

Cross reference: Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits 0

and 1

0-30

The other terminal did not

reply to NSS(A) in AI short

protocol mode



equalizer settings.

The other terminal may not be compatible.

Cross reference: Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4

0-32

The other terminal sent a

DCS, which contained

functions that the receiving

machine cannot handle.

Check the protocol dump list.

Ask the other party to contact the

manufacturer.

0-33

The data reception (not

ECM) is not completed

within 10 minutes.


The other terminal may have a defective

modem/NCU/FCU.

0-52 Polarity changed during

communication


Retry communication.

0-55 FCU does not detect the

SG3.

FCU firmware or board defective.

SG3 firmware or board defective.

0-56

The stored message data

exceeds the capacity of the

mailbox in the SG3.

SG3 firmware or board defective.

0-70 The communication mode The other terminal did not have a compatible

SM 15 B267

B26

7 Fa

xOpt

ion


specified in CM/JM was

not available

(V.8 calling and called

terminal)

communication mode (e.g., the other terminal

was a V.34 data modem and not a fax

modem.)

A polling tx file was not ready at the other

terminal when polling rx was initiated from the

calling terminal.

0-74

The calling terminal fell

back to T.30 mode,

because it could not detect

ANSam after sending CI.

The calling terminal could not detect ANSam

due to noise, etc.

ANSam was too short to detect.

Check the line connection and condition.

Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.

0-75

The called terminal fell

back to T.30 mode,


a CM in response to

ANSam (ANSam timeout).

The terminal could not detect ANSam.


Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.

0-76

The calling terminal fell

back to T.30 mode,


a JM in response to CM

(CM timeout).

The called terminal could not detect a CM due

to noise, etc.


Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.

0-77

The called terminal fell

back to T.30 mode,


a CJ in response to JM

(JM timeout).

The calling terminal could not detect a JM due

to noise, etc.

A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot

pass JM to the other end.


Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.

0-79

The called terminal

detected CI while waiting

for a V.21 signal.


If this error occurs, the called terminal falls

back to T.30 mode.

0-80 The line was disconnected The guard timer expired while starting these

B267 16 SM


due to a timeout in V.34

phase 2 – line probing.

0-81

The line was disconnected

due to a timeout in V.34

phase 3 – equalizer

training.

0-82


due to a timeout in the V.34

phase 4 – control channel

start-up.

0-83


due to a timeout in the V.34

control channel restart

sequence.

phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or

low signal level can cause these errors.

If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal:

Try making a call at a later time.

Try using V.17 or a slower modem using

dedicated tx parameters.

Try increasing the tx level.

Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.

If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:

Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting.

Try increasing the tx level.

Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same

error is frequent when receiving from multiple

senders.

0-84


due to abnormal signaling

in V.34 phase 4 – control

channel start-up.

The signal did not stop within 10 s.

Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.

If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.

0-85


due to abnormal signaling

in V.34 control channel

restart.

The signal did not stop within 10 s.


If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.

0-86


because the other terminal

requested a data rate

using MPh that was not

available in the currently

selected symbol rate.

The other terminal was incompatible.

Ask the other party to contact the

manufacturer.

0-87 The control channel started

after an unsuccessful

The receiving terminal restarted the control

channel because data reception in the primary

SM 17 B267

B26

7 Fa

xOpt

ion


primary channel. channel was not successful.

This does not result in an error

communication.

0-88


because PPR was

transmitted/received 9

(default) times within the

same ECM frame.

Try using a lower data rate at the start.

Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.

2-11 Only one V.21 connection

flag was received Replace the FCU.

2-12 Modem clock irregularity Replace the FCU.

2-13 Modem initialization error


Update the modem ROM.

Replace the FCU.

2-23 JBIG compression or

reconstruction error Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.

2-24 JBIG ASIC error Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.

2-25 JBIG data reconstruction

error (BIH error)


error (Float marker error)


error (End marker error)


error (Timeout)

JBIG data error

Check the sender’s JBIG function.

Update the MBU ROM.

2-29 JBIG trailing edge maker

error

FCU defective

Check the destination device.

2-50 The machine resets itself If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace

B267 18 SM


for a fatal FCU system

error

the FCU.

2-51

The machine resets itself

because of a fatal

communication error

If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace

the FCU.

2-53

Snd msg() in the manual

task is an error because

the mailbox for the

operation task is full.

The user did the same operation many times,

and this gave too much load to the machine.

4-01 Line current was cut

Check the line connector.


Replace the FCU or the NCU.

4-10

Communication failed

because of an ID Code

mismatch (Closed

Network) or Tel. No./CSI

mismatch (Protection

against Wrong

Connections)

Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs

programmed correctly, then resend.

The machine at the other end may be

defective.

5-10 DCR timer expired Replace the FCU.

5-20

Storage impossible

because of a lack of

memory

5-21 Memory overflow

Temporary memory shortage.

Test the SAF memory.

5-23

Print data error when

printing a substitute rx or

confidential rx message

Test the SAF memory.

Ask the other end to resend the message.

5-25 SAF file access error Replace an SD card or HDD.

Replace the FCU.

SM 19 B267

B26

7 Fa

xOpt

ion


6-00

G3 ECM - T1 time out

during reception of

facsimile data

6-01 G3 ECM - no V.21 signal

was received

6-02 G3 ECM - EOR was

received

Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.

Replace the FCU.

6-04 G3 ECM - RTC not

detected


Check for a bad line or defective remote

terminal.

Replace the FCU.

6-05

G3 ECM - facsimile data

frame not received within

18 s of CFR, but there was

no line fail


Check for a bad line or defective remote

terminal.

Replace the FCU.

Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer

Cross reference: Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

6-06 G3 ECM - coding/decoding

error

Defective FCU.

The other terminal may be defective.

6-08

G3 ECM - PIP/PIN

received in reply to

PPS.NULL

The other end pressed Stop during

communication.

The other terminal may be defective.

6-09 G3 ECM - ERR received

Check for a noisy line.

Adjust the tx levels of the communicating

machines.

See code 6-05.

6-10

G3 ECM - error frames still

received at the other end

after all communication

Check for line noise.

Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or

the dedicated tx parameter for that address).

B267 20 SM


attempts at 2400 bps Check the line connection.


6-21

V.21 flag detected during

high speed modem

communication

The other terminal may be defective or

incompatible.

6-22

The machine resets the

sequence because of an

abnormal handshake in the

V.34 control channel

Check for line noise.

If the same error occurs frequently, replace the

FCU.


6-99 V.21 signal not stopped

within 6 s Replace the FCU.

13-17 SIP user name registration

error

Double registration of the SIP user name.

Capacity for user-name registration in the SIP

server is not sufficient.

13-18 SIP server access error Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server.

Defective SIP server.

14-00 SMTP Send Error

Error occurred during sending to the SMTP

server. Occurs for any error other than 14-01

to 16. For example, the mail address of the

system administrator is not registered.

14-01 SMTP Connection Failed

Failed to connect to the SMTP server (timeout)

because the server could not be found.

The PC is not ready to transfer files.

SMTP server not functioning correctly.

The DNS IP address is not registered.

Network not operating correctly.

Destination folder selection not correct.

14-02 No Service by SMTP

Service (421)

SMTP server operating incorrectly, or the

destination for direct SMTP sending is not

correct.

SM 21 B267

B26

7 Fa

xOpt

ion


Contact the system administrator and check

that the SMTP server has the correct settings

and operates correctly.

Contact the system administrator for direct

SMTP sending and check the sending

destination.

14-03 Access to SMTP Server

Denied (450)

Failed to access the SMTP server because the

access is denied.

SMTP server operating incorrectly. Contact

the system administrator to determine if there

is a problem with the SMTP server and to

check that the SMTP server settings are

correct.

Folder send destination is incorrect. Contact

the system administrator to determine that the

SMTP server settings and path to the server

are correct.

Device settings incorrect. Confirm that the

user name and password settings are correct.

Direct SMTP destination incorrect. Contact the

system administrator to determine if there is a

problem at the destination at that the settings

at the destination are correct.

14-04 Access to SMTP Server

Denied (550)

SMTP server operating incorrectly

Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly

14-05 SMTP Server HDD Full

(452)


HDD on the server is full.

Insufficient free space on the HDD of the

SMTP server. Contact the system

administrator and check the amount of space

remaining on the SMTP server HDD.

Insufficient free space on the HDD where the

B267 22 SM


destination folder is located. Contact the

system administrator and check the amount of

space remaining on the HDD where the target

folder is located.

Insufficient free space on the HDD at the

target destination for SMTP direct sending.

Contact the system administrator and check

the amount of space remaining on the target

HDD.

14-06 User Not Found on SMTP

Server (551)

The designated user does not exist.

The designated user does not exist on the

SMTP server.

The designated address is not for use with

direct SMTP sending.

14-07 Data Send to SMTP Server

Failed (4XX)


transmission failed.

PC not operating correctly.



Destination folder setting incorrect.

Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly.

14-08 Data Send to SMTP Server

Failed (5XX)


transmission failed.


Destination folder setting incorrect.

Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly.

Software application error.

14-09 Authorization Failed for

Sending to SMTP Server

POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization

failed.

Incorrect setting for file transfer

14-10 Addresses Exceeded Number of broadcast addresses exceeded the

SM 23 B267

B26

7 Fa

xOpt

ion


limit for the SMTP server.

14-11 Buffer Full

The send buffer is full so the transmission

could not be completed. Buffer is full due to

using Scan-to-Email while the buffer is being

used send mail at the same time.

14-12 Data Size Too Large Transmission was cancelled because the

detected size of the file was too large.

14-13 Send Cancelled Processing is interrupted because the user

pressed Stop.

14-14 Security Locked File Error Update the software because of the defective

software.

14-15 Mail Data Error

The transmitting a mail is interrupted via DCS

due to the incorrect data.

Update the software because of the defective

software.

14-16 Maximum Division Number

Error

When a mail is divided for the mail

transmission and the division number of a mail

are more than the specified number, the mail

transmission is interrupted.


software.

14-17 Incorrect Ticket Update the software because of the defective

software.

14-18 Access to MCS File Error

The access to MCS file is denied due to the no

permission of access.


software.

14-30 MCS File Creation Failed Failed to create the MCS file because:

The number of files created with other

B267 24 SM


applications on the Document Server has

exceeded the limit.

HDD is full or not operating correctly.

Software error.

14-31 UFS File Creation Failed

UFS file could not be created:

Not enough space in UFS area to handle both

Scan-to-Email and IFAX transmission.

HDD full or not operating correctly.

Software error.

14-32 Cancelled the Mail Due to

Error Detected by NFAX

Error detected with NFAX and send was

cancelled due to a software error.

14-33 No Mail Address For the

Machine

Neither the mail address of the machine nor

the mail address of the network administrator

is registered.

14-34

Address designated in the

domain for SMTP sending

does not exist

Operational error in normal mail sending or

direct SMTP sending.

Check the address selected in the address

book for SMTP sending.

Check the domain selection.

14-50 Mail Job Task Error

Due to an FCU mail job task error, the send was

cancelled:

Address book was being edited during

creation of the notification mail.

Software error.

14-51 UCS Destination

Download Error

Not even one return notification can be

downloaded:

The address book was being edited.

The number for the specified destination does

not exist (it was deleted or edited after the job

was created).

SM 25 B267

B26

7 Fa

xOpt

ion


14-60 Send Cancel Failed The cancel operation by the user failed to

cancel the send operation.

14-61 Notification Mail Send

Failed for All Destinations All addresses for return notification mail failed.

14-62

Transmission Error due to

the existence of zero line

page

When the 0 line page exists in received pages

with G3 communication, the transmission is

interrupted.

15-01 POP3/IMAP4 Server Not

Registered

At startup, the system detected that the IP

address of the POP3/IMAP4 server has not

been registered in the machine.

15-02 POP3/IMAP4 Mail Account

Information Not Registered

The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not been

registered.

15-03 Mail Address Not

Registered The mail address has not been registered.

15-10 DCS Mail Receive Error Error other than 15-11 to 15-18.

15-11 Connection Error

The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server could not be

found:

The IP address for DNS or POP3/IMAP4

server is not stored in the machine.

The DNS IP address is not registered.


15-12 Authorization Error

POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed:

Incorrect IFAX user name or password.

Access was attempted by another device,

such as the PC.

POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect.

15-13 Receive Buffer Full

Occurs only during manual reception.

Transmission cannot be received due to

insufficient buffer space. The buffer is being

B267 26 SM


used for mail send or Scan-to-Email.

15-14 Mail Header Format Error The mail header is not standard format. For

example, the Date line description is incorrect.

15-15 Mail Divide Error

The e-mail is not in standard format. There is

no boundary between parts of the e-mail,

including the header.

15-16 Mail Size Receive Error The mail cannot be received because it is too

large.

15-17 Receive Timeout May occur during manual receiving only

because the network is not operating correctly.

15-18 Incomplete Mail Received Only one portion of the mail was received.

15-31

Final Destination for

Transfer Request

Reception Format Error

The format of the final destination for the

transfer request was incorrect.

15-39 Send/Delivery Destination

Error

The transmission cannot be delivered to the final

destination:

Destination file format is incorrect.

Could not create the destination for the file

transmission.

15-41 SMTP Receive Error

Reception rejected because the transaction

exceeded the limit for the “Auth. E-mail RX”

setting.

15-42 Off Ramp Gateway Error The delivery destination address was

specified with Off Ramp Gateway OFF.

15-43 Address Format Error Format error in the address of the Off Ramp

Gateway.

15-44 Addresses Over The number of addresses for the Off Ramp

Gateway exceeded the limit of 30.

SM 27 B267

B26

7 Fa

xOpt

ion


15-61 Attachment File Format

Error The attached file is not TIFF format.

15-62 TIFF File Compatibility

Error

Could not receive transmission due to:

Resolution error

Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi

without extended memory.

Resolution is not supported.

Page size error

The page size was larger than A3.

Compression error

File was compressed with other than MH, MR,

or MMR.

15-63 TIFF Parameter Error

The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not be

received because the TIFF header is incorrect:

The TIFF file attachment is a type not

supported.

The TIFF file attachment is corrupted.

Software error.

15-64 TIFF Decompression Error

The file received as an attachment caused the

TIFF decompression error:

The TIFF format of the attachment is

corrupted.

Software error.

15-71 Not Binary Image Data The file could not be received because the

attachment was not binary image data.

15-73 MDN Status Error

Could not find the Disposition line in the

header of the Return Receipt, or there is a

problem with the firmware.

15-74 MDN Message ID Error

Could not find the Original Message ID line in

the header of the Return Receipt, or there is a

problem with the firmware.

B267 28 SM


15-80 Mail Job Task Read Error

Could not receive the transmission because

the destination buffer is full and the destination

could not be created (this error may occur

when receiving a transfer request or a request

for notification of reception).

15-81 Repeated Destination

Registration Error

Could not repeat receive the transmission

because the destination buffer is full and the

destination could not be created (this error

may occur when receiving a transfer request

or a request for notification of reception).

15-91 Send Registration Error

Could not receive the file for transfer to the final

destination:

The format of the final destination or the

transfer destination is incorrect.

Destinations are full so the final and transfer

destinations could not be created.

15-92 Memory Overflow Transmission could not be received because

memory overflowed during the transaction.

15-93 Memory Access Error Transaction could not complete due to a

malfunction of SAF memory.

15-94 Incorrect ID Code

The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for

transfer request, because the ID code in the

incoming e-mail did not match the ID code

registered in the machine.

15-95 Transfer Station Function

The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for

transfer because the transfer function was

unavailable.

22-00 Original length exceeded

the maximum scan length

Divide the original into more than one page.

Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower

the scan resolution if possible.

SM 29 B267

B26

7 Fa

xOpt

ion


Add optional page memory.

22-01 Memory overflow while

receiving

Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.

Delete unnecessary files from memory.

Transfer the substitute reception files to an

another fax machine, if the machine’s printer is

busy or out of order.

Add an optional SAF memory card or hard

disk.

22-02

Tx or rx job stalled due to

line disconnection at the

other end

The job started normally but did not finish

normally; data may or may not have been

received fully.

Restart the machine.

22-04 The machine cannot store

received data in the SAF

Update the ROM

Replace the FCU.

22-05 No G3 parameter

confirmation answer Defective FCU board or firmware.

23-00 Data read timeout during

construction

Restart the machine.

Replace the FCU.

25-00

The machine software

resets itself after a fatal

transmission error

occurred

Update the ROM

Replace the FCU.

F0-xx V.34 modem error Replace the FCU.

F6-xx SG3 modem error

Update the SG3 modem ROM.

Replace the SG3 board.


Try communicating another V.8/V.34 fax.

B267 30 SM

3.2 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING

Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of the

network is causing the problem.

Communication Route

Item Action [Remarks]

1. Connection with

the LAN

Check that the LAN cable is connected to

the machine.

Check that the LEDs on the hub are lit. General LAN

2. LAN activity Check that other devices connected to the

LAN can communicate through the LAN.

1. Network settings

on the PC

Check the network settings on the PC.

[Is the IP address registered in the TCP/IP

properties in the network setup correct?

Check the IP address with the administrator

of the network.]

2. Check that PC

can connect with

the machine

Use the “ping” command on the PC to

contact the machine.

[At the MS-DOS prompt, type ping then the IP

address of the machine, then press Enter.]

Between IFAX and

PC

3. LAN settings in

the machine

Check the LAN parameters

Check if there is an IP address conflict

with other PCs.

[Use the “Network” function in the User Tools.

If there is an IP address conflict, inform the

administrator.]

Between machine

and e-mail server

LAN settings in the

machine

Check the LAN parameters

Check if there is an IP address conflict

with other PCs.

[Use the “Network” function in the User Tools.

If there is an IP address conflict, inform the

SM 31 B267

B26

7 Fa

xOpt

ion

Communication Route


administrator.]

1. E-mail account

on the server

Make sure that the machine can log into

the e-mail server.

Check that the account and password

stored in the server are the same as in

the machine.

[Ask the administrator to check.]

Between machine

and e-mail server

2. E-mail server

Make sure that the client devices which

have an account in the server can

send/receive e-mail.

[Ask the administrator to check.

Send a test e-mail with the machine’s own

number as the destination. The machine

receives the returned e-mail if the

communication is performed successfully.]

1. E-mail account

on the Server

Make sure that the PC can log into the

e-mail server.

Check that the account and password

stored in the server are the same as in

the machine.

[Ask the administrator to check.]

2. E-mail server

Make sure that the client devices which

have an account in the server can

send/receive e-mail.

[Ask the administrator to check.

Send a test e-mail with the machine’s own

number as the destination. The machine

receives the returned e-mail if the

communication is performed successfully.]

Between e-mail

server and internet

3. Destination Make sure that the e-mail address is

B267 32 SM

Communication Route


e-mail address actually used.

Check that the e-mail address contains

no incorrect characters such as spaces.

Between e-mail

server and internetRouter settings

Use the “ping” command to contact the

router.

Check that other devices connected to

the router can sent data over the router.

[Ask the administrator of the server to check.]

Between e-mail

server and internet

Error message by

e-mail from the

network of the

destination.

Check whether e-mail can be sent to

another address on the same network,

using the application e-mail software.

Check the error e-mail message.

[Inform the administrator of the LAN.]

SM 33 B267

B26

7 Fa

xOpt

ion

3.3 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING

3.3.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION

Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name

Check Point Action

1 LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection.

2 Specified IP address/host name correct? Check the IP address/host name.

3 Firewall/NAT is installed?

Cannot breach the firewall. Send by

using another method (Fax, Internet

Fax)

4 Transmission sent manually? Manual sending not supported.

5 IP address of local machine registered? Register the IP address.

6 Remote terminal port number setting other

than 1720? Send by specifying the port number.

7 Specified port number correct? Confirm the port number of the remote

fax.

8 DNS server registered when host name

specified? Contact the network administrator.

9 Remote fax a T.38 terminal? Check whether the remote fax is a T38

terminal.

10 Remote fax switched off or busy? Check that the remote fax is switched

on.

Request the network administrator to

increase the bandwidth.

Raise the delay level.

IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3

11 Network bandwidth too narrow?

IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the

B267 34 SM

DCS speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to

1.

12 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax

cancelled the transmission.

Cannot send via VoIP Gateway

Check Point Action


2 VoIP Gateway T.38 standard? Contact the network administrator.

3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.

4 VoIP Gateway power switched on? Contact the network administrator.

5 Is the IP address/host name of the

specified Gateway correct? Check the IP address/host name.

6 Number of the specified fax correct? Check the remote fax number.




Fax)


9 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address.

10 DNS registered when host name

specified? Contact the network administrator.

11 Remote fax a G3 fax? Check that the remote fax is a G3 fax.

12 G3 fax is connected to VoIP gateway? Check that G3 fax is connected.

13 Remote G3 fax turned on? Check that G3 fax is switched on.

14 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the network administrator to


SM 35 B267

B26

7 Fa

xOpt

ion

Raise the network delay level.

IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3

IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the

DCS speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to

1.

Cannot send by Alias Fax number.

Check Point Action


2 Number of specified Alias fax correct? Confirm the Alias of the remote fax.

Error Code: 13-14

3 Firewall/NAT installed?



Fax)


5 Gatekeeper installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.

6 Gatekeeper power switched on? Contact the network administrator.

7 IP address/host name of Gatekeeper

correct? Check the IP address/host name.

8 DNS server registered when Gatekeeper

host name specified? Contact the network administrator.

9 Enable H.323 SW is set to on? Check the settings.

See User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0

10 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address of the local fax.

11 Alias number of local fax registered? Register the Alias number of the local

fax.

12 Remote fax registered in Gatekeeper? Contact the network administrator.

B267 36 SM

13 Remote fax a T.38 terminal? Check whether the remote fax is a T38

terminal.

14 Remote fax switched off or busy? Contact the network administrator.

Request the system administrator to


Raise the delay level.

IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3 15 Network bandwidth too narrow?

Lower the modem transmission baud

rate.

IPFAX SW 05

16 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax

cancelled the transmission.

3.3.2 IP-FAX RECEPTION

Cannot receive by IP Address/Host name.

Check Point Action


2 Firewall/NAT is installed? Cannot breach the firewall. Send by using

another method (Fax, Internet Fax)

3 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address.

4 Port number specified at remote sender

fax (if required)?

Request the sender to specify the port

number.

5 Specified port number correct (if

required)?

Request the sender to check the port

number.


specified on sender side?

Contact the network administrator.

The sender machine displays this

error code if the sender fax is a Ricoh

SM 37 B267

B26

7 Fa

xOpt

ion

model.



7 Network bandwidth too narrow? Lower the start modem reception baud

rate on the receiving side.

IPFAX SW06

8 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax cancelled

the transmission.

Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway.

Check Point Action



Cannot breach the firewall. Request the

remote fax to send by using another

method (Fax, Internet Fax)

3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.

4 VoIP Gateway power switched on? Contact the network administrator.

5 IP address/host name of specified VoIP

Gateway correct on sender’s side?

Request the remote fax to check the IP

address/host name.


specified on sender side? Contact the network administrator.

7 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the network administrator to


8 G3 fax connected? Check that G3 fax is connected.

9 G3 fax power switched on? Check that G3 fax is switched on.

B267 38 SM

Cannot receive by Alias Fax number.

Check Point Action



Cannot the breach firewall. Request the

remote fax to send by using another

method (Fax, Internet Fax)

3 Gatekeeper installed correctly?


The sender machine displays this error

code when the sender fax is a Ricoh

model.

4 Power to Gatekeeper switched on?




model.

5 IP address/host name of Gatekeeper

correct on the sender’s side?

Request the sender to check the IP

address/host name.



model.

6

DNS server registered when

Gatekeeper host name specified on

sender’s side?




model.

7 Enable H.323 SW is set to on?

Request the sender to check the settings.

User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0

Only if the remote sender fax is a

Ricoh fax.

SM 39 B267

B26

7 Fa

xOpt

ion

8 Local fax IP address registered? Register the IP address.

9 Local fax Alias number registered? Register the Alias number.



10 Network bandwidth too narrow? Lower the start modem reception baud rate

on the receiving side.

IPFAX SW06

11 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax cancelled

the transmission.

12 Local fax registered in Gatekeeper?




model.

B267 40 SM

4. SERVICE TABLES

4.1 BEFOREHAND

Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid

damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the

power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch

off.

The main power LED ( ) lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open,

while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server, or

while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data.

SM 41 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

4.2 SERVICE TABLES

4.2.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SWITCHES)

Bit Switches

1 Mode No. Function

System Switch

101 001 – 032 00 – 1F

Change the bit switches for system settings for the

fax option

( Bit Switches)

Ifax Switch

102 001 – 016 00 – 0F

Change the bit switches for internet fax settings for

the fax option

( Bit Switches)

Printer Switch

103 001 – 016 00 – 0F

Change the bit switches for printer settings for the fax

option ( "Bit Switches")

Communication Switch

104 001 – 032 00 – 1F

Change the bit switches for communication settings

for the fax option

"Bit Switches"

G3-1 Switch

105 001 – 016 00 – 0F

Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of

the standard G3 board

"Bit Switches"

G3-2 Switch

106 001 – 016 00 – 0F


the optional G3 board

"Bit Switches"

B267 42 SM

G3-3 Switch

107 001 – 016 00 – 0F


the optional G3 board

"Bit Switches"

G4 Internal Switch 108

001 – 032 00 – 1F Not used (Do not change the bit switches)

G4 Parameter Switch 109

001 – 016 00 – 0F Not used (Do not change the bit switches)

IP fax Switch

111 001 – 016 00 – 0F

Change the bit switches for optional IP fax

parameters

"Bit Switches"

4.2.2 SP2-XXX (RAM DATA)

2 Mode No. Function

RAM Read/Write

101 001

Change RAM data for the fax board directly.

"Service RAM Addresses"

Memory Dump

001 G3-1 Memory

Dump

Print out RAM data for the fax board.

"Service RAM Addresses"

002 G3-2 Memory

Dump

Print out RAM data for the optional SG3

board.

003 G3-3 Memory

Dump

Print out RAM data for the optional SG3

board.

102

004 G4 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the SiG4 board.

SM 43 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

G3-1 NCU Parameters

103 001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22

NCU parameter settings for the standard G3

board. "NCU Parameters"

G3-2 NCU Parameters

104 001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22

NCU parameter settings for the optional G3


G3-3 NCU Parameters

105 001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22

NCU parameter settings for the optional G3


4.2.3 SP3-XXX (TEL LINE SETTINGS)

3 Mode No. Function

Service Station

001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station. 101

002 Select Line Select the line type.

Serial Number 102

000 Enter the fax unit’s serial number.

PSTN-1 Port Settings

001 Select Line

Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line. If

the machine is installed on a PABX line, select

“PABX”, “PABX(GND)” or “PABX(FLASH)”.

002 PSTN Access

Number

Enter the PSTN access number for the

G3-1 line.

103

003 Memory Lock

Disabled

If the customer does not want to receive

transmissions using Memory Lock on this line,

turn this SP on.

B267 44 SM


001 Select Line

Select the line setting for the G3-2 line. If the

machine is installed on a PABX line, select


002 PSTN Access

Number

Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-2

line.

003 Memory Lock

Disabled



change this SP to on.

104

004 Transmission

Disabled

If you turn this SP on, the machine does not

send any fax messages on the G3-2 line.


001 Select Line

Select the line setting for the G3-3 line. If the

machine is installed on a PABX line, select


002 PSTN Access

Number

Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-3

line.

003 Memory Lock

Disabled



change this SP to on.

105

004 Transmission

Disabled

If you turn this SP on, the machine does not

send any fax messages on the G3-3 line.

ISDN Port Settings

001 Select Line

002 PSTN Access

Number 106

003 Memory Lock

Disabled

Not used (Do not change the bit switches)

SM 45 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

106 004 Transmission

Disabled

IPFAX Port Settings

001 H323 Port

002 SIP Port

003 RAS Port

004 Gatekeeper port

005 T.38 Port

006 SIP Server Port

107

007 IPFAX Protocol

Priority Select "H323" or "SIP".

FAX SW 201

001 – 032 00 – 1F

4.2.4 SP4-XXX (ROM VERSIONS)

4 Mode No. Function

101 001 FCU ROM Version Displays the FCU ROM version.

102 001 Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.

103 001 G3-1 ROM Version Displays the G3-1 modem version.



106 001 G4 ROM Version Not used (Do not change the bit switches)

107 001 Charge ROM Version Not used (Do not change the bit switches)

B267 46 SM

4.2.5 SP5-XXX (INITIALIZING)

5 Mode No. Function

Initialize SRAM

101 000

Initializes the bit switches and user parameters, user data in

the SRAM, files in the SAF memory, and clock.

Erase All Files 102

000 Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.

Reset Bit Switches 103

000 Resets the bit switches and user parameters.

Factory setting

104 000

Resets the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the

SRAM and files in the SAF memory.

Initialize All Bit Switches 105

000 Initializes all the current bit switch settings.

Initialize Security Bit Switches

106 000

Initializes only the security bit switches. If you select

automatic output/display for the user parameter switches, the

security settings are initialized.

4.2.6 SP6-XXX (REPORTS)

6 Mode No. Function

System Parameter List

101 000 -

Touch the “ON” button to print the system

parameter list.

SM 47 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

Service Monitor Report

102 000 -

Touch the “ON” button to print the service

monitor report.

G3 Protocol Dump List

001 G3 All

Communications

Prints the protocol dump list of all

communications for all G3 lines.

002 G3-1 (All

Communications)


communications for the G3-1 line.

003 G3-1

(1 Communication)

Prints the protocol dump list of the last

communication for the G3-1 line.

004 G3-2

(All Communications)



005 G3-2

(1 Communication)



006 G3-3

(All Communications)



103

007 G3-3

(1 Communication)



G4 Protocol Dump List

001 Dch + Bch 1

002 Dch

003 Bch 1 Link Layer

004 Dch Link Layer

005 Dch +Bch 2

104

006 Bch 2 Link Layer

Not used (Do not change the bit switches)

B267 48 SM

All Files print out

105 000 -

Prints out all the user files in the SAF memory,

including confidential messages.

Do not use this function, unless the

customer is having trouble printing

confidential messages or recovering files

stored using the memory lock feature.

Journal Print out

001 All Journals The machine prints all the communication

records on the report. 106

002 Specified Date The machine prints all communication records

after the specified date.

Log List Print out

001 All log files

002 Printer

003 SC/TRAP Stored

004 Decompression

005 Scanner

006 JOB/SAF

007 Reconstruction

008 JBIG

009 Fax Driver

010 G3CCU

011 Fax Job

107

012 CCU

These log print out functions are for designer

use only.

SM 49 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

013 Scanner Condition

IP Protocol Dump List

001 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all

communications for the IP fax line. 108

002 1 Communication Prints the protocol dump list of the last

communication for the IP fax line.

4.2.7 SP7-XXX (TEST MODES)

These are the test modes for PTT approval.

7 Function

101 G3-1 Modem Tests

102 G3-1 DTMF Tests

103 Ringer Test

104 G3-1 V34 (S2400baud)

105 G3-1 V34 (S2800baud)

106 G3-1 V34 (S3000baud)

107 G3-1 V34 (S3200baud)

108 G3-1 V34 (S3429baud)

109 Recorded Message Test


111 G3-2 DTMF Tests

112 G3-2 V34 (S2400baud)

113 G3-2 V34 (S2800baud)

114 G3-2 V34 (S3000baud)

115 G3-2 V34 (S3200baud)

B267 50 SM

116 G3-2 V34 (S3429baud)


118 G3-3 DTMF Tests

119 G3-3 V34 (S2400baud)

120 G3-3 V34 (S2800baud)

121 G3-3 V34 (S3000baud)

122 G3-3 V34 (S3200baud)

123 G3-3 V34 (S3429baud)

124 IG3-1 Modem Tests - Not used

125 IG3-1 DTMF Tests - Not used

126 IG3-1 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used





131 IG3-2 Modem Tests - Not used

132 IG3-2 DTMF Tests - Not used






SM 51 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

4.2.8 SP9-XXX (DESIGN SWITCH MODE)

9 Mode No. Function

702 Design Switch DFU

B267 52 SM

4.3 BIT SWITCHES

Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as “Not used”, as this

may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not

accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as

Japan.

Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System

Parameter List printed by the machine.

4.3.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES

System Switch 00 [SP No. 1-101-001]

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

Dedicated transmission

parameter programming


Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated

transmission parameters.

Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicated

transmission parameters.

1 Not used Do not change

Technical data printout on the

Journal

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

1: Instead of the personal name, the following data

are listed on the Journal for each G3

communication.

2

e.g. 0000 (1) // 32 (2) V34 (3) // 288 (4) // 264 (5) // L0100 (6) 03 (7) 04 (8)

(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.

(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)

(3): Final modem type used

(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)

(5): Final data rate

(6): Rx revel (refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level)

(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.

(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.

SM 53 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

EQM and rx level are fixed at “FFFF” in tx mode.

The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at “00” for transmission records

and ECM reception records.

Rx level calculation

Example: 0000 // 32 V34 // 288/264 // L 01 00 03 04

The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after “L” indicates the rx level.

The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N

by -16 to get the rx level.

In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.

So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB

3 Not used Do not change this setting.

4 Line error mark print

0: OFF, 1: ON (print)

When "1" is selected, a line error mark is printed

on the printout if a line error occurs during

reception.

5

G3/G4 communication

parameter display

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key

parameters (see below). This is normally disabled

because it cancels the CSI display for the user.

Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.

6

Protocol dump list output after

each communication

0: Off

1: On

This is only used for communication

troubleshooting. It shows the content of the

transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always

reset this bit to 0 after finishing testing.

If system switch 09 bit 6 is at “1”, the list is only

printed if there was an error during the

communication.

7 Not used Do not change the setting.

System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

B267 54 SM



0-1 Not used Do not change these settings.

2

Force after transmission stall

0: Off

1: On

With this setting on, the machine resets itself

automatically if a transmission stalls and fails to

complete the job.



6-7

Memory read/write by RDS

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0

Always disabled

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1

User selectable

Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0

User selectable

Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1

Always enabled

(0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.

(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked

out, but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to

allow RDS operations to take place. RDS will

automatically be locked out again after a certain

time, which is stored in System Switch 03. Note

that if an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not

switch off until this time limit has expired.

(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the

machine.



0-7

Length of time that RDS is

temporarily switched on when

bits 6 and 7 of System Switch

02 are set to “User selectable”

00 - 99 hours (BCD).

This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System

Switch 02 are set to “User selectable”.

The default setting is 24 hours.




SM 55 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n 3

Printing dedicated tx

parameters on Quick/Speed

Dial Lists

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is

printed with the dedicated tx parameters (10 bytes

each).

The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed

dedicated tx parameters; 34 bytes of data are

printed (the other 24 bytes have no use for service

technicians).








0 Not used Do not change these settings.

1

Inclusion of communications

on the Journal when no image

data was exchanged.

0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Communications that reached phase C

(message tx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on

the Journal.

1: Communications that reached phase A (call

setup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.

This will include telephone calls.

2 Automatic error report printout


0: Error reports will not be printed.

1: Error reports will be printed automatically after

failed communications.

3

Printing of the error code on

the error report

0: No 1: Yes

1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.

B267 56 SM


5 Power failure report


1: A power failure report will be automatically

printed after the power is switched on if a fax

message disappeared from the memory when the

power was turned off last.

6

Conditions for printing the

protocol dump list

0: Print for all communications

1: Print only when there is a

communication error

This switch becomes effective only when system

switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1.

1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol

dump list only for communications with errors.

7

Priority given to various types

of remote terminal ID when

printing reports

0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel.

Number

1: Dial label > Tel. number >

RTI > CSI

This bit determines which set of priorities the

machine uses when listing remote terminal names

on reports.

Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for the

Quick/Speed Dial number.

System Switch 0A [SP No. 1-101-011]



4

Dialing on the ten-key pad

when the external telephone is

off-hook


0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the

external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting

when the external telephone is not by the

machine, or if a wireless telephone is connected

as an external telephone.

1: The user can dial on the machine’s ten-key pad

when the handset is off-hook.

5 On hook dial

0: Disabled 1: Enabled 0: On hook dial is disabled.

6-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings

SM 57 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 0E [SP No. 1-101-015]


0-1 Not used Do not change the settings.

2 Not used This machine does not have the capture function.

3

Action when the external

handset goes off-hook

0: Manual tx and rx operation

1: Memory tx and rx operation

(the display remains the

same)

0: Manual tx and rx are possible while the external

handset is off-hook. However, memory tx is not

possible.

1: The display stays in standby mode even when

the external handset is used, so that other people

can use the machine for memory tx operation.

Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with

this setting.


System Switch 0F [SP No. 1-101-016]


Country/area code for functional

settings (Hex)

00: France 11: USA

01: Germany 12: Asia

02: UK 13: Japan

0-7

03: Italy 14: Hong Kong

This country/area code determines the factory

settings of bit switches and RAM addresses.

However, it has no effect on the NCU

parameter settings and communication

parameter RAM addresses.

Cross reference: NCU country code:

SP No. 2-103-001 for G3-1

B267 58 SM

04: Austria 15: South Africa

05: Belgium 16: Australia

06: Denmark 17: New Zealand

07: Finland 18: Singapore

08: Ireland 19: Malaysia

09: Norway 1A: China

0A: Sweden 1B: Taiwan

0B: Switz. 1C: Korea

0C: Portugal 20: Turkey

0D: Holland 21: Greece

0E: Spain 22: Hungary

0F: Israel 23: Czech

10: --- 24: Poland



0-7 Threshold memory level for

parallel memory transmission

Threshold = N x 128 KB + 256 KB

N can be between 00 - FF(H)

Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB



0

TTI printing position

0: Superimposed on the page

data

1: Printed before the data

Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints

information that the customer considers to be

important (G3 transmissions).

SM 59 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

leading edge

1 Not used Japan Only

2-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings.



0-7 TTI printing position in the

main scan direction

TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm

Input even numbers only.

This setting determines the print start position for

the TTI from the left edge of the paper. If the TTI is

moved too far to the right, it may overwrite the file

number which is on the top right of the page. On

an A4 page, if the TTI is moved over by more than

50 mm, it may overwrite the page number.

System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change these settings)




0 Not used Do not change the settings.

1

Going into the Energy Saver

mode automatically

0: Enabled

1: Disabled

1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver

mode quickly, because the +5V power supply is

active even in the Energy Saver mode.


4-5 Interval for preventing the

machine from entering Energy

If there is a file waiting for transmission, the

machine does not go to Energy Saver mode

B267 60 SM

Saver mode if there is a

pending transmission file.

Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0

1 min

Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1

30 min1

Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0

1 hour

Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 1

24 hours

during the selected period.

After transmitting the file, if there is no file waiting

for transmission, the machine goes to the Energy

Saver mode.

6-7 Not used Do not change



0

Parallel Broadcasting

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

1: The machine sends messages simultaneously

using all available ports during broadcasting.







7

Special Original mode

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a

form or letterhead which has a colored or printed

background, change this bit to “1”. “Original 1” and

“Original 2” can be selected in addition to the “Text”,

SM 61 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

“Text/Photo” and “Photo” modes.

System Switch 1A [SP No. 1-101-027]

No. FUNCTION COMMENTS


System Switch 1B [SP No. 1-101-028]

In this switch setting, there is a limitation. Do not select the same image quality in two

modes.

e.g) these setting combination is not allowed:

[Bit1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = Text] [Bit3: 0, Bit 2:0 = Text/ Photo] [Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = Text]


0-1

Image Quality in Text mode

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = Text

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Text/

Picture

This setting determines the desirable scanning

image quality when the text mode is selected with

the operation panel.

2-3

Image Quality in Photo mode

Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = Text/ Photo

Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = Text


image quality when the photo mode is selected with

the operation panel.

Image Quality in Special

Original mode


image quality when the special original mode is

selected with the operation panel.

Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Mode

0 0 0 Text

0 0 1 Text/ Picture

0 1 0 Text/ Photo

4-6

0 1 1 Photo

B267 62 SM

1 0 0 Special 1

1 0 1 Special 2


System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 1D [SP No. 1-101-030]


0

RTI/CSI/CPS code display

0: Enable

1: Disable

0: RTI, CSI, CPS codes are displayed on the top

line of the LCD panel during communication.

1: Codes are switched off (no display)


2

Destination telephone

number display limitation

0: OFF, 1: ON

When "1" is selected, the destination telephone

number display is limited and redial is disabled.

3

Operation selection without

PIN code registered

0: Transmission interrupted

1: No interrupted

transmission

0: When "0" is selected without PIN code

registration, transmission is interrupted and an alert

message shows on the LCD.


System Switch 1E [SP No. 1-101-031]


0

Communication after the

Journal data storage area has

become full

0: Impossible

0: When this switch is on and the journal history

becomes full, the next report prints. If the journal

history is not deleted, the next transmission cannot

be received. This prevents overwriting

SM 63 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

1: Possible communication records before the machine can

print them.

1: If the buffer memory of the communication

records for the Journal is full, fax communications

are still possible. But the machine will overwrite

the oldest communication records.

Note: This setting is effective only when Automatic

Journal printout is enabled but the machine cannot

print the report (e.g., no paper).

1

Action when the SAF memory

has become full during

scanning

0: The current page is erased.

1: The entire file is erased.

0: If the SAF memory becomes full during

scanning, the successfully scanned pages are

transmitted.

1: If the SAF memory becomes full during

scanning, the file is erased and no pages are

transmitted.

This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory

transmission.

2 RTI/CSI display priority

0: RTI 1: CSI

This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is

displayed on the LCD while the machine is

communicating in G3 non-standard mode.

3

File No. printing

0: Enabled

1: Disabled

1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.

4

Action when authorized

reception is enabled but

authorized RTIs/CSIs are not

yet programmed

0: All fax reception is disabled

1: Faxes can be received if the

sender has an RTI or CSI

If authorized reception is enabled but the user has

stored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, the

machine will not be able to receive any fax

messages.

If the customer wishes to receive messages from

any sender that includes an RTI or CSI, and to

block messages from senders that do not include

an RTI or CSI, change this bit to “1”, then enable

Authorized Reception.

Otherwise, keep this bit at “0 (default setting)”.

B267 64 SM

5-7 Not used Do not change the settings

System Switch 1F [SP No. 1-101-032]



1

Report printout after an

original jam during SAF

storage or if the SAF memory

fills up

0: Enabled

1: Disabled

0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory

overflows during scanning, a report will be printed.

Change this bit to “1” if the customer does not

want to have a report in these cases.

Memory tx – Memory storage report

Parallel memory tx – Transmission result report


3

Received fax print start timing

(G3 reception)

0: After receiving each page

1: After receiving all pages

0: The machine prints each page immediately after

the machine receives it.

1: The machine prints the complete message after

the machine receives all the pages in the memory.


7

Action when a fax SC has

occurred

0: Automatic reset

1: Fax unit stops

0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other

than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit

automatically resets itself.

1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the

fax unit stops.

Cross reference:

Fax SC codes - See “Troubleshooting”

4.3.2 I-FAX SWITCHES

I-fax Switch 00 [SP No. 1-102-001]

FUNCTION COMMENTS No

Original Width of TX This setting sets the maximum size of the original

SM 65 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

Attachment File that the destination can receive. (Bits 3~7 are

reserved for future use or not used.)

0 A4

1 B4

2 A3

3-6 Reserved

7 Not used

0: Off (not selected), 1: On (selected)

If more than one of these three bits is set to “1”,

the larger size has priority. For example, if both Bit

2 and Bit 1 are set to “1” then the maximum size is

“A3” (Bit 2).

When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the

receiving machine at the destination, so the

sending machine cannot make a selection for the

receiving capabilities (original width setting) of the

receiving machine. The original width selected

with this switch is used as the RX machine’s

original width setting, and the original is reduced to

this size before sending. The default is A4.

If the width selected with this switch is higher than

the receiving machine can accept, the machine

detects this and this causes an error.


FUNCTION COMMENTS

No Original Line Resolution of TX

Attachment File

These settings set the maximum resolution of the

original that the destination can receive.

0 200x100 Standard

1 200x200 Detail

2 200x400 Fine

3 300 x 300 Reserve

4 400 x 400 Super Fine

5 600 x 600 Reserve

6 Reserve

0: Not selected

1: Selected

If more than one of these three bits is set to “1”,

the higher resolution has priority. For example, if

both Bit 0 and Bit 2 are set to “1” then the

resolution is set for "Bit 2 200 x 400.

B267 66 SM

mm/inch

7

This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission.

0: Off (No conversion), 1: On (Conversion)

When on (set to “1”), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail.

There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters.

Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver to

determine the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the mm/inch

selection is determined by the sender fax.

When this switch is Off (0):

Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.

Images scanned in mm are sent in mm.

Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.

Images received in mm are transmitted in mm.

When this switch is On (1):

Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.

Images scanned in mm are converted to inches.

Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.

Images received in mm are converted to inches.



RX Text Mail Header Processing

0

This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails

when they are received.

0: Prints only text mail.

1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.

When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the “From” address and

“Subject” address are printed as header information.

When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this

setting is ignored and no header is printed.

Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error 1

This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail

SM 67 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

attachment are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs.

This allows the customer to see which documents have not reached their intended

destinations if sent to the wrong e-mail addresses, for example.

0: Prints 1st page only.

1: Prints all pages.

Text String for Return Receipt

This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms

the transmission was received normally at the destination.

2-3

00: “Dispatched”

Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt

with “dispatched” in the 2nd part:

Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched

The “dispatched” string is included in the Subject string.

01: “Displayed”

Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt

with “displayed” in the 2nd part:

Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed

The “displayed” string is included in the Subject string.

10: Reserved

11: Reserved

A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to “00”

(for “dispatched”) received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error. If any

setting other than “displayed” (01) causes a problem, change the setting to “01” to

enable normal sending of the Return Receipt.

Media accept feature

4

This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to

confirm a reception.

0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail

1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail.

Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer mail,

which contains the media accept feature field.

5-6 Not Used

B267 68 SM

Image Resolution of RX Text Mail

7

This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.

0: 200 x 200

1: 400 x 400

The “1” setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order to have

enough SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x 400

resolution.

I-fax Switch 03 - Not used (do not change the settings) [ SP No. 1-102-004]



Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer

0

This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the

RTI/CSI of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.

0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTI

or CSI is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.

1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.

When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in the

Subject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to

determine automatically the destination folder for each e-mail.

1

Subject corresponding to mail post database

0: Standard subject

1: Mail post database subject

The standard subject is replaced by the mail post database subject in the following

three cases:

1) When the service technician sets the service (software) switch.

2) When memory sending, delivery specified by F code or SMTP reception is done.

3) With relay broadcasting (1st stage without the Schmidt 4 function).

This switch does not apply for condition 3) when the RX system is set up for

memory sending, delivery by F-code, sending with SMTP RX and when

SM 69 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

operators are using FOL (to prevent problems when receiving transmissions).

2-7 Not Used



Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients

0

Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive

transmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal.

For example:

"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a

broadcast to 9 destinations.

0: Not recorded

1: Recorded

1

I-Fax Automatic Re-dial

Setting

0: OFF

1: ON

Determines whether the I-fax automatically redials

when an error occurs.

2-7 Not Used

I-fax Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-007]

I-fax Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-008]



Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception

0-7 This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF

stores fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and

also holds incoming messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of SAF

B267 70 SM

memory available falls below this setting, mail can no longer be received; received

mail is then stored on the mail server.

00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)

The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the

amount of memory.




4-7 Restrict TX Retries

This setting determines the number of retries

when connection and transmission fails due to

errors.

01-F (1-15 Hex)

I-fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-011]

I-fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-012]

I-fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-013]

I-fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-014]

I-fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-015]

I-fax Switch 0F [SP No. 1-102-016]


Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files

0 This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or

output immediately.

0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.

1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.

SM 71 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

1-7 Not used

4.3.3 PRINTER SWITCHES

Printer Switch 00 [SP No. 1-103-001]


0

Select page separation marks

0: Off

1: On

0: If a 2 page RX transmission is split, [*] is printed

in the bottom right corner of the 1st page and only

a [2] is printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd

page.

1: If a 2 page RX transmission is split into two

pages, for example, [*] [2] is printed in the bottom

right corner of the 1st page and only a [2] is printed

in the upper right corner of the 2nd page.

This helps the user to identify pages that have

been split because the size of the paper is

smaller than the size of the document

received. (When A5 is used to print an A4 size

document, for example.)

1

Repetition of data when the

received page is longer than

the printer paper

0: Off

1: On

1: Default. 10 mm of the trailing edge of the

previous page are repeated at the top of the next

page.

0: The next page continues from where the

previous page stopped without any repeated text.

2

Prints the date and time on

received fax messages

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

This switch is only effective when user parameter

02 - bit 2 (printing the received date and time on

received fax messages) is enabled.

1: The machine prints the received and printed

date and time at the bottom of each received

page.


B267 72 SM




3-4

Maximum print width used in

the setup protocol

Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 0 = Not used

Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 1 = A3

Bit 4: 1, Bit 3: 0 = B4

Bit 4: 1, Bit 3: 1 = A4

These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printer

switch 01 is “1”.


7

Received message width

restriction in the protocol

signal to the sender

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

0: The machine informs the transmitting machine

of the print width depending on the paper size

available from the paper feed stations.

Refer to the table on the next page for how the

machine chooses the paper width used in the

setup protocol (NSF/DIS).

1: The machine informs the transmitting machine

of the fixed paper width which is specified by bits 3

and 4 above.



0

1st paper feed station usage

for fax printing

0: Enabled

1: Disabled

1

2nd paper feed station usage

for fax printing

0: Enabled

1: Disabled

0: The paper feed station can be used to print fax

messages and reports.

1: The specified paper feed station will not be used

for printing fax messages and reports.

Do not disable usage for a paper feed station

which has been specified by User Parameter

Switch 0F (15), or which is used for the

SM 73 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

2

3rd paper feed station usage

for fax printing

0: Enabled

1: Disabled

3

4th paper feed station usage

for fax printing

0: Enabled

1: Disabled

Specified Cassette Selection feature.




0

Length reduction of received

data

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

0: Incoming pages are printed without length

reduction.

(Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits

4 to 7)

1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing.

(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04,

bits 0 to 4)


4-7

Page separation setting when

sub scan compression is

forbidden

00-0F (0-15 mm: Hex)

Default: 6 mm

Page separation threshold (with reduction

disabled with switch 03-0 above).

For example, if this setting is set to "10", and A4 is

the selected paper size:

If the received document is 10 mm or less longer

than A4, then the 10 mm are cut and only 1 page

prints.

If the received document is 10 mm longer than A4,

then the document is split into 2 pages.


B267 74 SM


Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0

above.

<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + (N x 5mm)

“N” is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.

Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting

0 0 0 0 0 0 mm

0 0 0 0 1 5 mm

0 0 1 0 0 20 mm

1 1 1 1 1 155 mm

0-4

For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper

<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)

5

6

Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has taken

place.

Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = 4 mm

Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = 10 mm

Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = 15 mm


7 Not used. Do not change the setting.

Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)



0

Printing while a paper cassette

is pulled out, when the Just

Size Printing feature is

enabled.

Cross reference:

Just size printing on/off – User switch 05, bit 5

SM 75 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

0: Printing will not start

1: Printing will start if another

cassette has a suitable size of

paper, based on the paper

size selection priority tables.

1-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.




4

List of destinations in the

Communication Failure Report

for broadcasting

0: All destinations

1: Only destinations where

communication failure

occurred

1: Only destinations where communication failure

occurred are printed on the Communication

Failure Report.




Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0B [SP No. 1-103-012]

Erase margin at the trailing

edge for the fax printout

Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting

0-2

0 0 0 0 mm

Adjusts the erase margin at the trailing edge for

the fax printout.

B267 76 SM

0 0 1 1 mm

0 1 0 2 mm

0 1 1 3 mm

1 0 0 4 mm


Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0E [SP No. 1-103-015]


0

Paper size selection priority

0: Width

1: Length

0: A paper size that has the same width as the

received data is selected first.

1: A paper size which has enough length to print all

the received lines without reduction is selected first.

1

Paper size selected for

printing A4 width fax data

0: 8.5" x 11" size

1: A4 size

This switch determines which paper size is selected

for printing A4 width fax data, when the machine

has both A4 and 8.5" x 11" size paper.

2

Page separation

0: Enabled

1: Disabled

1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page

separation to print a received fax message, the

machine does not print the message (Substitute

Reception is used).

After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the

machine automatically prints the fax message.

3-4

Printing the sample image on

reports

Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 0 = The upper

half only

“Same size” means the sample image is printed at

100%, even if page separation occurs.

User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set

to “0” to enable this switch.

SM 77 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 1 = 50%

reduction in sub-scan only

Bit 4: 1, Bit 3: 0 = Same size


Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on

this feature.


7

Equalizing the reduction ratio

among separated pages

(Page Separation)

0: Enabled

1: Disabled

0: When page separation has taken place, all the

pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio.

1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected

paper size when page separation has taken place.

Other pages are printed without reduction.

Printer Switch 0F [SP No. 1-103-016]


0-1

Smoothing feature

Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 0 = Disabled

Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 1 = Disabled

Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 0 = Enabled

Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 1 = Not used

(0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine

receives halftone images from other

manufacturers fax machines frequently.


4.3.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES

Communication Switch 00 [SP No. 1-104-001]


0-1

Compression modes available

in receive mode

Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 0 = MH only

Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 1 = MH/MR

Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 0 = MH/MR/MMR

Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 1 = MH/MR/

These bits determine the compression capabilities

to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the

T.30 protocol.

B267 78 SM

MMR/JBIG

2-3


in transmit mode

Bit 3: 0 Bit 2: 0 = MH only

Bit 3: 0 Bit 2: 1 = MH/MR

Bit 3: 1 Bit 2: 0 = MH/MR/MMR

Bit 3: 1 Bit 2: 1 = MH/MR/

MMR/JBIG

These bits determine the compression capabilities

to be used in the transmission and to be declared

in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.


5

JBIG compression method:

Reception

0: Only basic supported

1: Basic and optional both

supported

Change the setting when communication

problems occur using JBIG compression.

6

JBIG compression method:

Transmission

0: Basic mode priority

1: Optional mode priority

Change the setting when communication

problems occur using JBIG compression.




0 ECM

0: Off 1: On

If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all

communications.

In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression

are switched off automatically.

1-5 Not used Do not change the setting.

6-7

Maximum printable page

length available

Bit 7: 0 Bit 6: 0 = No limit

The setting determined by these bits is informed to

the transmitting terminal in the pre-message

protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).

SM 79 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

Bit 7: 0 Bit 6: 1 = B4 (364 mm)

Bit 7: 1 Bit 6: 0 = A4 (297 mm)

Bit 7: 1 Bit 6: 1 = Not used



If there are more consecutive error lines in the

received page than the threshold, the machine will

send a negative response. The Low and High

threshold values depend on the sub-scan

resolution, and are as follows.

100 dpi 6(L) 12(H)

200 dpi 12(L) 24(H)

300 dpi 18(L) 36(H)

0 G3 Burst error threshold

0: Low 1: High

400 dpi 24(L) 48(H)

1 Acceptable total error line ratio

0: 5% 1: 10%

If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the

acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.

2

Treatment of pages received

with errors during G3

reception

0: Deleted from memory

without printing

1: Printed

0: Pages received with errors are not printed.

3

Hang-up decision when a

negative code (RTN or PIN) is

received during G3 immediate

transmission

0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up

0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is

received.

1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it

receives RTN or PIN.

This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if

ECM is being used.


B267 80 SM



0-7

Maximum number of page

retransmissions in a G3

memory transmission

00 - FF (Hex) times.

This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.

Default setting - 03(H)

Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)







0-7 I-Fax dial interval setting

Adjusts the interval of the I-fax dialing.

The interval of I-fax dialing is calculated by

following formula.

[Interval time = specified value with this switch x

0.2 msec]

Communication Switch 0A [SP No. 1-104-011]


0

Point of resumption of memory

transmission upon redialing

0: From the error page

1: From page 1

0: The transmission begins from the page where

transmission failed the previous time.

1: Transmission begins from the first page, using

normal memory transmission.


SM 81 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

Communication Switch 0B – Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 0C – Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 0D [SP No. 1-104-014]


0-7

The available memory

threshold, below which ringing

detection (and therefore

reception into memory) is

disabled

00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes

(e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes)

One page is about 24 kbytes.

The machine refers to this setting before each fax

reception. If the amount of remaining memory is

below this threshold, the machine cannot receive

any fax messages.

If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect

ringing signals and go into receive mode even if

there is no memory available. This will result in

communication failure.

Communication Switch 0E [SP No. 1-104-015]


0-7 Minimum interval between

automatic dialing attempts

06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s

(e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)

This value is the minimum time that the machine

waits before it dials the next destination.

Communication Switch 0F – Not used (do not change the settings.)



B267 82 SM

0-7

Memory transmission:

Maximum number of dialing

attempts to the same

destination

01 – FE (Hex) times

Communication Switch 11 – Not used (do not change the settings.)



0-7

Memory transmission: Interval

between dialing attempts to

the same destination

01 – FF (Hex) minutes

Communication Switch 13 – Not used (do not change the settings.)



0

Inch-to-mm conversion during

transmission


0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch

format are transmitted without conversion.

In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF

memory in mm format are transmitted without

conversion.

Note: When storing the scanned data into SAF

memory, the fax unit always converts the data into

mm format.

1: The machine converts the scanned data or

stored data in the SAF memory to the format

which was specified in the set-up protocol

(DIS/NSF) before transmission.


SM 83 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

6-7

Available unit of resolution in

which fax messages are

received

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0 = mm

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1 = inch

Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0 = mm and inch

(default)


For the best performance, do not change the

factory settings.

The setting determined by these bits is informed to

the transmitting terminal in the pre-message

protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).

Communication Switch 15 – Not used (do not change the settings)





Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1B [SP No. 1-104-028]


0-7

Extension access code (0 to 7)

to turn V.8 protocol On/Off

0: On

1: Off

If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol

procedure, set this bit to “1” to disable V.8.

Example: If “0” is the PSTN access code, set bit 0

to 1. When the machine detects “0” as the first

dialed number, it automatically disables V.8

protocol. (Alternatively, if “3” is the PSTN access

code, set bit 3 to 1.)

Communication Switch 1C [SP No. 1-104-029]


0-1 Extension access code (8 and Refer to communication switch 1B.

B267 84 SM

9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off

0: On

1: Off

Example: If “8” is the PSTN access code, set bit 0

to 1. When the machine detects “8” as the first

dialed number, it automatically disables V.8

protocol. (If “9” is the PSTN access code, use bit

1.)


Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)

4.3.5 G3 SWITCHES

G3 Switch 00 [SP No. 1-105-001]


0

1

Monitor speaker during

communication (tx and rx)

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = Disabled

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Up to Phase

B

Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = All the time


(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through

the communication.

(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in

the T.30 protocol.

(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on

all through the communication. Make sure that you

reset these bits after testing.

2

Monitor speaker during

memory transmission


1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory

transmission.


G3 Switch 01 [SP No. 1-105-002]


SM 85 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n



4 DIS frame length

0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes

1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will

not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are

communication problems with PC-based faxes

which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).


6

Forbid CED/AMsam output

0: Off

1: On (Forbid output)

Do not change this setting (Default: 0: Off), unless

communication problem is caused by a CED or

ANSam transmission.


G3 Switch 02 [SP No. 1-105-003]


0

G3 protocol mode used

0: Standard and non-standard

1: Standard only

Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can

only communicate with machines that send

T.30-standard frames only.

1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in

non-standard mode communication)


7 Short preamble


Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile

Manual for details about Short Preamble.

G3 Switch 03 [SP No. 1-105-004]


0

DIS detection number

(Echo countermeasure)

0: 1

0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same

DIS frame twice.

1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for

B267 86 SM

1: 2 the second DIS which is caused by echo on the

line.

1 Not Used Do not change the settings.

2

V.8 protocol

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.

Note:

Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always

bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4

kbps or lower.

3

ECM frame size

0: 256 bytes

1: 64 bytes

Keep this bit at “0” in most cases.

4

CTC transmission conditions

0: After one PPR signal

received

1: After four PPR signals

received (ITU-T standard)

0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)

mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the

modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following

condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,

9.6, and 7.2 kbps.

NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames

NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted

1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to

drop back the modem rate after receiving four

PPRs.

PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.

This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.

5

Modem rate used for the next

page after receiving a negative

code (RTN or PIN)

0: No change 1: Fallback

1: The machine’s tx modem rate will fall back

before sending the next page if a negative code is

received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.

6 Not Used Do not change the settings

7 Select detection of reverse

polarity in ringing

This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in

ringing on the phone line (applied to PSTN-G3

SM 87 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

0: Off

1: On

ringing). Do not change this setting

0: No detection Outside Japan

1: Detection Inside Japan only

G3 Switch 04 [SP No. 1-105-005]


0-3 Training error detection

threshold

0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits

If the number of error bits in the received TCF is

below this threshold, the machine informs the

sender that training has succeeded.


G3 Switch 05 [SP No. 1-105-006]


Initial Tx modem rate

Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 bps

0 0 0 1 2.4k

0 0 1 0 4.8k

0 0 1 1 7.2k

0 1 0 0 9.6k

0 1 0 1 12.0k

0 1 1 0 14.4k

0 1 1 1 16.8k

1 0 0 0 19.2k

1 0 0 1 21.6k

0-3

1 0 1 0 24.0k

These bits set the initial starting modem rate for

transmission.

Use the dedicated transmission parameters if

you need to change this for specific receivers.

If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected,

V.8 protocol should be disabled manually.

Cross reference:

V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2

B267 88 SM

1 0 1 1 26.4k

1 1 0 0 28.8k

1 1 0 1 31.2k

1 1 1 0 33.6k

Other settings - Not used

4-5

Initial modem type for 9.6 k or

7.2 kbps.

Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = V.29

Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = V.17

Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0 = V.34


These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and

7.2 kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these

speeds.


G3 Switch 06 [SP No. 1-105-007]



Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bps

0 0 0 1 2.4k

0 0 1 0 4.8k

0 0 1 1 7.2k

0 1 0 0 9.6k

0 1 0 1 12.0k

0 1 1 0 14.4k

0 1 1 1 16.8k

0-3

1 0 0 0 19.2k

These bits set the initial starting modem

rate for reception.

Use a lower setting if high speeds pose

problems during reception.

If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is

selected, V.8 protocol should be

disabled manually.

Cross reference:


SM 89 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

1 0 0 1 21.6k

1 0 1 0 24.0k

1 0 1 1 26.4k

1 1 0 0 28.8k

1 1 0 1 31.2k

1 1 1 0 33.6k


Modem types available for reception

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting

0 0 0 1 V.27ter

0 0 1 0 V.27ter,V.29

0 0 1 1 V.27ter,

V.29, V.33

0 1 0 0

V.27ter,

V.29,

V.17/V.33

0 1 0 1

V.27ter,

V.29,

V.17/V33,

V.34

4-7


The setting of these bits is used to

inform the transmitting terminal of the

available modem type for the machine

in receive mode.

If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must

be disabled manually.

Cross reference:


G3 Switch 07 [SP No. 1-105-008]


0-1 PSTN cable equalizer

(tx mode: Internal)

Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher

frequencies because of the length of wire between

B267 90 SM

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = None

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Low

Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = Medium

Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = High

the modem and the telephone exchange.

Use the dedicated transmission parameters for

specific receivers.

Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of

the following symptoms occurs.

Communication error

Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

This setting is not effective in V.34

communications.

2-3

PSTN cable equalizer

(rx mode: Internal)

Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = None

Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = Low

Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = Medium

Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 = High

Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher

frequencies because of the length of wire between

the modem and the telephone exchange.

Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of

the following symptoms occurs.

Communication error with error codes such as

0-20, 0-23, etc.

Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

This setting is not effective in V.34

communications.

4

PSTN cable equalizer

(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

Keep this bit at “1”.


6

Parameter selection for dial

tone detection

0: Normal parameter

1: Specific parameter

0: This uses the fixed table in the ROM for dial tone

detection.

1: This uses the specific parameter adjusted with

SRAM (69ECBEH - 69ECDEH). Select this if the

dial tone cannot be detected when the "Normal

parameter: 0" is selected.


SM 91 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3 Switch 0A [SP No. 1-105-011]


0-1

Maximum allowable carrier

drop during image data

reception

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 200

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 400

Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 800


These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop

time.

Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is

frequent.

2

Select cancellation of

high-speed RX if carrier

signal lost while receiving

0: Off

1: On

This switch setting determines if high-speed

receiving ends if the carrier signal is lost when

receiving during non-ECM mode

3 Not used Do not change the settings

4

Maximum allowable frame

interval during image data

reception.

0: 5 s 1: 13 s

This bit set the maximum interval between EOL

(end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval

between ECM frames from the other end.

Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is

frequent.


6

Reconstruction time for the

first line in receive mode

0: 6 s 1: 12 s

When the sending terminal is controlled by a

computer, there may be a delay in receiving page

data after the local machine accepts set-up data

and sends CFR. This is outside the T.30

recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this

bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to

B267 92 SM

send data.

Refer to error code 0-20.

ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should

come within 5 s of CFR.


G3 Switch 0B Not used (do not change the settings).

G3 Switch 0C Not used (do not change the settings).

G3 Switch 0D Not used (do not change the settings).

G3 Switch 0E [SP No 1-105-015]

Set CNG send time interval

Some machines on the receiving side may not be able to automatically switch the

3-second CNG interval.

High order bit 3000-2250ms: 3000-50xNms

3000 – 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) ≤ N ≤ FF (2250 ms)

0-7

Low order bit 00-0E(3000-3700ms: 3000+50xNms

3000 – 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) ≤ N ≤ 0F (3700 ms)

G3 Switch 0F [SP No. 1-105-016]


0

Alarm when an error occurred

in Phase C or later

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each

error communication, change this bit to “1”.

1

Alarm when the handset is

off-hook at the end of

communication

0: Disabled

If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the

handset is off-hook at the end of fax

communication, change this bit to “1”.

SM 93 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

1: Enabled


4.3.6 IP FAX SWITCHES

IP Fax Switch 00 [SP No. 1-111-001]



1 IP Fax Transport

0: TCP, 1: UDP Selects TCP or UDP protocol for IP-Fax

2 IP Fax single port selection

0: OFF, 1: ON (enable) Selects single data port.

3

IP Fax double ports (single data

port) selection

0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)

Selects whether IP-Fax uses a double port.

4 IP Fax Gatekeeper

0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)

Enables/disables the communication via the

gatekeeper for IP-Fax.

5 IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse

0: LSB first, 1: MSB first Reverses the T30 bit signal.

6 IP Fax max bit rate setting

0: Not affected, 1: Affected

When "0" is selected, the max bit rate does

not affect the value of the DIS/DCS.

When "1" is selected, the max bit rate affects

the value of the DIS/DCS.

7

IP Fax received telephone number

confirmation

0: No confirmation, 1:

Confirmation

When "0" is selected, fax data is received

without checking the telephone number.

When "1" is selected, fax data is received

only when confirming that the telephone

number from the sender matches the

registered telephone number in this

machine. If this confirmation fails, the line is

B267 94 SM

disconnected.

IP-Fax Switch 01


Select IP FAX Delay Level

Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Setting

0 0 0 0 Level 0

0 0 0 1 Level 1

0 0 1 0 Level 2

0 0 1 1 Level 3

0-3

Raise the level by selecting a higher setting

if too many transmission errors are occurring

on the network.

If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network, raise

this setting on the T.30 machine. Increasing

the delay time allows the recovery of more

lost packets.

If only UDP is enabled, increase the number

of redundant packets.

Level 1~2: 3 Redundant packets

Level 3: 4 Redundant packets

4-7 IP Fax preamble wait time setting

Selects the preamble wait time.

[00 to 0f]

There are 16 values in this 4-bit binary

switch combination.

Waiting time: set value level x 100 ms

Max: 0f (1500 ms) Min: 00 (No wait time)

The default is "0000" (00H).



0

IP Fax bit signal reverse setting

0: Maker code setting

1: Internal bit switch setting

When "0" is selected, the bit signal reverse

method is decided by the maker code.

When "1" is selected, the bit signal reverse

method is decided by the internal bit switch.

When communicating between IP Fax

devices, LSB first is selected.)

SM 95 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

1

IP Fax transmission speed setting

0: Modem speed

1: No limitation

Selects the transmit speed for IP Fax

communication.

2

SIP transport setting

0: TCP

1: UDP

This bit switch sets the transport that has

priority for receiving IP Fax data.

This function is activated only when the

sender has both TCP and UDP.

3

CCM connection

0: No CCM connection

1: CCM connection

When "1" is selected, only the connection

call message with H.323 or no tunneled

H.245 is transmitted via CCM.

4

Message reception selection from

non-registered SIP server

0: Answer

1: Not answer

0: This answers the INVITE message from

the SIP server not registered for the

machine.

1: This does not receive the INVITE

message from the SIP server not registered

for the machine and send a refusal message.

5

ECM communication setting

0: No limit for image compression

1: Limit for image compression

0: This does not limit the type of the image

compression with ECM communication.

1: When the other end machine is Ciscco,

this permits the image compression other

than JBIG or MMR with ECM

communication.




0

Effective field limitation for G3

standard function information

0: OFF, 1: 4byte (DIS)

Limits the effective field for standard G3

function information.

1 Switching between G3 standard

and G3 non standard

Enables/disables switching between G3

standard and G3 non-standard.

B267 96 SM

0: Enable switching

1: G3 standard only

2 Not used. Do not change this setting.

3

ECM frame size selection at

transmitting

0: 256byte, 1: 64byte

Selects the ECM frame size for sending.

4

DIS detection times for echo

prevention

0: 1 time, 1: 2 times

Sets the number of times for DIS to detect

echoes.

5

CTC transmission selection

0: PPRx1

1: PPRx4

When "0" is selected, the transmission

condition is decided by error frame numbers.

When "1" is selected, the transmission

condition is based on the ITU-T method.

6

Shift down setting at receiving

negative code

0: OFF, 1: ON

Selects whether to shift down when negative

codes are received.




0

1

2

3

TCF error threshold

Sets the TCF error threshold level.

[00 to 0f]

The default is "1111" (0fH).



SM 97 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n


Modem bit rate setting for transmission

Sets the modem bit rate for transmission. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).

Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1

0 0 0 1 2400 bps

0 0 1 1 4800 bps

0 0 1 1 7200 bps

0 1 0 0 9600 bps

0 1 0 1 12.0 Kbps

0 1 1 0 14.4 Kbps

0 1 1 1 16.8 Kbps

1 0 0 0 19.2 Kbps

1 0 0 1 21.6 Kbps

1 0 1 0 24.0 Kbps

1 0 1 1 26.4 Kbps

1 1 0 0 28.8 Kbps

1 1 0 1 31.2 Kbps

0-3

1 1 1 0 33.6 Kbps

4-5

Modem setting for transmission

Sets the modem for transmission.

The default is "00" (V29).

Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = V29

Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = V17

Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0 = V34*


*V34 is not supported for IP-Fax communication.

B267 98 SM




Modem bit rate setting for reception

Sets the modem bit rate for reception. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).


0 0 0 1 2400 bps

0 0 1 0 4800 bps

0 0 1 1 7200 bps

0 1 0 0 9600 bps

0 1 0 1 12.0 Kbps

0 1 1 0 14.4 Kbps

0 1 1 1 16.8 Kbps

1 0 0 0 19.2 Kbps

1 0 0 1 21.6 Kbps

1 0 1 0 24.0 Kbps

1 0 1 1 26.4 Kbps

1 1 0 0 28.8 Kbps

1 1 0 1 31.2 Kbps

1 1 1 0 33.6 Kbps

0-3

4-7 Modem setting for reception

Sets the modem type for reception. The default is "0100" (V27ter, V29, V17).

SM 99 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n


0 0 0 1 V27ter

0 0 1 0 V27ter, V29

0 0 1 1 V27ter, V29, V33

(invalid)

0 1 0 0 V27ter, V29, V17

0 1 0 1 V27ter, V29, V17,

V34*

*V34 is not supported for IP-Fax communication.



0 TSI information

0: Not added, 1: Added

Adds or does not add TSI information to

NSS(S).

1

DCN transmission setting at T1

timeout

0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted

Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1

timeout.


3

Hang up setting at DIS reception

disabled

0: No hang up

1: Hang up after transmitting DCN

Sets whether the machine disconnects after

DIS reception.

4 Number of times for training

0: 1 time, 1: 2 times

Selects the number of times training is done

at the same bit rate.

5

Space CSI transmission setting at

no CSI registration

0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted

When "0" is selected, frame data is enabled.

When "1" is selected, the transmitted data is

all spaces.

B267 100 SM




0-1

T1 timer adjustment

Adjusts the T1 timer.

The default is "00" (35 seconds).

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 35 sec

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 40 sec

Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 50 sec

Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = 60 sec

-

2-3

T4 timer adjustment

Adjust the T4 timer.


Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = 3 sec

Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = 3.5 sec

Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = 4 sec

Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 = 5 sec

-

4-5

T0 timer adjustment

Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = 75 sec

Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = 120 sec

Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0 = 180 sec

Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 1 = 240 sec

Adjusts the fail safe timer. This timer sets the

interval between "setup" data transmission

and T.38 phase decision. If your destination

return is late on the network or G3 fax return

is late, adjust the longer interval timer.



SM 101 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

4.4 NCU PARAMETERS

The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units that the

machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The factory settings for

each country are also given. Most of these must be changed by RAM read/write (SP2-102),

but some can be changed using NCU Parameter programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105); if

SP2-103, 104 and 105 can be used, this will be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM

is programmed in hex code unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.

The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU.

Change the fourth digit from “5” to “6” (e.g. 680500 to 680600) for the settings for

the first optional G3 interface unit and from “5” to “7” (e.g. 680700) for the settings

for the second optional G3 interface unit.

Address Function

Country/Area code for NCU parameters

Use the Hex value to program the country/area code directly into this

address, or use the decimal value to program it using SP2-103-001

Country

/Area Decimal Hex

Country

/Area Decimal Hex

France 00 00 USA 17 11

Germany 01 01 Asia 18 12

UK 02 02 Hong Kong 20 14

Italy 03 03 South Africa 21 15

Austria 04 04 Australia 22 16

Belgium 05 05 New Zealand 26 17

Denmark 06 06 Singapore 24 18

Finland 07 07 Malaysia 25 19

680500

Ireland 08 08 China 26 1A

B267 102 SM

Address Function

Norway 09 09 Taiwan 27 1B

Sweden 10 0A Korea 28 1C

Switzerland 11 0B Turkey 32 20

Portugal 12 0C Greece 33 21

Holland 13 0D Hungary 34 22

Spain 14 0E Czech 35 23

Israel 15 0F Poland 36 24

Address Function Unit Remarks

680501 Line current detection time

680502 Line current wait time

680503 Line current drop detect time

20 ms

Line current detection is

disabled.

Line current is not

detected if 680501

contains FF.

680504 PSTN dial tone frequency upper

limit (high byte)

680505 PSTN dial tone frequency upper

limit (low byte)

Hz (BCD)

If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone

detection is disabled.

680506 PSTN dial tone frequency lower

limit (high byte)

680507 PSTN dial tone frequency lower

limit (low byte)

Hz (BCD)

If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone


680508 PSTN dial tone detection time

680509 PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW)

68050A PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH)

20 ms If 680508 contains

FF(H), the machine

pauses for the pause

time (address 68050D /

SM 103 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n


68050B PSTN dial tone continuous tone

time

68050C PSTN dial tone permissible drop

time

68050E).

Italy: See Note 2.

68050D PSTN wait interval (LOW)

68050E PSTN wait interval (HIGH) -

68050F PSTN ring-back tone detection time 20 ms Detection is disabled if

this contains FF.

680510 PSTN ring-back tone off detection

time 20 ms -

680511

PSTN detection time for silent

period after ring-back tone detected

(LOW)

20 ms -

680512

PSTN detection time for silent

period after ring-back tone detected

(HIGH)

20 ms -

680513 PSTN busy tone frequency upper

limit (high byte)

680514 PSTN busy tone frequency upper

limit (low byte)

Hz (BCD)

If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone


680515 PSTN busy tone frequency lower

limit (high byte)

680516 PSTN busy tone frequency lower

limit (low byte)

Hz (BCD)

If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone


680517 PABX dial tone frequency upper

limit (high byte)

680518 PABX dial tone frequency upper

Hz (BCD)

If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone


B267 104 SM


limit (low byte)

680519 PABX dial tone frequency lower

limit (high byte)

68051A PABX dial tone frequency lower

limit (low byte)

Hz (BCD)

If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone


68051B PABX dial tone detection time

68051C PABX dial tone reset time (LOW)

68051D PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH)

68051E PABX dial tone continuous tone

time

68051F PABX dial tone permissible drop

time

If 68051B contains FF,

the machine pauses for

the pause time (680520 /

680521).

680520 PABX wait interval (LOW)

680521 PABX wait interval (HIGH)

20 ms

-

680522 PABX ringback tone detection time 20 ms

680523 PABX ringback tone off detection

time 20 ms

If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone


680524

PABX detection time for silent

period after ringback tone detected

(LOW)

20 ms

680525

PABX detection time for silent

period after ringback tone detected

(HIGH)

20 ms

If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone


680526 PABX busy tone frequency upper

limit (high byte)

680527 PABX busy tone frequency upper

Hz (BCD)

If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone


SM 105 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n


limit (low byte)

680528 PABX busy tone frequency lower

limit (high byte)

680529 PABX busy tone frequency lower

limit (low byte)

Hz (BCD)

If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone


68052A Busy tone ON time: range 1

68052B Busy tone OFF time: range 1

68052C Busy tone ON time: range 2

68052D Busy tone OFF time: range 2

68052E Busy tone ON time: range 3

20 ms

68052F Busy tone OFF time: range 3

680530 Busy tone ON time: range 4

680531 Busy tone OFF time: range 4

680532 Busy tone continuous tone

detection time

20 ms

-

680533

Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles

required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or

OFF-ON-OFF must be detected twice).

Tolerance (±)

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 75% Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0.

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 50% Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0.

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 25%

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 12.5%

Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection

680534 International dial tone frequency

upper limit (high byte)


Hz (BCD)

If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone


B267 106 SM


upper limit (low byte)


lower limit (high byte)


lower limit (low byte)

Hz (BCD)

If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone


680538 International dial tone detection

time

680539 International dial tone reset time

(LOW)

68053A International dial tone reset time

(HIGH)

68053B International dial tone continuous

tone time

68053C International dial tone permissible

drop time

If 680538 contains FF,


the pause time (68053D

/ 68053E).

Belgium: See Note 2.

68053D International dial wait interval

(LOW)

68053E International dial wait interval

(HIGH)

20 ms

-

68053F Country dial tone upper frequency

limit (HIGH)

680540 Country dial tone upper frequency

limit (LOW)

If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone


680541 Country dial tone lower frequency

limit (HIGH)

680542 Country dial tone lower frequency

limit (LOW)

Hz (BCD)

If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone


SM 107 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n


680543 Country dial tone detection time

680544 Country dial tone reset time (LOW)

680545 Country dial tone reset time (HIGH)

20 ms

If 680543 contains FF,


the pause time (680548 /

680549).

680546 Country dial tone continuous tone

time - -

680547 Country dial tone permissible drop

time

680548 Country dial wait interval (LOW)

680549 Country dial wait interval (HIGH)

20 ms -

68054A

Time between opening or closing

the DO relay and opening the OHDI

relay

1 ms

See Notes 3, 6 and 8.

SP2-103-012

(parameter 11).

68054B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms

See Note 3.

SP2-103-013

(parameter 12).

68054C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms

See Note 3.

SP2-103-014

(parameter 13).

68054D

Time between final OHDI relay

closure and DO relay opening or

closing

1 ms

See Notes 3, 6 and 8.

SP2-103-015

(parameter 14).

This parameter is only

valid in Europe.

68054E Minimum pause between dialed

digits (pulse dial mode)

See Note 3 and 8.

SP2-103-016

(parameter 15).

68054F Time waited when a pause is

entered at the operation panel

20 ms

SP2-103-017

(parameter 16). See

B267 108 SM


Note 3.

680550 DTMF tone on time SP2-103-018

(parameter 17).

680551 DTMF tone off time

1 ms SP2-103-019

(parameter 18).

680552 Tone attenuation level of DTMF

signals while dialing

-N x 0.5

–3.5 dBm

SP2-103-020

(parameter 19).

See Note 5.

680553

Tone attenuation value difference

between high frequency tone and

low frequency tone in DTMF signals

-dBm x 0.5

SP2-103-021

(parameter 20).

The setting must be less

than –5dBm, and should

not exceed the setting at

680552h above.

See Note 5.

680554 PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation level

after dialling

-N x 0.5

–3.5 dBm

SP2-103-022

(parameter 21). See

Note 5.

680555 ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation level

after dialling -dBm x 0.5 See Note 5

680556 Not used - Do not change the

settings.

680557

Time between 68054Dh (NCU

parameter 14) and 68054Eh (NCU

parameter 15)

1 ms

This parameter takes

effect when the country

code is set to France.

680558 Not used - Do not change the

setting.

680559 Grounding time (ground start mode) 20 ms The Gs relay is closed

for this interval.

SM 109 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n


68055A Break time (flash start mode) 1 ms The OHDI relay is open

for this interval.

68055B International dial access code

(High)

68055C International dial access code (Low)

BCD

For a code of 100:

68055B - F1

68055C - 00

68055D PSTN access pause time 20 ms

This time is waited for

each pause input after

the PSTN access code.

If this address contains

FF[H], the pause time

stored in address

68054F is used.

Do not set a number

more than 7 in the UK.

68055E Progress tone detection level, and

cadence detection enable flags

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = -25.0 dBm

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = -35.0 dBm

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = -30.0 dBm

Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = -40.0 dBm

Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = -49.0 dBm

Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2.

68055F

To

680564

Not used - Do not change the

settings.

680565 Long distance call prefix (HIGH) BCD

680566 Long distance call prefix (LOW) BCD

For a code of 0:

680565 – FF

680566 - FF

680567

to

680571


settings.

680572 Acceptable ringing signal 1000/ N

SP2-103-003

B267 110 SM


frequency: range 1, upper limit (parameter 02).

680573 Acceptable ringing signal

frequency: range 1, lower limit

SP2-103-004

(parameter 03).


frequency: range 2, upper limit

SP2-103-005

(parameter 04).


frequency: range 2, lower limit

(Hz).

SP2-103-006

(parameter 05).

680576 Number of rings until a call is

detected 1

SP2-103-007

(parameter 06).

The setting must not be

zero.

680577 Minimum required length of the first

ring 20 ms

See Note 4.

SP2-103-008

(parameter 07).

680578 Minimum required length of the

second and subsequent rings 20 ms

SP2-103-009

(parameter 08).

680579 Ringing signal detection reset time

(LOW)

SP2-103-010

(parameter 09).

68057A Ringing signal detection reset time

(HIGH)

20 ms SP2-103-011 (parameter

10).

68057B

to

680580


settings.

680581

Interval between dialing the last

digit and switching the Oh relay

over to the external telephone when

dialing from the operation panel in

handset mode.

20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms

SM 111 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n


680582

Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time

Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 0 = 200 ms

Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 1 = 800 ms

Other Not used

Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time

Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = 200 ms

Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = 800 ms

Other Not used

Bits 4 to 7 - Not used

-

680583

To

6805A0


settings.

6805A1 Acceptable CED detection

frequency upper limit (high byte)


frequency upper limit (low byte)

BCD (Hz)

If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone



frequency lower limit (high byte)


frequency lower limit (low byte)

BCD (Hz)

If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone


6805A5 CED detection time 20 ms ± 20

ms Factory setting: 200 ms

6805A6 Acceptable CNG detection

frequency upper limit (high byte)


frequency upper limit (low byte)

BCD (Hz)

If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone



frequency lower limit (high byte)


BCD (Hz)

If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone


B267 112 SM


frequency lower limit (low byte)

6805AA Not used - Do not change the

setting.

6805AB CNG on time 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms

6805AC CNG off time 20 ms Factory setting: 3000 ms

6805AD Number of CNG cycles required for

detection -

The data is coded in the

same way as address

680533.

6805AE Not used - Do not change the

settings.

6805AF

Acceptable AI short protocol tone

(800Hz) detection frequency upper

limit (high byte)

6805B0


(800Hz) detection frequency upper

limit (low byte)

Hz (BCD)

If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone


6805B1


(800Hz) detection frequency lower

limit (high byte)

6805B2


(800Hz) detection frequency lower

limit (low byte)

Hz(BCD)

If both addresses

contain FF(H), tone


6805B3 Detection time for 800 Hz AI short

protocol tone 20 ms Factory setting: 360 ms

6805B4 PSTN: Tx level from the modem -N – 3 dBm SP2-103-002

(parameter 01).

6805B5 PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission

level

- N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 –3.5 (dB)

See Note 7.

SM 113 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n


6805B6 PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission

level

- N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 –3 (dB)

See Note 7.

6805B7 PABX: Tx level from the modem - dBm -

6805B8 PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission

level - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)

6805B9 PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission

level - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB)

6805BD Modem turn-on level (incoming

signal detection level)

-37-0.5N

(dBm) -

6805BE

to

6805C6


settings.

6805C7

Bits 0 to 3 – Not used

Bit 4 = V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)

Bits 5 to 7 – Not used.

6805C8

to

6805D9


settings.

6805DA T.30 T1 timer 1 s

6805E0

bit 3

Maximum wait time for post

message

0: 12 s

1: 30 s

1: Maximum wait time

for post message

(EOP/EOM/MPS) can

be changed to 30 s.

Change this bit to “1” if

communication errors

occur frequently during

V.17 reception.

6805E3 Voltage setting to detect off-hook

for voltage/DP detection for an

0: Auto

1: Fixed V

Do not change these

settings

B267 114 SM


externally connected line.

Here is a summary of the fixed voltage settings (1:

Fixed) for an externally connected line.

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 -

0 0 0 0 Not used

0 0 0 1 2.75 V

0 0 1 0 5.5 V

1 0 0 0 22 V

1 1 1 1 41.25 V

0 RT=0 (Low) Bit 1

1 RT=1 (High)

0 RZ=0 (High) 6805E4

Bit 1 sets the level of

the call signal, Bit 3

sets the call signal

impedance Bit 3 1

RZ=1

(Composite)

0：，1：

0 Auto Bit 0

1 Fixed

0 Use RDTP

Bit 0 sets the ring

detection method, Bit

1 sets the ring

detection method

when fixed. Bit 1

1 Use RDTN

Here is a summary of the voltages for the

detection of off-hook for DP detection.

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 -

0 0 0 0 Not used

6805E5

0 0 0 1 2.75 V

If any setting is changed,

select a setting that is

higher than the default

setting.

SM 115 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n


0 0 1 0 5.5 V

1 0 0 0 22 V

1 1 1 1 41.25 V

NOTES

1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.

2. Italy and Belgium only

RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.

Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)

Bit 1 - Not used

Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)

If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are changed.

680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state

duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address 680533.

68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)

68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)

3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10 pps. If 20

pps is used, the machine automatically compensates.

4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time specified by

this parameter.

5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.

The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:

High frequency tone:

– 0.5 x N680552/680554–3.5 dBm

– 0.5 x N680555 dBm

Low frequency tone:

– 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) –3.5 dBm

– 0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm

N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)

6. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds closing

and Di opening

B267 116 SM

68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds opening

and Di closing

7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI short

protocol) refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher than 1500Hz

refer to the setting at 6805B6h.

8. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the sum of

the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and 68054E.

SM 117 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

4.5 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

There are two sets of transmission parameters: Fax and E-mail

Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable parameters

allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience problems, store that

terminal’s fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and adjust the parameters allocated to

that number.

The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be described.

4.5.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE

1. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1.

2. Enter Address Book Management mode ([User Tools]> System Settings> Key

Operator> Address Book Management).

3. Select the address book that you want to program.

4. For the fax parameter, select "Fax Dest.", for the E-mail parameter, select "E-mail", then

press “Start”. Make sure that the LED of the Start button lights green.

5. The settings for the switch 00 are now displayed. Press the bit number that you wish to

change.

6. To scroll through the parameter switches, either:

7. Select the next switch: press “Next” or Select the previous switch: “Prev.” until the

correct switch is displayed. Then go back to step 6.

8. After the setting is changed, press “OK”.

9. After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.

4.5.2 PARAMETERS

Fax Parameters The initial settings of the following fax parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are

disabled.

Switch 00

FUNCTION AND COMMENTS

ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)

If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting,

adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1

second.

B267 118 SM

Range: 0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)

FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.

Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.

Switch 01


Tx level

Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0

0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 1 –1

0 0 0 1 0 –2

0 0 0 1 1 –3

0 0 1 0 0 –4

0 1 1 1 1 –15

0-4

1 1 1 1 1 Disabled

If communication with a particular

remote terminal often contains

errors, the signal level may be

inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for

communications with that terminal

until the results are better.

If the setting is “Disabled”, the NCU

parameter 01 setting is used.

Do not use settings other

than listed on the left.

5-7

Cable equalizer

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = None

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = Low

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = Medium

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = High

Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = Disabled

Use a higher setting if there is signal

loss at higher frequencies because

of the length of wire between the

modem and the telephone exchange

when calling the number stored in

this Quick/Speed Dial.

Also, try using the cable equalizer if

one or more of the following

symptoms occurs.

Communication error with error

codes such as 0-20, 0-23, etc.

Modem rate fallback occurs

SM 119 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

frequently.

Do not use settings other

than listed on the left.

If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit

switch setting is used.

Switch 02



Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 bps

0 0 0 0 Not used

0 0 0 1 2400

0 0 1 0 4800

0 0 1 1 7200

0 1 0 0 9600

0 1 0 1 12000

0 1 1 0 14400

0 1 1 1 16800

1 0 0 0 19200

1 0 0 1 21600

1 0 1 0 24000

1 0 1 1 26400

1 1 0 0 28800

0-3

1 1 0 1 31200

If training with a particular remote terminal

always takes too long, the initial modem rate

may be too high. Reduce the initial Tx

modem rate using these bits.

For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch

04 bit 4 must be changed to 0.

Do not use settings other than listed

on the left. If the setting is

“Disabled”, the bit switch setting is

used.

B267 120 SM

1 1 1 0 33600

1 1 1 1 Disabled

Other settings: Not used


Switch 03


0-1

Inch-mm conversion before tx

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0

= Inch-mm conversion

available

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Inch only



The machine uses inch-based resolutions for

scanning. If “inch only” is selected, the printed

copy may be slightly distorted at the other end if

that machine uses mm-based resolutions.

If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is

used.

2-3

DIS/NSF detection method

Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0

= First DIS or NSF

Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1

= Second DIS or NSF



(0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are

interfering with the set-up protocol at the start of

transmission. The machine will then wait for the

second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.


used.

4

V.8 protocol

0: Off

1: Disabled

If transmissions to a specific destination always

end at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower),

disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.

0: V.34 communication will not be possible.


used.

5


in transmit mode

0: MH only

1: Disabled

This bit determines the capabilities that are

informed to the other terminal during transmission.


used.

SM 121 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

6-7

ECM during transmission

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0 = Off

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1 = On



For example, if ECM is switched on but is not

wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use

the (0, 0) setting.

V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression are

automatically disabled if ECM is disabled.

If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch

setting is used.

Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)






E-mail Parameters The initial settings of the following e-mail parameters are all "0" (all parameters disabled).

Switch 00


0

MH Compression mode

for e-mail attachments

0: Off

1: On

Switches MH compression on and off for files

attached to e-mails for sending.

1

MR Compression mode


0: Off

1: On

Switches MR compression on and off for files


2 MMR Compression mode Switches MMR compression on and off for files

B267 122 SM


0: Off

1: On



7

Designates the bits to

reference for

compression method of

e-mail attachments

0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6)

1: No registration.

The "0" selection (default) references the settings for

Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the

selections of Bits 00, 01, 02.

Switch 01


0

Original width of e-mail

attachment: A4

0: Off

1: On

Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as

A4.

1


attachment: B4

0: Off

1: On


B4.

2


attachment: A3

0: Off

1: On


A3.


7


reference for original size

of e-mail attachments


1: No registration.


Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the

selections of Bits 00, 01, 02.

SM 123 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

Switch 02


0

Line resolution of e-mail

attachment: 200 x 100

0: Off

1: On

Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as

200 x100.

1



0: Off

1: On


200 x 200.

2



0: Off

1: On


200 x 400.


4



0: Off

1: On


400 x 400.


7


reference for original size

of e-mail attachments


1: No registration.


Bits 00, 01, 02, 04 above. The "1" selection ignores

the selections of Bits 00, 01, 02, 04.


Switch 04

B267 124 SM


0

Full mode address

selection

0: Full mode address

1: No full mode (simple

mode)

If the other ends have the addresses, which have

the full mode function flag ("0"), this machine

determines them as full mode standard machines.

This machine attaches the "demand of reception

confirmation" to a message when transmitting.

This machine updates the reception capability to

the address book when receiving.


Switch 05


0

Directr transmission

selection to SMTP server

0: ON

1: OFF

Allows or does not allow the direct transmission to

SMTP server.






SM 125 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

4.6 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

Do not change the settings which are marked as “Not used” or “Read only.”

680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only) 680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)

680002(H) - Year (BCD)

680003(H) - Month (BCD)

680004(H) - Day (BCD)

680006 to 680015(H) - Machine’s serial number (16 digits - ASCII)

680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)

680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)

680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches

680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches

680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches

680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches

680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches: Not used

6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches: Not used

6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00) : Not used

6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01) : Not used

6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02) Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies

(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)


Bit 2: Reception time printing



Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Bit 4: Checkered mark printing



Bit 5: Not used

Bit 6: Not used

Bit 7: Not used

B267 126 SM

6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report printout) Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 1: Not used

Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 6: Not used

Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On

6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report printout) Bit 0: Not used

Bit 1: Automatic communication failure report and transfer result report output 0:

Off, 1: On

Bits 2 to 3: Not used

Bit 4: Indicates the parties 0: Not indicated, 1: Indicated

Bit 5: Include sender’s name on reports 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 6: Not used

Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On

6800D5(H) - User parameter switch 05 (SWUSR_05) Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition

0: Enabled, 1: Disabled

Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages

(Paper end, toner end, jam, and during night mode)

Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives all the fax messages.

Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1 = The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.

Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.

Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 1 = The machine does not receive anything.

Bit 3: Not used

Bit 4: Not used

Bit 5: Just size printing 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 6: Not used

Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On

6800D6(H) - User parameter switch 06 (SWUSR_06): Not used

6800D7(H) - User parameter switch 07 (SWUSR_07) Bit 0 Ringing 0: Off, 1: On

Bit1: Automatic answering message 0: Off, 1: On

SM 127 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On

Bits 3 and 4: Not used

Bit 5: Remote control 0: Off, 1: On


6800D8(H) - User parameter switch 08 (SWUSR_08) Bits 0 and 1: Not used.

Bit 2: Authorized reception

0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are

accepted.

1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature are

accepted.

Bits 3 to 7: Not used.

6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09): Not used

6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A) Bits 0 to 2: Not used

Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On


Bit 6: Use both e-mail notification and printed reports to confirm the transmission

results 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 7: Not used

6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B) Bits 0 and 1: Not used

Bit 2: White original detection 0: Off, 1: On (alarm and alert message on the LCD)

Bit 3: Receive rejection for 1300 Hz transmission 0: Off (receive), 1: On (not

receive)

Bit 5: Not used

Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station 0: Off, 1:

On

Bit 7: Not used

6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used

6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D): Not used

6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E) Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off

Bit 1: Maximum document length detection 0: Double letter, 1: Longer than

double-letter (well log) – up to 1,200 mm

Bit 2: Not used

B267 128 SM

Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key

(Copy/Fax/Printer/Scanner) is pressed 0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared


Bit 7: Not used

6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F) (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout

Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 1st paper feed station

Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 2nd paper feed station

Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = 3rd paper feed station

Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 4th paper feed station

Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = LCT

Other settings Not used


Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off


6800E0(H) – User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10) (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)


Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size

paper is not available. 0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority


6800E1(H) – User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11) Bit 0: Not used

Bit 1: Not used

Bit 2: Inclusion of the “Add” button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is

selected for broadcasting 0:Not needed, 1: Needed


Bit 7: Press “Start” key without an original when using the on hook dial or the

external telephone,

0: displays “Cannot detect original size”. 1: Receives fax messages.

6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12) Bit 0: TTI date 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 1: TTI sender 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 2: TTI file number 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 3: TTI page number 0: Off, 1: On

SM 129 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n


Bit 7: Japan only

6800E3(H) - User parameter switch 19 (SWUSR_13) Bit 0: Not used

Bit 1: Journal format

0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions

1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, and G3-3 communications

Bit 2: Not used

Bit 3: 90° image rotation during B5 portrait Tx (This switch is not printed on the user

parameter list.) 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and

sub-scan directions. (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0:

Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reduction

Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports (This switch is not printed on the user

parameter list.) 0: Off, 1: On


6800E4(H) - User parameter switch 20 (SWUSR_14) Bit 0: Automatic printing of the LAN fax result report 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 1: Not used.

Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax

(LAN fax) driver

Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting

0 0 0 0 0 min.

0 0 0 1 1 min.

1 1 1 0 14 min.

1 1 1 1 15 min.

Bits 6 and 7: Not used.

6800E5(H) - User parameter switch 21 (SWUSR_15) Bit 0: Print results of sending reception notice request message 0: Disabled (print

only when error occurs), 1: Enabled

Bit 1: Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request 0: Disabled, 1:

B267 130 SM

Enabled

Bit 2: Not used

Bit 3: File format for forwarded folders 0: TIFF, 1:PDF

Bit 4: Transmit Journal by E-mail 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Bit 5: Not used

Bit 6: Network error display 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed

Bit 7: Transmit error mail notification 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled

6800E6(H) - User parameter switch 22 (SWUSR_16) (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

Bit 0: Dial tone detection (PSTN 1) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled


6800E7(H) – User parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17): Not used

6800E8(H) - User parameter switch 24 (SWUSR_18): Not used

6800E9(H) - User parameter switch 25 (SWUSR_19) Bit 0: Not used

Bit 1: Reception mode switch timer 0: Off, 1: On (switching Fax or Fax/Tel)

Bit 2: Mode priority switch 0: Fax first, 1: Tel first

Bit 3: Dial in function (Japan Only)

Bit 4: RDS operation 0: Not acceptable, 1: Acceptable for the limit specified by

system switch 03

This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user

(see system switch 02).


6800EA(H) and 6800EB(H) - User parameter switches 26 and 27 (SWUSR_1A and 1B): Not used

6800EC(H) - User parameter switch 28(SWUSR_1C) Xxxxx

6800ED(H) - User parameter switch 29(SWUSR_1D) xxxxxx

6800EE(H) and 6800EF(H) - User parameter switches 30 and 31 (SWUSR_1E and 1F): Not used

6800F0(H) - User parameter switch 32 (SWUSR_20) Bit 0: Quotation priority for a destination when there is no destination of the

specified type

0: Paper output priority = Priority order: 1. IP-fax destination, 2. Fax Number, 3.

SM 131 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

E-mail address, 4. Folder

1: Electric putout order = Priority order: 1. E-mail address, 2. Folder, 3. IP-fax

destination, 4. Fax number


6800F1(H) - User parameter switch 33 (SWUSR_21): Not used

6800F2(H) - User parameter switch 34 (SWUSR_22) Bit 0: Gatekeeper server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Bit 1: SIP server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled


680100 to 68010F(H) - G4 Parameter Switches – Not used

680110 to 68012F(H) - G4 Internal Switches – Not used

680130 to 68016F(H) - Service Switches

680170 to 68017F(H) - IFAX Switches

680180 to 68018F(H) - IP-FAX Switches

680190 to 6801AF(H) - Service station’s fax number (SP3-101)

6801B0 to 6801B9(H) - Own fax PABX extension number

6801BA to 6801C3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN) – Not used

6801C4 to 6801D7(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) – Not used

6801D8 to 6801E3(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3) – Not used

6801E4 to 6801EF(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3) – Not used

6801F0 to 6801FB(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4) – Not used

6801FC to 680207(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4) – Not used

680208 to 68021B(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.

68021C to 68022F(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - Not used

680230 to 680246(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - Not used

680247 to 680286(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.

680287 to 6802C6(H) - TTI 2 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - Not used

6802C7 to 680306(H) - TTI 3 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - Not used

680307 to 68031A(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)

68031B to 68032E(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII) - Not used

68032F to 680342(H) - PSTN-3 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII) - Not used

680343(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)

680344(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex) - Not used

680345(H) Number of PSTN-3 CSI characters (Hex) - Not used

If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 64 for TTI), add a

B267 132 SM

stop code (00[H]) after the last character.

680380 to 680387(H) - Last power off time (Read only)

680380(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H) - 12-hour

clock (PM)

680381(H) - Year (BCD)

680382(H) - Month (BCD)

680383(H) - Day (BCD)

680384(H) – Hour

680385(H) – Minute

680386(H) – Second

680387(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, /// , 06: Sunday

680394(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)

Bit 0: Page Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed

Bit 1: SAF Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed

Bits 2 to 7; Not used

680395(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)


Bit 4: G3-2 0: Not installed, 1: Installed

Bit 5: G3-3 0: Not installed, 1: Installed

Bit 6 and 7: Not used

680406 to 68040A – Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only)

680406(H) - Suffix (BCD)

680407(H) - Version (BCD)

680408(H) - Year (BCD)

680409(H) - Month (BCD)

68040A(H) - Day (BCD)

68040B to 68040F – Option G3 board (G3-3) ROM information (Read only)

68040B(H) - Suffix (BCD)

68040C(H) - Version (BCD)

68040D(H) - Year (BCD)

68040E(H) - Month (BCD)

68040F(H) - Day (BCD)

680410(H) - G3-1 Modem ROM version (Read only)



680420(H) - Number of multiple sets print (Read only)

SM 133 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

680476(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)

680477(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)

680492(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)

680493(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)

680494(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)

680495(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)

680496(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)

680497(H) - Beeper volume 00 - 07(H)

6804A8(H) - Machine code (Check ram 4)

688E8E to 68918D(H) - SIP server address (Read only)

688E8E(H) - Proxy server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

688F0E(H) - Proxy server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

688F8E(H) - Redirect server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

68900E(H) - Redirect server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

68908E(H) - Registrar server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

68910E(H) - Registrar server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

68918E(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

68920E(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

68928E(H) - Arias Number (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

68930E(H) - SIP user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

68938E(H) - SIP digest authentication password (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

68940E(H) - Gateway address information (Max. 7100 characters - ASCII)

68AFCA(H) - Stand-by port number for H.232 connection

68AFCCH) - Stand-by port number for SIP connection

68AFCE(H) - RAS port number

68AFD0(H) - Gatekeeper port number

68AFD2(H) - Port number of data waiting for T.38

68AFD4(H) - Port number of SIP server

68AFD6(H) - Priority for SIP and H.323 0: H.323, 1: SIP

68AFD7(H) - SIP function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

68AFD8(H) - H.323 function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

68AFD9(H) - SIP digest authentication function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

68AFDA(H) - IP-Fax backup data 00 - 600 (H)

69ECBE(H) - 69ECDE(H) - IMPORTANT: Do not change the values of these RAM

addresses. They are not for use in the field. ⇒

Rev. 04/2007

B267 134 SM

6BEBFE(H) – IMPORTANT: Do not change the values of these RAM addresses. They are

not for use in the field.

6BEBFF(H) – IMPORTANT: Do not change the values of these RAM addresses. They are


6BEC00(H) – IMPORTANT: Do not change the values of these RAM addresses. They are






6BEC03 to 6BEC04 – IMPORTANT: Do not change the values of these RAM addresses.

They are not for use in the field.





⇒

⇒

⇒

⇒

⇒

⇒

⇒

⇒

Rev. 04/2007

SM 135 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n


5.1 OVERVIEW

The basic fax unit consists of two PCBs: an FCU and an MBU.

The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with the

controller board. The MBU contains the ROM and SRAM. Also, the FCU has an NCU circuit.

B267 136 SM

5.2 BOARDS

5.2.1 FCU

The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface to the

base copier’s engine, and all the fax options.

FACE3 (Fax Application Control Engine) CPU

Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)

DMA control

Clock generation

DRAM backup control

Modem (FAME) V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8

DRAM The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows.

SAF memory : 4MB

Working memory : 8MB

Page memory : 4MB

The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery.

SM 137 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

Memory Back-up A Rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 1 hour.

5.2.2 MBU

On this board, the flash ROM contains the FCU firmware, and the SRAM contains the

system data and user parameters. Even if the FCU is changed, the system data and user

parameters are kept on the MBU board.

ROM 3MB flash ROMs for system software storage

2MB (16bit x 1MB) + 1MB (16bit x 512K)

SRAM The 128 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a lithium

battery.

Memory Back-up A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in the SRAM,

in case the base copier's main switch is turned off.

Switches

Item Description

SW1 Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off.

B267 138 SM

5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH

5.3.1 TRANSMISSION

SM 139 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution in inch format. The

SBCU processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.

When scanning a fax original, the SBCU uses the MTF, independent dot erase and

thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit’s scanner bit switches,

not the copier's SP modes.

Then, the FCU converts the data to mm format, and compresses the data in MMR or raw

format to store it in the SAF memory. If image rotation will be done, the image is rotated in

page memory before compression.

At the time of transmission, the FCU decompresses the stored data, then re-compresses

and/or reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCU transmits the data to the

line.

Immediate Transmission The base copier's scanner scans the original at the resolution agreed with the receiving

terminal. The SBCU video processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.

When scanning a fax original, the SBCU uses the MTF, independent dot erase and

thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit’s scanner bit switches,

not the copier's SP modes.

Then the FCU stores the data in page memory, and compresses the data for transmission.

The NCU transmits the data to the line.

JBIG Transmission Memory transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes from the

DCR to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line.

Immediate transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes from the

page memory to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line.

Adjustments Priority for the line used for G3 transmission (PSTN 1): System switch 16 bit 1

B267 140 SM

5.3.2 RECEPTION

First, the FCU stores the incoming data from either an analog line to the SAF memory. (The

data goes to the FACE3 at the same time, and is checked for error lines/frames.)

The FCU then decompresses the data and transfers it to page memory. If image rotation will

be done, the image is rotated in the page memory. The data is transferred to the SBCU.

JBIG Reception When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-1 (the standard analog line), the data

is sent to the QM-CODER for decompression. Then the data is stored in the page memory,

and transferred to the SBCU.

SM 141 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

5.4.1 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION

Mail Transmission This machine supports T.37 full mode. (ITU-, RFC232). The difference between T.37 simple

mode and full mode is as follows.

Function T.37 Simple Mode T.37 Full Mode

Resolution 200 x 100

200 x 200

200 x100

200 x 200

200 x 400

400 x 400 (if available)

RX Paper Width A4 A4, B4, A3

RX Data Compression Method MH MH (default), MR, MMR,

Signals Image data

transmission only

Image data transmission,

exchange of capability

information between the two

terminals, and

acknowledgement of receipt of

fax messages

Data Formats The scanned data is converted into a TIFF-F formatted file.

The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:

Field Content

From Mail address of the sender

Reply To Destination requested for reply

To Mail address of the destination

Bcc Backup mail address

Subject From CSI or RTI (Fax Message No. xxxx)

B267 142 SM

Content Type Multipart/mixed

Attached files: image/tiff

Content Transfer Encoding Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable

Message Body MIME-converted TIFF-F (MIME standards specify how

files are attached to e-mail messages)

Direct SMTP Transmission Internet Fax documents can be sent directly to their destinations without going through the

SMTP server. (Internet Faxes normally transmit via the SMTP server.)

For example:

e-mail address: [email protected]

SMTP server address: gts.abcd.com

In this case this feature destination e-mail address ([email protected]) is read as the SMTP

server address "gts.abcd.com" and the transmissions bypass the SMTP server.

Selectable Options These options are available for selection:

With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail. Inch-mm

conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7. Detail resolution will be used if

Super Fine resolution is selected, unless Fine resolution is enabled with IFAX SW01.

The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memory capacity) are

the same as for G3 fax memory TX.

The default compression is TIFF-F format.

IFAX SW00: Acceptable paper widths for sending

IFAX SW09: Maximum number of attempts to the same destination

Secure Internet Transmission SMTP Authentication: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> SMTP

Authentication

POP Before SMTP: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP Before SMTP

Mail Reception This machine supports three types of e-mail reception:

POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.)

IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol)

SM 143 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –

Internet/LAN Fax Boards – Mail Reception

POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure The machine automatically picks up e-mail from the server at an interval which is adjustable

in the range 2 to 1440 min. in 1-minute steps: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer>

E-mail Reception Interval

SMTP Reception The IFAX must be registered as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNS server,

and the address of the received mail must specify the IFAX.

Enable SMTP reception: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception

Protocol

Even if the MX record on the DNS server includes the IFAX, mail cannot be received

with SMTP until SMTP reception is enabled:

However, if SMTP reception is selected and the machine is not registered in the MX

record of the DNS server, then either IMAP4 or POP3 is used, depending on the setting:

User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol

Mail Delivery Conditions: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP 1. The machine must be set up for SMTP mail delivery: User Tools> Facsimile Features>

E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings

2. If the user wishes to limit this feature so that the machine will only deliver mail from

designated senders, the machine’s “Auth. E-mail RX” feature must be set (User Tools>

Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings).

3. If the “SMTP RX File Delivery Setting” is set to 0 to prohibit SMTP receiving, and if there

is mail designated for delivery, then the machine responds with an error. (User Tools>

Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings)

4. If the quick dial, speed dial, or group dial entry is incorrect, the mail transmission is lost,

and the IFAX issues an error to the SMTP server and outputs an error report.

Auth. E-mail RX In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders must be limited

using the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered.

1. Access Limit Entry

For example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp:

[email protected] Matches and is delivered.

B267 144 SM

[email protected] Does not match and is not delivered.

[email protected] Does not match and is not delivered.

2. Conditions

The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters.

If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming mail do not

match, the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered, and the SMTP server

responds with an error. However, in this case an error report is not output.

If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered, and if the incoming mail

specifies a delivery destination, then the mail is delivered unconditionally.

Handling Mail Reception Errors Abnormal files

When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and commands the server to

erase the message. Then the machine prints an error report and sends information about

the error by e-mail to the sender address (specified in the “From” or “Reply-to” field of the

message). If there is an incomplete received message in the machine memory, it will be

erased.

The machine prints an error message when it fails to send the receive error notification after

a certain number of attempts.

The following types of files are judged to be abnormal if one or more of the following are

detected:

1. Unsupported MIME headers.

Supported types of MIME header

Header Supported Types

Content-Type Multipart/mixed, text/plain, message/rfc822 Image/tiff

Charset US-ASCII, ISO 8859 X. Other types cannot be

handled, and some garbage may appear in the data.

Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable

2. MIME decoding errors

3. File format not recognized as TIFF-F format

4. Resolution, document size, or compression type cannot be accepted

SM 145 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

Remaining SAF capacity error The machine calls the server but does not receive e-mail if the remaining SAF capacity is

less than a certain value (the value depends on IFAX Switch 08. The e-mail will be received

when the SAF capacity increases (for example, after substitute reception files have been

printed). The error handling method for this type of error is the same as for “Abnormal files”.

If the capacity of the SAF memory drops to zero during reception, the machine operates in

the same way as when receiving an abnormal file (refer to “Abnormal files” above).

Secure Internet Reception To enable password encryption and higher level security: User Tools> System Settings> File

Transfer> POP3/IMAP4 Settings> Encryption (set to “On”)

Transfer Request: Request By Mail For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –

Internet/LAN Fax Boards – Transfer Request

The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:

Field Content

From E-mail address of the requesting terminal

To Destination address (Transfer Station address)

Bcc Blind carbon copy

Subject From TSI (Fax Message No. xxxx)

Content-Type Multipart/mixed

Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files)

Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-Bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable

Mail body (text part) RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code) RELAY:

#01#*X#**01….

Message body MIME-converted TIFF-F.

E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode) The following features are available as options for mail sending: entering a subject,

designating the level of importance, confirming reception of the mail.

B267 146 SM

Subject and Level of Importance You can enter a subject message with: Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options

The Subject entry for the mail being sent is limited to 64 characters. The subject can also be

prefixed with an “Urgent” or “High” notation.

How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type

Mail Type

Subject

Entry --- Entry Condition

1. “CSI” (“RTI”)

2. “RTI” CSI not registered

3. “CSI” RTI not registered No Subject

Entry

4. None

CSI, RTI not

registered

Fax Message No.

+

File No.

1. “CSI” (“RTI”)

2. “RTI” CSI not registered

Normal:

Return Receipt

(dispatched).

You can select

“displayed” with IFAX

SW02 Bits 2 and 3.

3. “CSI” RTI not registered

Confirmation

of Reception From

4. None CSI, RTI not registered

Error:

Return Receipt

(processed/error)

RTI or CSI of

the station

designated

for delivery

Mail delivery

RTI or CSI of

sender

Mail sending from G3

memory

Mail delivery,

memory

transfer,

SMTP

receiving

and delivery

From

Mail address

of sender Memory sending

Fax Message No. +

File Number

SM 147 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

Mail address

of sender

SMTP receiving and

delivery (Off Ramp

Gateway)

Mail error

notification --- Error Message No. xxxx From CSI (RTI)

Items of the table above are in the Subject.

Subjects Displayed on the PC

E-mail Messages After entering the subject, you can enter a message with:

Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options

An e-mail message (up to 5 lines) can be pre-registered with: User Tools> System Settings>

File Transfer> Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message

Limitations on Entries

Item Maximum

Number of Lines 5 lines

Line Length 80 characters

Name Length 20 characters

Message Disposition Notification (MDN) For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –

Internet/LAN Fax Boards – E-mail Options

The network system administrator can confirm whether a sent mail has been received

correctly or not. This function is enabled only when "I-FAX switch 02 Bit 4" is set to "1"This

confirmation is done in four steps.

1. Send request for confirmation of mail reception. To enable or disable this request

(known as MDN):

2. Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options

3. Mail reception (receive confirmation request)

B267 148 SM

4. Send confirmation of mail reception

5. Receive confirmation of mail reception

The other party’s machine will not respond to the request unless the two conditions below

are met:

The other party’s machine must be set up to respond to the confirmation request.

The other party’s machine must support MDN (Message Disposition Notification).

- Setting up the Receiving Party -

The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if:

1. The “Disposition Notification To” field is in the received mail header (automatically

inserted in the 4th line in the upper table on the previous page, if MDN is enabled), and

2. Sending the disposition notification must be enabled (User Parameter Setting SW21 (15

[H]) Bit 1 for this model). The content of the response is as follows:

Normal reception: “Return Receipt (dispatched)” in the Subject line

IFAX SW02 (Bit 2, 3) “Return Receipt (displayed)” in the Subject line

Error: “Return Receipt (processed/error)” in the Subject line

Handling Reports 1. Sending a Request for a Return Receipt by Mail

After the mail sender transmits a request for a return receipt, the mail sender’s journal is

annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and a “Q” in the Mode column.

2. Mail Receipt (Request for Receipt Confirmation) and Sending Mail Receipt Response

After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt, the mail

receiver’s journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and an “A” in

the Mode column.

3. Receiving the Return Receipt Mail

After the mail sender receives a return receipt, the information in the mail sender’s

journal about the receipt request is replaced, i.e. the journal is annotated with “OK”

in the Result column.

When the return receipt reports an error, the journal is annotated with an “E” in the

Result column.

The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separate

communication. Its arrival is only reported by the presence of “OK” or “E” in the

Result column.

If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list (i.e., a Group

destination; the machine sends the mail to more than one location. See “How to set

SM 149 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

up Mail Delivery”), the Result column of the Journal is updated every time a return

receipt is received. For example, if the mailing list was to 5 destinations, the Result

column indicates the result of the communication with the 5th destination only. The

results of the communications to the first 4 destinations are not shown.

Exceptions: If one of the communications had an error, the Result column will

indicate E, even if subsequent communications were OK.

If two of the communications had an error, the Journal will indicate the destination

for the first error only.

Report Sample

B267 150 SM

5.5 IP-FAX

5.5.1 WHAT IS IP-FAX?

For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –

Internet/LAN Fax Boards – IP-FAX

T.38 Packet Format

TCP is selected by default for this machine, but you can change this to UDP with IPFAX SW

00 Bit 1.

UDP Related Switches

IP-Fax Switch 01


Select IP FAX Delay Level

Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Setting

0 0 0 0 Level 0

0 0 0 1 Level 1

0 0 1 0 Level 2

0 0 1 1 Level 3

0-3

Raise the level by selecting a higher setting

if too many transmission errors are occurring

on the network.

If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network, raise

this setting on the T.30 machine. Increasing

the delay time allows the recovery of more

lost packets.

If only UDP is enabled, increase the number

of redundant packets.

Level 1~2: 3 Redundant packets

Level 3: 4 Redundant packets

Settings

User parameter switch 34 (22[H]), bit 0

IP-Fax Gate Keeper usage 0: No, 1: Yes

IP Fax Switches: Various IP-FAX settings (see the bit switch table)

SM 151 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

6. SPECIFICATIONS

6.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Type: Desktop type transceiver

Circuit: PSTN

PABX

Connection: Direct couple

Original Size:

Book (Face down)

Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins]

Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins]

ARDF (Face up)

(Single-sided document)

Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins]

Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]

(Double-sided document)

Length: 128 - 432 mm [5.0 - 17 inch]

Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]

Scanning Method: Flat bed, with CCD

Resolution:

G3

8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)

8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail)

8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine)

200 x 100 dpi (Standard)

200 x 200 dpi (Detail)

Transmission Time:

G3: 3 s at 28800 bps; Measured with G3 ECM using memory for

an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at standard

resolution

Data Compression: MH, MR, MMR, JBIG

B267 152 SM

Protocol: Group 3 with ECM

Modulation: V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM),

V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FM)

Data Rate:

G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/

19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps

Automatic fallback

I/O Rate: With ECM: 0 ms/line

Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line

Memory Capacity:

ECM: 128 KB

SAF

Standard: 4 MB

Page Memory:

Standard: 4 MB (Print: 2 MB + Scanner: 2 MB)

SM 153 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

6.2 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS

Connectivity:

Local area network

Ethernet 100base-Tx/10base-T

IEEE1394 (IP over 1394)

IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)

Resolution: Main scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi

Sub scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi, 100 dpi

To use 400 dpi, IFAX SW01 Bit 4 must be set to “1”.

Transmission Time:

1 s (through a LAN to the server)

Condition: ITU-T #1 test document (Selerexe Letter)

MTF correction: OFF

TTI: None

Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi

Communication speed: 10 Mbps

Correspondent device: E-mail server

Line conditions: No terminal access

Document Size:

Maximum message width is A4/LT.

To use B4 and A3 width, IFAX SW00 Bit 1 (B4) and/or Bit 2

(A3) must be set to “1”.

E-mail File Format:

Single/multi-part

MIME conversion

Image: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR)

Protocol:

Transmission: SMTP, TCP/IP

Reception: POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP

Data Rate: 100 Mbps(100base-Tx)

10 Mbps (10base-T)

B267 154 SM

Authentication Method:

SMTP-AUTH

POP before SMTP

A-POP

Remark: The machine must be set up as an e-mail client before installation.

Any client PCs connected to the machine through a LAN must also

be e-mail clients, or some features will not work (e.g. Autorouting).

SM 155 B267

B26

7 Fa

x O

ptio

n

6.3 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS

Network:

Local Area Network

Ethernet/10base-T, 100base-TX

IEEE1394 (IP over 1394)

IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)

Scan line density: 8 x 3.85 lines/mm, 200 x 100dpi (standard characters)

8 x 7.7lines/mm, 200 x 200dpi (detailed characters)

Original size: Maximum A3 or 11"x 17" (DLT)

Maximum scanning

size:

Standard: A3, 297mm x 432mm

Irregular: 297mm x 1200mm

Transmission

protocol:

Recommended: T.38 Annex protocol, TCP, UDP/IP

communication

Compatible

machines: IP-Fax compatible machines

IP-Fax transmission

function:

Specify IP address and send fax to an IP-Fax compatible fax

through a network.

Also capable of sending fax from a G3 fax connected to the

public telephone lines via a VoIP gateway.

IP-Fax reception

function:

Receive a fax sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax through a

network.

Also capable of receiving fax from a G3 fax connected the public

telephone lines via a VoIP gateway.

B267 156 SM

6.4 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION

Component Code No. Remarks

FCU 1

MBU 2

Speaker

B267

3

Included with fax unit

Handset Type 1018 B433 NA only. Common with J-C2

B806

DUPLEX UNIT AD2000

SM i B806

DUPLEX UNIT AD2000 B806 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................ 1 1.1 REPLACEMENTS .........................................................................................1

1.1.1 REAR COVER......................................................................................1 1.1.2 DRIVE BOARD.....................................................................................2 1.1.3 INVERTER CLUTCH............................................................................2 1.1.4 DUPLEX TRANSPORTER MOTOR.....................................................3 1.1.5 INVERTER MOTOR.............................................................................4

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS........................................... 6 2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT................................................................................6

2.1.1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT ...............................................................6 2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ...........................................................................................7 2.3 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM...................................................................8 2.4 PAPER PATH TIMINMG CHART ..................................................................9

2.4.1. PAPER PATH ......................................................................................9 2.4.2 TIMING CHART ................................................................................. 10

Replacements

SM 1 B806

Dup

lex

Uni

t A

D20

00

B80

6


1.1 REPLACEMENTS

Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of

the procedures in this section.

This manual uses the following symbols.

: See or Refer to, : Screw, : Connector, : Clip ring, : E-ring

: Clamp

1.1.1 REAR COVER

(Color Photo)

Replacements

B806 2 SM

1. Rear cover [A] of the duplex unit ( x 2: [B] is stepped screw.)

1.1.2 DRIVE BOARD

(Color Photo)

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover") 2. Drive board with bracket [A] ( x 2, All s)

(Color Photo)

3. Drive board [B] ( x 2, snap x 2)

1.1.3 INVERTER CLUTCH 1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")

(Color Photo)

2. Inverter clutch [A] ( x 1, x 1)

Replacements

SM 3 B806

Dup

lex

Uni

t A

D20

00

B80

6

1.1.4 DUPLEX TRANSPORT MOTOR

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover") 2. Pull the duplex tray on the way.

(Color Photo)

3. Remove the gear [A] to release the timing belt ( x 1). 4. Duplex transport motor unit [B] ( x 4, x 1)

(Color Photo)

5. Duplex transport motor [C] ( x 2)] When Reassembling the Duplex Transport Motor

Replacements

B806 4 SM

(Color Photos)

Make sure that timing belts are correctly engaged with three gears before securing gears

and duplex transport motor unit.

1.1.5 INVERTER MOTOR

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover") 2. Pull the duplex tray on the way.

(Color Photo) 3. Inverter motor unit [A] ( x 4, x 2)

Replacements

SM 5 B806

Dup

lex

Uni

t A

D20

00

B80

6

(Color Photo)

4. Inverter motor [B] ( x 2)

When reassembling the inverter motor unit, make sure that the timing belt is

correctly engaged with the gear [C].

Component Layout

B806 6 SM


2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT

2.1.1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

1. Duplex Entrance Sensor

2. Duplex Left Cover Switch

3. Duplex Transport Motor

4. Tray Set Switch

5. Drive Board

6. Paper Wait Sensor

7. Inverter Motor

8. Duplex Right Cover Switch

9. Duplex Inverter Sensor

10. Duplex Clutch

11. Duplex Exit Sensor

Drive Layout

SM 7 B806

Dup

lex

Uni

t A

D20

00

B80

6

2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT

The duplex entrance roller [A] and transport roller 1 [B] are driven by the duplex transport

motor [C] via timing belts and gears.

The Transport roller 2 [D] and duplex exit roller [E] are driven by the inverter motor [F] via

timing belts, clutch and gears.

Junction Gate Mechanism

B806 8 SM

2.3 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM

When the paper reaches the engine exit sensor in duplex mode, the junction gate solenoid

[A] is turned on. The junction gate solenoid pushes up junction gate edge [B]. As a result,

the junction gate [C] opens the path[D] for the duplex unit.

Paper Path and Timing Chart

SM 9 B806

Dup

lex

Uni

t A

D20

00

B80

6

2.4 PAPER PATH AND TIMING CHART

2.4.1 PAPER PATH

(Color Illustration)

Paper Path and Timing Chart

B806 10 SM

2.4.2 TIMING CHART

B813 DOCUMENT FEEDER DF2000

SM i B813

DOCUMENT FEEDER DF2000 B813 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. OVERALL INFORMATION ..............................................................1 1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................................1 1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.........................................................2 1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................................3

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS...........................................4 2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION.......................................................................4 2.2 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION .......................................................................6 2.3 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT MECHANISM ......................................7 2.4 STAMP ..........................................................................................................8 2.5 TIMING CHARTS ..........................................................................................9

2.5.1 A3, STAMP MODE............................................................................. 10 2.6 JAM DETECTION........................................................................................ 11 2.7 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT ............................................................. 12 2.8 FREE RUN .................................................................................................. 13

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........................................14 3.1 EXTERIOR COVERS .................................................................................. 14

3.1.1 REAR COVER.................................................................................... 14 3.1.2 ORIGINAL TABLE.............................................................................. 14 3.1.3 FRONT COVER ................................................................................. 14 3.1.4 ORIGINAL ENTRANCE GUIDE ......................................................... 14 3.1.5 DF FEED COVER .............................................................................. 15

3.2 FEED UNIT.................................................................................................. 15 3.3 SEPARATION ROLLER .............................................................................. 15 3.4 PICK-UP ROLLER....................................................................................... 16 3.5 FEED BELT................................................................................................. 16 3.6 ORIGINAL SENSORS (WIDTH, LENGTH, TRAILING EDGE).................... 17 3.7 ORIGINAL SET SENSOR ........................................................................... 18 3.8 TRANSPORT MOTOR ................................................................................ 18 3.9 FEED COVER OPEN SENSOR/ FEED CLUTCH/ROM/DF DRIVE BOARD19 3.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR.................................................................... 20 3.11 PICK-UP SOLENOID............................................................................. 20 3.12 STAMP SOLENOID............................................................................... 21

MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

SM 1 B813

Doc

umen

t Fe

eder

D

F200

0 B

813

1. OVERALL INFORMATION 1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1. Separation roller 2. Original feed belt 3. Pick-up roller 4. Original entrance guide 5. Original table

6. Original exit roller 7. 2nd transport roller 8. Original exposure guide 9. 1st transport roller

B813I901.WMF

1

2

678 9

3 4 5

ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

B813 2 SM

1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1. DF feed clutch 2. Feed cover open sensor 3. DF pick-up solenoid 4. DF transport motor 5. DF drive board 6. DF position sensor 7. Original length sensor 2

8. Original length sensor 1 9. Original trailing edge sensor 10. Original width sensor 1 11. Original width sensor 2 12. Original set sensor 13. Stamp solenoid 14. Registration sensor

B813I902.WMF

23

45

6

1

14

13

12

11

109

7

8

DRIVE LAYOUT

SM 3 B813

Doc

umen

t Fe

eder

D

F200

0 B

813

1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. DF feed clutch 2. DF transport motor 3. 2nd transport roller 4. Exit roller

5. Separation roller 6. 1st transport roller 7. Original feed belt 8. Pick-up roller

B813I903.WMF

2

1

8 7

6

54

3

ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

B813 4 SM

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

The DF uses two width sensors (width sensor 1 [A] and width sensor 2 [B]) to detect the original width, and two length sensors (length sensor 1 [C] and length sensor 2 [D]) to detect the original length. The DF detects the original size based on the combination of inputs from these sensors, as indicated in the table on the next page. If using a non-standard original size, the user must input the original length at the operation panel. The original width sensors have four possible output states: P1 to P4. The output depends on the position of the ridges on the toothed plate attached to the original rear fence. During one-to-one copying, copy paper is fed to the registration roller in advance to increase the copy speed. The original exit trailing edge sensor [E] monitors the stack of originals in the feeder, and detects when the trailing edge of the last page has been fed in. This stops the ADF from causing the feed of an unwanted extra sheet of copy paper.

B813D905.WMF

[E]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]


SM 5 B813

Doc

umen

t Fe

eder

D

F200

0 B

813

NA EU Original Length 1

Original Length 2 P1 P2 P3 P4

1 A3 (297 x 420) ON ON - - - ON 2 B4 (257 x 364) ON ON - - ON - 3 A4 SEF (210 x 297) ON - - ON - - 4 A4 LEF (297 x 210) - - - - - ON 5 B5 SEF (182 x 257) ON - ON - - - 6 B5 LEF (257 x 182) - - - - ON - 7 A5 SEF (148 x 210) - - ON - - - 8 A5 LEF (210 x 148) - - - ON - - 9 11" x 17" 1 ON ON - - - ON 10 11" x 15" 1 ON ON - - - ON 11 10" x 14" ON ON - - ON - 12 81/2" x 14" 2 ON ON - ON - - 13 81/2" x 13" 4 ON ON - ON - - 14 8" x 13" 2 4 ON ON - ON - - 15 81/2" x 11" SEF 3 ON - - ON - - 16 11" x 81/2" LEF - - - - - ON 17 8" x 10" SEF 3 ON - - ON - - 18 51/2" x 81/2" SEF - - ON - - - 19 81/2" x 51/2" LEF - - - ON - -

NA: America (North, Middle, South) EU: Europe, Asia, China, Taiwan : No : Yes ON: Paper present

1, 1: In NA, original size 11" x 15" is detected as 11" x 17" 2, 2: In NA, original size 8" x 13" is detected as 81/2" x 14" 3, 3: In NA, original size 8" x 10" is detected as 81/2" x 11" 4, 4: In EU, original size 8" x 13" is detected as 81/2" x 13"

- Original Width Sensor States -

Width Sensor 1 High Low Low High Width Sensor 2 High High Low Low Detection State P1 P2 P3 P4

Low = Blocked High = Open

PICK-UP AND SEPARATION

B813 6 SM

2.2 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION

An FRR (feed and reverse roller) system is used. Setting original(s) onto the feed table lifts the original set sensor feeler [A], causing the original set sensor [B] to issue a signal informing the main CPU that the DF is ready to start feeding.

When the Start key ( ) is pressed, the DF pick-up solenoid [C] turns on, causing the transport guide [D] and pick-up roller [E] to lower onto the original, while at the same time causing the original stoppers [F] to drop down to clear the feed path for the original. After 200 ms, the DF transport motor [G] turns on, feeding the top original page to the paper feed belt [H], where it is separated by the separation roller [I].

B813D907.WMF

B813D908.WMF

[A] [B]

[C]

[D] [E]

[H]

[I]

[G]

[F]

ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT MECHANISM

SM 7 B813

Doc

umen

t Fe

eder

D

F200

0 B

813

2.3 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT MECHANISM

When the leading edge of the original reaches the registration sensor at [A], the DF transport motor turns off. After a short time the DF transport motor turns on again. The original is fed past the DF exposure glass [B], where it is scanned. It is then fed through to the 2nd transport roller [C] and fed out by the exit roller [D]. The DF transport motor uses a constant speed to feed the original up to the registration sensor. When the motor turns on again to feed the original to the DF exposure glass, however, the speed depends on the selected reproduction ratio. At 100%, the speed is 100 mm/s (Color mode: 66.7mm/sec).

B813D901.WMF

[A] [C]

[D]

[B]

STAMP

B813 8 SM

2.4 STAMP

This function is only for fax mode. The fax unit includes the stamp. The stamp solenoid [A] is located between the 2nd transport roller [B] and the exit roller [C]. The copier controls this solenoid directly. When the original reaches the stamp position, the DF transport motor stops. Provided that the page was sent successfully (immediate transmission) or stored successfully (memory transmission), the stamp solenoid then comes on 300 ms after the DF motor stops. After stamping, the DF transport motor resumes feeding, at about 1.3 times the normal speed. The positioning of the stamp on the original can be adjusted using SP6-010.

B813D902.WMF

[B]

[A]

[C]

TIMING CHARTS

SM 9 B813

Doc

umen

t Fe

eder

D

F200

0 B

813

2.5 TIMING CHARTS B813D903.WMF

21.0

mm

(27.

0-5-

1mm

)

420m

m*2

JAM

1 *1

50m

s

Orig

. Siz

eIn

fo

Feed

Feed

, Sca

nnin

g, E

xit

168.

1mm

200m

s

369.

1mm

(Pap

er le

ngth

- ((S

epar

atio

nto

Reg

ist.

Sen

sor)

+ 15

mm

))36

9.1m

m

15m

m

50m

s

Feed

, Sca

nnin

g, E

xit

Feed

, Sca

nnin

g, E

xit

Orig

inal

Fed

Nex

t Orig

inal

Pre

set

Orig

inal

Fed

Orig

inal

Fed

Nex

t Orig

inal

Pre

set

No

Orig

inal

Pre

set

No

Nex

tP

rese

tO

rigin

alE

xits

5mm

50m

s

5mm

50m

s

5mm

369.

1mm

15m

m15

mm

200m

s

JAM

4 *1

JAM

2, 3

*1

DIS

AB

LEE

NA

BLE

CW

Reg

istra

tion

Sen

sor

FGA

TE

Orig

inal

Set

Sen

sor

Pic

k-up

Sol

enoi

d

DF

Feed

Clu

tch

Tran

spor

tM

otor

RXD

TXD

For i

nfor

mat

ion

abou

t jam

con

ditio

ns, s

ee S

ectio

n 2.

6.Th

is s

igna

l goe

s hi

gh w

hen

the

lase

r sta

rt to

wire

a p

ate

to th

e dr

um.

The

dist

ance

dep

ends

on

SP m

ode

setti

ng 6

-006

-2 a

nd -3

.F

Gat

e:*2*1

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

MAX

RE

AD

TIMING CHARTS

B813 10 SM

2.5.1 A3, STAMP MODE

DIS

AB

LEE

NA

BLE

CW

Sta

mp

FGA

TE

Orig

inal

Set

Sen

sor

Pic

k-up

Sol

enoi

d

DF

Feed

Clu

tch

Tran

spor

tM

otor

RXD

TXD

For i

nfor

mat

ion

abou

t jam

con

ditio

ns, s

ee S

ectio

n 2.

6.Th

is s

igna

l goe

s hi

gh w

hen

the

lase

r sta

rt to

wire

a p

ate

to th

e dr

um.

The

dist

ance

dep

ends

on

SP m

ode

setti

ng 6

-006

-2 a

nd -3

.F

Gat

e:*2*1

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

MAX

RE

AD

Feed

Sca

nnin

g, S

tam

p P

ositi

on S

top

168.

1mm

200m

s50

ms

50m

s

50m

s50

ms

50m

s

200m

m20

0ms

JAM

1 *1

JAM

2, 3

*121

.0m

m(2

7.0-

1mm

)

420m

m*2

200m

m20

0mm

JAM

4 *1

*271

.2m

m*2

71.2

mm

Sta

mp

Sca

nnin

g, S

tam

p P

ositi

on S

top

Exi

tS

tam

pEx

it

Orig

. Siz

eIn

foO

rigin

alFe

d

Orig

. Len

gth

& N

ext O

rig.

Pre

sent

Sta

mp

Posi

tion

Sto

pS

tam

pFi

nish

Orig

inal

Fed

No

Orig

inal

Set

Orig

.Le

ngth

&N

o N

ext

Orig

.

Sta

mp

Pos

ition

Sto

pS

tam

pFi

nish

Orig

inal

Exi

ts

B813D904.WMF

JAM DETECTION

SM 11 B813

Doc

umen

t Fe

eder

D

F200

0 B

813

2.6 JAM DETECTION JAM 1: If the registration sensor fails to turn on within x1 ms after the DF

transport motor comes on to feed the original from the original tray. x1 = 2267 ms

JAM 2: If the registration sensor fails to turn off within x2 ms after the DF transport motor comes on to feed the original from the original tray. x2 = 1234 ms

JAM 3: If there is no original at the registration sensor when scanning is started, even though the sensor had already turned on.

JAM 4: The current original is stopped after the registration sensor detects its leading edge, but the previous original is still at the scanning position.

JAM 5: If the original stopped at the stamp position is removed. JAM 6: If the cover is opened or the ADF is lifted up while the ADF is in

operation. JAM 7: If the DF gate signal (indicating that the original is now in the correct

position for scanning) is not asserted when the original trailing edge passes the DF exposure glass. JAM 7 occurs when the original is pulled out while it is being scanned.

OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

B813 12 SM

2.7 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT The DF CPU controls the DF transport motor, DF feed clutch, DF pick-up solenoid, and stamp solenoid. The DF CPU also monitors all sensors and provides updated status when prompted at regular intervals by the mainframe, which may then take action based on this information. The DF/mainframe connection is checked automatically immediately after the mainframe is powered on.

Main Frame Interface ADF Control

CPU

Driver

Driver

DF Feed Motor

DF Feed Clutch

DF Pick-upSolenoid

Stamp Solenoid

Registration SensorOriginal Set SensorDF Position SensorFeed Cover Open SensorOriginal Width Sensor 1Original Width Sensor 2Original Length Sensor 1Original Length Sensor 2Original Trailing Edge Sensor

ADF Control Board

B813D906.WMF

FREE RUN

SM 13 B813

Doc

umen

t Fe

eder

D

F200

0 B

813

2.8 FREE RUN You can use DIP switch 100 (on the DF control board) to carry out a one-sided free run.

Mode\Bits Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Normal Off Off Off Off FR with paper On Off Off Off Feed/Transport Motor Test On On Off Off Feed Solenoid Test Off Off On Off Feed Clutch Test On Off On Off Stamp Solenoid Test Off On On Off Special I/F Test Off Off Off On FR without paper On Off Off On Transport Motor Test On On Off On

FR: Free run

Procedure

1. Set bit 1 and/or bit 2 on SW100 (on the DF control board) to ON. 2. Set originals on the original table. 3. The free run starts automatically after about 2 seconds. 4. To stop the run, set SW100 bits 1 and 2 back to OFF. To ensure that the

system correctly resets, turn power off and then back on.

Free Run Process

1. Set originals on the DF table. 2. The first original sheet feeds into the DF. 3. The sensor detects the original. 4. The DF outputs the original to the exit tray. 5. Steps 2 through 4 repeat for each subsequent original sheet. When all

originals have been fed, the DF stops and waits for more.

EXTERIOR COVERS

B813 14 SM

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.1 EXTERIOR COVERS 3.1.1 REAR COVER

1. Lift the DF. 2. Unhook the three latches [A] in the

order marked on the DF body. 3. Close the DF. 4. Open the DF feed cover [B].

5. Rear cover [C] ( x 1) 3.1.2 ORIGINAL TABLE

1. Rear cover ( 3.1.1)

2. Original table [D] ( x 2, x 2) 3.1.3 FRONT COVER

1. Open the DF feed cover [B]. 2. Original table. ( 3.1.2)

3. Front cover [E] ( x 2) 3.1.4 ORIGINAL ENTRANCE

GUIDE

1. Feed unit ( 3.2) 2. Original table ( 3.1.2) 3. Roller cover [F]

4. Original entrance guide [G] ( x 4)

B813R901.WMF

B813R902.WMF

[A]

[F]

[E]

[D]

[C]

[B]

[G]

FEED UNIT

SM 15 B813

Doc

umen

t Fe

eder

D

F200

0 B

813

3.1.5 DF FEED COVER

1. Rear cover ( 3.1.1) 2. Original table ( 3.1.2) 3. Front cover ( 3.1.3) 4. Clip [A]

5. Strap [B] ( x 1)

6. DF feed cover [C] ( x 2)

3.2 FEED UNIT

1. Open the DF feed cover [D] and detach the strap [E] ( x 1).

2. Raise the front guide flap [F] to about a 45-degree angle, and push the feed unit [G] into the spring so that it comes free. NOTE: 1) The feed unit comes off

very easily if you first lift flap [H] to about a 45-degree angle.

2) When reinstalling, be sure that the lever [I] is above the pin [J].

3.3 SEPARATION ROLLER

1. Feed unit ( 3.2) 2. Roller cover [K]

3. Separation roller [L] ( x 1).

B813R903.WMF

B813R904.WMF

B813R905.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[H]

[E] [G][F]

[I]

[J]

[L] [K]

PICK-UP ROLLER

B813 16 SM

3.4 PICK-UP ROLLER

1. Feed unit ( 3.2) 2. Remove 2 clip rings and 1 bushing [A] 3. Pull the shaft [B] part way out at the gear end, so that the pick-up roller [C] can

be taken off.

3.5 FEED BELT

1. Feed unit ( 3.2) 2. Pick-up roller housing [D] 3. Push down on the lower wings [E] of the tensioning piece [F], so that the

tensioning piece comes free of the shaft. 4. Take the tensioning piece out, and then remove the belt [G].

B813R906.WMF

B813R907.WMF

B813R908.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[F]

[G]

[E]

[D]

ORIGINAL SENSORS (WIDTH, LENGTH, TRAILING EDGE)

SM 17 B813

Doc

umen

t Fe

eder

D

F200

0 B

813

3.6 ORIGINAL SENSORS (WIDTH, LENGTH, TRAILING EDGE)

1. Original table ( 3.1.2)

2. Sensor platform [A] ( x 3).

3. Length sensors [B], [C] ( x 1 on each sensor) NOTE: Replace both sensors at the same time, together with the wiring and

connectors.

4. Width sensors [D], [E], and trailing edge sensor [F] ( x 1 on each sensor) NOTE: Replace all three sensors at the same time, together with the wiring

and connectors.

B813R909.WMF

B813R910.WMF

[A]

[D]

[E] [F]

[B]

[C]

ORIGINAL SET SENSOR

B813 18 SM

3.7 ORIGINAL SET SENSOR

1. Original entrance guide ( 3.1.4)

2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)

3. Original set sensor [B] ( x 1)

3.8 TRANSPORT MOTOR

1. Rear cover ( 3.1.1) 2. Open the wire clamp [C] at the top of the motor bracket [D].

3. Motor bracket [D] ( x 2 , 1 spring) NOTE: Unhook the spring at the board side.

4. Transport motor [E] ( x 2, x 1)

B813R911.WMF

B813R912.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[E]

[D]

FEED COVER OPEN SENSOR/ FEED CLUTCH/ROM/DF DRIVE BOARD

SM 19 B813

Doc

umen

t Fe

eder

D

F200

0 B

813

3.9 FEED COVER OPEN SENSOR/ FEED CLUTCH/ROM/DF DRIVE BOARD

Exterior


Feed Cover Open Sensor

2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)

3. Feed cover open sensor [B] ( x 1)

Feed Clutch

2. Feed unit ( 3.2)

3. Feed clutch [C] ( x 1, 1 bushing, x 1). NOTE: Pull the shaft inward until the clutch can be removed.

ROM

2. Replace the ROM [D] on the DF drive board.

DF Drive Board

2. DF drive board [E] ( x 3, all connectors)

B813R913.WMF

[E]

[D] [B]

[C][A]

REGISTRATION SENSOR

B813 20 SM

3.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR

1. DF feed cover ( 3.1.5) 2. Original entrance guide ( 3.1.4)

3. Outer turn guide [A] ( x 2)

4. Pop out the inner turn guide [B], and remove the registration sensor [C] ( x 1)

3.11 PICK-UP SOLENOID


2. Pick-up solenoid [D] ( x 2, x 1)

B813R914.WMF

B813R915.WMF

[C]

[B]

[A]

[D]

STAMP SOLENOID

SM 21 B813

Doc

umen

t Fe

eder

D

F200

0 B

813

3.12 STAMP SOLENOID

1. Rear cover ( 3.1.1) 2. Disconnect the stamp solenoid connector.

NOTE: Pull out the small connector piece from the large connector. (The large connector itself cannot fit through the hole in the frame.)

3. Lift the ADF upright and pull open the exit guide [A]. Release the front and rear hooks [B] and open the cover [C].

4. Remove the stamp solenoid [D] ( x 1), and pull it out together with the wire.

[C]

[D]

[A]

[B]B813R916.WMF

B814 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER

DF2010

SM i B814

AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER DF2010 B814

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION............................................ 1 1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................................1 1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.........................................................2 1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................................3

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS .......................................... 4 2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION.......................................................................4 2.2 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION .......................................................................6 2.3 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT .............................................................7

2.3.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS................................................................7 2.3.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS ..............................................................8 2.3.3 ORIGINAL TRAILING EDGE SENSOR................................................9

2.4 STAMP ........................................................................................................10 2.5 TIMING CHARTS ........................................................................................11

2.5.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE (A3).............................................11 2.5.2 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE (A3, STAMP MODE)...................12 2.5.3 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE...................................................13 2.5.4 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE (STAMP MODE) .......................14

2.6 JAM DETECTION........................................................................................15 2.7 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT..............................................................16 2.8 FREE RUN ..................................................................................................17

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......................................... 18 3.1 DF EXIT TABLE AND COVER ....................................................................18 3.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT................................................................................19 3.3 LEFT COVER ..............................................................................................20 3.4 PICK-UP ROLLER.......................................................................................21 3.5 FEED BELT .................................................................................................22 3.6 SEPARATION ROLLER ..............................................................................23 3.7 ORIGINAL SET/ORIGINAL REVERSE SENSORS.....................................24 3.8 ORIGINAL L/W SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE SENSOR............................25 3.9 FEED CLUTCH, PICK-UP SOL, TRANSPORT MOTOR, FEED MOTOR...26 3.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR....................................................................27 3.11 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR ...........................28


SM 1 B814

AR

DF

DF2

010

B81

4

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION 1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1. Separation Roller 2. Paper Feed Belt 3. Pick-up Roller 4. Original Set Sensor 5. Original Trailing Edge Sensor 6. Original Width Sensor Board 7. Original Length Sensor 1 8. Original Length Sensor 2 9. Original Table 10. Reverse Table

11. Reverse Roller 12. Junction Gate 13. Exit Roller 14. Original Exit Sensor 15. Stamp 16. 2nd Transport Roller 17. Original Exposure Guide 18. Registration Sensor 19. 1st Transport Roller

B814I901.WMF

1

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1617

19

18

2

15 14 13 12 11 10


B814 2 SM


1. DF Feed Clutch 2. Feed Cover Sensor 3. Original Width Sensor Board 4. Original Length Sensor 1 5. DF Pick-up Solenoid 6. Original Length Sensor 2 7. Junction Gate Solenoid 8. DF Drive PCB 9. DF Position Sensor

10. DF Feed Motor 11. DF Transport Motor 12. Original Exit Sensor 13. Stamp Solenoid 14. Original Trailing Edge Sensor 15. Original Set Sensor 16. Original Reverse Sensor 17. Registration Sensor

B814I902.WMF

21

16

15

17

14

13

12

11

10

9

87

6 5

43

DRIVE LAYOUT

SM 3 B814

AR

DF

DF2

010

B81

4

1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Separation Roller 2. Original Feed Belt 3. Pick-up Roller 4. DF Feed Clutch 5. DF Transport Motor

6. DF Feed Motor 7. Reverse Table Roller 8. 2nd Transport Roller 9. Exit Roller 10. 1st Transport Roller

B814I903.WMF

4

10

1

2

3

6

5

9 8

7


B814 4 SM

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

The original size detection mechanism consists of the original width sensor board [A] and two original length sensors-1 [B] and -2 [C]. Based on the combined output of the length sensors and the width sensor board, the machine can detect the size of the original. This integrated detection mechanism is detailed in the table on the next page. Note that the width sensor’s terminal plate is attached to the original guide, so the widths of the originals must all be the same.

B814D901.WMF

[A] [B]

[C]


SM 5 B814

AR

DF

DF2

010

B81

4

NA EU OriginalLength 1

OriginalLength 2 P1 P2 P3 P4

1 A3 (297 x 420) ON ON - - - ON 2 B4 (257 x 364) ON ON - - ON - 3 A4 SEF (210 x 297) ON - - ON - - 4 A4 LEF (297 x 210) - - - - - ON 5 B5 SEF (182 x 257) ON - ON - - - 6 B5 LEF (257 x 182) - - - - ON - 7 A5 SEF (148 x 210) - - ON - - - 8 A5 LEF (210 x 148) - - - ON - - 9 11" x 17" 1 ON ON - - - ON 10 11" x 15" 1 ON ON - - - ON 11 10" x 14" ON ON - - ON - 12 81/2" x 14" 2 ON ON - ON - - 13 81/2" x 13" 4 ON ON - ON - - 14 8" x 13" 2 4 ON ON - ON - - 15 81/2" x 11" SEF 3 ON - - ON - - 16 11" x 81/2" LEF - - - - - ON 17 8" x 10" SEF 3 ON - - ON - - 18 51/2" x 81/2" SEF - - ON - - - 19 81/2" x 51/2" LEF - - - ON - -

NA: America (North, Middle, South) EU: Europe, Asia, China, Taiwan : No : Yes ON: Paper present

1, 1: In NA, original size 11" x 15" is detected as 11" x 17" 2, 2: In NA, original size 8" x 13" is detected as 81/2" x 14" 3, 3: In NA, original size 8" x 10" is detected as 81/2" x 11" 4, 4: In EU, original size 8" x 13" is detected as 81/2" x 13"

B5SEF/A5SEF

A4SEF/A5LEF B4/B5LEF A3/A4LEF

P4P3P2P1

Original Width 2

Original SideGuide Position

Original Width Sensor Board

Original Width 1

B814D902.WMF

PICK-UP AND SEPARATION

B814 6 SM

2.2 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION

The original is set with the image facing up. The original pushes actuator [A] and the original set sensor [E] is activated. After pressing the start button, the pick-up solenoid [D] is activated and the lift plate [C] lifts the original up until it comes in contact with the pick-up roller [B]. The pick-up roller then feeds the top sheet of paper. After being fed from the pick-up roller, the topmost sheet is separated from the stack by the separation roller and sent to the first transport roller. The mechanism is an FRR system, consisting of the original feed belt [F] and separation roller [G].

B814D903.WMF

B814D904.WMF

[B]

[F]

[G]

[A] [B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT

SM 7 B814

AR

DF

DF2

010

B81

4

2.3 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT 2.3.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS

The DF feed motor feeds the separated original to the first transport roller [A] at maximum speed. When the registration sensor [B] detects the leading edge, the motor stops for a short while. Then the feed and transport motors turn on again, and feed the original through the scanning area at a lower speed (the scanning area contains the original exposure guide [D] and DF exposure glass [C]). After scanning, the original is fed out by the second transport roller [E] and exit roller [F].

B814D905.WMF

[A]

[C] [D]

[F]

[E]

[B]


B814 8 SM

2.3.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS

When the registration sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the original, the DF feed motor (which drives the feed roller) and transport motor (which drives the transport roller) both switch off. After a brief interval, the transport motor alone reactivates to drive the first transport roller [A] and second transport roller [G] and the exit roller [F]. The front side of the original is then scanned. When the original exit sensor [C] detects the leading edge of the original, the junction gate solenoid is activated and the junction gate [D] opens. The original is then transported towards the reverse table [H]. Soon after the trailing edge of the original passes the exit sensor [C], the junction gate solenoid switches off and the junction gate [D] is closed. When the original has been fed onto the reverse table, the DF feed motor switches on in reverse. The original is then fed by the reverse roller [E] and then by the exit roller [F] and first transport roller [A] to the scanning area (where the reverse side will be scanned).

B814D906.WMF

B814D907.WMF

[A]

[C]

[F]

[B]

[E]

[D]

[H]

[G]

[A] [E]

[D]

[F]


SM 9 B814

AR

DF

DF2

010

B81

4

The original is then sent to the reverse table [H] a second time to be turned over. This is done so that the duplex copies will be properly stacked front side down in the exit tray [J] in the correct order. 2.3.3 ORIGINAL TRAILING EDGE SENSOR

During one-to-one copying, copy paper is fed to the registration roller in advance (while the original is still being scanned), to increase the copy speed. The trailing edge sensor monitors the stack of originals in the feeder, and detects when the trailing edge of the last page has been fed in. The main CPU then stops the copier from feeding an unwanted extra sheet of copy paper.

B814D908.WMF

B814D909.WMF

[H]

[I]

[J]

STAMP

B814 10 SM

2.4 STAMP

This function is only for fax mode. There is a stamp [A] between the 2nd transport roller [B] and the exit roller [C], and its solenoid is controlled by the copier directly. When the original reaches the stamp position, the DF feed motor stops. At 300 milliseconds after stopping the DF feed motor, the stamp solenoid turns on if the page was sent successfully (immediate transmission) or stored successfully (memory transmission). After stamping, the DF feed motor starts again to feed out the document, and its speed is about 1.3 times the normal speed. The stamping position on the original can be changed by adjusting SP6-010.

B814D910.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

TIMING CHARTS

SM 11 B814

AR

DF

DF2

010

B81

4

2.5 TIMING CHARTS 2.5.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE (A3)

26.2

mm

(32.

2-5-

1mm

)

50m

s

5mm

JAM

#1A

200m

s

327.

6mm

JAM

#6

327.

6mm

JAM

#2, 3

, 5

420m

m

JAM

#4

50m

s5m

m

327.

6mm

50m

s5m

m

168.

1mm

50m

s

Feed

Mot

orTr

ansp

ort M

otor

CW

TXD

RX

D

MAX

RE

AD

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF

EN

AB

LED

ISA

BLE

DF

Feed

Clu

tch

DF

Pic

k-up

Sole

noid

Orig

inal

Set

Sens

or

Orig

inal

Exi

tSe

nsor

Reg

istra

tion

Sens

or

FGA

TE

B814D911.WMF

TIMING CHARTS

B814 12 SM

2.5.2 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE (A3, STAMP MODE)

Feed

Mot

orTr

ansp

ort M

otor

CW

TXD

RX

D

MA

XR

EA

DO

FF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF

EN

AB

LED

ISA

BLE

DF

Feed

Clu

tch

DF

Pic

k-up

Sol

enoi

d

Orig

inal

Set

Sen

sor

Orig

inal

Exi

tS

enso

r

Reg

istra

tion

Sen

sor

200m

sJA

M#1

A

50m

s50

ms

50m

s

JAM

#8

200m

s

50m

s

JAM

#8

168.

4mm

50m

s

31.2

mm

JAM

#2, 3

, 5

JAM

#474

.5m

m

JAM

#6

420m

m

200m

s20

0ms

74.5

mm

31.2

mm

FGA

TE

ON

OFF

Sta

mp

B814D912.WMF

TIMING CHARTS

SM 13 B814

AR

DF

DF2

010

B81

4

2.5.3 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE

Tran

spor

t Mot

or

CW

TXD

RX

D

MA

XR

EA

DO

FF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF

EN

AB

LED

ISA

BLE

DF

Feed

Clu

tch

DF

Pic

k-up

Sol

enoi

d

Orig

inal

Set

Sen

sor

Orig

inal

Rev

erse

Sen

sor

Reg

istra

tion

Sen

sor

FGA

TE

Feed

Mot

or

MA

XC

CW

CW

MA

XR

EA

DO

FF ON

OFF

Orig

inal

Exi

tS

enso

r

ON

OFFON

OFF

Junc

tion

Gat

eS

olen

oid

200m

sJA

M#1

A

50m

s

5mm

200m

sJA

M#7

50m

s32

.8m

m5m

m

50m

s20

0ms

5mm

50m

s

50m

s

JAM

#7

200m

s

JAM

#7

50m

s32

.8m

m5m

m

50m

s

200m

s

168.

1mm

50m

s

50m

s

JAM

#7

50.7

mm

JAM

#6

36.2

mm

(32.

5-5-

1mm

)

JAM

#2, 3

, 5

50.7

mm

JAM

#1B

JAM

#2, 3

, 526

.2m

mJAM

#650

.7m

m

JAM

#1B

JAM

#2, 3

, 526

.2m

m

JAM

#6

JAM

#2, 5

60m

mJA

M#2

, 3, 5

26.2

mm

JAM

#1B

JAM

#650

.7m

mJA

M#6

JAM

#6

JAM

#1B JA

M#2

, 5

B814D913.WMF

TIMING CHARTS

B814 14 SM

2.5.4 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE (STAMP MODE)

Tran

spor

t Mot

or

CW

TXD

RX

D

MA

XR

EA

DO

FF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF

EN

AB

LED

ISA

BLE

DF

Feed

Clu

tch

DF

Pic

k-up

Sol

enoi

d

Orig

inal

Set

Sen

sor

Orig

inal

Rev

erse

Sen

sor

Reg

istra

tion

Sen

sor

FGA

TE

ON

OFF

Sta

mp

200m

s

JAM

#1A

50m

s

JAM

#8

50m

s20

0ms

32.8

mm

JAM

#7

50m

s50

ms

JAM

#8

50m

s20

0ms

JAM

#7

50m

s50

ms

31.2

mm

JAM

#2, 3

, 5

50.7

mm

74.5

mm

200m

s

JAM

#1B

JAM

#2, 3

, 5

31.2

mm

200m

s

74.5

mm

JAM

#1B JA

M#2

, 560m

m

50.7

mm

JAM

#6

Feed

Mot

or

MA

XC

CW

CW

MA

XR

EA

DO

FF ON

OFF

Orig

inal

Exi

tS

enso

r

ON

OFFON

OFF

Junc

tion

Gat

eS

olen

oid

B814D914.WMF

JAM DETECTION

SM 15 B814

AR

DF

DF2

010

B81

4

2.6 JAM DETECTION JAM 1A: If the registration sensor does not turn on within X1 ms after original

feed starts. X1 = 1,000 ms

JAM 1B: If the registration sensor does not turn on within 953 ms after the leading edge of the original reaches the original reverse sensor (duplex mode only)

JAM 2: If the registration sensor does not turn off within X2 ms after receiving the feeding signal from the Mainframe and after turning on. X2 = (Original length/line speed) +2,000 ms

JAM 3: If there is no original at the registration sensor when scanning is started, even though the sensor had already turned on. The operator may then remove the original from the ADF.

JAM 4: The current original is stopped after the registration sensor detects its leading edge, but the previous original is still at the scanning position.

JAM 5: If the original exit sensor does not turn on within X3 ms after receiving relaying signal from the Mainframe and after the registration sensor turns on. X3 = 140 mm/line speed

JAM 6: If the original exit sensor does not turn off within X4 ms after the original exit sensor turns on. X4 = (Original length/line speed) +1,030 ms

JAM 7: If the original reverse sensor does not turn on within 2,329 ms after the reversing process begins (Duplex mode only).

JAM 8: If the original stopped at the stamp position is removed. JAM 9: If the cover is opened or the ADF is lifted up while the ADF is in

operation. JAM 10: If the DF gate signal (indicating that the original is now in the correct

position for scanning) is not asserted when the original trailing edge passes the DF exposure glass. JAM 10 occurs when the original is pulled out while it is being scanned.

OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

B814 16 SM

2.7 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT The DF CPU controls the transport motor, DF feed motor, DF feed clutch, junction gate solenoid, stamp solenoid, and pick-up solenoid. The DF CPU also monitors all DF sensors and provides updated status information when prompted at regular intervals by the mainframe, which may then take action based on this information. The DF–mainframe connection is checked automatically just after power is supplied to the mainframe.

Main Frame Interface ADF Control

CPU

Driver

Driver

DF Feed Motor

DF TransportMotor

DF Feed Clutch

Junction GateSolenoid

DF Pick-upSolenoid

Stamp Solenoid

Registration SensorOriginal Set SensorDF Position SensorFeed Cover Open SensorOriginal Width Sensor BoardOriginal Length Sensor 1Original Length Sensor 2Original Trailing Edge SensorOriginal Exit SensorOriginal Reverse Sensor

ADF Control Board

B814D915.WMF

FREE RUN

SM 17 B814

AR

DF

DF2

010

B81

4

2.8 FREE RUN Two types of free runs can be performed by using Dip Switch DPS 100 on the DF control board. The switch settings are as follows: DPS 100

Mode\Bits Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Normal Off Off Off Off One-sided FR with paper On Off Off Off Two-sided FR with paper Off On Off Off Feed/Transport Motor Test On On Off Off Feed Solenoid Test Off Off On Off Feed Clutch Test On Off On Off Stamp Solenoid Test Off On On Off Inverter Solenoid Test On On On Off Special I/F Test Off Off Off On One-sided FR without paper On Off Off On Two-sided FR without paper Off On Off On Transport Motor Test On On Off On Feed Motor Test Off Off On On

Procedure

1. Turn on SW 1 or 2 (DPS 100 on DF control board). 2. Set the original on the original table. 3. After 2 seconds, the free run will automatically start. 4. To stop the free run, turn all DIP switches OFF, then turn the main power off

and on.

One-sided Free Run Process

1. The originals are set on the original table. 2. The first page of the original is fed into the DF. 3. The sensors detect the original. 4. The original is output to the exit tray. 5. Steps 2-4 above are repeated for any additional originals set on the original

table. If there are no additional originals, the DF will stop and wait.

Two-sided Free Run Process

The process is the same, except that the original reverse cycle is added.

DF EXIT TABLE AND COVER

B814 18 SM

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.1 DF EXIT TABLE AND COVER

1. Open the left cover.

2. [A] Front cover ( x 2)

3. [B] Rear cover ( x 2). Take care not to break the 3 hooks. 4. [C] Open the reverse table

5. [D] Original exit table ( x 3)

B814R901.WMF

[C]

[A]

[D]

[B]

ORIGINAL FEED UNIT

SM 19 B814

AR

DF

DF2

010

B81

4

3.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT

1. Open the left cover. 2. [A] Original feed unit

B814R902.WMF

[A]

LEFT COVER

B814 20 SM

3.3 LEFT COVER

1. Front and rear covers ( 3.1)

2. [A] Left cover ( x 2)

3. [B] Lower left stay unit ( x 2)

B814R903.WMF

[A]

[B]

PICK-UP ROLLER

SM 21 B814

AR

DF

DF2

010

B81

4

3.4 PICK-UP ROLLER

1. Original feed unit ( 3.2) 2. [A] Pick-up roller (1 snap ring)

B814R904.WMF

[A]

FEED BELT

B814 22 SM

3.5 FEED BELT

1. Original feed unit ( 3.2) 2. [A] Paper feed guide 3. [B] Belt holders 4. [C] Feed belt

B814R905.WMF

B814R906.WMF

[A]

[C]

[B]

SEPARATION ROLLER

SM 23 B814

AR

DF

DF2

010

B81

4

3.6 SEPARATION ROLLER

1. Lift the original feed guide [A]. 2. [B] Separation roller cover 3. [C] Separation roller

B814R907.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

ORIGINAL SET/ORIGINAL REVERSE SENSORS

B814 24 SM

3.7 ORIGINAL SET/ORIGINAL REVERSE SENSORS

1. Open the left cover. 2. While pushing the left and right pawls [A], open the original feed guide plate [B].

3. [C] Original set sensor ( x 1)

4. [D] Original reverse sensor ( x 1)

B814R908.WMF

[B]

[D]

[A]

[C]

ORIGINAL L/W SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE SENSOR

SM 25 B814

AR

DF

DF2

010

B81

4

3.8 ORIGINAL L/W SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE SENSOR

1. Open the original table.

2. [A] Upper part of the table ( x 3)

3. [B] Width sensor board ( x 1)

4. [C] Length sensor-1 ( x 1)

5. [D] Length sensor-2 ( x 1)

6. [E] Trailing edge sensor ( x 1)

To ensure proper detection of paper size, after wiping off the sensor board and terminal plate with a dry cloth (or cloth with alcohol), apply silicone grease (KS-660) to the terminal plate [G].

B814R909.WMF

B814R910.WMF

B814R912.WMF

[G]

[A]

[B][C]

[D][E]

FEED CLUTCH, PICK-UP SOL, TRANSPORT MOTOR, FEED MOTOR

B814 26 SM

3.9 FEED CLUTCH, PICK-UP SOL, TRANSPORT MOTOR, FEED MOTOR

Exterior

1. Rear cover ( 3.1)

DF Feed Clutch

1. [A] DF feed clutch [A] ( x 1, x 1)

Pick-up Solenoid

1. [B] Pick-up solenoid ( x 3, 1 snap ring, x 1)

Transport Motor

1. [C] Bracket ( x 2)

2. [E] Transport motor ( x 2, x 1)

DF Feed Motor

1. [C] Bracket ( x 2)

2. [D] DF feed motor ( x 2, x 1)

B814R913.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

REGISTRATION SENSOR

SM 27 B814

AR

DF

DF2

010

B81

4

3.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR

1. Front and rear covers ( 3.1) 2. Left cover and lower left stay unit ( 3.3) 3. [A] Transport guide plate

4. [B] Registration sensor ( x 1)

B814R914.WMF

[A]

[B]

STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR

B814 28 SM

3.11 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR

1. Front cover, Rear cover, Original exit table ( 3.1) 2. Open the exit guide plate [A]. Next, detach the unit by inserting a screwdriver or

other tool into one of the small openings [B] on either side of the guide plate holder and pushing firmly.

3. [C] Stamp solenoid ( x 1, x 1)

4. [D] Original exit sensor ( x 1)

B814R915.WMF

B814R916.WMF

[A] [B]

[C]

[D]

B384

PAPER TRAY UNIT PS450

SM i B384

PAPER TRAY UNIT PS450 B384 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION..............................................1 1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ......................................................1 1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................................2 1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...........................................................................................3

2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................4 2.1 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM .......................................4 2.2 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM ..........................................................................5 2.3 PAPER END DETECTION ...........................................................................7 2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION .....................................................................8

PAPER SIZE DETECTION......................................................................9 2.5 SIDE AND END FENCES .......................................................................... 10

Side Fences........................................................................................... 10 End Fence ............................................................................................. 10

3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ...........................................11 3.1 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT............................................................... 11 3.2 TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT ...................................................... 12 3.3 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT................................................................ 12 3.4 RELAY CLUTCH REPLACEMENT ............................................................ 13 3.5 UPPER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT .................................... 14 3.6 LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT ................................... 15 3.7 LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT.................................................................. 16 3.8 PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT................................................... 17 3.9 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR REPLACEMENT ............................... 17 3.10 PAPER SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT ................................................. 18

Pape

r Tra

y U

nit P

S450

B

384


SM 1 B384


1. Upper Paper Feed Roller 2. Lower Paper Feed Roller 3. Upper Tray 4. Lower Tray

5. Upper Bottom Plate 6. Lower Bottom Plate 7. Optional Tray Heater

B384V101.WMF

1 5

4

2

67

3


B384 2 SM


1. Tray Main Board 2. Upper Lift Sensor 3. Upper Lift Motor 4. Upper Paper Height 2 Sensor 5. Upper Paper Height 1 Sensor 6. Upper Paper Feed Clutch 7. Relay Clutch 8. Tray Cover Switch 9. Lower Paper Feed Clutch 10. Lower Paper Height 2 Sensor

11. Lower Paper Height 1 Sensor 12. Vertical Transport Sensor 13. Upper Paper End Sensor 14. Lower Paper End Sensor 15. Lower Paper Size Switch 16. Upper Paper Size Switch 17. Optional Tray Heater 18. Lower Lift Motor 19. Lower Lift Sensor 20. Tray Motor

B384V102.WMF

7

1

8

9

6

5

4

23

14 1312

11 10

15

16

18

19

17

20

Pape

r Tra

y U

nit P

S450

B

384

DRIVE LAYOUT

SM 3 B384

1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Tray Motor 2. Drive Belt 3. Upper Paper Feed Clutch 4. Relay Clutch

5. Lower Paper Feed Clutch 6. Relay Roller 7. Lower Paper Feed Roller 8. Upper Paper Feed Roller

B384V103.WMF

4

5

3

6

7

8

2

1

PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM

B384 4 SM

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM

Each paper tray holds 500 sheets. The paper feed roller [A] drives the top sheet of paper from the paper tray to the copier/printer. The friction pad [B] allows only one sheet to feed at a time. The friction pad applies pressure to the feed roller with a spring [C].

B384D104.WMF

[A] [B]

[C]

Pape

r Tra

y U

nit P

S450

B

384

PAPER LIFT MECHANISM

SM 5 B384

2.2 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM

The paper size switch detects when the tray is pushed in. When the paper tray is pushed into the machine, the pin [A] for the lift motor pressure shaft engages the lift motor coupling [B] and the pin [C] for the bottom plate lift shaft in the tray engages the bottom plate pressure lever coupling [D]. The pin [E] on the rear of the tray pushes the lock lever so that the lift motor can lift the bottom plate pressure lever. The lift motor turns on, and turns clockwise as viewed on the lower diagram. The main pressure spring [K] pulls the bottom plate pressure lever, and this lifts the tray bottom plate. When the top of the stack touches the feed roller, the motor cannot pull up the plate any more, so it pulls the actuator [G] into the lift sensor [F]. The pressure of the feed roller on the paper is now too high, so the lift motor reverses to reduce this pressure. It reverses for 300 ms or 600 ms, depending on the paper size. For smaller paper, it reverses the larger amount (600 ms) to reduce the pressure more.

B384D106.WMF

B384D107.WMF

[A]

[D]

[B]

[C]

[H]

[E]

[C]

[D][E]

[J] [I]

[B][A]

[K] [F]

[G]


B384 6 SM

For A4-SEF paper or wider, a projection [H] on the side fence engages the secondary pressure spring [J] through a lever [I]. Then, the secondary pressure spring [J] applies paper feed pressure in addition to the main pressure spring [K], to ensure that extra pressure is applied to wider paper. When the paper tray is pulled out, the pins [A, C] disengage from the couplings [B, D], and the bottom plate drops. To make it easier to push the tray in, the lift motor rotates backwards 1.7 seconds to return the bottom plate pressure lever coupling [D] to the original position. The lift motor on timing can be adjusted with SP mode, to change the pressure from the main pressure spring.

• SP1-908-1 (1st tray), 1-908-2 (2nd tray) • Default: 0 • Increase the pressure: +1, +2 • Decrease the pressure: –1, –2

If the pressure is too strong, the sheet of paper may not be fed smoothly, and if it is too weak, more than one sheet of paper may be fed at a time. The pressure depends on the paper size.

Pape

r Tra

y U

nit P

S450

B

384

PAPER END DETECTION

SM 7 B384

2.3 PAPER END DETECTION

If there is some paper in the paper tray, the paper stack raises the paper end feeler [A] and the paper end sensor [B] is deactivated. When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout [C] in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated. When the paper tray is drawn out with no paper in the tray, the shape of the paper end feeler causes it to lift up.

B384D105.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION

B384 8 SM

2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION

The amount of paper in the tray is detected by the combination of on/off signals from two paper height sensors [A] and [B]. When the amount of paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever [C] moves the actuator up. The following combination of sensor signals is sent to the copier/printer.

Amount of Paper Paper Height Sensor 1 Paper Height Sensor 2 Near End OFF ON

30% ON ON 70% ON OFF 100% OFF OFF

When the tray contains paper of a small width, the paper feed pressure may become too low when the thickness of the remaining stack of paper has decreased. The lift motor rotates forward 300 ms after the sensor detects a certain amount of paper remaining in the tray to increase paper feed pressure, simulating the pressure generated by a full tray.

B384D107.WMF

[C]

[C]

[B][A]

Pape

r Tra

y U

nit P

S450

B

384

PAPER SIZE DETECTION

SM 9 B384


There are four paper size microswitches [A] on the front right plate of the paper tray unit. The switches are actuated by a paper size actuator [B] behind the paper size indicator plate, which is on the front right of the tray. Each paper size has its own actuator, with a unique combination of notches. To determine which size has been installed, the CPU reads which microswitches the actuator has switched off. The CPU disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected. If the paper size actuator is broken, or if there is no tray installed, the Add Paper indicator will light. When the paper size actuator is at the “*” mark, the paper tray can be set up to accommodate one of a wider range of paper sizes by using user tools. If the paper size for this position is changed without changing the user tool setting, a paper jam will result.

B384D108.WMF

[A]

[B] SW Size 1 2 3 4

A3, F (81/2" x 13") A4 short-edge A4 long-edge A5 long-edge 11" x 17"

B4, 81/2" x 14" B5 long-edge, 81/2" x 11"

B5 short-edge, 11" x 81/2"

* (Asterisk)

: ON (Pushed) : OFF (Not pushed)

SIDE AND END FENCES

B384 10 SM

2.5 SIDE AND END FENCES

Side Fences If the tray is full of paper and it is pushed in strongly, the fences may deform or bend. This may cause the paper to skew or the side-to-side registration to be incorrect. To correct this, each side fence has a stopper [A] attached to it. Each side fence can be secured with a screw [B], for customers who do not want to change the paper size.

End Fence As the amount of paper in the tray decreases, the bottom plate [C] lifts up gradually. The end fence [D] is connected to the bottom plate. When the tray bottom plate rises, the end fence moves forward and pushes the back of the paper stack to keep it squared up.

B384D110.WMF

B384D109.WMF

[D]

[C]

[A]

[B]

Pape

r Tra

y U

nit P

S450

B

384

FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT

SM 11 B384

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.1 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1. [A] Paper tray 2. Move the release lever [B] to the front. 3. Pull the feed roller [C] to the operation side and remove it.

B384R723.WMF

[C]

[B]

[A]

TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT

B384 12 SM

3.2 TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT 1. [A] Rear cover ( x 5)

2. [B] Tray main board ( x 4, x 8)

3.3 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT 1. Rear cover ( x 5) 2. Disconnect 8 connectors from the tray main board [B].

3. Tray main board with the bracket ( x 2)

4. [C] Tray motor ( x 6, x 1)

B384R101.WMF

B384R103.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

Pape

r Tra

y U

nit P

S450

B

384

RELAY CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

SM 13 B384

3.4 RELAY CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

1. [A] Rear cover ( x 5)

2. [B] Right cover ( x 2)

3. [C] Stopper bracket ( x 1) 4. [D] Bushing

5. [E] Relay clutch ( x 1)

B384R102.WMF

B384R101.WMF

[A]

[E]

[C]

[B]

[D]

UPPER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

B384 14 SM

3.5 UPPER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT


2. [B] Bracket ( x 2)

3. [C] Stopper bracket ( x 2) 4. [D] Bushing

5. [E] Upper paper feed clutch ( x 1)

B384R101.WMF

B384R102.WMF

[A]

[E]

[C]

[D]

[B]

Pape

r Tra

y U

nit P

S450

B

384

LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

SM 15 B384

3.6 LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

1. [A] Rear cover ( x 5) 2. [B] Snap ring 3. [C] Lower paper feed clutch

B384R102.WMF

B384R101.WMF

[B][C]

[A]

LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT

B384 16 SM

3.7 LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT

1. Pull out the paper tray.

2. [A] Rear cover ( x 5) 3. [B] 2P connector 4. [C] Spring

5. [D] Lift motor unit ( x 3)

6. [E] Lift motor ( x 3)

B384R101.WMF

B384R104.WMF

[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

[E]

Pape

r Tra

y U

nit P

S450

B

384

PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT

SM 17 B384

3.8 PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT

1. Paper tray

2. [A] Paper end sensor bracket ( x 1, x 1) 3. [B] Paper end sensor

NOTE: After replacing the sensor, pull the sensor cable towards the right side of the frame [C] so that it does not touch the paper in the tray.

3.9 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR REPLACEMENT

1. Open the right door [A].

2. [B] Right guide plate ( x 2)

3. [C] Vertical transport sensor bracket ( x 1, x 1) 4. [D] Vertical transport sensor

B384R106.WMF

B384R105.WMF

[C]

[C]

[A]

[B]

[B]

[A]

[D]

PAPER SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT

B384 18 SM

3.10 PAPER SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT

1. Upper and lower paper trays

2. [A] Inner cover ( x 2)

3. [B] Paper size switch ( x 1)

B384R108.WMF

[B]

[A]

B385

PAPER TRAY UNIT PS460

SM i B385

PAPER TRAY UNIT PS460 B385 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION..............................................1 1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ......................................................1 1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................................2 1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...........................................................................................3

2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................4 2.1 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ..............................................................4 2.2 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM ..........................................................................5 2.3 PAPER END DETECTION ...........................................................................7 2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION .....................................................................8 2.5 PAPER SIZE DETECTION...........................................................................9 2.6 SIDE AND END FENCES .......................................................................... 10

Side Fences........................................................................................... 10 End Fence ............................................................................................. 10

3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ...........................................11 3.1 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT............................................................... 11 3.2 TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT ...................................................... 12 3.3 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT................................................................ 13 3.4 LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT.................................................................. 14 3.5 PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT................................................... 15 3.6 PAPER SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT ................................................... 15

Pape

r Tra

y U

nit P

S460

B

385


SM 1 B385


1. Paper Feed Roller 2. Tray

3. Bottom Plate 4. Optional Tray Heater

B385V101.WMF

13

2

4


B385 2 SM


1. Tray Main Board 2. Lift Sensor 3. Lift Motor 4. Paper Height 2 Sensor 5. Paper Height 1 Sensor

6. Paper Feed Motor 7. Tray Cover Switch 8. Paper End Sensor 9. Paper Size Switch 10. Optional Tray Heater

B385V102.WMF

7

1

6

5

4

23

10

98

Pape

r Tra

y U

nit P

S460

B

385

DRIVE LAYOUT

SM 3 B385

1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Paper Feed Motor 2. Paper Feed Roller

B385V103.WMF

1

2

PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION

B385 4 SM

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION

The paper tray holds 500 sheets. The paper feed roller [A] drives the top sheet of paper from the paper tray to the copier/printer. The friction pad [B] allows only one sheet to feed at a time. The friction pad applies pressure to the feed roller with a spring [C].

B385D103.WMF

[A] [B]

[C]

Pape

r Tra

y U

nit P

S460

B

385


SM 5 B385

2.2 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM

The paper size switch detects when the tray is pushed in. When the paper tray is pushed into the machine, the pin [A] for the lift motor pressure shaft engages the lift motor coupling [B] and the pin [C] for the bottom plate lift shaft in the tray engages the bottom plate pressure lever coupling [D]. The pin [E] on the rear of the tray pushes the lock lever so that the lift motor can lift the bottom plate pressure lever. The lift motor turns on, and turns clockwise as viewed on the lower diagram. The main pressure spring [K] pulls the bottom plate pressure lever, and this lifts the tray bottom plate. When the top of the stack touches the feed roller, the motor cannot pull up the plate any more, so it pulls the actuator [G] into the lift sensor [F]. The pressure of the feed roller on the paper is now too high, so the lift motor reverses to reduce this pressure. It reverses for 300 ms or 600 ms, depending on the paper size. For smaller paper, it reverses the larger amount (600 ms) to reduce the pressure more.

B385D106.WMF

B385D107.WMF

[A]

[D]

[B]

[C]

[H]

[E]

[C]

[D][E]

[J] [I]

[B][A]

[K] [F]

[G]


B385 6 SM

For A4-SEF paper or wider, a projection [H] on the side fence engages the secondary pressure spring [J] through a lever [I]. Then, the secondary pressure spring [J] applies paper feed pressure in addition to the main pressure spring [K], to ensure that extra pressure is applied to wider paper. When the paper tray is pulled out, the pins [A, C] disengage from the couplings [B, D], and the bottom plate drops. To make it easier to push the tray in, the lift motor rotates backwards 1.7 seconds to return the bottom plate pressure lever coupling [D] to the original position. The lift motor on timing can be adjusted with an SP mode, to change the pressure from the main pressure spring.

• SP1-908-1 • Default: 0 • Increase the pressure: +1, +2 • Decrease the pressure: –1, –2

If the pressure is too strong, the sheet of paper may not be fed smoothly, and if it is too weak, more than one sheet of paper may be fed at a time. The pressure depends on the paper size.

Pape

r Tra

y U

nit P

S460

B

385

PAPER END DETECTION

SM 7 B385

2.3 PAPER END DETECTION

If there is some paper in the paper tray, the paper stack raises the paper end feeler [A] and the paper end sensor [B] is deactivated. When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout [C] in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated. When the paper tray is drawn out with no paper in the tray, the shape of the paper end feeler causes it to lift up.

B385D105.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION

B385 8 SM

2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION

The amount of paper in the tray is detected by the combination of on/off signals from two paper height sensors [A] and [B]. When the amount of paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever [C] moves the actuator up. The following combination of sensor signals is sent to the copier/printer.

Amount of Paper Paper Height Sensor 1 Paper Height Sensor 2 Near End OFF ON

30% ON ON 70% ON OFF 100% OFF OFF

When the tray contains paper of a small width, the paper feed pressure may become too low when the thickness of the stack of remaining paper has decreased. The lift motor rotates forward 300 ms after the sensor detects a certain amount of paper remaining in the tray to increase paper feed pressure, simulating the pressure generated by a full tray.

B385D107.WMF

[C]

[C]

[B][A]

Pape

r Tra

y U

nit P

S460

B

385


SM 9 B385

2.5 PAPER SIZE DETECTION

There are four paper size microswitches [A] on the front right plate of the paper tray unit. The switches are actuated by a paper size actuator [B] behind the paper size indicator plate, which is on the front right of the tray. Each paper size has its own actuator, with a unique combination of notches. To determine which size tray has been installed, the CPU reads which microswitches the actuator has switched off. The CPU disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected. If the paper size actuator is broken, or if there is no tray installed, the Add Paper indicator will light. When the paper size actuator is at the "*" mark, the paper tray can be set up to accommodate one of a wider range of paper sizes by using user tools. If the paper size for this position is changed without changing the user tool setting, a paper jam will result.

B385D108.WMF

SW Size 1 2 3 4

A3, F (81/2" x 13") A4 short-edge A4 long-edge A5 long-edge 11" x 17"

B4, 81/2" x 14" B5 long-edge, 81/2" x 11"

B5 short-edge, 11" x 81/2"

* (Asterisk)

: ON (Pushed) : OFF (Not pushed)

[A]

[B]

SIDE AND END FENCES

B385 10 SM

2.6 SIDE AND END FENCES

Side Fences If the tray is full of paper and it is pushed in strongly, the fences may deform or bend. This may cause the paper to skew or the side-to-side registration to be incorrect. To correct this, each side fence has a stopper [A] attached to it. Each side fence can be secured with a screw [B], for customers who do not want to change the paper size.

End Fence As the amount of paper in the tray decreases, the bottom plate [C] lifts up gradually. The end fence [D] is connected to the bottom plate. When the tray bottom plate rises, the end fence moves forward and pushes the back of the paper stack to keep it squared up.

B385D110.WMF

B385D109.WMF

[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

Pape

r Tra

y U

nit P

S460

B

385

FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT

SM 11 B385

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3.1 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1. [A] Paper tray 2. Move the release lever [B] to the front. 3. Pull the feed roller [C] to the operation side and remove it.

B385R723.WMF

[C]

[B]

[A]

TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT

B385 12 SM

3.2 TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT


2. [B] Tray main board [B] ( x 3, x 5)

B385R939.WMF

B385R002.WMF

[A]

[B]

Pape

r Tra

y U

nit P

S460

B

385

TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT

SM 13 B385

3.3 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT


2. [B] Tray motor ( x 2, x 1)

B385R102.WMF

[A]

[B]

LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT

B385 14 SM

3.4 LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT

1. Pull out the paper tray.

2. [A] Rear cover ( x 4) 3. [B] 2P connector 4. [C] Spring

5. [D] Lift motor unit ( x 3)

6. [E] Lift motor ( x 3)

B385R152.WMF

B385R104.WMF

[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

[E]

Pape

r Tra

y U

nit P

S460

B

385

PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT

SM 15 B385

3.5 PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT

1. Paper tray

2. [A] Paper end sensor bracket ( x 1, x 1) 3. [B] Paper end sensor

NOTE: After replacing the sensor, pull the sensor cable to the right side of the frame [C] so that the cable does not touch the paper in the tray.

3.6 PAPER SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT

1. [A] Lower tray cover ( x 2) 2. [B] Paper tray

3. [C] Right front cover ( x 1)

4. [D] Paper size switch bracket ( x 1)

5. [E] Paper size switch ( x 1)

B385R106.WMF

B385R101.WMF

[C]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[B]

[A]

b229_sm

Documents

installation procedure

installation requirements

copier installation

ardf installation

adf installation

accessory check

duplex unit installation

ricoh products